2015 Hyundai Santa Fe Owner's Manual

All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of pub-lication. However, Hyundai reserves the right to make changes atany time so that our policy of continual product improvement maybe carried out.

This manual applies to all of this vehicle and includes descriptionsand explanations of optional as well as standard equipment. As aresult, you may find material in this manual that does not apply toyour specific vehicle.

OOWWNNEERR''SS MMAANNUUAALL

OperationMaintenanceSpecifications

F2

Your Hyundai should not be modified in any way. Such modifications may adversely affectthe performance, safety or durability of your Hyundai and may, in addition, violate conditionsof the limited warranties covering the vehicle. Certain modifications may also be in violationof regulations established by the U.S. Department of Transportation and other federal orstate agencies.

Your vehicle is equipped with electronic fuel injection and other electronic components. It ispossible for an improperly installed/adjusted two-way radio or cellular telephone to adverse-ly affect electronic systems. For this reason, we recommend that you carefully follow theradio manufacturer's instructions or consult your Hyundai dealer for precautionary meas-ures or special instructions if you choose to install one of these devices.

CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO YOUR HYUNDAI

TWO-WAY RADIO OR CELLULAR TELEPHONE INSTALLATION

F3

This manual includes information titled as WARNING, CAUTION and NOTICE.These titles indicate the following:

✽✽ NOTICEThis indicates that interesting or helpful information is being provided.

SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE WARNING

WARNING This indicates that a condition may result in harm, serious injury or death to youor other persons if the warning is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with thewarning.

CAUTIONThis indicates that a condition may result in damage to your vehicle or its equip-ment if the caution is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the caution.

F4

FOREWORD

Thank you for choosing Hyundai. We are pleased to welcome you to the growing number of discerning people whodrive Hyundais. The advanced engineering and high-quality construction of each Hyundai we build is something ofwhich we're very proud.

Your Owner's Manual will introduce you to the features and operation of your new Hyundai. It is suggested that you readit carefully because the information it contains can contribute greatly to the satisfaction you receive from your new car.

The manufacturer also recommends that all service and maintenance on your car be performed by an authorizedHyundai dealer. Hyundai dealers are prepared to provide high-quality service, maintenance and any other assistancethat may be required.

HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA

Note : Because future owners will also need the information included in this manual, if you sell this Hyundai, pleaseleave the manual in the vehicle for their use. Thank you.

Copyright 2014 Hyundai Motor America. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored inany retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of Hyundai MotorAmerica.

CAUTIONSevere engine and transaxle damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and lubricants that donot meet Hyundai specifications.You must always use high quality fuels and lubricants that meet the spec-ifications listed on Page 8-6 and 8-7 in the Vehicle Specifications and consumer information section of theOwner's Manual.

F5

Guide to Hyundai Genuine Parts1.What are Hyundai Genuine Parts?

Hyundai Genuine Parts are thesame parts used by Hyundai MotorCompany to manufacture vehicles.They are designed and tested forthe optimum safety, performance,and reliability to our customers.

2. Why should you use genuineparts?Hyundai Genuine Parts are engi-neered and built to meet rigid man-ufacturing requirements. Using imi-tation, counterfeit or used salvageparts is not covered under theHyundai New Vehicle LimitedWarranty or any other Hyundaiwarranty.

In addition, any damage to or fail-ure of Hyundai Genuine Partscaused by the installation or failureof an imitation, counterfeit or usedsalvage part is not covered by anyHyundai Warranty.

3. How can you tell if you are pur-chasing Hyundai Genuine Parts?Look for the Hyundai Genuine PartsLogo on the package (see below).Hyundai Genuine Parts for exportare packaged with labels writtenonly in English.Hyundai Genuine Parts are onlysold through authorized HyundaiDealerships.

A100A01L A100A02L A100A04L

A100A03L

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

I

IntroductionHow to use this manual / Fuel requirements / Vehicle break-in process / Vehicle handling instructions /Vehicle data collection and event data recorders

Your vehicle at a glanceExterior overview / Interior overview / Instrument panel overview / Engine compartment

Safety features of your vehicleSeats / Seat belts / Child restraint system / Air bag

Features of your vehicleKeys / Door locks / Tailgate / Windows / Hood / Fuel filler lid / Panoramic sunroof / Steering wheel / Mirrors/ Instrument cluster / Lighting / Wipers & Washers / Climate control system / Multimedia system / Etc.

Driving your vehicleBefore driving / Engine start/stop button / Transaxle / All Wheel Drive (AWD) / Brake system / Cruise con-trol system / Blind Spot Detection System / Active ECO system / Winter driving / Vehicle load limit / Etc.

What to do in an emergencyRoad warning / Emergency while driving / Emergency starting / Engine overheat / TPMS / Flat tire / Towing / Etc.

MaintenanceEngine compartment / Maintenance service / Engine oil / Engine coolant / Brake fluid / Washer fluid /Parking brake / Air cleaner / Wiper blades / Battery / Tire and wheels / Fuses / Light bulbs / Etc.

Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

Index

table of contents

1

Introduction

How to use this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Fuel requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

• Gasoline containing alcohol and methanol . . . . . . . . . 1-3

• Gasoline containing MMT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

• Do not use methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

• Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Vehicle break-in process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

Vehicle handling instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

Vehicle data collection and event data recorders . 1-6

Introduction

21

We want to help you get the greatestpossible driving experience fromyour vehicle. Your Owner’s Manualcan assist you in many ways. Westrongly recommend that you readthe entire manual. In order to mini-mize the chance of death or injury,you must read the WARNING andCAUTION sections in the manual.Illustrations complement the text inthis manual to best explain how touse your vehicle. By reading yourmanual, you will learn about fea-tures, important safety information,and driving tips under various roadconditions.

The general layout of the manual isprovided in the Table of Contents. Agood place to start is the index; it hasan alphabetical listing of all informa-tion in your manual.Sections: This manual has eight sec-tions plus an index. Each sectionbegins with a brief list of contents soyou can tell at a glance if that sectionhas the information you want.You will find various WARNINGS,CAUTIONS, and NOTICES in thismanual.These WARNINGS were pre-pared to enhance your personal safe-ty. You should carefully read and fol-low ALL procedures and recommen-dations provided in these WARN-INGS, CAUTIONS and NOTICES.

Symbols used in this manualWarnings, Cautions and Notices

✽✽ NOTICEA NOTICE indicates interesting orhelpful information is being provided.

Safety symbol in illustrations

The symbol means to "Avoid"or "Do not do something".

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

WARNING A WARNING indicates that acondition may result in harm,serious bodily injury or death ifthe warning is ignored.

CAUTIONA CAUTION indicates that a con-dition may result in damage toyour vehicle if the caution isignored.

1 3

Introduction

Your new vehicle is designed to obtainmaximum performance with UNLEAD-ED FUEL, as well as minimize exhaustemissions and spark plug fouling.

Your new vehicle is designed to useonly unleaded fuel having a pumpoctane number ((R+M)/2) of 87(Research Octane Number 91) orhigher. (Do not use methanol blend-ed fuels.)

Never add any fuel system cleaningagents to the fuel tank other than whathas been specified. (Consult anauthorized HYUNDAI dealer fordetails.)

Gasoline containing alcohol andmethanolGasohol, a mixture of gasoline andethanol (also known as grain alco-hol), and gasoline or gasohol con-taining methanol (also known aswood alcohol) are being marketedalong with or instead of leaded orunleaded gasoline.Do not use gasohol containing morethan 10% ethanol, and do not usegasoline or gasohol containing anymethanol. Either of these fuels maycause drivability problems and dam-age to the fuel system, engine con-trol system and emission control sys-tem.Discontinue using gasohol of anykind if drivability problems occur.Vehicle damage or drivability prob-lems may not be covered by themanufacturer’s warranty if they resultfrom the use of:1. Gasohol containing more than

10% ethanol.2. Gasoline or gasohol containing

methanol.3. Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.

"E85" fuel is an alternative fuel com-prised of 85 percent ethanol and 15percent gasoline, and is manufac-tured exclusively for use in FlexibleFuel Vehicles. “E85” is not compati-ble with your vehicle. Use of “E85”may result in poor engine perform-ance and damage to your vehicle'sengine and fuel system. HYUNDAIrecommends that customers do notuse fuel with an ethanol contentexceeding 10 percent.

✽✽ NOTICEYour New Vehicle Limited Warrantydoes not cover damage to the fuelsystem or any performance prob-lems caused by the use of “E85” fuel.

FUEL REQUIREMENTS

WARNING - Refueling• Do not "top off" after the noz-

zle automatically shuts offwhen refueling. Attempts toforce more fuel into the tankcan cause fuel overflow ontoyou and the ground causing arisk of fire.

• Always check that the fuel capis installed securely to pre-vent fuel spillage in the eventof an accident.

Introduction

41

Other fuelsUsing fuels such as- Silicone (Si) contained fuel- Ferrocene (Fe) contained fuel- Other metallic additives contained

fuelsmay cause vehicle and engine dam-age. The Malfunction Indicator Lamp(MIL) may illuminate or cause plug-ging, misfiring, poor acceleration,engine stalling, catalyst melting,abnormal corrosion, life cycle reduc-tion, etc.

Gasoline containing MMTSome gasoline contains harmful man-ganese-based fuel additives such asMMT (MethylcyclopentadienylManganese Tricarbonyl).HYUNDAI does not recommend theuse of gasoline containing MMT.This type of fuel can reduce vehicleperformance and affect your emis-sion control system.The malfunction indicator lamp onthe cluster may come on.

Do not use methanolFuels containing methanol (woodalcohol) should not be used in yourvehicle. This type of fuel can reducevehicle performance and damagecomponents of the fuel system,engine control system and emissioncontrol system.

✽✽ NOTICEYour New Vehicle Limited Warrantymay not cover damage to the fuelsystem and any performance prob-lems that are caused by the use offuels containing methanol.

Fuel AdditivesHYUNDAI recommends that you usegood quality gasolines treated withdetergent additives such as TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline, which helpprevent deposit formation in theengine. These gasolines will help theengine run cleaner and enhance per-formance of the Emission ControlSystem. For more information on TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline, please goto the website (www.toptiergas.com)

For customers who do not use TOPTier Detergent Gasoline regularly, andhave problems starting their vehicle orthe engine does not run smoothly,additives that you can buy separatelymay be added to the gasoline.If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is notavailable, one bottle of additive addedto the fuel tank at every 7,500mile orevery engine oil change is recom-mended. Additives are available fromyour authorized HYUNDAI dealeralong with information on how to usethem. Do not mix other additives.

Operation in foreign countriesIf you are going to drive your vehiclein another country, be sure to:• Observe all regulations regarding

registration and insurance.• Determine that acceptable fuel is

available.

1 5

Introduction

VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCESSNo special break-in period is needed.By following a few simple precautionsfor the first 600 miles (1,000 km) youmay add to the performance, econo-my and life of your vehicle.• Do not race the engine.• While driving, keep your engine

speed (rpm, or revolutions perminute) between 2,000 rpm and4,000 rpm.

• Do not maintain a single speed forlong periods of time, either fast orslow. Varying engine speed isneeded to properly break-in theengine.

• Avoid hard stops, except in emer-gencies, to allow the brakes to seatproperly.

As with other vehicles of this type,failure to operate this vehicle correct-ly may result in loss of control, anaccident or vehicle rollover.Specific design characteristics (high-er ground clearance, track, etc.) givethis vehicle a higher center of gravitythan other types of vehicles. It is notdesigned for cornering at the samespeeds as a conventional 2-wheeldrive sedans or sports coupe. Avoidsharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.Failure to operate this vehicle cor-rectly may result in loss of control, anaccident or vehicle rollover. Be sureto read the “Reducing the risk of arollover” driving guidelines, insection 5 of this manual.

CALIFORNIA PROPO-SITION 65 WARNING

Items contained in motor vehi-cles or emitted from them areknown to the State of Californiato cause cancer and birthdefects or reproductive harm.These include:• Gasoline and its vapors• Engine exhaust• Used engine oil• Interior passenger compart-

ment components and materi-als

• Component parts which aresubject to heat and wear

In addition, battery posts, termi-nals and related accessoriescontain lead, lead compoundsand other chemicals known tothe State of California to causecancer and reproductive harm.

VEHICLE HANDLINGINSTRUCTIONS

Introduction

61

This vehicle is equipped with anevent data recorder (EDR). Themain purpose of an EDR is torecord, in certain crash or nearcrash-like situations, such as anair bag deployment or hitting aroad obstacle, data that will assistin understanding how a vehicle'ssystems performed. The EDR isdesigned to record data related tovehicle dynamics and safety sys-tems for a short period of time,typically 30 seconds or less. TheEDR in this vehicle is designed torecord such data as:• How various systems in your

vehicle were operating;• Whether or not the driver and

passenger safety belts werebuckled/fastened;

• How far (if at all) the driver wasdepressing the acceleratorand/or brake pedal; and,

• How fast the vehicle was travel-ing.

These data can help provide a bet-ter understanding of the circum-stances in which crashes andinjuries occur. NOTE: EDR data arerecorded by your vehicle only if anon-trivial crash situation occurs;no data are recorded by the EDRunder normal driving conditionsand no personal data (e.g., name,gender, age, and crash location)are recorded. However, other par-ties, such as law enforcement,could combine the EDR data withthe type of personally identifyingdata routinely acquired during acrash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR,special equipment is required, andaccess to the vehicle or the EDR isneeded. In addition to the vehiclemanufacturer, other parties, suchas law enforcement, that have thespecial equipment, can read theinformation if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR.

VEHICLE DATA COLLECTION AND EVENT DATA RECORDERS

Exterior overview I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Exterior overview II. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Interior overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Instrument panel overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

2

Your vehicle at a glance

Exterior overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Interior overview (I). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Interior overview (II) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Instrument panel overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

2


22

EXTERIOR OVERVIEW

1. Panoramic sunroof ..............................4-47

2. Front windshield wiper blades .............7-43

3. Outside rearview mirror.......................4-67

4. Door locks ...........................................4-21

5. Headlight .............................................7-75

6. Front fog light.....................................4-116

7. Hood....................................................4-41

8. Tires and wheels.........................7-48 / 8-4

ONCEIN2001❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

■ Front view

2 3


1. Antenna .............................................4-161

2. Defroster............................................4-124

3. Parking assist system........................4-105

4. Fuel filler door .....................................4-43

5. Towing hook.........................................6-31

6. Rear combination lamp .......................7-79

7. Rear window wiper blade ....................7-44

8. High mounted stop lamp .....................7-81

9. Rearview camera ..............................4-109

ONCEIN2002❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

■ Rear view


42

INTERIOR OVERVIEW (I)

1. Inside door handle...............................4-23

2. Driver position memory system.............3-8

3. Outside rearview mirror control ...........4-67

4. Power window lock button ...................4-40

5. Central door lock switch ......................4-23

6. Power window switch...........................4-36

7. Fuel-filler door opener .........................4-43

8. Instrument panel illumination control knob.........................................4-72

9. DBC button..........................................5-40

10. ESC OFF button................................5-35

11. Active ECO button.............................5-56

12. Heated steering wheel button ...........4-53

13. AWD LOCK button ............................5-22

14. AC inverter button ...........................4-153

15. BSD on/off button ..............................5-50

16. Steering wheel...................................4-53

17. Tilt and telescopic steering control lever .......................................4-54

18. Inner panel fuse ................................7-63

19. Hood release lever ............................4-41

20. Seat .....................................................3-2

ONCNIN3003❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

2 5


INTERIOR OVERVIEW (II)

OANNIN2006❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

1. Power outlet.......................................4-152

2. Aux, USB and iPod® ..........................4-156

3. Seat warmer/Air ventilation seat button ...............3-13/3-14

4. Parking assist system button.............4-105

5. Transaxle shift lever .............................5-14

6. Cup holder.........................................4-150


62

INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW

OANNIN2004❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

1. Lighting control lever .........................4-112

2. Audio remote control buttons ............4-161

3. Bluetooth hands-free buttons ..................................4-196 / 4-247

4. Cruise control button ...........................5-46

5. Driver selectable steering mode button ..4-55

6. LCD display control buttons ................4-72

7. Horn.....................................................4-54

8. Driver’s front air bag ............................3-62

9. Wiper and washer control lever.........4-117

10. Ignition switch/Engine start/stop button..............5-6 / 5-9

11. Audio ...............................................4-161

12. Hazard warning flasher ...................4-110

13. Climate control system .......4-125 / 4-135

14. Passenger’s front air bag ..................3-62

15. Glove box ........................................4-147

2 7


ENGINE COMPARTMENT

1. Engine coolant reservoir .....................7-33

2. Engine oil filler cap ..............................7-30

3. Brake fluid reservoir ............................7-35

4. Air cleaner ...........................................7-38

5. Fuse box..............................................7-63

6. Negative battery terminal ....................7-45

7. Positive battery terminal ......................7-45

8. Radiator cap ........................................7-34

9. Engine oil dipstick................................7-30

10. Windshield washer fluid reservoir......7-37

ONCEIN2007❈ The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

■ Gasoline 3.3L GDI

Safety features of your vehicle

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2• Front seat adjustment - Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

• Front seat adjustment - Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

• Driver position memory system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

• Rear seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27• Seat belt restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27

• Pre-tensioner seat belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33

• Seat belt precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36

• Care of seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39

Child restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40• Using a child restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42

• Tether Anchor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45

• Securing a child restraint seat with

child seat lower anchor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47

Air bag - supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . 3-49• How does the air bag system operate . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50

• Do not Installing a child restraint on a front

passenger's seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51

• Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52

• SRS components and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52

• Occupant classification system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56

• Main components of occupant classification system . 3-57

• Driver's and passenger's front air bag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62

• Side impact air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67

• Curtain air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68

• SRS Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75

• Additional safety precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-76

• Air bag warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77

3


23

Front seat(1) Forward and backward(2) Seatback angle(3) Seat cushion height (Driver’s seat)(4) Lumbar support (Driver’s seat)*(5) Seat warmer* /

Air ventilation seat*(6) Headrest

2nd row seat(7) Forward and backward(8) Seatback angle and folding(9) Walk-in seat lever(10) Headrest(11) Armrest(12) Seat warmer*

3rd row seat(13) Seatback folding(14) Headrest

* if equipped

SEATS

ONCNSA3001

❈ The actual feature in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

Manual seat

Power seat

3 3


WARNING - Looseobjects

Loose objects in the driver’sfoot area could interfere withthe operation of the foot pedals,possibly causing an accident.Do not place anything under thefront seats.

WARNING - Driverresponsibility for passengers

Riding in a vehicle with theseatback reclined could lead toserious or fatal injury in an acci-dent. If a seat is reclined duringan accident, the occupant’ships may slide under the lapportion of the seat belt, apply-ing great force to the unprotect-ed abdomen. Serious or fatalinternal injuries could result.The driver must advise the pas-senger to keep the seatback inan upright position wheneverthe vehicle is in motion.

WARNING - Uprightingseat

When you return the seatbackto its upright position, hold theseatback and return it slowlyand be sure there are no otheroccupants around the seat. Ifthe seatback is returned with-out being held and controlled,the back of the seat couldspring forward resulting in acci-dental injury to a person struckby the seatback.

WARNINGOccupants should never sit onseat cushions. The passenger'ships may slide under the lapportion of the seat belt duringan accident or a sudden stop.Serious or fatal internal injuriescould result because the seatbelt cannot operate normally.

WARNING - Driver’s seatTo avoid serious injury or death:• Never attempt to adjust the

seat while the vehicle is mov-ing. This could result in lossof control, and an accidentcausing death, serious injury,or property damage.

• Do not allow anything to inter-fere with the normal positionof the seatback. Storing itemsagainst a seatback or in anyother way interfering withproper locking of a seatbackcould result in serious or fatalinjury in a sudden stop or col-lision.

• In order to avoid unnecessaryand perhaps severe air baginjuries, always sit as far backas possible from the steeringwheel while maintaining com-fortable control of the vehicle.We recommend that yourchest be at least 10 inches(250 mm) away from the steer-ing wheel.


43

WARNING - Rear seatbacks

• The rear seatback must besecurely latched. If not, pas-sengers and objects could bethrown forward resulting inserious injury or death in theevent of a sudden stop or col-lision.

• No passenger should ride inthe cargo area or sit or lie onfolded seatbacks while thevehicle is moving. All passen-gers must be properly seatedin seats and restrained prop-erly while riding.

• When resetting the seatbackto the upright position, makesure it is securely latched bypushing it forward and rear-wards.

• To avoid the possibility ofburns, do not remove the car-pet in the cargo area. Emissioncontrol devices beneath thisfloor generate high tempera-tures.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Luggage and other cargo

should be laid flat in the cargoarea or on the folded rearseatback. If objects are large,heavy, or must be piled, theymust be secured. Under nocircumstances should cargobe piled higher than the seat-backs. Failure to follow thesewarnings could result in seri-ous injury or death in theevent of a sudden stop, colli-sion or rollover.

WARNINGAfter adjusting the seat, alwayscheck that it is securely lockedinto place by attempting tomove the seat forward orreverse without using the lockrelease lever. Sudden or unex-pected movement of the dri-ver's seat could cause you tolose control of the vehicleresulting in an accident.

WARNING• Do not adjust the seat while

wearing seat belts. Moving theseat cushion forward maycause strong pressure on theabdomen.

• Use extreme caution so thathands or other objects are notcaught in the seat mechanismswhile the seat is moving.

• Do not place a cigarettelighter on the floor or seat.When you operate the seat,gas may exit out of the lighterand cause a fire.

• Use extreme caution whenpicking small objects trappedunder the seats or betweenthe seat and the center con-sole. Your hands might be cutor injured by the sharp edgesof the seats mechanism.

3 5


Front seat adjustment - Manual(if equipped)Forward and rearward

To move the seat forward or rearward:1. Pull the seat slide adjustment

lever up and hold it.2. Slide the seat to the position you

desire.3. Release the lever and make sure

the seat is locked in place.Adjust the seat before driving, andmake sure the seat is locked secure-ly by trying to move forward and rear-ward without using the lever. If theseat moves, it is not locked properly.

Seatback angle

To recline the seatback:1. Lean forward slightly and lift up the

seatback recline lever.2. Carefully lean back on the seat

and adjust the seatback of theseat to the position you desire.

3. Release the lever and make surethe seatback is locked in place.(The lever MUST return to its orig-inal position for the seatback tolock.)

Seat cushion height (for driver’s seat) (if equipped)

To change the height of the seatcushion, push the lever upwards ordownwards.• To lower the seat cushion, push the

lever down several times.• To raise the seat cushion, pull the

lever up several times.

ONCESA2002

ONCESA2003

ONCESA2004


63

2-way lumbar support (for driver’s seat)

1. Press the front portion of theswitch to increase support or therear portion of the switch todecrease support.

2. Release the switch once it reach-es the desired position.

Front seat adjustment - power (if equipped)The front seat can be adjusted byusing the control knobs located onthe outside of the seat cushion.Before driving, adjust the seat to theproper position so as to easily con-trol the steering wheel, pedals andswitches on the instrument panel.

ONCESA2005

WARNINGThe power seat is operable withthe ignition OFF.Therefore, children should neverbe left unattended in the vehicle.

CAUTION• The power seat is driven by an

electric motor. Stop operatingonce the adjustment is com-pleted. Excessive operationmay damage the electricalequipment.

• When in operation, the powerseat consumes a large amountof electrical power. To preventunnecessary battery drain,don’t adjust the power seatlonger than necessary whilethe engine is not running.

• Do not operate two or morepower seat control knobs at thesame time. Doing so may resultin power seat motor or electri-cal component malfunction.

3 7


Forward and backward

1. Push the control switch forward orbackward to move the seat to thedesired position.

2. Release the switch once the seatreaches the desired position.

Seatback angle

1. Push the control switch forward orbackward to move the seatback tothe desired angle.


Seat height (for driver’s seat)

1. Pull the front portion of the controlswitch up to raise or down to lowerthe front part of the seat cushion.Pull the rear portion of the controlswitch up to raise or down to lowerthe seat cushion.


ONCESA2009

ONCESA2006 ONCESA2007


83

4-way lumbar support (for driver’s seat, if equipped)

The lumbar support can be adjustedby pressing the switch.1. Press the front portion (1) of the

switch to increase support, or therear portion (2) of the switch, todecrease support.


3. Press the upper portion (3) of theswitch to move the support posi-tion up, or press the lower portion(4) of the switch, to move the sup-port position down.


Driver position memory system(if equipped, for power seat)

A driver position memory system isprovided to store and recall the driv-er seat and outside rearview mirrorposition with a simple button opera-tion. By saving the desired positioninto the system memory, differentdrivers can reposition the driver seatbased upon their driving preference.If the battery is disconnected, the posi-tion memory will be erased and thedriving position should be restored inthe system.

Storing positions into memoryusing the buttons on the doorStoring driver’s seat positions

1. Shift the shift lever into P or Nwhile the engine start/stop buttonis ON or ignition switch ON.

2. Adjust the driver’s seat and out-side rearview mirror to a positionthat is comfortable for the driver.

3. Press SET button on the controlpanel. The system will beep once.

4. Press one of the memory buttons(1 or 2) within 5 seconds afterpressing the SET button. The sys-tem will beep twice when memoryhas been successfully stored.

ONCESA2008

WARNING Never attempt to operate thedriver position memory systemwhile the vehicle is moving.This could result in loss of con-trol, and an accident causingdeath, serious injury, or propertydamage.

ODM042335

3 9


Recalling positions from memoryThe position in memory will berecalled when:1. The shift lever is in P or N with one

of the condition below:- The ignition switch in the ON

position or engine running.- The ignition switch in the

LOCK/OFF or ACC positionwhile the driver's door is opened.

2. Press the desired memory button(1 or 2). The system will beeponce, then the driver’s seat willautomatically adjust to the storedposition.

Adjusting the control switch for thedriver’s seat while the system isrecalling the stored position willcause the movement to stop andmove in the direction that the controlswitch is moved.

Easy access function (if equipped)The system will move the driver'sseat automatically as follows:• Without smart key system

- It will move the driver’s seat rear-ward when the ignition key isremoved and front driver’s door isopened.

- It will move the driver’s seat for-ward when the ignition key isinserted.

• With smart key system- It will move the driver’s seat rear-

ward when the engine start/stopbutton is changed to the OFFposition and front driver’s door isopened.

- It will move the driver’s seat for-ward when the engine start/stopbutton is changed to the ACC orSTART position.

You can activate or deactivate thisfeature. Refer to "User settings" insection 4.

WARNING Use caution when recalling theadjustment memory while sit-ting in the vehicle. Push theseat position control switch tothe desired position immediate-ly if the seat moves too far inany direction.


103

Headrest

The driver's and front passenger'sseats are equipped with a headrestfor the occupant's safety and comfort.The headrest not only provides com-fort for the driver and front passenger,but also helps to protect the head andneck in the event of a collision.

Forward and backward adjustment

The headrest may be adjusted for-ward to 4 different positions by pullingthe headrest forward to the desireddetent. To adjust the headrest tobackwards position, press and holdthe release button (1), and adjustposition of the headrest. Adjust theheadrest so that it properly supportsthe head and neck.

WARNING - Headrestadjustment

• For maximum effectiveness incase of an accident, the head-rest should be adjusted so themiddle of the headrest is at thesame height as the center ofgravity of an occupant's head.Generally, the center of gravityof most people's head is simi-lar with the height of the top oftheir eyes.Also adjust the headrest asclose to your head as possi-ble. For this reason, the use ofa cushion that holds the bodyaway from the seatback is notrecommended.

• Do not operate the vehiclewith the headrests removed.Severe injury to an occupantmay occur in the event of anaccident. Headrests may pro-vide protection against severeneck injuries when properlyadjusted.

• Do not adjust the headrestposition of the driver's seatwhile the vehicle is in motion.

OHM038048N ONCESA2015

3 11


Adjusting the height up and down

To raise the headrest :1. Pull it up to the desired position (1).

To lower the headrest :1. Push and hold the release button

(2) on the headrest support2. Lower the headrest to the desired

position (3).

Removal and installation

To remove the headrest:1. Recline the seatback (2) with the

recline lever or switch (1).2. Raise headrest as far as it can go.

ONCESA2016

ONCNSA3150

ONCNSA3152

■ Type A

■ Type B

OYFH034205

CAUTIONIf you recline the seatbacktowards the front with the head-rest and seat cushion raised,the headrest may come in con-tact with the sunvisor or otherparts of the vehicle.


123

3. Press the headrest release button(3) while pulling the headrest up(4).

To reinstall the headrest :1. Put the headrest poles (2) into the

holes while pressing the releasebutton (1).

2. Recline the seatback (4) with therecline lever or switch (3).

3. Adjust the headrest to the appro-priate height.

WARNINGNEVER allow anyone to ride in aseat with the headrest removed.

WARNINGAlways make sure the headrestlocks into position after rein-stalling and adjusting it properly.

ONCNSA3151

ONCNSA3153

■ Type A

■ Type B

3 13


Seat warmer (if equipped)

The seat warmer is provided to warmthe front seats during cold weather.

With the ignition switch in the ONposition, push either of the switches(red color) to warm the driver's seator the front passenger's seat.During mild weather or under condi-tions where the operation of the seatwarmer is not needed, keep theswitches in the OFF position.• Each time you push the button, the

temperature setting of the seat ischanged as follows :

• The seat warmer defaults to theOFF position whenever the ignitionswitch is turned on.

• With the seat warmer switch in theON position, the heating system inthe seat turns off or on automati-cally depending on the seat tem-perature.

OANNSA2018

OANNSA2019

■ Type A

■ Type B

OFF→HIGH( )→MIDDLE( )→LOW( )

→

CAUTION• When cleaning the seats, do

not use an organic solventsuch as thinner, benzene,alcohol and gasoline. Doingso may damage the surface ofthe heater or seats.

• To prevent overheating theseat warmer, do not place any-thing on the seats that insu-lates against heat, such asblankets, cushions or seatcovers while the seat warmeris in operation.

• Do not place heavy or sharpobjects on seats equippedwith seat warmers. Damage tothe seat warming componentscould occur.


143

Air ventilation seat (if equipped)

The air ventilation seat is provided tocool the front seats during hot weath-er by blowing air through small ventholes on the surface of the seats.While the engine is running, pressthe cooling portion (blue color) of theswitch to cool the driver's seat or thefront passenger's seat.When the operation of the seat cool-er is not needed, keep the switchesin the OFF position.

• Each time you press the button, theairflow will change as follows:

• The air ventilation seat defaults tothe OFF position whenever the igni-tion switch is turned on.

WARNING - Seat warmerburns

Never allow passengers whomay not be able to take care ofthemselves to be exposed tothe risk of seat warmer burns.These include:1. Infants, children, elderly or

disabled persons, or hospitaloutpatients

2. Persons with sensitive skinor those that burn easily

3. Fatigued individuals4. Intoxicated individuals5. Individuals taking medication

that can cause drowsiness orsleepiness (sleeping pills,cold tablets, etc.)

OANNSA2020

OFF→HIGH( )→MIDDLE( )→LOW( )

→

3 15


Seatback pocket Rear seat adjustmentForward and backward (if equipped)

To move the seat forward or backward:1. Pull the seat slide adjustment

lever up and hold it.

WARNINGFor proper operation of theoccupant classification system:• Do not place any items cumu-

latively weighing over 2.2 lbs(1 kg) in the seatback pocketor on the seat.

OCM030052

WARNING - Seatbackpockets

Do not put heavy or sharpobjects in the seatback pocket.An occupant could contact suchobjects in a crash. Heavy objectsin the front passenger seatbackcould also interfere with theoccupant sensing system.

OANNSA2021

ONCDSA2113

■ 7-seater

■ 6-seater


163

2. Slide the seat to the position youdesire.

3. Release the lever and make surethe seat is locked in place.

Adjust the seat before driving, andmake sure the seat is locked securelyby trying to move forward and back-ward without using the lever. If theseat moves, it is not locked properly.

Seatback angle

To recline the seatback:1. Pull up the seatback recline lever.2. Hold the lever and adjust the seat-

back of the seat to the position youdesire.

3. Release the lever and make surethe seatback is locked in place. (Thelever MUST return to its originalposition for the seatback to lock.)

OANNSA2022

ONCDSA3125

■ 7-seater

■ 6-seater

3 17


Headrest (for rear seat)

The rear seat(s) is equipped withheadrests in all the seating positionsfor the occupant's safety and comfort.The headrest not only provides com-fort for passengers, but also helps toprotect the head and neck in theevent of a collision.

Adjusting the height up and down- 2nd row

To raise the headrest :1. Pull it up to the desired position (1).

To lower the headrest :1. Push and hold the release button

(2) on the headrest support2. Lower the headrest to the desired

position (3).WARNING - Headrest

adjustment

(Continued)

OHM038049N

OANNSA2024

(Continued)• For maximum effectiveness in

case of an accident, the head-rest should be adjusted so themiddle of the headrest is at thesame height as the center ofgravity of an occupant's head.Generally, the center of gravi-ty of most people's head issimilar with the height of thetop of their eyes.Also adjust the headrest asclose to your head as possi-ble. For this reason, the use ofa cushion that holds the bodyaway from the seatback is notrecommended.

• Do not operate the vehiclewith the headrests removed.Severe injury to an occupantmay occur in the event of anaccident. Headrests may pro-vide protection against severeneck injuries when properlyadjusted.

• Do not adjust the headrestheight while the vehicle is inmotion.


183

Removal and installation- 2nd row

To remove the headrest :1. Raise it as far as it can go then

press the release button (1) whilepulling the headrest up (2).

To reinstall the headrest :1. Put the headrest poles (3) into the

holes while pressing the releasebutton (1).

2. Adjust it to the appropriate height.

Fold the headrest - 3rd row

To fold the headrest :Pull the strap.

OANNSA2025

WARNING• Make sure the headrest locks

in position after adjusting it toproperly protect the occu-pants.

• After installing the headrest,make sure that it is installedin the right direction.A headrest installed reverselycould increase whiplashinjury during rear impact.

ONCESA2106

3 19


Unfold the headrest - 3rd row

To unfold the headrest :Raise the headrest manually.

Armrest

To use the armrest, pull it forwardfrom the seatback.

Seat warmer (for rear seat, if equipped)

The seat warmer is provided to warmthe rear seats during cold weather.With the ignition switch in the ONposition, push either of the switchesto warm the rear seats.During mild weather or under condi-tions where the operation of the seatwarmer is not needed, keep theswitches in the OFF position.

ONCESA2107

ONCESA2108

■ 7-seater

■ 6-seaterOANNSA2028

ODM032026


203

• Each time you push the button, thetemperature setting of the seat ischanged as follows :

• The seat warmer defaults to theOFF position whenever the ignitionswitch is turned on.

• With the seat warmer switch in theON position, the heating system inthe seat turns off or on automati-cally depending on the seat tem-perature.

OFF → HIGH( ) → LOW( )

→

CAUTION• When cleaning the seats, do

not use an organic solventsuch as thinner, benzene,alcohol and gasoline. Doingso may damage the surface ofthe heater or seats.

• To prevent overheating theseat warmer, do not place any-thing on the seats that insu-lates against heat, such asblankets, cushions or seatcovers while the seat warmeris in operation.

• Do not place heavy or sharpobjects on seats equippedwith seat warmers. Damage tothe seat warming componentscould occur.

WARNING - Seat warmerburns

Never allow passengers whomay not be able to take care ofthemselves to be exposed tothe risk of seat warmer burns.These include:1. Infants, children, elderly or

disabled persons, or hospitaloutpatients

2. Persons with sensitive skinor those that burn easily

3. Fatigued individuals4. Intoxicated individuals5. Individuals taking medication

that can cause drowsiness orsleepiness (sleeping pills,cold tablets, etc.)

3 21


Walk-in seat (2nd row seat, if equipped)

To get in or out of the 3rd row seat,1. Route the seat belt webbing

through the rear seat belt guide clip.After inserting the seat belt, tightenthe belt webbing by pulling it up.

2. Pull up the walk-in lever (1) on the2nd row seatback.

3.The 2nd row seatback will be fold-ed and push the seat to the far-thest forward position.After getting in or out, slide the 2ndrow seat to the farthest rearwardposition and pull the seatback firm-ly backward until it clicks into place.Make sure that the seat is locked inplace.

Folding the rear seatThe rear seatbacks can be folded tofacilitate carrying long items or toincrease the luggage capacity of thevehicle.

ODM032027

ONCESA2110

ONCESA2109

WARNINGNever attempt to adjust whilethe vehicle is moving or whilethe 2nd row seat is occupied asthe seat may suddenly moveand cause the seated passengerto be injured.

WARNING • Never allow passengers to sit

on top of the folded downseatback while the vehicle ismoving. This is not a properseating position and no seatbelts are available for use.This could result in seriousinjury or death in case of anaccident or sudden stop.

• Objects carried on the foldeddown seatback should notextend higher than the top ofthe front seatbacks. Doingthis could allow cargo to slideforward and cause injury ordamage during sudden stops.


223

To fold down the rear seatback

1. Insert the rear seat belt buckle inthe pocket between the rear seat-back and cushion, and insert therear seat belt webbing in the guideto prevent the seat belt from beingdamaged.

2. Set the front seatback to theupright position and if necessary,slide the front seat forward.

3. Lower the rear headrests to thelowest position.

■ 2nd row seat

ODM032034/OXM039030/ODM032027/ODM032035

■ 3rd row seat

3 23


4.Pull on the seatback folding lever,then fold the seat toward the frontof the vehicle. When you return theseatback to its upright position,always be sure it has locked intoposition by pushing on the top ofthe seatback.

5.To use the rear seat, lift and pullthe seatback backward by pullingon the folding lever (2nd row) orstrap (3rd row).Pull the seatback firmly until itclicks into place.Make sure the seatback is lockedin place.

6.Return the rear seat belt to theproper position.

■ 2nd row seat

■ 3rd row seat

OANNSA2026/ONCESA2100/OANNSA2027/ONCESA2102


243

2nd row seat folding (from outside, if equipped)

Pull the 2nd row seat back foldinglever out.The 2nd row seat back will be folded.If you pull the left side lever (1) out,left side seat back and center seatback will be folded.If you pull the right side lever (2) out,right side seat back will be folded.

To fold down the rear center seat-back (for 2nd row seat)

1. Lower the rear headrests to thelowest position.

2. Push the center seatback foldinglever up, then fold the seat towardthe front of the vehicle.

When you return the seatback to itsupright position, always be sure ithas locked into position by pushingon the top of the seatback.

ONCDSA3116

WARNING - Rear seat folding

Do not fold the rear seats (2nd &3rd row seats), if passengers,pets or luggage are in the rearseats.It may cause injury or damageto passengers, pets or luggage.

ONCESA2104

3 25


WARNING - 2nd row centerseat folding

• Do not fold the 2nd row centerseat, if occupants are seatedin the 3rd row seats, it maycause injury to occupants bythe seat device.If occupants are seated in the3rd row seats, fix the uprightposition of the 2nd row centerseat.

• The 2nd row center seat backdoes not fix when it is folded.If you use the 2nd row centerseat back folding function tocarry long objects, you shouldfix the long object to prevent itfrom being thrown about thevehicle in a collision andcausing injury to vehicleoccupants.

CAUTION - Rear seat beltsWhen returning the rear (2ndand/or 3rd row) seatbacks to theupright position, remember toreturn the rear shoulder belts totheir proper position. Routing theseat belt webbing through therear seat belt guides will helpkeep the belts from being trappedbehind or under the seats.

CAUTION - Damagingrear seat belt buckles

When you fold the rear (2ndand/or 3rd row) seatback, insertthe buckle in the pocket betweenthe rear seatback and cushion.Doing so can prevent the bucklefrom being damaged by the rearseatback.

WARNING - Uprightingseat

When you return the seatbackto its upright position, hold theseatback and return it slowly. Ifthe seatback is returned with-out holding it, the back of theseat could spring forwardresulting in injury caused bybeing struck by the seatback.

WARNING - 2nd row LHseat folding

Be careful when you fold the2nd row LH seat, if the centerseat is folded. It may cause theinjury to you by the seat device.


263

WARNING - CargoCargo should always besecured to prevent it from beingthrown about the vehicle in acollision and causing injury tothe vehicle occupants. Do notplace objects in the rear (2ndand/or 3rd row) seats, since theycannot be properly secured andmay hit the front seat occupantsin a collision.

WARNING - Cargo loadingMake sure the engine is off, theautomatic transaxle is in P (Park)and the parking brake is secure-ly applied whenever loading orunloading cargo. Failure to takethese steps may allow the vehi-cle to move if the shift lever isinadvertently moved to anotherposition.

OUN026140

WARNING If the tailgate is pushed down toclose it when a passenger'shead is not against a properlyadjusted headrest or a tall per-son is seated, the tailgate mayhit the occupant's head, whichcould cause injury.

3 27


Seat belt restraint systemSEAT BELTS

WARNINGSeat belts are designed to bearupon the bony structure of thebody, and should be worn lowacross the front of the pelvis,chest and shoulders, as appli-cable; wearing the lap sectionof the belt across the abdominalarea must be avoided.Seat belts should be adjustedas firmly as possible, consis-tent with comfort, to provide theprotection for which they havebeen designed.A slack belt will greatly reducethe protection afforded to theoccupant.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Never wear the shoulder belt

under your arm or behindyour back. An improperlypositioned shoulder belt cancause serious injuries in acrash. The shoulder beltshould be positioned midwayover your shoulder acrossyour collarbone.

• Avoid wearing twisted seatbelts. A twisted belt can't doits job as well. In a collision, itcould even cut into you. Besure the belt webbing isstraight and not twisted.

• Be careful not to damage thebelt webbing or hardware. Ifthe belt webbing or hardwareis damaged, replace it.

WARNING• For maximum restraint sys-

tem protection, the seat beltsmust always be used whenev-er the car is moving.

• Seat belts are most effectivewhen seatbacks are in theupright position.

• Children age 12 and youngermust always be properlyrestrained in the rear seat.Never allow children to ride inthe front passenger seat. If achild over 12 must be seatedin the front seat, he/she mustbe properly belted and theseat should be moved as farback as possible.

(Continued)


283

Seat belt warning (for driver’s seat)

The driver's seat belt warning lightand chime will activate to the follow-ing table when the ignition switch isin "ON" position.

WARNING• No modifications or additions

should be made by the userwhich will either prevent theseat belt adjusting devicesfrom operating to removeslack, or prevent the seat beltassembly from being adjustedto remove slack.

• When you fasten the seat belt,be careful not to latch the seatbelt in the buckles of another.It's very dangerous and youmay not be protected by theseat belt properly.

• Do not unfasten the seat beltand do not fasten and unfas-ten the seat belt repeatedlywhile driving.This could resultin loss of control, and an acci-dent causing death, seriousinjury, or property damage.

• Make sure there is nothing inthe buckle. The seat belt maynot be fastened securely.

1GQA2083

(Continued)Care should be taken to avoidcontamination of the webbingwith polishes, oils and chemi-cals and particularly batteryacid. Cleaning may safely becarried out using mild soap andwater. The belt should bereplaced if webbing becomesfrayed, contaminated or dam-aged. It is essential to replacethe entire assembly after it hasbeen worn in a severe impacteven if damage to the assemblyis not obvious. Belts should notbe worn with straps twisted.Each seat belt assembly mustonly be used by one occupant;it is dangerous to put a beltaround a child being carried onthe occupant's lap.

3 29


*1 Warning pattern repeats 11 timeswith an interval of 24 seconds. Ifthe driver's seat belt is buckled, thelight will stop within 6 seconds andchime will stop immediately.

*2 The light will stop within 6 secondsand chime will stop immediately.

Seat belt - Driver's and passen-ger’s 3-point system with emer-gency locking retractor

To fasten your seat belt:

To fasten your seat belt, pull it out ofthe retractor and insert the metal tab(1) into the buckle (2). There will bean audible "click" when the tab locksinto the buckle.

The seat belt automatically adjusts tothe proper length only after the lapbelt portion is adjusted manually sothat it fits snugly around your hips. Ifyou lean forward in a slow, easymotion, the belt will extend and letyou move around. If there is a sud-den stop or impact, however, the beltwill lock into position. It will also lockif you try to lean forward too quickly.If you are not able to pull out the seatbelt from the retractor, firmly pull thebelt out and release it. Then you willbe able to pull the belt out smoothly.

B180A01NF-1

Conditions Warning Pattern

Seat BeltVehicle

SpeedLight-Blink

Chime-

Sound

Unbuckled 6 seconds

Buckled 6 seconds None

Buckled →Unbuckled

Below 3 mph

(5 km/h)6 seconds None

3 mph~

6 mph6 seconds

Above 6 mph

(10 km/h)

6 sec. on / 24 sec. off

(11 times)

Unbuckled

Above 6 mph

(10 km/h)

↓

Below 3 mph

(5 km/h)

6 seconds *1

↓

Stop *2


303

Height adjustment (Front)

You can adjust the height of the shoul-der belt anchor to one of 4 positionsfor maximum comfort and safety.The shoulder portion should beadjusted so that it lies across yourchest and midway over your shouldernearest the door and not your neck.The height of the adjusting seat beltshould not be too near your neck.To adjust the height of the seat beltanchor, lower or raise the heightadjuster into an appropriate position.

To raise the height adjuster, pull it up(1). To lower it, push it down (3) whilepressing the height adjuster button (2).Release the button to lock theanchor into position. Try sliding theheight adjuster to make sure that ithas locked into position.

OCM030026

Front seat

B200A02NF

WARNINGImproperly positioned seatbelts may increase the risk ofserious injury in an accident.Take the following precautionswhen adjusting the seat belt:• Position the lap portion of the

seat belt as low as possibleacross your hips, not on yourwaist, so that it fits snugly.

(Continued)

3 31


Seat belts - Rear seat 3-point sys-tem with combination lockingretractorTo fasten your seat belt:

Combination retractor type seat beltsare installed in the rear seat positionsto help accommodate the installationof child restraint systems. Although acombination retractor is also installedin the front passenger seat position, itis strongly recommended that childrenalways be seated in the rear seat.NEVER place any infant restraint sys-tem in the front seat of the vehicle.This type of seat belt combines thefeatures of both an emergency lock-ing retractor seat belt and an auto-matic locking retractor seat belt. Tofasten your seat belt, pull it out of theretractor and insert the metal tab intothe buckle. There will be an audible"click" when the tab locks into thebuckle. When not securing a childrestraint, the seat belt operates in thesame way as the driver's seat belt(Emergency Locking Retractor Type).It automatically adjusts to the properlength only after the lap belt portion ofthe seat belt is adjusted manually sothat it fits snugly around your hips.

When the seat belt is fully extendedfrom the retractor to allow the instal-lation of a child restraint system, theseat belt operation changes to allowthe belt to retract, but not to extend(Automatic Locking Retractor Type).Refer to “Using a child restraint sys-tem” in this section.To convert from the automatic lock-ing feature to the emergency lockingoperation mode, allow the unbuckledseat belt to fully retract.

(Continued)• Position one arm under the

shoulder belt and the otherover the belt, as shown in theillustration.

• Always position the shoulderbelt anchor into the lockedposition at the appropriateheight.

• Never position the shoulderbelt across your neck or face.


323

When using the rear center seat belt,the buckle with the “CENTER” markmust be used.

To release the seat belt:

The seat belt is released by pressingthe release button (1) in the lockingbuckle. When it is released, the beltshould automatically draw back intothe retractor.If this does not happen, check thebelt to be sure it is not twisted, thentry again.

Stowing the rear seat belt

• The rear seat belt buckles can bestowed in the pocket between therear seatback and cushion whennot in use.

B210A01NF-1/H ODM032034

OXM039030

■ 2nd row seat

■ 3rd row seat (if equipped)

ODM032051

3 33


• Routing the seat belt webbingthrough the rear seat belt guideswill help keep the belts from beingtrapped behind or under the seats.After inserting the seat belt, tightenthe belt webbing by pulling it up.

Pre-tensioner seat belt

Your vehicle is equipped with pre-ten-sioner seatbelts in the front seatingpositions (driver side with retractorpre-tensioner, passenger side withretractor and EFD (EmergencyFastening Device)).The pre-tensioner seat belts can beactivated, where the frontal collisions(or side collisions or rollovers) aresevere enough, together with the airbags.

OANNSA2023

CAUTIONWhen using the seat belt, use itafter taking it out of the guides.If you pull the seat belt when itis stored in the guides, it maydamage the guides and/or beltwebbing.

ODM032027

ODM032035

■ 2nd row seat

■ 3rd row seat (if equipped)


343

When the vehicle stops suddenly, orif the occupant tries to lean forwardtoo quickly, the seat belt retractor willlock into position. In certain frontalcollisions (or side collisions orrollovers), the pre-tensioner will acti-vate and pull the seat belt into tightercontact against the occupant's body.(1) Retractor Pretensioner

The purpose of the retractor pre-tensioner is to make sure that theshoulder belts fit in tightly againstthe occupant's upper body in cer-tain frontal collisions (or side colli-sions or rollovers).

(2) EFD (Emergency Fastening Device)The purpose of the EFD is to makesure that the pelvis belts fit in tight-ly against the occupant's lowerbody in certain frontal collisions (orrollovers). (for passenger’s side)

If the system senses excessive ten-sion on the driver or passenger's seatbelt when the pre-tensioner systemactivates, the load limiter inside theretractor pre-tensioner will releasesome of the pressure on the affectedseat belt.

The seat belt pre-tensioner systemconsists mainly of the following com-ponents.Their locations are shown inthe illustration:1. SRS air bag warning light2. Retractor pre-tensioner assembly3. SRS control module4. Emergency fastening device (EFD)

WARNING• Do not put anything near the

buckle. Placing objects nearthe buckle may increase therisk of personal injury in theevent of a collision.

• For your safety, be sure thatthe belt webbing is not looseor twisted and always sitproperly on your seat.

ODMESA2024

3 35


✽✽ NOTICE• Both the driver's and front pas-

senger's seat belt pre-tensionersystem may be activated not onlyin certain frontal collision but alsoin certain side collision or rollover,if the vehicle is equipped with aside or curtain air bag.

• When the pre-tensioner seat beltsare activated, a loud noise may beheard and fine dust, which mayappear to be smoke, may be visiblein the passenger compartment.These are normal operating condi-tions and are not hazardous.

• Although it is harmless, the finedust may cause skin irritation andshould not be breathed for pro-longed periods. Wash all exposedskin areas thoroughly after anaccident in which the pre-tension-er seat belts were activated.

• Because the sensor that activatesthe SRS air bag is connected withthe pre-tensioner seat belt, theSRS air bag warning light onthe instrument panel will illumi-nate for approximately 6 secondsafter the ignition switch has beenturned to the ON position, andthen it should turn off.

CAUTIONIf the pre-tensioner seat beltsystem are not working proper-ly, this warning light will illumi-nate even if there is no malfunc-tion of the SRS air bag. If theSRS air bag warning light blinksor does not illuminate when theignition switch is turned ON, or ifit remains illuminated after illu-minating for approximately 6seconds, or if it illuminates whilethe vehicle is being driven, havean authorized HYUNDAI dealerinspect the pre-tensioner seatbelt and SRS air bag system assoon as possible.

WARNINGTo obtain maximum benefitfrom a pre-tensioner seat belt:1. The seat belt must be worn

correctly and adjusted to theproper position. Please readand follow all of the importantinformation and precautionsabout your vehicle’s occupantsafety features – includingseat belts and air bags – thatare provided in this manual.

2. Be sure you and your passen-gers always wear seat beltsproperly.


363

Seat belt precautions(Continued)• Improper handling of the pre-

tensioner seat belt assem-blies, and failure to heed thewarnings not to strike, modify,inspect, replace, service orrepair the pre-tensioner seatbelt assemblies may lead toimproper operation or inad-vertent activation and seriousinjury.

• Always wear the seat beltswhen driving or riding in amotor vehicle.

• If the vehicle or pre-tensionerseat belt must be discarded,contact an authorizedHYUNDAI dealer.

WARNINGAll occupants of the vehiclemust wear their seat belts at alltimes. Seat belts and childrestraints reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries for alloccupants in the event of a col-lision or sudden stop. Without aseat belt, occupants could beshifted too close to a deployingair bag, strike the interior struc-ture or be thrown from the vehi-cle. Properly worn seat beltsgreatly reduce these hazards.Even with advanced air bags,unbelted occupants can beseverely injured by a deployingair bag.Always follow the precautionsabout seat belts, air bags andoccupant seating contained inthis manual.

WARNING• Pre-tensioner seatbelt sys-

tems are designed to operateonly one time. After activation,pre-tensioner seat belts mustbe replaced. All seat belts, ofany type, should always bereplaced after they have beenworn during a collision.

• The pre-tensioner seat beltassembly mechanisms becomehot during activation. Do nottouch the pre-tensioner seatbelt assemblies for several min-utes after they have been acti-vated.

• Do not attempt to inspect orreplace the pre-tensioner seatbelts yourself. This must bedone by an authorizedHYUNDAI dealer.

• Do not strike the pre-tension-er seat belt assemblies.

• Do not attempt to service orrepair the pre-tensioner seatbelt system in any manner.

(Continued)

3 37


Infant or small childAll 50 states have child restraint laws.You should be aware of the specificrequirements in your state. Childand/or infant seats must be properlyplaced and installed in the rear seat.For more information about the use ofthese restraints, refer to “Childrestraint system” in this section.

✽✽ NOTICESmall children are best protectedfrom injury in an accident whenproperly restrained in the rear seatby a child restraint system thatmeets the requirements of theFederal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards. Before buying any childrestraint system, make sure that ithas a label certifying that it meetsFederal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard 213. The restraint must beappropriate for your child's heightand weight. Check the label on thechild restraint for this information.Refer to “Child restraint system” inthis section.

Larger childrenChildren who are too large for childrestraint systems should alwaysoccupy the rear seat and use theavailable lap/shoulder belts. The lapportion should be fastened snug onthe hips and as low as possible.Check belt fit periodically. A child'ssquirming could put the belt out ofposition. Children are afforded themost safety in the event of an acci-dent when they are restrained by aproper restraint system in the rearseat. If a larger child (over age 12)must be seated in the front seat, thechild should be securely restrainedby the available lap/shoulder belt andthe seat should be placed in the rear-most position. Children age 12 andunder should be restrained securelyin the rear seat. NEVER place a childage 12 and under in the front seat.NEVER place a rear facing child seatin the front seat of a vehicle.

WARNINGEvery person in your vehicleneeds to be properly restrainedat all times, including infantsand children. Never hold a childin your arms or lap when ridingin a vehicle. The violent forcescreated during a crash will tearthe child from your arms andthrow the child against the inte-rior. Always use a child restraintappropriate for your child'sheight and weight.


383

If the shoulder belt portion slightlytouches the child’s neck or face, tryplacing the child closer to the center ofthe vehicle. If the shoulder belt stilltouches their face or neck they need tobe returned to a child restraint system.

Pregnant womenThe use of a seat belt is recom-mended for pregnant women tolessen the chance of injury in anaccident. When a seat belt is used,the lap belt portion should be placedas low and snugly as possible on thehips, not across the abdomen. Forspecific recommendations, consult aphysician.

Injured personA seat belt should be used when aninjured person is being transported.When this is necessary, you shouldconsult a physician for recommenda-tions.

One person per beltTwo people (including children)should never attempt to use a singleseat belt. This could increase theseverity of injuries in case of an acci-dent.

Do not lie downTo reduce the chance of injuries inthe event of an accident and toachieve maximum effectiveness ofthe restraint system, all passengersshould be sitting up and the front andrear seats should be in an uprightposition when the car is moving. Aseat belt cannot provide proper pro-tection if the person is lying down inthe rear seat or if the seats are in areclined position.

WARNING - Pregnantwomen

Pregnant women must neverplace the lap portion of thesafety belt over the area of theabdomen where the unbornchild is located or above theabdomen where the belt couldseriously injure or even causethe death of the unborn childduring an impact.

WARNING - Shoulderbelts on small children

• Never allow a shoulder belt tobe in contact with a child’sneck or face while the vehicleis in motion.

• If seat belts are not properlyworn and adjusted on chil-dren, there is a risk of death orserious injury.

3 39


Care of seat beltsSeat belt systems should never bedisassembled or modified. In addi-tion, care should be taken to assurethat seat belts and belt hardware arenot damaged by seat hinges, doorsor other abuse.

Periodic inspectionAll seat belts should be inspectedperiodically for wear or damage ofany kind. Any damaged parts shouldbe replaced as soon as possible.

Keep belts clean and drySeat belts should be kept clean anddry. If belts become dirty, they can becleaned by using a mild soap solu-tion and warm water. Bleach, dye,strong detergents or abrasivesshould not be used because theymay damage and weaken the fabric.

When to replace seat beltsEntire in-use seat belt assembly orassemblies should be replaced if thevehicle has been involved in an acci-dent. This should be done even if nodamage is visible. Additional ques-tions concerning seat belt operationshould be directed to an authorizedHYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING - Pinched seat belt

Make sure that the webbingand/or buckle does not getcaught or pinched in the rearseat when returning the rearseatback to its upright position.A caught or pinched webbing/buckle may become damagedand could fail during a collisionor sudden stop resulting in seri-ous injury or death.

WARNINGRiding with a reclined seatbackincreases your chance of seri-ous or fatal injuries in the eventof a collision or sudden stop.The protection of your restraintsystem (seat belts and air bags)is greatly reduced by recliningyour seat. Seat belts must besnug against your hips andchest to work properly. Themore the seatback is reclined,the greater the chance that anoccupant's hips will slide underthe lap belt causing seriousinternal injuries or the occu-pant's neck could strike theshoulder belt. Drivers and pas-sengers should always sit wellback in their seats, properlybelted, and with the seatbacksupright.


403

Children riding in the car should sit inthe rear seat and must always beproperly restrained to minimize therisk of injury in an accident, suddenstop or sudden maneuver. Accordingto accident statistics, children aresafer when properly restrained in therear seats than in the front seat.Larger children not in a child restraintshould use one of the seat belts pro-vided.You should be aware of the specificrequirements in your state. Childand/or infant safety seats must beproperly placed and installed in therear seat. You must use a commer-cially available child restraint systemthat meets the requirements of theFederal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards (FMVSS).Child restraint systems are designedto be secured in vehicle seats by lapbelts or the lap belt portion of alap/shoulder belt, or by a LATCH sys-tem (if equipped).

Children could be injured or killed ina crash if their restraints are notproperly secured. For small childrenand babies, a child seat or infant seatmust be used. Before buying a par-ticular child restraint system, makesure it fits your car seat and seatbelts, and fits your child. Follow allthe instructions provided by the man-ufacturer when installing the childrestraint system.

CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM

WARNING• A child restraint system must

be placed in the rear seat.Never install a child or infantseat on the front passenger'sseat. Should an accidentoccur and cause the passen-ger-side air bag to deploy, itcould severely injure or kill aninfant or child seated in aninfant or child seat. Thus onlyuse a child restraint in therear seat of your vehicle.

(Continued)

(Continued)• A seat belt or child restraint

system can become very hotif it is left in a closed vehicleon a sunny day, even if theoutside temperature does notfeel hot. Be sure to check theseat cover and buckles beforeplacing a child there.

• When the child restraint sys-tem is not in use, store it inthe luggage area or fasten itwith a seat belt so that it willnot be thrown forward in thecase of a sudden stop or anaccident.

• Children may be seriouslyinjured or killed by an inflatingair bag. All children, eventhose too large for childrestraints, must ride in therear seat.

3 41


WARNINGTo reduce the chance of seriousor fatal injuries:• Children of all ages are safer

when restrained in the rearseat. A child riding in the frontpassenger seat can be force-fully struck by an inflating airbag resulting in serious orfatal injuries.

• Always follow the childrestraint system manufactur-er’s instructions for installationand use of the child restraint.

• Always make sure the childseat is secured properly in thecar and your child is securelyrestrained in the child seat.

• Never hold a child in yourarms or lap when riding in avehicle.The violent forces cre-ated during a crash will tearthe child from your arms andthrow the child against thecar’s interior.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Never put a seat belt over

yourself and a child. During acrash, the belt could pressdeep into the child causingserious internal injuries.

• Never leave children unat-tended in a vehicle – not evenfor a short time. The car canheat up very quickly, resultingin serious injuries to childreninside. Even very young chil-dren may inadvertently causethe vehicle to move, entanglethemselves in the windows, orlock themselves or othersinside the vehicle.

• Never allow two children, orany two persons, to use thesame seat belt.

• Children often squirm andreposition themselves improp-erly. Never let a child ride withthe shoulder belt under theirarm or behind their back.Always properly position andsecure children in the rear seat.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Never allow a child to stand-

up or kneel on the seat or floorof a moving vehicle. During acollision or sudden stop, thechild can be violently thrownagainst the vehicle’s interior,resulting in serious injury.

• Never use an infant carrier ora child safety seat that"hooks" over a seatback, itmay not provide adequatesecurity in an accident.

• Seat belts can become veryhot, especially when the car isparked in direct sunlight.Always check seat belt buck-les before fastening themover a child.

• After an accident, have anauthorized HYUNDAI dealercheck the child restraint sys-tem, seat belt, tether anchorand lower anchor.

• If there is not enough space toplace the child restraint sys-tem because of the driver'sseat, install the child restraintsystem in the rear right seat.


423

Using a child restraint system

For small children and babies, the useof a child seat or infant seat is required.This child seat or infant seat should beof appropriate size for the child andshould be installed in accordance withthe manufacturer's instructions.

For safety reasons, we recommendthat the child restraint system beused in the rear seats.

Since all passenger seat belts movefreely under normal conditions andonly lock under extreme or emer-gency conditions (emergency lockingmode), you must manually changethese seat belts to the automatic lock-ing mode to secure a child restraint.

WARNING - Child seatinstallation

• A child can be seriouslyinjured or killed in a collision ifthe child restraint is not prop-erly anchored to the vehicleand the child is not properlyrestrained in the child restraint.

(Continued)

(Continued)Before installing the childrestraint system, read theinstructions supplied by thechild restraint system manu-facturer.

• If the seat belt does not oper-ate as described in this sec-tion, have the system checkedimmediately by your author-ized HYUNDAI dealer.

• Failure to observe this manu-al's instructions regardingchild restraint systems andthe instructions provided withthe child restraint systemcould increase the chanceand/or severity of injury in anaccident.

• If the vehicle headrest pre-vents proper installation of achild seat, the headrest of therespective seating positionshall be readjusted or entirelyremoved.

WARNINGNever place a rear-facing childrestraint in the front passengerseat, because of the danger thatan inflating passenger-side airbag could impact the rear-facingchild restraint and kill the child.

CRS09

OANNSA2032

Forward-facing child restraint system

Rearward-facing child restraint system

3 43


Placing a passenger seat beltinto the automatic locking mode

The automatic locking mode will helpprevent the normal movement of thechild in the vehicle from causing theseat belt to loosen and compromisethe child restraint system. To securea child restraint system, use the fol-lowing procedure.

To install a child restraint system onthe outboard or center rear seats, dothe following:1. Place the child restraint system in

the seat and route the lap/shoulderbelt around or through the restraint,following the restraint manufactur-er’s instructions. Be sure the seatbelt webbing is not twisted.

2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latchinto the buckle. Listen for the dis-tinct “click” sound.

Position the release button so that itis easy to access in case of an emer-gency.

3. Pull the shoulder portion of theseat belt all the way out. When theshoulder portion of the seat belt isfully extended, it will shift theretractor to the “Automatic locking”(child restraint) mode.

OMD030054AOMD030053A

E2MS103005


443

4. Slowly allow the shoulder portionof the seat belt to retract and listenfor an audible “clicking” or “ratchet-ing” sound. This indicates that theretractor is in the “automatic lock-ing” mode. If no distinct sound isheard, repeat steps 3 and 4.

5. Remove as much slack from thebelt as possible by pushing downon the child restraint system whilefeeding the shoulder belt back intothe retractor.

6. Push and pull on the child restraintsystem to confirm that the seatbelt is holding it firmly in place. If itis not, release the seat belt andrepeat steps 2 through 6.

7. Double check that the retractor isin the “Automatic locking” mode byattempting to pull more of the seatbelt out of the retractor. If you can-not, the retractor is in the “Automaticlocking” mode.

To remove the child restraint, pressthe release button on the buckle andthen pull the lap/shoulder belt out ofthe restraint and allow the seat belt toretract fully.

OMD030056AOMD030055A

3 45


When the seat belt is allowed toretract to its fully stowed position,the retractor will automaticallyswitch from the “Automatic lock-ing” mode to the emergency lockmode for normal adult usage.

WARNING - Automaticlocking mode

The lap/shoulder belt automati-cally returns to the “emergencylock mode” whenever the belt isallowed to retract fully.Therefore, the preceding sevensteps must be followed eachtime a child restraint is installed.If the retractor is not in theAutomatic Locking mode, thechild restraint can move whenyour vehicle turns or stops sud-denly. A child can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the childrestraint is not properlyanchored to the car, includingsetting the retractor to theAutomatic Locking mode.

ONCESA2021/ONCESA2112/ONCESA2111

■ 7-seater ■ 6-seater

Securing a child restraint seat with “Tether Anchor” system

This symbol indicates theposition of the tether anchor.

Child restraint hooks (tether anchors) are located on the rear of the seat backs.


463

1. Route the child restraint seat strapover the seatback.For vehicles with adjustable head-rests, route the tether strap underthe headrest and between theheadrest posts, otherwise routethe tether strap over the top of theseatback.❈ Refer to "Adjusting the height up

and down - 2nd row" in this chap-ter.

2. Connect the tether strap hook tothe appropriate child restrainthook holder and tighten to securethe child restraint seat.

WARNING - Tether strapNever mount more than onechild restraint to a single tetheranchor or to a single loweranchorage point. The increasedload caused by multiple seatsmay cause the tethers oranchorage points to break,causing serious injury or death.

WARNINGA child can be seriously injuredor killed in a collision if thechild restraint is not properlyanchored to the car and thechild is not properly restrainedin the child restraint. Always fol-low the child seat manufactur-er’s instructions for installationand use.

WARNING• When using the vehicle's

"Tether Anchor" system toinstall a child restraint systemin the rear seat, all unusedvehicle rear seat belt metallatch plates or tabs must belatched securely in their seatbelt buckles and the seat beltwebbing must be retractedbehind the child restraint toprevent the child from reachingand taking hold of unretractedseat belts. Unlatched metallatch plates or tabs may allowthe child to reach the unretract-ed seat belts which may resultin strangulation and a seriousinjury or death to the child inthe child restraint.

• Do not place anything aroundthe lower anchors. Also makesure that the seat belt is notcaught in the lower anchors.

OANNSA2033

3 47


Securing a child restraint seat withchild seat lower anchor system

Some child seat manufacturersmake child restraint seats that arelabeled as LATCH or LATCH-com-patible child restraint seats. LATCHstands for "Lower Anchors andTethers for Children". These seatsinclude two rigid or webbing mount-ed attachments that connect to twoLATCH anchors at specific seatingpositions in your vehicle. This type ofchild restraint seat eliminates theneed to use seat belts to attach thechild seat in the rear seats.

Child restraint symbols are locatedon the left and right rear seat backsto indicate the position of the loweranchors for child restraints.

OXM039035

ODM032038

Lower Anchor

Lower AnchorPosition IndicatorWARNING - Child restraint

checkCheck that the child restraintsystem is secure by pushingand pulling it in different direc-tions. Incorrectly fitted childrestraints may swing, twist, tipor separate causing death orserious injury.

WARNING - Child restraintanchorage

• Child restraint anchorages aredesigned to withstand onlythose loads imposed by cor-rectly fitted child restraints.Under no circumstances arethey to be used for adult seatbelts or harnesses or forattaching other items or equip-ment to the vehicle.

• The tether strap may not workproperly if attached some-where other than the correcttether anchor.


483

LATCH anchors have been providedin your vehicle. The LATCH anchorsare located in the left and right out-board seating positions of the sec-ond row. Their locations are shown inthe illustration. There is no LATCHanchors provided for the second cen-ter and the third seating positions.The LATCH anchors are locatedbetween the seatback and the seatcushion of the rear seat left and rightoutboard seating positions.

Follow the child seat manufacturer’sinstructions to properly install childrestraint seats with LATCH orLATCH-compatible attachments.Once you have installed the LATCHchild restraint, assure that the seat isproperly attached to the LATCH andtether anchors.Also, test the child restraint seatbefore you place the child in it. Tiltthe seat from side to side. Also try totug the seat forward. Check to see ifthe anchors hold the seat in place.

✽✽ NOTICEThe recommended weight for theLATCH system is under 65 lb (30 kg).How to calculate the child restraintweight : Child restraint weight = 65 lb (30 kg) - Child weight

WARNINGIf the child restraint is notanchored properly, the risk of achild being seriously injured orkilled in a collision greatlyincreases.

WARNING - LATCH loweranchors

LATCH lower anchors are onlyto be used with the left and rightoutboard seating positions ofthe second row. Never attemptto attach a LATCH equippedseat in the the second centerand the third seating positions.You may damage the anchors orthe anchors may fail and breakin a collision.

CAUTIONDo not allow the rear seat beltwebbing to get scratched orpinched by the child-seat latchand LATCH anchor during theinstallation.

WARNING - Unused rearseatbelts

Always fasten the seatbeltsbehind the child restraint seatwhen they are not used tosecure the child seat. Failure todo so may result in child stran-gulation.

WARNINGDo not place anything aroundthe lower anchors. Also makesure that the seat belt is notcaught in the lower anchors.

3 49


(1) Driver’s front air bag(2) Passenger’s front air bag(3) Side impact air bag(4) Curtain air bag(5) Driver’s knee air bag

AIR BAG - ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM

WARNINGEven in vehicles with air bags,you and your passengers mustalways wear the seat belts pro-vided in order to minimize therisk and severity of injury in theevent of a collision or rollover.

ONCESA2052

❈ The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.


503

How does the air bag systemoperate • Air bags are activated (able to

inflate if necessary) only when theignition switch is turned to the ON orSTART position.

• The appropriate air bags inflateinstantly in the event of seriousfrontal or side collision in order tohelp protect the occupants fromserious physical injury.

• There is no single speed at whichthe air bags will inflate.Generally, air bags are designed toinflate by the severity of a collisionand its direction. These two factorsdetermine whether the sensorssend out an electronic deployment/inflation signal.

• Air bag deployment depends on anumber of factors including vehiclespeed, angles of impact and thedensity and stiffness of the vehiclesor objects which your vehicle hits inthe collision.Though, factors are notlimited to those mentioned above.

• The front air bags will completelyinflate and deflate in an instant.It is virtually impossible for you tosee the air bags inflate during anaccident.It is much more likely that you willsimply see the deflated air bagshanging out of their storage com-partments after the collision.

• In addition to inflating in seriousside collisions, side and/or curtainair bags will inflate if the sensingsystem detects a rollover.

• When a rollover is detected, sideand/or curtain air bags will remaininflated longer to help provide pro-tection from ejection, especiallywhen used in conjunction with theseat belts.

• In order to help provide protection,the air bags must inflate rapidly.Thespeed of air bag inflation is a con-sequence of the extremely shorttime in which to inflate the air bagbetween the occupant and the vehi-cle structures before the occupantimpacts those structures.

This speed of inflation reduces therisk of serious or life-threateninginjuries and is thus a necessary partof air bag design.However, air bag inflation can alsocause injuries which normally caninclude facial abrasions, bruises andbroken bones because the inflationspeed also causes the air bags toexpand with a great deal of force.

• There are even circumstancesunder which contact with the airbag can cause fatal injuries, espe-cially if the occupant is positionedexcessively close to the air bag.

WARNING• To avoid severe personal injury

or death caused by deployingair bags in a collision, the driv-er should sit as far back fromthe steering wheel air bag aspossible (at least 10 inches(250 mm) away). The front pas-sengers should always movetheir seats as far back as pos-sible and sit back in their seat.

(Continued)

3 51


Noise and smokeWhen the air bags inflate, they make aloud noise and they leave smoke andpowder in the air inside of the vehicle.This is normal and is a result of theignition of the air bag inflator. After theair bag inflates, you may feel substan-tial discomfort in breathing due to thecontact of your chest with both theseat belt and the air bag, as well asfrom breathing the smoke and powder.Open your doors and/or windowsas soon as possible after impact inorder to reduce discomfort and pre-vent prolonged exposure to thesmoke and powder.

Though the smoke and powder arenon-toxic, they may cause irritation tothe skin (eyes, nose and throat, etc). Ifthis is the case, wash and rinse withcold water immediately and consult adoctor if the symptom persists.

Do not install a child restraint onthe front passenger’s seat.

Never place a rear-facing childrestraint in the front passenger’sseat. If the air bag deploys, it wouldimpact the rear-facing child restraint,causing serious or fatal injury.In addition, do not place front-facingchild restraints in the front passen-ger’s seat either. If the front passen-ger air bag inflates, it could causeserious or fatal injuries to the child.

1JBH3051

WARNING - Hot components

Do not touch the air bag storagearea's internal componentsimmediately after air bag infla-tion. The air bag related parts inthe steering wheel, instrumentpanel and the roof rails abovethe front and rear doors arevery hot. Hot components canresult in burn injuries.

(Continued)• Air bags inflate instantly in the

event of collision, and passen-gers may be injured by the airbag expansion force if they arenot in proper position.

• Air bag inflation may causeinjuries which normally includefacial or bodily abrasions,injuries from broken glasses orburns by the air bag inflationgasses.


523

Air bag warning light

The purpose of the air bag warninglight in your instrument panel is toalert you of a potential problem withyour airbag system, which includesside and/or curtain airbags used forrollover protection.When the ignition switch is turnedON, the indicator light should illumi-nate for approximately 6 seconds,then go off.

SRS components and functions

The SRS consists of the followingcomponents:1. Driver's front air bag module2. Passenger's front air bag module3. Side impact air bag modules4. Curtain air bag modules5. Retractor pre-tensioner assem-

blies 6. Air bag warning light7. SRS control module (SRSCM)/

Rollover sensor8. Front impact sensors9. Side impact sensors

W7-147

WARNING - Air bagdeployment

When children are seated in therear outboard seats of a vehicleequipped with side and/or cur-tain air bags, install the childrestraint system as far awayfrom the door side as possible.Inflation of the side and/or cur-tain air bags could cause seri-ous injury or death to an infantor child.

OEN031051N

3 53


10. “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF”indicator (Front passenger’s seatonly)

11. Occupant classification system(Front passenger’s seat only)

12. Driver’s and front passenger’sseat belt buckle sensors

The SRSCM continually monitors allSRS components while the ignitionswitch is ON to determine if a crashimpact is severe enough to requireair bag deployment or pre-tensionerseat belt deployment.

The SRS air bag warning light " "on the instrument panel will illumi-nate for about 6 seconds after theignition switch is turned to the ONposition, after which the SRS air bagwarning light " " should go out.

W7-147

WARNINGIf any of the following condi-tions occurs, this indicates amalfunction of the SRS. Have anauthorized HYUNDAI dealerinspect the air bag system assoon as possible.• The light does not turn on

briefly when you turn the igni-tion ON.

• The light stays on after illumi-nating for approximately 6seconds.

• The light comes on while thevehicle is in motion.

• The light blinks when the igni-tion switch is in ON position.


543

The front air bag modules are locatedin the center of the steering wheel, inthe front passenger's panel above theglove box and in the driver’s sideknee bolster. When the SRSCMdetects a sufficiently severe impact tothe front of the vehicle, it will auto-matically deploy the front air bags.

Upon deployment, tear seams mold-ed directly into the pad covers willseparate under pressure from theexpansion of the air bags. Furtheropening of the covers then allows fullinflation of the air bags.

A fully inflated air bag, in combina-tion with a properly worn seat belt,slows the driver's or the passenger'sforward motion, reducing the risk ofhead and chest injury.

After complete inflation, the air bagimmediately starts deflating,enabling the driver to maintain for-ward visibility and the ability to steeror operate other controls.

OHM039103N

Driver’s front air bag (2)

OHM039102N


OHM039104N


3 55


B240B05L

Passenger’s front air bag

WARNING • Do not install or place any

accessories (drink holder, CDor discs holder, sticker, etc.)on the front passenger'spanel above the glove box in avehicle with a passenger's airbag. Such objects maybecome dangerous projec-tiles and cause injury if thepassenger's air bag inflates.

(Continued)

(Continued)• When installing a container of

liquid air freshener inside thevehicle, do not place it nearthe instrument cluster nor onthe instrument panel surface.It may become a dangerousprojectile and cause injury ifthe passenger's air baginflates.

WARNING• If an air bag deploys, there

may be a loud noise followedby a fine dust released in thevehicle. These conditions arenormal and are not hazardous- the air bags are packed inthis fine powder.The dust gen-erated during air bag deploy-ment may cause skin or eyeirritation as well as aggravateasthma for some persons.Always wash all exposed skinareas thoroughly with luke-warm water and a mild soapafter an accident in which theair bags were deployed.

• The SRS can function onlywhen the ignition switch is inthe ON position.

(Continued)


563

Occupant classification system Your vehicle is equipped with anoccupant classification system in thefront passenger's seat.The occupant classification systemis designed to detect the presence ofa properly-seated front passengerand determine if the passenger'sfront air bag should be enabled (mayinflate) or not. The driver's front airbag is not affected or controlled bythe occupant classification system.

(Continued)If the SRS air bag warning light" " does not illuminate, orcontinuously remains on afterilluminating for about 6 sec-onds or blinks when the igni-tion switch is turned to the ONposition, or after the engine isstarted, comes on while driv-ing, the SRS is not workingproperly. If this occurs, haveyour vehicle immediatelyinspected by an authorizedHYUNDAI dealer.

• Before you replace a fuse ordisconnect a battery terminal,turn the ignition switch to theLOCK position and removethe ignition key for ignitionkey, and turn the enginestart/stop button to the OFFposition for smart key. Neverremove or replace the air bagrelated fuse(s) when the igni-tion switch is in the ON posi-tion. Failure to heed this warn-ing will cause the SRS air bagwarning light to illuminate.

OANNSA2003/OANNSA2002/OANNSA2004

■ Type B

■ Type A

■ Type C

3 57


Main components of occupantclassification system• A detection device located within

the front passenger seat cushion.• Electronic system to determine

whether the front passenger airbag system should be activated ordeactivated.

• An indicator light located on theinstrument panel which illuminatesthe words PASSENGER AIR BAG"OFF" indicating the front passen-ger air bag system is deactivated.

• The instrument panel air bag indi-cator light is interconnected withthe occupant classification system.

If the front passenger seat is occupiedby a person that the system deter-mines to be of adult size, and he/shesits properly (sitting upright with theseatback in an upright position, cen-tered on the seat cushion with theirseat belt on, legs comfortably extend-ed and their feet on the floor), thePASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF" indica-tor will be turned off and the front pas-senger's air bag will be able to inflate,if necessary, in frontal crashes.

You will find the PASSENGER AIRBAG "OFF" indicator on the centerfacia panel. This system detects theconditions 1~4 in the following tableand activates or deactivates the frontpassenger air bag based on theseconditions.Always be sure that you and all vehi-cle occupants are seated andrestrained properly (sitting uprightwith the seat in an upright position,centered on the seat cushion, withthe person's legs comfortablyextended, feet on the floor, and wear-ing the safety belt properly) for themost effective protection by the airbag and the safety belt.

• The OCS may not function proper-ly if the passenger takes actionswhich can affect the classificationsystem. These include:(1) Failing to sit in an upright posi-

tion.(2) Leaning against the door or

center console.(3) Sitting towards the sides or the

front of the seat.(4) Putting legs on the dashboard

or resting them on other loca-tions which reduce the passen-ger weight on the front seat.

(5) Improperly wearing the safetybelt.

(6) Reclining the seat back.(7) Wearing a thick cloth like ski

wear or hip protection wear.(8) Put on the seat an additional

thick cushion.


583

Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classificationsystem

*1 The system judges a person of adultsize as an adult. When a smaller adultsits in the front passenger seat, thesystem may recognize him/her as achild depending on his/her physiqueand posture.

*2 Do not allow children to ride in the frontpassenger seat. When a larger childwho has outgrown a child restraint sys-tem sits in the front passenger seat,the system may recognize him/her asan adult depending upon his/herphysique or sitting position.

*3 Never install a child restraint system onthe front passenger seat.

*4 The PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF"indicator may turn on or off when achild above 12 months to 12 years old(with or without child restraint system)sits in the front passenger seat. This isa normal condition.

WARNING - OCS systemRiding in an improper positionadversely affects the occupantclassification system (OCS) andmay result in the deactivation offront passenger air bag. It isimportant for the driver toinstruct the passenger as to theproper seating instructions ascontained in this manual.

(Continued)

Condition detected by the occupant classification system

Indicator/Warning light Devices

PASSENGER AIRBAG “OFF”

indicator light

SRSwarning light

Front passenger air bag

1. Adult *1 or child age 13 and up*2 Off Off Activated

2. Infant or child restraint system with 12 months old*3 *4 On Off Deactivated

3. Unoccupied On Off Deactivated

4. Malfunction in the system Off On Activated

3 59


1KMN3663

1KMN3664

1KMN3665

- Never sit with hips shiftedtowards the front of the seat.

- Never lean on the door or cen-ter console.

- Never sit on one side of thefront passenger seat.

- Never place feet on the dash-board.

OVQ036013N

1KMN3662

- Never put a heavy load, anactive electronic device orblanket in the front passengerseat or seatback pocket.

- Never excessively recline thefront passenger seatback.

OHG031073A

- Never sit on the front passen-ger seat with anything attachedsuch as a blanket or cushion.

(Continued)


603

When an adult is seated in the frontpassenger seat, if the PASSENGERAIR BAG “OFF” indicator is on, turnthe ignition switch to the LOCK orOFF position and ask the passengerto sit properly (sitting upright with theseat back in an upright position, cen-tered on the seat cushion with theirseat belt on, legs comfortablyextended and their feet on the floor).Restart the engine and have the per-son remain in that position. This willallow the system to detect the personand to enable the passenger air bag.

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF"indicator is still on, ask the passen-ger to move to the rear seat.

✽✽ NOTICEThe PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF"indicator illuminates for about 4 sec-onds after the ignition switch isturned to the ON position or after theengine is started. If the front passen-ger seat is occupied, the occupantclassification sensor will then classifythe front passenger after severalmore seconds.

B990A01O

Proper position

WARNINGDo not hang onto the front pas-senger seat. Do not hang anyitems, such as a seatback tableor entertainment system, on thefront passenger seatback. Donot place feet on the front pas-senger seatback. Do not placeany items under the front pas-senger seat. Any of these couldinterfere with proper sensoroperation.

WARNING - AIR BAG"OFF" light

Do not allow an adult passengerto ride in the front seat when thePASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF”indicator is illuminated, becausethe air bag will not deploy in theevent of a crash.The driver mustinstruct the passenger to repo-sition himself in the seat. Failureto properly position yourselfmay lead to air bag deactivationresulting in air bag non-deploy-ment in a collision. If the PAS-SENGER AIR BAG “OFF” indica-tor remains illuminated after thepassenger repositions them-selves properly and the vehicleis restarted, it is recommendedthe passenger move to the rearseat because the passenger'sfront air bag will not deploy.

3 61


WARNING• Even though your vehicle is

equipped with the occupantclassification system, neverinstall a child restraint systemin the front passenger's seat.A deploying air bag can force-fully strike a child resulting inserious injuries or death. Anychild age 12 and under shouldride in the rear seat. Childrentoo large for child restraintsshould use the availablelap/shoulder belts. No matterwhat type of crash, children ofall ages are safer whenrestrained in the rear seat.

• The occupant classificationsystem may not work properlyif water, coffee or any otherliquid on the front passengerseat. Keep the front seat dryat all times.

(Continued)

(Continued)• If the PASSENGER AIR BAG

"OFF" indicator is illuminatedwhen the front passenger'sseat is occupied by an adultand he/she sits properly (sit-ting upright with the seatbackin an upright position, cen-tered on the seat cushion withtheir seat belt on, legs com-fortably extended and theirfeet on the floor), have thatperson sit in the rear seat.

• Do not modify or replace thefront passenger seat. Don'tplace anything on or attachanything such as a blanket orseat heater to the front pas-senger seat.This can adverse-ly affect the occupant classifi-cation system.

• Do not sit on sharp objectssuch as tools when occupyingthe front passenger seat. Thiscan adversely affect the occu-pant classification system.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Do not use accessory seat

covers on the front seats.• Accident statistics show that

children are safer if they arerestrained in the rear, asopposed to the front seat. It isrecommended that childrestraints be secured in a rearseat, including an infant ridingin a rear-facing infant seat, achild riding in a forward-fac-ing child seat and an olderchild riding in a booster seat.

• Air bags can only be usedonce – have an authorizedHYUNDAI dealer replace theair bag immediately afterdeployment.

(Continued)


623

Driver's and passenger's frontair bagWARNING

If the occupant classificationsystem is not working properly,the SRS air bag warning light on the instrument panel will illu-minate because the passenger'sfront air bag is connected withthe occupant classification sys-tem. If there is a malfunction ofthe occupant classification sys-tem, the PASSENGER AIR BAG"OFF" indicator will not illumi-nate and the passenger's frontair bag will inflate in frontalimpact crashes even if there isno occupant in the front passen-ger's seat. If the SRS air bagwarning light does not illumi-nate when the ignition switch isturned to the ON position,remains illuminated afterapproximately 6 seconds orblinks when the ignition switchis turned to the ON position, or ifit illuminates while the vehicle isbeing driven, have an author-ized HYUNDAI dealer inspectthe occupant classification sys-tem and the SRS air bag systemas soon as possible.

(Continued)• A smaller-stature adult in the

front passenger’ seat who isnot seated correctly (for exam-ple: seat excessively reclined,leaning on the door or centerconsole, or hips shifted for-ward in the seat) can cause acondition where the occupantclassification system sensesless weight than if the occu-pant were seated properly (sit-ting upright with the seatbackin an upright position, cen-tered on the seat cushion withtheir seat belt on, legs com-fortably extended and theirfeet on the floor).This condition can result in anadult potentially being mis-classified as a child and illu-mination of the PASSENGERAIR BAG "OFF" indicator.

ODM032040/ODM032041/ODM032042

■ Driver’s knee air bag

■ Driver’s front air bag

■ Passenger’s front air bag

3 63


Your vehicle is equipped with aSupplemental Restraint (Air Bag)System and the lap/shoulder belts atboth the driver and passenger seat-ing positions.The front air bags are designed tosupplement the three-point seatbelts. For these air bags to provideprotection, the seat belts must beworn at all times when driving.The indications of the system's pres-ence are the letters "SRS AIR BAG"embossed on the air bag pad coverin the steering wheel, on the kneebolster below the steering wheel col-umn and the passenger's side frontpanel pad above the glove box.The SRS consists of air bagsinstalled under the pad covers in thecenter of the steering wheel , in theknee bolster below the steeringwheel column and the passenger'sside front panel above the glove box.The purpose of the SRS is to providethe vehicle's driver and/or the frontpassenger with additional protectionthan that offered by the seat belt sys-tem alone in case of a frontal impactof sufficient severity.

The seat belt buckle sensors deter-mine if the driver and front passen-ger's seat belts are fastened. Thesesensors provide the ability to controlthe SRS deployment based onwhether or not the seat belts are fas-tened, and how severe the impact is.

The advanced SRS offers the abilityto control the air bag inflation withintwo levels. A first stage level is pro-vided for moderate-severity impacts.A second stage level is provided formore severe impacts.

According to the impact severity andseat belt usage, the SRSCM (SRSControl Module) controls the air baginflation. Failure to properly wearseat belts can increase the risk orseverity of injury in an accident.

Additionally, your vehicle is equippedwith an occupant classification sys-tem in the front passenger's seat.The occupant classification systemdetects the presence of a passengerin the front passenger's seat and willturn off the front passenger's air bagunder certain conditions. For moredetail, see "Occupant classificationsystem" in this section.


643

✽✽ NOTICE• Be sure to read information about

the SRS on the labels provided onthe sun visor.

• Advanced air bags are combinedwith pre-tensioner seat belts tohelp provide enhanced occupantprotection in frontal crashes.Front air bags are not intended todeploy in collisions in which pro-tection can be provided by the pre-tensioner seat belt.

WARNINGIf you are considering modifica-tion of your vehicle due to a dis-ability, please contact theHyundai Customer AssistanceCenter at 1-800-633-5151.

WARNINGDo not place any objects under-neath the front seats as theycould interfere with the occu-pant classification system.

WARNINGAlways use seat belts and childrestraints – every trip, everytime, everyone! Air bags inflatewith considerable force and inthe blink of an eye. Seat beltshelp keep occupants in properposition to obtain maximumbenefit from the air bag. Evenwith advanced air bags, improp-erly and unbelted occupantscan be severely injured whenthe air bag inflates.Always follow the precautionsabout seat belts, air bags andoccupant safety contained in thismanual. To reduce the chance ofserious or fatal injuries andreceive the maximum safety ben-efit from your restraint system:• Never place a child in any child

or booster seat in the front seat.• ABC – Always Buckle Children

in the back seat. It is the safestplace for children of any ageto ride.

(Continued)

3 65


(Continued)• If the SRS air bag warning

light remains illuminated whilethe vehicle is being driven,have an authorized HYUNDAIdealer inspect the air bag sys-tem as soon as possible.

• Air bags can only be used once– have an authorized HYUNDAIdealer replace the air bagimmediately after deployment.

• The SRS is designed to deploythe front air bags only whenfrontal impact is sufficientlysevere and when the impactangle is toward from the for-ward longitudinal axis of thevehicle. Additionally, the airbags will only deploy once.Seat belts must be worn at alltimes.

• Front air bags are not intendedto deploy in side-impact, rear-impact or rollover crashes. Inaddition, front air bags will notdeploy in frontal crashes belowthe deployment threshold.

(Continued)

(Continued)• No objects should be placed

over or near the air bag mod-ules on the steering wheel,instrument panel, and thefront passenger's panel abovethe glove box, because anysuch object could cause harmif the vehicle is in a crashsevere enough to cause theair bags to deploy.

• Never place covers, blanketsor seat warmers on the pas-senger seat as these mayinterfere with the occupantclassification system.

• Do not tamper with or discon-nect SRS wiring or other com-ponents of the SRS system.Doing so could result in injury,due to accidental deploymentof the air bags or by renderingthe SRS inoperative.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Front and side air bags can

injure occupants improperlypositioned in the front seats.

• Move your seat as far back aspractical from the front airbags, while still maintainingcontrol of the vehicle.

• You and your passengersshould never sit or lean unnec-essarily close to the air bags.Improperly positioned driverand passengers can be severe-ly injured by inflating air bags.

• Never lean against the door orcenter console – always sit inan upright position.

• Do not allow a passenger toride in the front seat when thePASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF"indicator is illuminated,because the air bag will notdeploy in the event of a mod-erate or severe frontal crash.

(Continued)


663

(Continued)• The SRS air bag system must

deploy very rapidly to provideprotection in a crash. If anoccupant is out of positionbecause of not wearing a seatbelt, the air bag may forcefullycontact the occupant causingserious or fatal injuries.

(Continued)• Even though your vehicle is

equipped with the occupantclassification system, do notinstall a child restraint systemin the front passenger seatposition. A child restraint sys-tem must never be placed inthe front seat. The infant orchild could be severely injuredor killed by an air bag deploy-ment in case of an accident.

• Children age 12 and undermust always be properlyrestrained in the rear seat.Never allow children to ride inthe front passenger seat. If achild over 12 must be seatedin the front seat, he or shemust be properly belted andthe seat should be moved asfar back as possible.

(Continued)

(Continued)• For maximum safety protec-

tion in all types of crashes, alloccupants including the drivershould always wear their seatbelts whether or not an air bagis also provided at their seat-ing position to minimize therisk of severe injury or deathin the event of a crash. Do notsit or lean unnecessarily closeto the air bag while the vehicleis in motion.

• Sitting improperly or out ofposition can result in seriousor fatal injury in a crash. Alloccupants should sit uprightwith the seatback in anupright position, centered onthe seat cushion with theirseat belt on, legs comfortablyextended and their feet on thefloor until the vehicle isparked and the ignition key isremoved.

(Continued)

3 67


Side impact air bag

❈ The actual air bags in the vehicle may differfrom the illustration.

Your vehicle is equipped with a sideimpact air bag in each front seat. Thepurpose of the air bag is to provide thevehicle's driver and/or the front pas-senger with additional protection thanthat offered by the seat belt alone.

The side impact air bags aredesigned to deploy only during cer-tain side-impact collisions, depend-ing on the crash severity, angle,speed and point of impact. The sideimpact air bags are not designed todeploy in all side impact situations orrollover situations.The side impact air bags do not onlydeploy on the side of the impact butalso on the opposite side.The side and/or curtain air bags onboth sides of the vehicle may deployif a rollover or possible rollover isdetected.

WARNINGDo not allow the passengers tolean their heads or bodies ontodoors, put their arms on thedoors, stretch their arms out ofthe window, or place objectsbetween the doors and passen-gers when they are seated onseats equipped with side and/orcurtain air bags.

WARNING• The side impact air bag is sup-

plemental to the driver's andthe passenger's seat belt sys-tems and is not a substitutefor them. Therefore your seatbelts must be worn at all timeswhile the vehicle is in motion.The air bags deploy only incertain side impact conditionssevere enough to cause sig-nificant injury to the vehicleoccupants.

• For best protection from theside impact air bag systemand to avoid being injured bythe deploying side impact airbag, both front seat occupantsshould sit in an upright posi-tion with the seat belt properlyfastened. The driver's handsshould be placed on the steer-ing wheel at the 9:00 and 3:00positions. The passenger'sarms and hands should beplaced on their laps.

(Continued)

ODM032043

OHM032071


683

Curtain air bag

❈ The actual air bags in the vehicle may differfrom the illustration.

Curtain air bags are located alongboth sides of the roof rails above thefront and rear doors.

(Continued)• Do not use any accessory

seat covers.• Use of seat covers could

reduce or prevent the effec-tiveness of the system.

• Do not install any accessorieson the side or near the side airbag.

• Do not place any objects overthe air bag or between the airbag and yourself.

• Do not place any objects (anumbrella, bag, etc.) betweenthe front door and the frontseat. Such objects maybecome dangerous projectilesand cause injury if the supple-mental side air bag inflates.

• To prevent unexpected deploy-ment of the side impact air bagthat may result in personalinjury, avoid impact to the sideimpact sensor when the igni-tion switch is on.

(Continued)

(Continued)• If the seat or seat cover is

damaged, have the vehiclechecked and repaired by anauthorized HYUNDAI dealerbecause your vehicle isequipped with side impact airbags and an occupant classi-fication system.

OANNSA2036

OHM032072

3 69


They are designed to help protectoccupants in certain side impactsand to help prevent them from eject-ing out of the vehicle as a result of arollover, especially when the seat-belts are also in use.• The curtain air bags are designed

to deploy during certain sideimpact collisions, depending on thecrash severity, angle, speed andpoint of impact.

• The curtain air bags do not onlydeploy on the side of the impactbut also on the opposite side.

• Also, the curtain air bags on bothsides of the vehicle will deploy incertain rollover situations.

• The curtain air bags are notdesigned to deploy in all sideimpact or rollover situations.

(Continued)• Do not allow the passengers

to lean their heads or bodiesonto doors, put their arms onthe doors, stretch their armsout of the window, or placeobjects between the doorsand passengers when they areseated on seats equipped withside and/or curtain air bags.

• Never try to open or repair anycomponents of the side cur-tain air bag system. Thisshould only be done by anauthorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Failure to follow the aboveinstructions can result in injuryor death to the vehicle occu-pants in an accident.

WARNING• In order for side and curtain

air bags to provide the bestprotection, front seat occu-pants and outboard rear occu-pants should sit in an uprightposition with the seat beltsproperly fastened.Importantly, children shouldsit in a proper child restraintsystem in the rear seat.

• When children are seated inthe rear outboard seats, theymust be seated in the properchild restraint system. Makesure to put the child restraintsystem as far away from thedoor side as possible, andsecure the child restraint sys-tem in a locked position.

(Continued)


703

Why didn’t my air bag go off in acollision? (Inflation and non-infla-tion conditions of the air bag)There are many types of accidentsin which the air bag would not beexpected to provide additionalprotection.These include rear impacts, sec-ond or third collisions in multipleimpact accidents, as well as lowspeed impacts.

Air bag collision sensors

(1) SRS control module / Rollover sensor

(2) Front impact sensor

(3) Side impact sensor (4) Side impact sensor

ONCESA2105/OANNSA2037/ONCDSA3123/OANNSA2038/ODM032048

1 2 3 4

3 71


• Problems may arise if the sensorinstallation angles are changeddue to the deformation of the frontbumper, body or C pillars or frontdoor where side collision sensorsare installed. Have the vehiclechecked and repaired by anauthorized HYUNDAI dealer.

• Your vehicle has been designed toabsorb impact and deploy the airbag(s) in certain collisions. Installingbumper guards or side steppers orreplacing a bumper with non-gen-uine parts may adversely affect yourvehicle’s collision and air bagdeployment performance.

Air bag inflation conditions

Front air bags

Front air bags are designed to inflatein a frontal collision depending onthe intensity, speed or angles ofimpact of the front collision.

WARNING - Air bag sensors

• Do not hit or allow any objectsto impact the locations whereair bags or sensors areinstalled.This may cause unexpectedair bag deployment, whichcould result in serious per-sonal injury or death.

• If the installation location orangle of the sensors is alteredin any way, the air bags maydeploy when they should notor they may not deploy whenthey should, causing severeinjury or death.Therefore, do not try to per-form maintenance on oraround the air bag sensors.Have the vehicle checked andrepaired by an authorizedHYUNDAI dealer.

1VQA2084


723

❈ The actual air bags in the vehicle may dif-fer from the illustration.

Side impact and curtain air bags

Side impact and curtain air bags aredesigned to inflate when an impact isdetected by side collision sensorsdepending on the strength, speed orangles of impact resulting from aside impact collision.Also, the side impact and curtain airbags are designed to inflate when arollover is detected by the rolloversensor.Although the front air bags (driver’sfront, knee and front passenger’s airbags) are designed to inflate in frontalcollisions, they also may inflate inother types of collisions if the frontimpact sensors detect a sufficientfrontal force in another type of impact.Side impact and curtain air bags aredesigned to inflate in certain sideimpact collisions. They may inflate inother type of collisions where a sideforce is detected by the sensors.

Side air bag and/or curtain air bagsmay also inflate where rollover sen-sors indicate the possibility of arollover occurring (even if none actual-ly occurs) or in other situations, inclu-iding when the vehicle is tilted whilebeing towed. Even where side and/orcurtain air bags would not provideimpact protection in a rollover, howev-er, they will deploy to prevent ejectionof occupants, especially those whoare restrained with seat belts.If the vehicle chassis is impacted bybumps or objects on unimprovedroads, the air bags may deploy. Drivecarefully on unimproved roads or onsurfaces not designed for vehicle traf-fic to prevent unintended air bagdeployment.

OVQ036018N

OHM032072

3 73


Air bag non-inflation conditions

• In certain low-speed collisions theair bags may not deploy. The airbags are designed not to deploy insuch cases because they may notprovide benefits beyond the pro-tection of the seat belts in such col-lisions.

• Air bags are not designed to inflatein rear collisions, because occu-pants are moved backward by theforce of the impact. In this case,inflated air bags would not be ableto provide any additional benefit.

• Front air bags may not inflate inside impact collisions, becauseoccupants move to the direction ofthe collision, and thus in sideimpacts, frontal air bag deploymentwould not provide additional occu-pant protection.However, side impact and curtainair bags may inflate depending onthe intensity, vehicle speed andangles of impact.

OVQ036018NOUN036087

1VQA2086


743

• In an angled collision, the force ofimpact may direct the occupants ina direction where the air bags wouldnot be able to provide any addition-al benefit, and thus the SRS maynot deploy any air bags.

• Just before impact, drivers oftenbrake heavily. Such heavy brakinglowers the front portion of the vehi-cle causing it to “ride” under a vehi-cle with a higher ground clearance.Air bags may not inflate in this"under-ride" situation becauseforces that are detected by sensorsmay be reduced by such “under-ride” collisions.

• Front air bags may not inflate inrollover accidents where the SRSCMindicates that the SRSCM indicatesthat the front air bag deploymentwould not provide additional occu-pant protection.

1VQA20901VQA2089 1VQA2091

3 75


• Air bags may not inflate if the vehi-cle collides with objects such as util-ity poles or trees.

SRS CareThe SRS is virtually maintenance-free and so there are no parts you cansafely service by yourself. If the SRSair bag warning light " " does notilluminate, when you turn the ignitionon, or continuously remains on, orcontinuously blinks have your vehicleimmediately inspected by an author-ized HYUNDAI dealer.

Any work on the SRS system, suchas removing, installing, repairing, orany work on the steering wheel, thefront passenger's panel, front seatsand roof rails must be performed byan authorized HYUNDAI dealer.Improper handling of the SRS systemmay result in serious personal injury.

To clean the air bag pad covers, useonly a soft, dry cloth or one which hasbeen moistened with plain water.Solvents or cleaners could adverselyaffect the air bag covers and properdeployment of the system.

WARNING• Modification to SRS compo-

nents or wiring, including theaddition of any kind of badgesto the pad covers or modifica-tions to the body structure,can adversely affect SRS per-formance and lead to possibleinjury.

• Not only the modification ofthe parts where the SRS sen-sors are but also the modifica-tion of other parts of the vehi-cle may affect the SRS per-formance and lead to possibleinjury.

• No objects should be placedover or near the air bag mod-ules on the steering wheel,instrument panel, and thefront passenger's panel abovethe glove box, because anysuch object could cause harmif the vehicle is in a crashsevere enough to cause theair bags to inflate.

(Continued)

1VQA2092


763

If components of the air bag systemmust be discarded, or if the vehiclemust be scrapped, certain safetyprecautions must be observed. Anauthorized HYUNDAI dealer knowsthese precautions and can give youthe necessary information. Failure tofollow these precautions and proce-dures could increase the risk of per-sonal injury.

Additional safety precautions• Never let passengers ride in the

cargo area or on top of a folded-down back seat. All occupantsshould sit upright, fully back in theirseats with their seat belts on andtheir feet on the floor.

• Passengers should not moveout of or change seats while thevehicle is moving. A passengerwho is not wearing a seat belt dur-ing a crash or emergency stop canbe thrown against the inside of thevehicle, against other occupants,or out of the vehicle.

• Each seat belt is designed torestrain one occupant. If morethan one person uses the sameseat belt, they could be seriouslyinjured or killed in a collision.

• Do not use any accessories onseat belts. Devices claiming toimprove occupant comfort or repo-sition the seat belt can reduce theprotection provided by the seat beltand increase the chance of seriousinjury in a crash.

• Passengers should not placehard or sharp objects betweenthemselves and the air bags.Carrying hard or sharp objects onyour lap or in your mouth can resultin injuries if an air bag inflates.

• Keep occupants away from the airbag covers. All occupants should situpright, fully back in their seats withtheir seat belts on and their feet onthe floor. If occupants are too closeto the air bag covers, they could beinjured if the air bags inflate.

• Do not attach or place objectson or near the air bag covers.Any object attached to or placedon the front or side air bag coverscould interfere with the properoperation of the air bags.

• Do not modify the front seats.Modification of the front seats couldinterfere with the operation of thesupplemental restraint system sens-ing components or side air bags.

• Do not place items under thefront seats. Placing items underthe front seats could interfere withthe operation of the supplementalrestraint system sensing compo-nents and wiring harnesses.

(Continued)• If the air bags inflate, they

must be replaced by anauthorized HYUNDAI dealer.

• Do not tamper with or discon-nect SRS wiring, or othercomponents of the SRS sys-tem. Doing so could result ininjury, due to accidental infla-tion of the air bags or by ren-dering the SRS inoperative.

• If your car was flooded andhas soaked carpeting or wateron the flooring, you shouldn'ttry to start the engine; havethe car towed to an authorizedHYUNDAI dealer.

3 77


• Never hold an infant or child onyour lap. The infant or child couldbe seriously injured or killed in theevent of a crash. All infants and chil-dren should be properly restrainedin appropriate child safety seats orseat belts in the rear seat.

Adding equipment to or modi-fying your air bag-equippedvehicleIf you modify your vehicle by chang-ing your vehicle's frame, bumper sys-tem, front end or side sheet metal orride height, this may affect the oper-ation of your vehicle's air bag sys-tem.

Air bag warning label

Air bag warning labels, some requiredby the U.S. National Highway TrafficSafety Administration (NHTSA), areattached to alert the driver and pas-sengers of potential risks of the airbag system.

WARNING• Sitting improperly or out of

position can cause occupantsto be shifted too close to adeploying air bag, strike theinterior structure or be thrownfrom the vehicle resulting inserious injury or death.

• Always sit upright with theseatback in an upright posi-tion, centered on the seatcushion with your seat belton, legs comfortably extendedand your feet on the floor.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Always have the ignition OFF

when the vehicle is beingtowed or where it may other-wise be tilted, since the sideand/or curtain air bags mayinflate if the sensors interpretthose tilt angles as a potentialrollover.

• Be careful not to cause impactto the doors when the ignitionis ON.The air bags may inflate.

OANNSA2006

ODM032057

Features of your vehicle

Folding key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4• Record your key number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4• Key operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4• Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6• Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7• Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

Smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10• Record your key number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10• Smart key function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10• Loss of the smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13• Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14• Smart key immobilizer system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14• Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16

Theft-alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17• Armed stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17• Theft-alarm stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19• Disarmed stage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21• From outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21• From inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23• Impact sensing door unlock system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25• Child-protector rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25

Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26• Non-Powered tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26• Power tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27

• Smart tailgate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31• Emergency tailgate safety release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36• Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37

Hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41• Opening the hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41• Closing the hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42

Fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43• Opening the fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43• Closing the fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43• Emergency fuel filler lid release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46

Panoramic sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47• Sunroof open warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47• Sunshade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48• Sliding the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49• Tilting the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50• Closing the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50• Resetting the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52

Steering wheel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53• Electronic power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53• Tilt & telescopic steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54• Heated steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55• Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55• Driver selectable steering mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56

4

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59• Inside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59• Blue Link® center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67• Outside rearview mirror. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67• Blind zone mirror (BZM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70

Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71• Instrument Cluster Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72• LCD Display Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72• Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73• Transaxle Shift Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76

LCD display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77• LCD Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77• Service Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78• User Settings Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79• A/V Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82• Turn By Turn Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82• Warning Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82

Trip computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89• Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89• Trip A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90• Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91

Warning and indicator sights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93• Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93• Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-101

Rear parking assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-105• Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-105• Non-operational conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-106• Self-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-108

Rearview camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-109Hazard warning flasher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-111

• Battery saver function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-111• Headlamp delay function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-111• Daytime running light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-112• Lighting control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-112• High - beam operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114• Turn signals and lane change signals . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115• Front fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-116

Wipers and washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-117• Windshield wipers (front). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-117• Windshield washers (front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-117• Rear window wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . 4-119

Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-120• Interior lamp AUTO cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-120• Map lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-120• Room lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-121• Luggage room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122• Vanity mirror lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122• Glove box lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122

4

Welcome system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123• Headlamp welcome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123• Interior light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123• Pocket lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123

Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-124• Rear window defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-124• Front wiper deicer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-124

Manual climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125• Heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-126• 3rd row climate control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-131• System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-132• Climate control air filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134

Automatic climate control system. . . . . . . . . . . . 4-135• Automatic heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . 4-137• Manual heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . 4-137• 3rd row climate control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-143

Windshield defrosting and defogging. . . . . . . . . 4-144• Manual climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-144• Automatic climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-145

Storage compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-147• Center console storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-147• Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-147• Multi box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-148• Sunglass holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-148• Luggage tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-149

Interior features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-150• Cigarette lighter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-150• Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-150• Sunvisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-151• Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-152• AC inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-153• Clothes hanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-155• Floor mat anchor(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-155• Aux, USB and iPod® port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-156• Luggage net (holder) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-157• Cargo security screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-157• Side curtain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-159

Exterior features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-160• Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-160

Audio system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-161• Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-161• Audio remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-161

4


44

Record your key numberThe key code numberis stamped on the keycode tag attached tothe key set. Shouldyou lose your keys,this number will

enable an authorized HYUNDAI deal-er to duplicate the keys easily.Remove the key code tag and store itin a safe place. Also, record the keycode number and keep it in a safe andhandy place, but not in the vehicle.

Key operations

• Used to start the engine.• Used to lock and unlock the doors.• Used to lock and unlock the glove

box.• To unfold the key, press the release

button then the key will unfold auto-matically. To fold the key, fold thekey manually while pressing therelease button.

FOLDING KEY

OVF041001

CAUTIONDo not fold the key withoutpressing the release button.This may damage the key.

WARNINGUse only HYUNDAI originalparts for the ignition key in yourvehicle. If an aftermarket key isused, the ignition switch maynot return to ON after START. Ifthis happens, the starter willcontinue to operate causingdamage to the starter motorand possible fire due to exces-sive current in the wiring.

4 5


Door Lock (1)

1. Close all doors, engine hood andtailgate.

2. Press the lock button(1).3. All doors and tailgate will lock. The

hazard warning lights will blink once.4. If the lock button is pressed once

more within 4 seconds, the hazardwarning lights will blink and thehorn will sound once (HornFeedback function).

5. Make sure that doors are locked bychecking the door lock button insideor pulling the outside door handle.

Door Unlock (2) 1. Press the unlock button(2).2. The driver's door will unlock. The

hazard warning lights will blink twotimes.

3. Press the unlock button(2) twicewithin 4 seconds and all doors andtailgate will unlock. The hazardwarning lights will blink two times.

✽✽ NOTICEYou can activate or deactivate theTwo Turn Unlock and HornFeedback function. Refer to "Usersettings" in this section.

WARNING - Ignition key Leaving children unattended ina vehicle with the ignition keyis dangerous even if the key isnot in the ignition switch is ACCor ON position. Children copyadults and they could place thekey in the ignition switch.The ignition key would enablechildren to operate power win-dows or other controls, or evenmake the vehicle move, whichcould result in serious bodilyinjury or even death. Neverleave the keys in your vehiclewith unsupervised children,when the engine is running.

OVF041003


64

Tailgate unlock (3)The tailgate is unlocked if the buttonis pressed for more than 1 second.Also, once the tailgate is opened andthen closed, the tailgate will belocked automatically.

Panic (4)The horn sounds and hazard warn-ing lights flash for about 30 secondsif this button is pressed for more than1 second.To stop the horn and lights,press any button on the transmitter.

Transmitter precautions✽✽ NOTICEThe transmitter will not work if anyof following occur:• The ignition key is in the ignition

switch.• You exceed the operating distance

limit (about 90 feet [30 m]).• The battery in the transmitter is

weak.• Other vehicles or objects may be

blocking the signal.• The weather is extremely cold.• The transmitter is close to a radio

transmitter such as a radio substa-tion or an airport which can inter-fere with normal operation of thetransmitter.

When the transmitter does not workcorrectly, open and close the doorwith the ignition key. If you have aproblem with the transmitter, contactan authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

(Continued)

(Continued)• If the transmitter is in close prox-

imity to your mobile phone, thesignal could be blocked by yourmobile phones normal operationalsignals. This is especially impor-tant when the phone is active suchas making and receiving calls, textmessaging, and/or sending/receiv-ing emails. Avoid placing thetransmitter and your mobilephone in the same pants or jacketpocket and always try to maintainan adequate distance between thetwo devices.

CAUTIONKeep the transmitter away fromwater or any liquid. If the key-less entry system is inoperativedue to exposure to water or liq-uids, it will not be covered byyour manufacturer’s vehiclewarranty.

4 7


Battery replacement

The transmitter uses a 3 volt lithiumbattery which will normally last forseveral years. When replacement isnecessary, use the following proce-dure.1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and

gently pry open the transmittercenter cover.

2. Replace the battery with a newbattery (CR2032). When replacingthe battery, make sure the batteryposition.

3. Install the battery in the reverseorder of removal.

For replacement transmitters, see anauthorized HYUNDAI dealer fortransmitter reprogramming.• The transmitter is designed to give

you years of trouble-free use, how-ever it can malfunction if exposed tomoisture or static electricity. If youare unsure how to use your trans-mitter or replace the battery, contactan authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

• Using the wrong battery can causethe transmitter to malfunction. Besure to use the correct battery.

• To avoid damaging the transmitter,don't drop it, get it wet, or expose itto heat or sunlight.

• An inappropriately dis-posed battery can be harm-ful to the environment andmay cause human health.Dispose the battery accord-ing to your local law(s) orregulation.

OLM042302

CAUTION - Transmitterdamage

Do not drop, wet or expose thekeyless entry system transmit-ter to heat or sunlight.


84

Immobilizer system (if equipped)Your vehicle is equipped with anelectronic engine immobilizer systemto reduce the risk of unauthorizedvehicle use.Your immobilizer system is com-prised of a small transponder in theignition key and electronic devicesinside the vehicle.With the immobilizer system, when-ever you insert your ignition key intothe ignition switch and turn it to ON,it checks and determines and verifiesif the ignition key is valid.If the key is determined to be valid,the engine will start.If the key is determined to be invalid,the engine will not start.

To activate the immobilizer sys-tem:Turn the ignition key to the OFF posi-tion. The immobilizer system acti-vates automatically. Without a validignition key for your vehicle, theengine will not start.

To deactivate the immobilizersystem:Insert the ignition key into the keycylinder and turn it to the ON position.

✽✽ NOTICEWhen starting the engine, do not usethe key with other immobilizer keysaround. Otherwise the engine maynot start or may stop soon after itstarts. Keep each key separate inorder to avoid a starting malfunction.

✽✽ NOTICEIf you need additional keys or loseyour keys, contact an authorizedHYUNDAI dealer.

WARNINGIn order to prevent theft of yourvehicle, do not leave spare keysanywhere in your vehicle. YourImmobilizer password is a cus-tomer unique password andshould be kept confidential. Donot leave this number anywherein your vehicle.

CAUTIONDo not put metal accessoriesnear the ignition switch.Metal accessories may interruptthe transponder signal and mayprevent the engine from beingstarted.

4 9


This device complies with Part 15of the FCC rules.Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:1. This device may not cause harm-

ful interference, and 2. This device must accept any inter-

ference received, including inter-ference that may cause undesiredoperation.

CAUTIONThe transponder in your ignitionkey is an important part of theimmobilizer system. It isdesigned to give years of trou-ble-free service, however youshould avoid exposure to mois-ture, static electricity and roughhandling. Immobilizer systemmalfunction could occur.

CAUTIONDo not change, alter or adjustthe immobilizer system becauseit could cause the immobilizersystem to malfunction andshould only be serviced by anauthorized HYUNDAI dealer.Malfunctions caused by improp-er alterations, adjustments ormodifications to the immobilizersystem are not covered by yourvehicle manufacturer warranty.

CAUTIONChanges or modifications notexpressly approved by the partyresponsible for compliancecould void the user’s authorityto operate the equipment. If thekeyless entry system is inopera-tive due to changes or modifica-tions not approved by the partyresponsible for compliance, itwill not be covered by your man-ufacturer’s vehicle warranty.


104

Record your key numberThe key code numberis stamped on the keycode tag attached tothe key set. Shouldyou lose your keys,this number will

enable an authorized HYUNDAI deal-er to duplicate the keys easily.Remove the key code tag and store itin a safe place. Also, record the keycode number and keep it in a safe andhandy place, but not in the vehicle.

Smart key function

To remove the mechanical key, pressand hold the release button(1) andremove the mechanical key (2).To reinstall the mechanical key, putthe key into the hole and push it untila click sound is heard.

With a smart key, you can lock orunlock a door (and Tailgate) and startthe engine.Refer to the following for more details.

SMART KEY

ODM042002

WARNING - Smart keyLeaving children unattended ina vehicle with the smart key isdangerous even if the EngineStart/Stop Button is in the ACCor ON position. Children copyadults and they could press theEngine Start/Stop Button.The smart key would enablechildren to operate power win-dows or other controls, or evenmake the vehicle move, whichcould result in serious bodilyinjury or even death. Neverleave the keys in your vehiclewith unsupervised children,when the Engine is running.

4 11


Door Lock

Using the door handle button

1. Carry the smart key.2. Close all doors, engine hood and

tailgate.

3. Press the button of the outsidedoor handle.

4. The hazard warning lights will blinkand the chime will sound once.

5. Make sure that doors are lockedby pulling the outside door handle.

✽✽ NOTICE• The button will only operate when

the smart key is within 28~40in.(0.7~1m) from the outside doorhandle.

• Even though you press the outsidedoor handle button, the doors willnot lock and the chime will soundfor 3 seconds if any of followingoccur:- The smart key is in the vehicle.- The engine start/stop button is

in ACC or ON position.- Any door is open.

Using the button on the smart key

1 Close all doors, engine hood andtailgate.

2. Press the lock button(1).3. The hazard warning lights will blink

and the chime will sound once.4. Make sure that doors are locked

by pulling the outside door handle.

ODM042006

OVF041004


124

UnlockingUsing the door handle button

1. Carry the smart key.2. Press the button of the driver's

outside door handle.3. The driver’s door will unlock. The

hazard warning lights will blink andthe chime will sound two times.

4. Press the button twice within 4seconds and all doors and the tail-gate will unlock and the hazardwarning lights will blink and thechime will sound two times.

❈ If you press the button of the frontpassenger’s outside door handlewhile carrying the smart key, alldoors will unlock.

✽✽ NOTICE• The button will only operate when

the smart key is within 28~40in.(0.7~1m) from the outside doorhandle.

• When the smart key is recognizedin the area of 28~40in. (0.7~1m)from the front outside door han-dle, other people can also unlockthe doors by pressing the button ofthe front outside door handle.

• After unlocking the driver’s dooror all doors, the door(s) will lockautomatically unless the door isopened.


1. Press the unlock button(2) of thesmart key.

2. The driver’s door will unlock. Thehazard warning lights will blink andthe chime will sound two times.

3. Press the unlock button(2) twicewithin 4 seconds and all doors andthe tailgate will unlock. The hazardwarning lights will blink and thechime will sound two times.

✽✽ NOTICEAfter pressing the button, the doorswill lock automatically unless anydoor is opened within 30 seconds.

✽✽ NOTICEYou can activate or deactivate theTwo Turn Unlock function. Refer to"User settings" in this section.

4 13


Tailgate unlockingUsing the tailgate handle button

1. Carry the smart key.2. Press the tailgate handle button.3. When all doors are locked, the

hazard warning lights will blink twotimes.Once the tailgate is opened andthen closed, the tailgate will lockautomatically.

✽✽ NOTICEThe button will only operate whenthe smart key is within 28~40in.(0.7~1m) from the tailgate handle.


1. Press the tailgate unlock button(3)for more than 1 second.

2. When all doors are locked, thehazard warning lights will blink twotimes.

Panic1. Press the panic button(4) for more

than 1 second.2. The horn sounds and hazard

warning light flash for about 30seconds.

✽✽ NOTICETo stop the horn and lights, pressany button on the smart key.

Start-upYou can start the engine withoutinserting the key. For detailed infor-mation refer to the “Engine start/stopbutton” in section 5.

Loss of the smart keyA maximum of 2 smart keys can beregistered to a single vehicle.If you happen to lose your smart key,you will not be able to start theengine. You should immediately takethe vehicle and remaining key to yourauthorized HYUNDAI dealer(tow thevehicle, if necessary) to protect itfrom potential theft.


144

Smart key precautions• The smart key will not work if any

of the following occur:- The smart key is close to a radio

transmitter such as a radio sta-tion or an airport which can inter-fere with normal operation of thesmart key.

- The smart key is near a mobiletwo way radio system or a cellu-lar phone.

- Another vehicle’s smart key isbeing operated close to yourvehicle.

• When the smart key does not workcorrectly, open and close the doorwith the mechanical key and contactan authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

• If the smart key is in close proximi-ty to your cell phone or smartphone, the signal from the smartkey could be blocked by normaloperation of your cell phone orsmart phone. This is especiallyimportant when the phone is activesuch as making a call, receivingcalls, text messaging, and/or send-ing/receiving emails. Avoid placingthe smart key and your cell phoneor smart phone in the same pantsor jacket pocket and maintain ade-quate distance between the twodevices.

Smart key immobilizer systemYour vehicle is equipped with anelectronic engine immobilizer systemto reduce the risk of unauthorizedvehicle use.Your immobilizer system is com-prised of a small transponder in thesmart key and electronic devicesinside the vehicle.With the immobilizer system, when-ever you turn the engine start/stopbutton to the ON position by pressingthe button while carrying the smartkey, it checks and determines andverifies if the smart key is valid or not.If the key is determined to be valid,the engine will start.If the key is determined to be invalid,the engine will not start.

CAUTIONKeep the smart key away fromwater or any liquid. If the key-less entry system is inoperativedue to exposure to water orother liquids, it will not be cov-ered by your manufacturer’svehicle warranty.

4 15


To deactivate the immobilizersystem:Turn the engine start/stop button tothe ON position by pressing the but-ton while carrying the smart key.

To activate the immobilizer system:Turn the engine start/stop button tothe OFF position. The immobilizersystem activates automatically.Without a valid smart key for yourvehicle, the engine will not start.

✽✽ NOTICEWhen starting the engine, do not usethe key with other immobilizer keysaround. Otherwise the engine maynot start or may stop soon after itstarts. Keep each key separate inorder to avoid a starting malfunction.

✽✽ NOTICEIf you need additional keys or loseyour keys, contact an authorizedHYUNDAI dealer.

CAUTIONIn order to prevent theft of yourvehicle, do not leave spare keysanywhere in your vehicle. YourImmobilizer password is a cus-tomer unique password andshould be kept confidential. Donot leave this number anywherein your vehicle.

CAUTIONThe transponder in your smartkey is an important part of theimmobilizer system. It isdesigned to give years of trou-ble-free service, however youshould avoid exposure to mois-ture, static electricity and roughhandling. Immobilizer systemmalfunction could occur.

CAUTIONDo not change, alter or adjustthe immobilizer system becauseit could cause the immobilizersystem to malfunction andshould only be serviced by anauthorized HYUNDAI dealer.Malfunctions caused by improp-er alterations, adjustments ormodifications to the immobilizersystem are not covered by yourvehicle manufacturer warranty.

CAUTIONDo not put metal accessoriesnear the smart key.The engine may not start becausethe metal accessories may inter-rupt the transponder signal fromtransmitting normally.


164

This device complies with Part 15of the FCC rules.Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:1. This device may not cause harm-



Battery replacement

A smart key battery should last forseveral years, but if the smart key isnot working properly, try replacingthe battery with a new one. If you areunsure how to use your smart key orreplace the battery, contact anauthorized HYUNDAI dealer.1. Remove the mechanical key.2. Pry open the rear cover.3. Replace the battery with a new

battery (CR2032). When replacingthe battery, make sure the batteryposition.

4. Install the battery in the reverseorder of removal.

• The smart key is designed to giveyou years of trouble-free use, how-ever it can malfunction if exposedto moisture or static electricity. Ifyou are unsure how to use orreplace the battery, contact anauthorized HYUNDAI dealer.

• Using the wrong battery can causethe smart key to malfunction. Besure to use the correct battery.

• To avoid damaging the smart key,don't drop it, get it wet, or expose itto heat or sunlight.

• An inappropriately dis-posed battery can be harm-ful to the environment andhuman health. Dispose thebattery according to yourlocal law(s) or regulation.

CAUTION - Smart keydamage

Do not drop, get wet or exposethe smart key to heat or sun-light, or it will be damaged.

OHG040009WARNING

Changes or modifications notexpressly approved by the partyresponsible for compliancecould void the user’s authorityto operate the equipment. If thekeyless entry system is inoper-ative due to changes or modifi-cations not expressly approvedby the party responsible forcompliance, it will not be cov-ered by your manufacturer’svehicle warranty.

4 17


This system is designed to provideprotection from unauthorized entryinto the vehicle. This system is oper-ated in three stages: the first is the"Armed" stage, the second is the"Theft-alarm" stage, and the third isthe "Disarmed" stage. If triggered,the system provides an audiblealarm with blinking of the hazardwarning lights.

Armed stageUsing the smart key (if equipped)Park the vehicle and stop the engine.Arm the system as described below.1. Turn off the engine.2. Make sure that all doors, the

engine hood and tailgate lid areclosed and latched.

3. • Lock the doors by pressing thebutton of the front outside doorhandle with the smart key in yourpossession.

After completion of the steps above,the hazard warning lights and chimewill operate once to indicate that thesystem is armed.If any door remains open, the doorswon't lock and the chime will soundfor 3 seconds. Close the door and tryagain to lock the doors.If the tailgate hatch or the enginehood remains open, the hazardwarning lights and the chime won'toperate, and the theft alarm will notarm. After you close the tailgate andengine hood, the hazard warninglights blink once.

• Lock the doors by pressing the lockbutton on the smart key.

After completion of the steps above,the hazard warning lights and chimewill operate once to indicate that thesystem is armed.If any door, tailgate or engine hoodremains open, the hazard warninglights and chime won't operate andthe theft-alarm will not arm. After youclose the tailgate and engine hood,the hazard warning lights blink once.

THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

Armedstage

Theft-alarmstage

Disarmedstage


184

Using the transmitter (if equipped)Park the vehicle and stop the engine.Arm the system as described below.1. Turn off the engine and remove

the ignition key from the ignitionswitch.

2. Make sure that all doors, theengine hood and tailgate areclosed and latched.

3. Lock the doors by pressing thelock button on the transmitter.

After completion of the steps above,the hazard warning lights will blinkonce to indicate that the system isarmed.If any door, tailgate or engine hoodremains open, the hazard warninglights won't operate and theft-alarmwill not arm. After you close all doors,tailgate and engine hood, the hazardwarning lights blink once.

Using the mechanical keyPark the vehicle and stop the engine.Arm the system as described below.1. Turn off the engine and remove

the key from the ignition switch(ifequipped).

2. Make sure that all doors, theengine hood and tailgate areclosed and latched.

3. Lock the doors by inserting the keyinto the key hole on the front out-side door handle and turning thekey toward the rear of the vehicle.

If any door, tailgate or engine hoodremains open, the theft-alarm will notarm.

✽✽ NOTICEIf you lock or unlock the doors byusing the mechanical key, the haz-ard warning light won't operate.

Do not arm the system until allpassengers have left the vehicle. Ifthe system is armed while a pas-senger(s) remains in the vehicle,the alarm may be activated whenthe remaining passenger(s) leavethe vehicle. If any door (or trunk)or engine hood is opened within30 seconds after the systementers the armed stage, the sys-tem is disarmed to prevent anunnecessary alarm.

4 19


Theft-alarm stageThe alarm will be activated if any ofthe following occurs while the systemis armed.• A door is opened without using the

transmitter, smart key or mechanicalkey.

• The tailgate is opened withoutusing the transmitter or smart key.

• The engine hood is opened.The horn will sound and the hazardwarning lights will blink continuouslyfor approximately 30 seconds. Thealarm will repeat once more unlessthe system is disarmed. To turn offthe system, unlock the doors with themechanical key or transmitter orsmart key.

Disarmed stageUsing the smart key (if equipped)The system will be disarmed whenthe doors are unlocked by pressingthe unlock button on the smart key orpressing the lock/unlock button of thefront outside door handle with thesmart key in your possession.After unlocking the doors, the hazardwarning lights and chime will operatetwice to indicate that the system isdisarmed.After unlocking the doors, if any dooris not opened within 30 seconds, thesystem will be rearmed.

Using the transmitter (if equipped)The system will be disarmed whenthe doors are unlocked by pressingthe unlock button on the transmitter.After unlocking the doors, the hazardwarning lights will blink twice to indi-cate that the system is disarmed.After unlocking the doors, if any dooris not opened within 30 seconds, thesystem will be rearmed.

Using the mechanical keyThe system will be disarmed whenthe doors are unlocked with themechanical key.

✽✽ NOTICEIf you lock or unlock the doors byusing the mechanical key, the haz-ard warning light and chime soundwon't operate.


204

✽✽ NOTICE• Avoid trying to start the engine

while the alarm is activated. Thevehicle starting motor is disabledduring the theft-alarm stage.

• If you lose your keys, contact yourauthorized HYUNDAI dealer.

CAUTIONDo not change, alter or adjustthe theft-alarm system becauseit could cause the theft-alarmsystem to malfunction andshould only be serviced by anauthorized HYUNDAI dealer.Malfunctions caused by improp-er alterations, adjustments ormodifications to the theft-alarmsystem are not covered by yourvehicle manufacturer warranty.

4 21


DOOR LOCKS Operating door locks fromoutside the vehicle Using the folding key (if equipped)

• Doors can be locked and unlockedby pressing the lock button(1) andunlock button(2) on the folding key.

Once the doors are unlocked, theymay be opened by pulling the doorhandle. When closing the door, pushthe door by hand. Make sure thatdoors are closed securely.For more detailed information, referto "Folding key" in this section.

Using the smart key (if equipped)

• Doors can be locked and unlockedpressing the button of the outsidedoor handle with the smart key inyour possession.

• Doors can be locked and unlockedby pressing the lock button(1) andunlock button(2) on the smart key.

Once the doors are unlocked, theymay be opened by pulling the doorhandle. When closing the door, pushthe door by hand. Make sure thatdoors are closed securely.For more detailed information, referto “Smart key” in this section.

OVF041003

ODM042006

OVF041004


224

Using the mechanical key in anemergency situation

If the smart key or folding key doesnot operate normally, you can lock orunlock the doors as follows:

1. Unfold the folding key or remove themechanical key from the smart key.

2. Insert the key into the hole of theoutside door handle. Turn the keytoward the front of the vehicle tounlock and toward the rear of thevehicle to lock.

✽✽ NOTICE• In cold and wet climates, door

locks and door mechanisms maynot work properly due to freezingconditions.

• If the door is locked/unlockedmultiple times in rapid successionwith either the vehicle key or doorlock switch, the system may stopoperating temporarily in order toprotect the circuit and preventdamage to system components.

✽✽ NOTICE You can activate or deactivate theTow Turn Unlock function. Refer to"User Settings" in this section.

WARNING• If you don't close the door

securely, the door may openagain.

• Be careful that someone'sbody and hands are nottrapped when closing the door.ODM042011

ODMECO2035

■ Type A

■ Type B

Lock

Unlock

LockUnlock

4 23


Operating door locks frominside the vehicleWith the door lock button

• To unlock a door, push the doorlock button(1) to the “Unlock” posi-tion.The red mark (2) on the buttonwill be visible.

• To lock a door, push the door lockbutton(1) to the “Lock” position. Ifthe door is locked properly, the redmark (2) on the button will not bevisible.

• To open a door, pull the door han-dle (3) outward.

• If the inner door handle on eitherfront door is pulled when the doorlock button is in the locked position,the door will unlock and open.

• The front door cannot be locked ifthe ignition key is in the ignitionswitch and the door is open.

• The door cannot be locked if thesmart key is in the vehicle and anydoor is open.

If a power door lock ever fails to func-tion while you are in the vehicle, tryone or more of the following:• Operate the door unlock feature

repeatedly (both electronic andmanual) while simultaneouslypulling on the door handle.

• Operate the other door locks andhandles, front and rear.

• Lower a front window and use thekey to unlock the door from out-side.

Central door lock switch

Operate by depressing the centraldoor lock switch.• When pushing down the lock switch

(1), all vehicle doors will lock.

ODM042013

ODM042014

OANNCO43001

■ Driver’s door

■ Passenger’s door


244

• When pushing down the lockrelease switch (2), all vehicle doorswill unlock.

• If the key is in the ignition switchand front door is open, the doorswill not lock even though the cen-tral door lock switch (1) is pressed.

• If the smart key is in the vehicleand any door is open, the doorswill not lock even though the cen-tral door lock switch (1) is pressed.

WARNING - Unlockedvehicles

Leaving your vehicle unlockedcan invite theft or possible harmto you or others from someonehiding in your vehicle while youare gone. Always remove theignition key, engage the parkingbrake, close all windows andlock all doors when leavingyour vehicle unattended.

WARNING - Unattendedchildren

An enclosed vehicle can becomeextremely hot, causing death orsevere injury to unattended chil-dren or animals who cannotescape the vehicle. Furthermore,children might operate featuresof the vehicle that could injurethem, or they could encounterother harm, possibly from some-one gaining entry to the vehicle.Never leave children or animalsunattended in your vehicle.

WARNING - Doors• The doors should always be

fully closed and locked whilethe vehicle is in motion to pre-vent accidental opening of thedoor. Locked doors will alsodiscourage potential intruderswhen the vehicle stops orslows.

• Be careful when openingdoors and watch for vehicles,motorcycles, bicycles orpedestrians approaching thevehicle in the path of the door.Opening a door when some-thing is approaching cancause damage or injury.

4 25


Impact sensing door unlocksystemAll doors will be automaticallyunlocked if an impact or collision isdetected by the impact sensors whilethe ignition switch is ON.However, the doors may not beunlocked if mechanical problemsoccur with the door lock system orbattery.

✽✽ NOTICEYou can select some auto doorlock/unlock features in “UserSettings” as follows;• Speed sensing auto door lock• Auto door unlock when the igni-

tion key is removed from the igni-tion switch or engine is turned off.

• Auto door lock/unlock by shiftingthe shift lever out of P(Park) orinto P(Park).

For more information, refer to“User Settings” in this section.

Child-protector rear door lock

The child safety lock is provided tohelp prevent children from acciden-tally opening the rear doors frominside the vehicle. The rear doorsafety locks should be used whenev-er children are in the vehicle.1. Open the rear door.2. Insert a key (or screwdriver) into

the hole (1) and turn it to the lock( ) position. When the child safe-ty lock is in the lock position, therear door will not open even whenthe inner door handle is pulled.

3. Close the rear door.To open the rear door, pull the out-side door handle (2).Even though the doors are unlocked,the rear door will not open by pullingthe inner door handle until the reardoor child safety lock is unlocked.

WARNING - Rear doorlocks

If children accidentally open therear doors while the vehicle isin motion, they could fall out ofthe vehicle, resulting in severeinjury or death. To prevent chil-dren from opening the reardoors from the inside, the reardoor safety locks should beused whenever children are inthe vehicle.

ONCNCO2015


264

Non-Powered tailgateOpening the tailgate

• The tailgate is locked or unlockedwhen all doors are locked orunlocked with the key, transmitter,smart key or central door lock switch.

• If unlocked, the tailgate can beopened by pressing the handleswitch and pulling the handle up.

• Only the tailgate is unlocked if thetailgate unlock button on the trans-mitter or smart key is pressed forabout 1 second, or the tailgatehandle button is pressed when thesmart key is detected.

✽✽ NOTICEIn cold and wet climates, door lockand door mechanisms may not workproperly due to freezing conditions.

Closing the tailgate

To close the tailgate, lower and pushdown the tailgate firmly. Make surethat the tailgate is securely latched.

TAILGATE

ONCNCO2002

ONCNCO2003

WARNINGThe tailgate swings upward.Make sure no objects or peopleare near the rear of the vehiclewhen opening the tailgate.

CAUTIONMake certain that you close thetailgate before driving yourvehicle. Possible damage mayoccur to the tailgate lift cylin-ders and attached hardware ifthe tailgate is not closed prior todriving.

4 27


Power tailgate (if equipped)

(1) Power tailgate handle switch (2) Power tailgate close button

✽✽ NOTICEThe power tailgate operates whenthe automatic shift lever is in P(Park).

WARNING - Exhaustfumes

If you drive with the tailgateopened, you will draw dangerousexhaust fumes into your vehiclewhich can cause serious injuryor death to vehicle occupants.If you must drive with the tail-gate opened, keep the air ventsand all windows open so thatadditional outside air comesinto the vehicle.

WARNING - Rear cargoarea

Occupants should never ride inthe rear cargo area where norestraints are available.To avoidinjury in the event of an acci-dent or sudden stops, occu-pants should always be proper-ly restrained.

WARNINGNever leave children or animalsunattended in your vehicle.Children or animals might oper-ate the power tailgate that couldresult in injury to themselves orothers, or damage the vehicle.

WARNINGMake sure there are no peopleor objects around the tailgatebefore operating the power tail-gate. Wait until the tailgate isopened fully and stopped beforeloading or unloading cargo orpassengers from the vehicle.

ONCNCO2005

ONCNCO2006


284

Opening the tailgate

The power tailgate will open automat-ically by doing one of the following:• Press the tailgate unlock button on

the transmitter or smart key.• Press the tailgate handle switch

carrying the smart key with you.

Closing the tailgate

1. Press the power tailgate close but-ton (approximately 1 second).

2. The tailgate will close and lockautomatically.

ONCNCO2005 ONCNCO2006

CAUTIONDo not close or open the powertailgate manually. This maycause damage to the power tail-gate. If it is necessary to closeor open the power tailgate man-ually when the battery is dis-charged or disconnected, donot apply excessive force.

WARNINGThe chime will sound and thehazard warning flasher will blink10 times if you drive with thetailgate closed but not locked.Stop your vehicle immediatelyat a safe place and check if yourtailgate is securely locked.

4 29


Power tailgate non-opening con-ditionsThe power tailgate will not open orclose automatically, when the vehicleis moving more than 2 mph (3 km/h).

✽✽ NOTICE• The power tailgate can be operat-

ed when the engine is not running.However the power tailgate opera-tion consumes large amounts ofvehicle electric power. To preventthe battery from being discharged,do not operate it excessively e.g.:more than approximately 10 timesrepeatedly.

• To prevent the battery from beingdischarged, do not leave the powertailgate in the open position for along lime.

• Do not modify or repair any partof the power tailgate by yourself.This must be done by an author-ized HYUNDAI dealer.

• When jacking up the vehicle tochange a tire or repair the vehicle,do not operate the power tailgate.This could cause the power tail-gate to operate improperly.

• In cold and wet climates, thepower tailgate may not work prop-erly due to freezing conditions.

Automatic reversal

During power opening and closing ifthe power tailgate is blocked by anobject or part of the body, the powertailgate will detect the resistance.• If the resistance is detected while

opening the tailgate, it will stop andmove in the opposite direction.

• If the resistance is detected whileclosing the tailgate, it will stop andmove in the opposite direction.

However, if the resistance is weaksuch as from an object that is thin orsoft, or the tailgate is near the latchedposition, the automatic stop and rever-sal may not detect the resistance.

WARNINGThe chime will sound continuous-ly if you drive over 2 mph (3 km/h)with the tailgate opened. Stopyour vehicle immediately at a safeplace and check if your tailgate isopened. ONCNCO2007


304

If the automatic reversal featureoperates continuously more thantwice during opening or closingoperation, the power tailgate maystop at that position. At this time,close the tailgate manually and oper-ate the tailgate automatically again.

How to reset the power tailgateIf the battery has been discharged ordisconnected, or if the related fuse hasbeen replaced or disconnected, for thepower tailgate to operate normally,reset the power tailgate as follow:1. Put the shift lever in P (Park).2. Press the tailgate handle switch

and tailgate close button at thesame time for more than 3 sec-onds. (the chime will sound)

3. Close the tailgate manually.

If the power tailgate does not work properly after the above procedure,have the system checked by anauthorized HYUNDAI dealer.

✽✽ NOTICEIf the power tailgate does not oper-ate normally, first check the follow-ing condition before using the powertailgate.Check if the shift lever is in:• P (Park) for automatic transaxle

vehicles

Power tailgate opening heightuser setting

The driver may set the height of afully opened tailgate by following thebelow instruction.1. Position the tailgate manually to

the height you prefer.2. Press the tailgate close button for

more than 3 seconds.3. Close the tailgate manually after

hearing the buzzer sound.

The tailgate will open to the heightthe driver has set up.

WARNINGNever intentionally place anyobject or part of your body inthe path of the power tailgate tomake sure the automatic rever-sal operates. ONCNCO2006

4 31


Smart tailgate (if equipped)

On the vehicle equipped with a smartkey, the tailgate can be opened withno-touch activation using the Smarttailgate system.

How to use the Smart Tailgate The tailgate can be opened with no-touch activation satisfying all theconditions below.• After 15 seconds when all doors

are closed and locked• Positioned in the detecting area for

more than 3 seconds.

✽✽ NOTICE• The Smart Tailgate does not oper-

ate when:- The smart key is detected within

15 seconds after the doors areclosed and locked, and is contin-uously detected.

- The smart key is detected within15 seconds after the doors areclosed and locked, and 1.5 mfrom the front door handles. (forvehicles equipped with WelcomeLight)

- A door is not locked or closed.- The smart key is in the vehicle.

WARNING - Rear cargoarea

Occupants should never ride inthe rear cargo area where norestraints are available.To avoidinjury in the event of an acci-dent or sudden stops, occu-pants should always be proper-ly restrained.

WARNING - Exhaustfumes

If you drive with the tailgateopen, you will draw dangerousexhaust fumes into your vehiclewhich can cause serious injuryor death to vehicle occupants. Ifyou must drive with the tailgateopen, keep the air vents and allwindows open so that addition-al outside air comes into thevehicle.

ONC045077


324

1. SettingTo activate the Smart Tailgate, go toUser Settings Mode and selectSmart Tailgate on the LCD display.

❈ For more details, refer to "LCDDisplay" in this chapter.

2. Detect and AlertIf you are positioned in the detectingarea (50 ~100 cm behind the vehi-cle) carrying a smart key, the hazardwarning lights will blink and chimewill sound for about 3 seconds toalert you the smart key has beendetected and the tailgate will open.

✽✽ NOTICEDo not approach the detecting areaif you do not want the tailgate toopen. If you have unintentionallyentered the detecting area and thehazard warning lights and chimestarts to operate, leave the detectingarea with the smart key. The tailgatewill stay closed.

3. Automatic openingThe hazard warning lights will blinkand chime will sound 2 times andthen the tailgate will slowly open.

ONC045078 ONC045079

4 33


How to deactivate the SmartTailgate function using the smartkey

1. Door lock2. Door unlock3. Tailgate open4. Panic

If you press any button of the smartkey during the Detect and Alertstage, the Smart Tailgate functionwill be deactivated.Make sure to be aware of how todeactivate the Smart Tailgate func-tion for emergency situations.

✽✽ NOTICE• If you press the door unlock but-

ton (2), the Smart Tailgate func-tion will be deactivated temporar-ily. But, if you do not open anydoor for 30 seconds, the SmartTailgate function will be activatedagain.

• If you press the tailgate open but-ton (3) for more than 1 second, thetailgate opens.

• If you press the door lock button(1) or tailgate open button (3)when the Smart Tailgate functionis not in the Detect and Alert stage,the Smart Tailgate function willnot be deactivated.

• In case you have deactivated theSmart Tailgate function by press-ing the smart key button andopened a door, the Smart Tailgatefunction can be activated again byclosing and locking all doors.

WARNING• Make certain that you close

the tailgate before drivingyour vehicle.

• Make sure there are no peopleor objects around the tailgatebefore opening or closing thetailgate.

• Make sure objects in the rearcargo area do not come outwhen opening the tailgate onthe slope way. It may causeserious injury.

• Make sure to deactivate theSmart tailgate function whenwashing your vehicle.Otherwise, the tailgate mayopen inadvertently.

• The key should be kept out ofreach of children. Childrenmay inadvertently open theSmart Tailgate while playingaround the rear area of thevehicle.

OVF041004

■ Smart key


344

Detecting area

• The Smart Tailgate operates with awelcome alert if the smart key isdetected within 20~40 inches(50~100 cm) from the tailgate.

• The alert stops at once if the smartkey is positioned outside thedetecting area during the Detectand Alert stage.

✽✽ NOTICE• The Smart Tailgate function will

not work if any of the followingoccurs:- The smart key is close to a radio

transmitter such as a radio sta-tion or an airport which caninterfere with normal operationof the transmitter.

- The smart key is near a mobiletwo way radio system or a cellu-lar phone.

- Another vehicle's smart key isbeing operated close to yourvehicle.

• The detecting range may decreaseor increase when :- One side of the tire is raised to

replace a tire or to inspect thevehicle.

- The vehicle is slantingly parkedon a slope or unpaved road, etc.

Emergency tailgate safetyrelease

Your vehicle is equipped with theemergency tailgate safety releaselever located on the bottom of thetailgate. When someone is inadver-tently locked in the luggage compart-ment, the tailgate can be opened bydoing as follows:1. Remove the cover.2. Push the release lever to the right.3. Push up the tailgate.

ONCNCO2004

ODM044510K

20~40 inches

4 35


WARNING• For emergencies, be fully

aware of the location of theemergency tailgate safetyrelease lever in this vehicleand how to open the tailgate ifyou are accidentally locked inthe luggage compartment.

• No one should be allowed tooccupy the luggage compart-ment of the vehicle at any time.The luggage compartment is avery dangerous location in theevent of a crash.

• Use the release lever foremergencies only. Useextreme caution, especiallywhile the vehicle is in motion.


364

(1) Driver’s door power windowswitch

(2) Front passenger’s door powerwindow switch

(3) Rear door (left) power windowswitch

(4) Rear door (right) power windowswitch

(5) Window opening and closing(6) Automatic power window

up/down (if equipped)(7) Power window lock switch

✽✽ NOTICEIn cold and wet climates, power win-dows may not work properly due tofreezing conditions.

WINDOWS

OANNCO43005

4 37


Power windowsThe ignition switch must be in the ONposition for power windows to operate.Each door has a power windowswitch that controls that door's win-dow. The driver has a power windowlock switch which can block the oper-ation of passenger windows. The dri-ver’s door has a master power win-dow switch that controls all the win-dows in the vehicle. The power win-dows can be operated for approxi-mately 30 seconds after the ignitionkey is removed or turned to the ACCor LOCK position. However, if thefront doors open, the power windowscannot be operated within the 30second period.

✽✽ NOTICEWhile driving with the rear windowsdown or with the sunroof (ifequipped) in an open (or partiallyopen) position, your vehicle maydemonstrate a wind buffeting orpulsation noise. This noise is a nor-mal occurrence and can be reducedor eliminated by taking the follow-ing actions. If the noise occurs withone or both of the rear windowsdown, partially lower both frontwindows approximately one inch. Ifyou experience the noise with thesunroof open, slightly reduce thesize of the sunroof opening.

Window opening and closing

To open or close a window, pressdown or pull up the front portion ofthe corresponding switch to the firstdetent position (5).

ODM042020


384

Auto up/down window (driver’s window)

Pressing down or pulling up the powerwindow switch momentarily to the sec-ond detent position (6) completelylowers or lifts the window even whenthe switch is released.To stop the win-dow at the desired position while thewindow is in operation, momentarilypull or push the switch in the directionopposite of the window’s movement.If the power window is not operatedcorrectly, the automatic power windowsystem must be reset as follows:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ONposition.

2. Close driver’s windows and contin-ue pulling up on the power windowswitch for at least 1 second afterthe window is completely closed.

Automatic reversal

If the upward movement of the win-dow is blocked by an object or part ofthe body, the window will detect theresistance and will stop upwardmovement. The window will thenlower approximately 11.8 in. (30 cm)to allow the object to be cleared.

ODM042021

OUN026013

4 39


If the window detects the resistancewhile the power window switch ispulled up continuously, the windowwill stop upward movement thenlower approximately 1 in. (2.5 cm). Ifthe power window switch is pulled upcontinuously again within 5 secondsafter the window is lowered by theautomatic window reversal feature,the automatic window reversal willnot operate.

✽✽ NOTICEThe automatic reverse feature forthe driver’s window is only activewhen the “auto up” feature is usedby fully pulling up the switch. Theautomatic reverse feature will notoperate if the window is raised usingthe halfway position on the powerwindow switch.

WARNING Always check for obstructionsbefore raising any window toavoid injuries or vehicle damage.If an object less than 0.16 in. (4mm) in diameter is caughtbetween the window glass andthe upper window channel, theautomatic reverse window maynot detect the resistance and willnot stop and reverse direction.


404

Power window lock button

The driver can disable the powerwindow switches on the rear passen-gers' doors by pressing the powerwindow lock switch to the lock posi-tion (pressed).When the power window lock switchis pressed:• The driver's master control can

operate all the power windows.• The front passenger's control can

operate the front passenger'spower window.

• The rear passenger's control can-not operate the rear passenger'spower window.

CAUTION• To prevent possible damage

to the power window system,do not open or close two win-dows or more at the sametime. This will also ensure thelongevity of the fuse.

• Never try to operate the mainswitch on the driver's doorand the individual door win-dow switch in opposing direc-tions at the same time. If this isdone, the window will stop andcannot be opened or closed.

WARNING - Windows• NEVER leave the ignition key

(or smart key) in the vehicle.• NEVER leave any child unat-

tended in the vehicle. Evenvery young children may inad-vertently cause the vehicle tomove, entangle themselves inthe windows, or otherwiseinjure themselves or others.

• Always double check to makesure all arms, hands, headand other obstructions aresafely out of the way beforeclosing a window.

• Do not allow children to playwith the power windows. Keepthe driver’s door power win-dow lock switch in the LOCKposition (depressed). Seriousinjury can result from uninten-tional window operation bythe child.

• Do not extend any head orarms outside through the win-dow opening while driving.

ODM042022

4 41


Opening the hood

1. Pull the release lever to unlatchthe hood. The hood should popopen slightly.

2. Go to the front of the vehicle, raisethe hood slightly, pull the second-ary latch (1) inside of the hood upand lift the hood (2).

3. Raise the hood. It will raise com-pletely by itself after it has beenraised about halfway.

HOOD

WARNINGOpen the hood after turning offthe engine on a flat surface,shifting the shift lever to theP(Park) position, and setting theparking brake.

ODM042023

ONCNCO2036

WARNING

When you check the enginecompartment, please make sureyour head is not injured by thehood safety hook which islocated inside of the hood.

ODMNMC2034


424

Closing the hood1. Before closing the hood, check the

following:• All filler caps in engine compart-

ment must be correctly installed.• Gloves, rags or any other com-

bustible material must be removedfrom the engine compartment.

2. Lower the hood halfway and pushdown to securely lock in place.

WARNING• Before closing the hood,

ensure that all obstructionsare removed from the hoodopening. Closing the hoodwith an obstruction present inthe hood opening may resultin property damage or severepersonal injury.

• Do not leave gloves, rags orany other combustible materi-al in the engine compartment.Doing so may cause a heat-induced fire.

• Always double check to besure that the hood is firmlylatched before driving away. Ifit is not latched, the hoodcould open while the vehicleis being driven, causing atotal loss of visibility, whichmight result in an accident.

• Do not move the vehicle withthe hood in the raised posi-tion, as vision is obstructedand the hood could fall or bedamaged.

4 43


Opening the fuel filler lid

The fuel filler lid must be openedfrom inside the vehicle by pulling thefuel filler lid opener lever located onthe driver’s door.

✽✽ NOTICEIf the fuel filler lid will not openbecause ice has formed around it,tap lightly or push on the lid to breakthe ice and release the lid. Do not pryon the lid. If necessary, spray aroundthe lid with an approved de-icer fluid(do not use radiator anti-freeze) ormove the vehicle to a warm placeand allow the ice to melt.

1. Stop the engine.2. Pull the fuel filler lid opener lever,

then the fuel filler lid will pop up.3. Pull the fuel filler lid (1) out to fully

open.4. To remove the cap, turn the fuel

tank cap (2) counterclockwise.5. Refuel as needed.

Closing the fuel filler lid1. To install the cap, turn it clockwise

until it clicks one time. This indi-cates that the cap is securely tight-ened.

2. Close the fuel filler lid and push itin lightly making sure that it issecurely closed.

FUEL FILLER LID

ODM042025

ODM044026


444

WARNING - Refueling• If pressurized fuel sprays out,

it can cover your clothes orskin and thus subject you tothe risk of fire and burns.Always remove the fuel capcarefully and slowly. If the capis venting fuel or if you hear ahissing sound, wait until thecondition stops before com-pletely removing the cap.

• Do not "top off" after the noz-zle automatically shuts offwhen refueling.

• Tighten the cap until it clicksone time, otherwise theMalfunction Indicator Light will illuminate.

• Always check that the fuel capis installed securely to pre-vent fuel spillage in the eventof an accident.

WARNING - Refuelingdangers

Automotive fuels are flammablematerials.When refueling, pleasenote the following guidelinescarefully. Failure to follow theseguidelines may result in severepersonal injury, severe burns ordeath by fire or explosion.• Read and follow all warnings

posted at the gas station facility.• Before refueling, note the

location of the EmergencyGasoline Shut-Off, if available,at the gas station facility.

• Before touching the fuel noz-zle, you should eliminatepotentially dangerous staticelectricity discharge by touch-ing another metal part of thevehicle, a safe distance awayfrom the fuel filler neck, noz-zle, or other gas source.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Do not get back into a vehicle

once you have begun refuel-ing since you can generatestatic electricity by touching,rubbing or sliding against anyitem or fabric (polyester, satin,nylon, etc.) capable of produc-ing static electricity. Staticelectricity discharge canignite fuel vapors resulting inrapid burning. If you must re-enter the vehicle, you shouldonce again eliminate poten-tially dangerous static elec-tricity discharge by touching ametal part of the vehicle, awayfrom the fuel filler neck, noz-zle or other gasoline source.

(Continued)

4 45


(Continued)• When refueling, always shut

the engine off. Sparks pro-duced by electrical compo-nents related to the enginecan ignite fuel vapors causinga fire. Once refueling is com-plete, check to make sure thefiller cap and filler door aresecurely closed, before start-ing the engine.

• DO NOT use matches or alighter and DO NOT SMOKE orleave a lit cigarette in yourvehicle while at a gas stationespecially during refueling.Automotive fuel is highlyflammable and can, whenignited, result in fire.

• If a fire breaks out during refu-eling, leave the vicinity of thevehicle, and immediately con-tact the manager of the gasstation and then contact thelocal fire department or 911.Follow any safety instructionsthey provide.

(Continued)• When using an approved

portable fuel container, be sureto place the container on theground prior to refueling. Staticelectricity discharge from thecontainer can ignite fuel vaporscausing a fire. Once refuelinghas begun, contact with thevehicle should be maintaineduntil the filling is complete.Use only approved portableplastic fuel containers designedto carry and store gasoline.

• Do not use cellular phoneswhile refueling. Electric cur-rent and/or electronic interfer-ence from cellular phones canpotentially ignite fuel vaporscausing a fire.

(Continued)

CAUTION• Make sure to refuel your vehi-

cle according to the "Fuelrequirements" suggested insection 1.

• If the fuel filler cap requiresreplacement, use only a gen-uine HYUNDAI cap or theequivalent specified for yourvehicle. An incorrect fuel fillercap can result in a seriousmalfunction of the fuel systemor emission control system.

• Do not spill fuel on the exteriorsurfaces of the vehicle. Anytype of fuel spilled on paintedsurfaces may damage the paint.

• After refueling, make sure thefuel cap is installed securelyto prevent fuel spillage in theevent of an accident.


464

Emergency fuel filer doorrelease

If the fuel filler door does not openusing the remote fuel filler doorrelease, you can open it manually.Unsnap and remove the panel in thecargo area. Pull the handle outwardslightly.

ODM042027

CAUTIONDo not pull the handle exces-sively, otherwise the luggagearea trim or release handle maybe damaged.

4 47


If your vehicle is equipped with asunroof, you can slide or tilt yoursunroof with the sunroof control leverlocated on the overhead console.

Type AThe sunroof can only be opened,closed, or tilted when the ignitionswitch is in the ON position.

Type BThe sunroof can be operated forapproximately 30 seconds after theignition key is removed or turned tothe ACC or LOCK position. However,if the front doors are opened, thesunroof cannot be opened even with-in the 30 seconds period.

• In cold and wet climates, the sun-roof may not work properly due tofreezing conditions.

• After the vehicle is washed or in arainstorm, be sure to wipe off anywater that is on the sunroof beforeoperating it.

PANORAMIC SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)

ODM042028

CAUTION - Sunroof control lever

Do not continue to move the sun-roof control lever after the sun-roof is fully opened, closed, ortilted. Damage to the motor orsystem components could occur.

CAUTIONMake sure the sunroof is fullyclosed when leaving your vehi-cle. If the sunroof is opened, rainor snow may leak through thesunroof and wet the interior aswell as cause theft.


484

Sunroof open warning (if equipped)

Type AIf the driver removes the ignition key(smart key: turns off the engine) andopens the driver-side door when thesunroof is not fully closed.

Type BIf the driver removes the ignition key(smart key: turns off the engine)when the sunroof is not fully closed.

The warning chime will sound for a fewseconds and a message "SunroofOpen" will appear on the LCD display.Close the sunroof securely whenleaving your vehicle.

Sunshade

To open the sunshadePress the sunshade open button (1).

ODMECO2002

WARNING• Never adjust the sunroof or

sunshade while driving. Thiscould result in loss of controland an accident that maycause death, serious injury, orproperty damage.

• If you would like to carry itemson the roof using a cross bar,do not operate the sunroof.

• When carrying cargo on theroof, do not load heavy itemsabove the sunroof or glass roof.

• Do not allow children to oper-ate the sunroof.

CAUTIONDo not extend any luggage outside the sunroof while driving.

ODM042029

4 49


To close the sunshade when thesunroof glass is closedType A

- Press the sunshade close button (2).❈ When you press the sunshade

close button (2) with the sunroofglass opened, the sunshade willbe closed halfway.

- Push the sunroof control lever for-ward or pull it down.

Type B

- Press the sunshade close button (2).❈ When you press the sunshade

close button (2) with the sunroofglass opened, the sunshade willbe closed halfway, then sunroofglass will be closed and then sun-shade will be fully closed finally.

To stop the sliding at any point, pressthe sunshade control switch momen-tarily.

✽✽ NOTICEWrinkles formed on the sunshade asmaterial characteristic are normal.

Sliding the sunroof

When the sunshade is closedIf you pull the sunroof control leverbackward, the sunshade and sunroofglass will slide all the way open. Tostop the sunroof movement at anypoint, pull or push the sunroof controllever momentarily.

CAUTION• Do not pull or push the sun-

shade by hand. It could causesunshade failure.

• Close the sunroof when driv-ing through dusty roads. Dustmay cause a malfunction ofthe vehicle system.

ODM042030


504

When the sunshade is openedIf you pull the sunroof control leverbackward, the sunroof glass will slideall the way open. To stop the sunroofmovement at any point, pull or pushthe sunroof control lever momentarily.

✽✽ NOTICEOnly the front glass of the panora-ma sunroof opens and closes.

Tilting the sunroof

When the sunshade is closedIf you push the sunroof control leverupward, the sunshade will slide halfwayopen then the sunroof glass will tilt.To stop the sunroof movement at anypoint, pull or push the sunroof controllever momentarily.

When the sunshade is openedIf you push the sunroof control leverupward, the sunroof glass will tilt.To stop the sunroof movement at anypoint, pull or push the sunroof controllever momentarily.

Closing the sunroofTo close (or tilt down) the sunroof- Pull the sunroof glass control lever

downward (or forward).Type A

❈ When you pull the sunroof glasscontrol lever downward (or for-ward) with the sunshade opened,the sunshade will be closedhalfway and then glass will beclosed (or tilt down) and then sun-shade will be fully closed finally.

Type B

❈ When you pull the sunroof glasscontrol lever downward (or for-ward) with the sunshade opened,the glass will be closed (or tiltdown).

To stop the sunroof movement at anypoint, pull or push the sunroof controllever momentarily.

ODM042033

4 51


Automatic reversal

If an object or part of the body isdetected while the sunroof glass orsunshade is closing automatically, itwill reverse the direction, and thenstop.The auto reverse function does notwork if a tiny obstacle is between thesliding glass or sunshade and thesunroof sash. You should alwayscheck that all passengers andobjects are away from the sunroofbefore closing it.Do not extend the face, neck, arms orbody outside the sunroof while driving.

OYF049215

WARNING - Sunroof• Be careful that someone’s

head, hands and body are nottrapped by a closing sunroof.

• Do not extend the face, neck,arms or body outside throughan opened sunroof while driv-ing.

• Make sure your hands andface are safely out of the waybefore closing a sunroof.

• A panoramic sunroof is madeof glass, therefore it may breakin an accident. If you do nothave your seat belt on, youmay contact the broken glassand get injured or killed. For allpassengers safety, have theseat belts on. (ex. seat belt,CRS, etc.)

CAUTION - Sunroof motor damage

If you try to open the sunroofwhen the temperature is belowfreezing or when the sunroof iscovered with snow or ice, theglass or the motor could bedamaged.

CAUTION• Periodically remove any dirt

that may accumulate on theguide rail.

• If you drive with the sunroofopened right after a car washor rain, water may get insidethe vehicle.


524

Resetting the sunroofWhenever the vehicle battery is dis-connected or discharged, you mustreset your sunroof system as follows:

1.Turn the ignition switch to the ONposition.

2.Close the sunshade and sunroofcompletely if opened.

3.Release the sunroof control lever.4.Push the sunroof control lever for-

ward in the direction of close(about 10 seconds) until the sun-roof moves a little. Then, releasethe lever.

5.Push the sunroof control lever for-ward in the direction of close, untilthe sunroof operates as followsagain:

The sunshade and sunroof glassslide open → The sunroof glassslide close → The sunshade close

Then, release the lever.

When this is complete, the sunroofsystem has been reset.

✽✽ NOTICEIf you do not reset the sunroof, itmay not work properly.

4 53


Electric power steering (EPS)The power steering uses a motor toassist you in steering the vehicle. Ifthe engine is off or if the power steer-ing system becomes inoperative, thevehicle may still be steered, but it willrequire increased steering effort.The motor driven power steering iscontrolled by a power steering con-trol unit which senses the steeringwheel torque and vehicle speed tocommand the motor.The steering becomes heavier asthe vehicle’s speed increases andbecomes lighter as the vehicle’sspeed decreases for optimum steer-ing control.Should you notice any change in theeffort required to steer during normalvehicle operation, have the powersteering checked by an authorizedHYUNDAI dealer.

✽✽ NOTICEThe following symptoms may occurduring normal vehicle operation:• The EPS warning light does not

illuminate.• The steering gets heavy immedi-

ately after turning the ignitionswitch on. This happens as the sys-tem performs the EPS systemdiagnostics. When the diagnosticsis completed, the steering wheelwill return to its normal condition.

• A click noise may be heard fromthe EPS relay after the ignitionswitch is turned to the ON orLOCK (OFF) position.

• A motor noise may be heard whenthe vehicle is at a stop or at a lowdriving speed.

• If the Electric Power SteeringSystem does not operate normally,the warning light will illuminate onthe instrument cluster. The steer-ing wheel may become difficult tocontrol or operate abnormally.Take your vehicle to an authorizedHYUNDAI dealer and have thevehicle checked as soon as possible.

(Continued)

STEERING WHEEL

CAUTION• If the Electric Power Steering

System does not operate nor-mally, the warning light willilluminate on the instrumentcluster. The steering wheelmay become difficult to con-trol or operate abnormally.Take your vehicle to anauthorized HYUNDAI dealerand have the vehicle checkedas soon as possible.

• When you operate the steer-ing wheel in low temperature,abnormal noise could occur. Iftemperature rises, the noisewill disappear.This is a normalcondition.


544

(Continued)• Some noises may be heard when

operating the steering in low tem-peratures. When the temperaturerises, the noise will disappear. Thisis a normal condition.

• The steering effort may becomeheavy when the charging systemwarning light comes on.

Tilt & telescopic steering A tilt steering wheel allows you toadjust the steering wheel before youdrive. You can also raise it to giveyour legs more room when you exitand enter the vehicle (if equipped).

The steering wheel should be posi-tioned so that it is comfortable foryou to drive, while permitting you tosee the instrument panel warninglights and gauges.

To change the steering wheel angle,pull down the lock release lever (1),adjust the steering wheel to thedesired angle (2) and height (ifequipped) (3), then pull up the lock-release lever to lock the steeringwheel in place. Be sure to adjust thesteering wheel to the desired posi-tion before driving.

WARNING - Steering• Never adjust the angle and

height of steering wheel whiledriving. You may lose yoursteering control and causesevere personal injury or acci-dents.

• After adjusting, push thesteering wheel both up anddown to be certain it is lockedin position.

ODM042036

4 55


Heated steering wheel (if equipped)

With the ignition switch in the ONposition, pressing the heated steer-ing wheel button warms the steeringwheel. The indicator on the buttonwill illuminate and notify you on theLCD display.To turn the heated steering wheel off,press the button once again. Theindicator on the button will turn offand notify you on the LCD display.

✽✽ NOTICE• The heated steering wheel will turn

off automatically approximately 30minutes after the heated steeringwheel is turned on.

• If you turn on the ignition againafter turning off your engine in halfan hour (after operating heaterbutton), the heating system will bemaintained in its 'on' condition.

Horn

To sound the horn, press the areaindicated by the horn symbol on yoursteering wheel (see illustration). Thehorn will operate only when this areais pressed.Check the horn regularly to be sure itoperates properly.

CAUTION• Do not install any grip to oper-

ate the steering wheel. Thiscauses damage to the heatedsteering wheel system.

• When cleaning the heatedsteering wheel, do not use anorganic solvent such as paintthinner, benzene, alcohol andgasoline. Doing so may dam-age the surface of the steeringwheel.

• If the surface of the steeringwheel is damaged by a sharpobject, damage to the heatedsteering wheel componentscould occur.

OANNCO43006

ODM042038


564

Driver selectable steeringmode (if equipped)

The driver selectable steering modecontrols steering effort as driver'spreference or road condition.You can select the desired steeringmode by pressing the driver selec-table steering mode button.The driver selectable steering modestays in the last mode selected whenturning the engine on.

When the steering mode button ispressed, the selected steering modewill appear on the LCD display.If the steering mode button is pressedwithin 4 seconds, the steering modewill change as above pictures.

ODM042039

ODM042044

■ Type A

■ Type BODM042040

CAUTION• Do not strike the horn severe-

ly to operate it, or hit it withyour fist. Do not press on thehorn with a sharp-pointedobject.

• When cleaning the steeringwheel, do not use an organicsolvent such as thinner, ben-zene, alcohol or gasoline.Doing so may damage thesteering wheel.

4 57


If the steering wheel mode button isnot pressed for about 4 seconds, theLCD display will change to the previ-ous screen.

Normal mode

The normal mode offers mediumsteering effort.

Comfort mode

The steering effort becomes lighterin comfort mode.

ODM042041

ODM042045

■ Type A

■ Type BODM042042

ODM042046

■ Type A

■ Type B


584

Sport mode

The steering effort becomes heavier.

CAUTION• For your safety, if you press the

steering mode button tochange the mode while turningthe steering wheel, the LCDdisplay will change as youselected, but the steering effortwill not change. After that, ifyou leave the steering wheelcentered, the steering effort willchange to the selected mode.

• Be careful when changing thesteering mode while driving.

• When the electronic powersteering is not working prop-erly, the driver selectablesteering mode will not work.

ODM042043

ODM042047

■ Type A

■ Type B

4 59


MIRRORSInside rearview mirrorAdjust the rearview mirror so that thecenter view through the rear windowis seen. Make this adjustment beforeyou start driving.

Day/night rearview mirror

Make this adjustment before youstart driving and while the day/nightlever is in the day position.Pull the day/night lever toward you toreduce glare from the headlights ofthe vehicles behind you during nightdriving.Remember that you lose somerearview clarity in the night position.

Electric chromic mirror (ECM)with HomeLink® system, compassand Blue Link® (if equipped)Your vehicle may be equipped with aGentex Automatic-Dimming Mirrorwith a Z-Nav™ Electronic CompassDisplay and an IntegratedHomeLink® Wireless Control System.During nighttime driving, this featurewill automatically detect and reducerearview mirror glare while the com-pass indicates the direction the vehi-cle is pointed. The HomeLink®

Universal Transceiver allows you toactivate your garage door(s), electricgate, home lighting, etc.

WARNING - Rear visibilityDo not place objects in the rearseat or cargo area which wouldinterfere with your visionthrough the rear window.

WARNING Do not modify the inside mirrorand do not install a wide mirror.It could result in injury, duringan accident or deployment ofthe air bag.

ONCNCO2008

ONCNCO2010

■ Type A

■ Type B

Day

Night

Day

Night


604

(1) Telematics button(2) Telematics button(3) Telematics button(4) Compass control button &

Dimming ON/OFF button(5) Status indicator LED(6) Channel 1 button(7) Channel 2 button(8) Channel 3 button(9) Compass display(10) Rear light sensor

Automatic-Dimming Night VisionSafety™ (NVS®) Mirror

The NVS® Mirror in your vehicle isthe most advanced way to reduceannoying glare in the rearview mirrorduring any driving situation. For moreinformation regarding NVS® mirrorsand other applications, please referto the Gentex website:www.gentex.com

✽✽ NOTICEThe NVS® Mirror automaticallyreduces glare during driving condi-tions based upon light levels moni-tored in front of the vehicle andfrom the rear of the vehicle. Theselight sensors are visible throughopenings in the front and rear of themirror case. Any object thatobstructs either light sensor willdegrade the automatic dimmingcontrol feature.

Automatic-dimming functionYour mirror will automatically dimupon detecting glare from the vehi-cles traveling behind you. The auto-dimming function can be controlledby the Dimming ON/OFF Button:

1. Pressing and hold the button for3 seconds turns the autodimmingfunction OFF which is indicated bythe green Status Indicator LEDturning off.

2. Pressing and hold the button for3 seconds again turns the auto-dimming function ON which is indi-cated by the green StatusIndicator LED turning on.

The mirror defaults to the ON posi-tion each time the vehicle is started.

Z-Nav™ Compass Display

The NVS™ Mirror in your vehicle isalso equipped with a Z-Nav™Compass that shows the vehicleCompass heading in the DisplayWindow using the 8 basic cardinalheadings (N, NE, E, SE, etc.).

OYF042250N

4 61


Compass functionThe Compass can be turned ON andOFF and will remember the last statewhen the ignition is cycled. To turnthe display feature ON/OFF:1. Press and release the button

within 1 second to turn the displayfeature OFF.

2. Press and release the buttonagain within 1 second to turn thedisplay back ON.

Additional options can be set withpress and hold sequences of the button and are detailed below.

There is a difference between mag-netic north and true north. The com-pass in the mirror can compensatefor this difference when it knows theMagnetic Zone in which it is operat-ing. This is set either by the dealer orby the user. The operating ZoneNumbers for North America areshown in the figure on the followingsection.

B520C05NF


624

To adjust the Zone setting:1. Determine the desired Zone

Number based upon your currentlocation on the Zone Map.

2. Press and hold the button for 6seconds, the current ZoneNumber will appear on the display.

3. Pressing and holding the buttonagain will cause the numbers toincrement (Note: they will repeat…13, 14, 15, 1, 2, …). Releasingthe button when the desired ZoneNumber appears on the displaywill set the new Zone.

4. Within about 5 seconds the com-pass will start displaying a com-pass heading again.

There are some conditions that cancause changes to the vehicle mag-nets, such as installing a ski rack ora CB antenna. Body repair work onthe vehicle can also cause changesto the vehicle's magnetic field. Inthese situations, the compass willneed to be re-calibrated to quicklycorrect for these changes. To re-cali-brate the compass:

1. Press and hold the button formore than 9 seconds. When thecompass memory is cleared a "C"will appear in the display.

2. To calibrate the compass, drivethe vehicle in 2 complete circles atless than 5 mph (8 km/h).

Integrated HomeLink® WirelessControl System

The HomeLink® Wireless ControlSystem provides a convenient way toreplace up to three hand-held radio-frequency (RF) transmitters with asingle built-in device. This innovativefeature will learn the radio frequencycodes of most current transmitters tooperate devices such as gate opera-tors, garage door openers, entrydoor locks, security systems, evenhome lighting. Both standard androlling code-equipped transmitterscan be programmed by following theoutlined procedures. AdditionalHomeLink® information can be foundat: www.homelink.com or by calling1-800-355-3515.

4 63


Retain the original transmitter of theRF device you are programming foruse in other vehicles as well as forfuture HomeLink® programming. It isalso suggested that upon the sale ofthe vehicle, the programmedHomeLink® buttons be erased forsecurity purposes.

Programming HomeLink®

✽✽ NOTICE• When programming a garage

door opener, it is advised to parkthe vehicle outside of the garage.

• It is recommended that a new bat-tery be placed in the hand-heldtransmitter of the device being pro-grammed to HomeLink® for quick-er training and accurate transmis-sion of the radio-frequency signal.

• Some vehicles may require theignition switch to be turned to thesecond (or "accessories") positionfor programming and/or opera-tion of HomeLink.

• In the event that there are still pro-gramming difficulties or questionsafter following the programmingsteps listed below, contactHomeLink® at: www.homelink.comor 1-800-355-3515.

WARNINGBefore programming HomeLink®

to a garage door opener or gateoperator, make sure that peopleand objects are out of the way ofthe device to prevent potentialharm or damage. Do not useHomeLink® with any garagedoor opener that lacks the safe-ty stop and reverse featuresrequired by U.S. federal safetystandards (this includes anygarage door opener model man-ufactured before April 1, 1982).A garage door that cannotdetect an object - signaling thedoor to stop and reverse - doesnot meet current U.S. federalsafety standards. Using agarage door opener withoutthese features increases therisk of serious injury or death.


644

Programming

To train most devices, follow theseinstructions:1. For first-time programming, press

and hold the two outside buttons( , ), HomeLink® Channel 1and Channel 3, until the indicatorlight begins to flash (after 10 sec-onds). Release both buttons. Donot hold the buttons for longerthan 20 seconds.

2. Position the end of your hand-heldtransmitter 1-3 inches (2-8 cm)away from the HomeLink® buttonyou wish to program while keepingthe indicator light in view.

3. Simultaneously press and holdboth the HomeLink® and hand-held transmitter buttons until theHomeLink® indicator light changesfrom a slow to a rapid blinkinglight. Now you may release boththe HomeLink® and hand-heldtransmitter buttons.

✽✽ NOTICESome devices may require you toreplace this Programming step 3 withprocedures noted in the "GateOperator/Canadian Programming"section. If the HomeLink® indicatorlight does not change to a rapidlyblinking light after performing thesesteps, contact HomeLink® atwww.homelink.com.

OYF042252N

Flashing

OYF042251N

Flashing

4 65


4. Firmly press, hold for 5 secondsand release the programmedHomeLink® button up to two sepa-rate times to activate the door. If thedoor does not activate, press andhold the just-trained HomeLink® but-ton and observe the indicator light.• If the indicator light stays on con-

stantly, programming is completeand your device should activatewhen the HomeLink® button ispressed and released.

• If the indicator light blinks rapidlyfor 2 seconds and then turns to aconstant light, continue with"Programming" steps 5-7 to com-plete the programming of a rollingcode equipped device (most com-monly a garage door opener).

5. At the garage door opener receiv-er (motor-head unit) in the garage,locate the "leam" or "smart" but-ton. This can usually be foundwhere the hanging antenna wire isattached to the motor-head unit.

6. Firmly press and release the"leam" or "smart" button. (Thename and color of the button varyby manufacturer). There are 30seconds to initiate step 7.

7. Return to the vehicle and firmlypress, hold for 2 seconds andrelease the programmedHomeLink® button. Repeat the"press/hold/release" sequence asecond time, and, depending onthe brand of the garage dooropener (or other rolling codeequipped device), repeat thissequence a third time to completethe programming process.

HomeLink® should now activate yourrolling code equipped device.

Gate operator & Canadian pro-grammingDuring programming, your handheldtransmitter may automatically stoptransmitting. Continue to press theIntegrated HomeLink® WirelessControl System button (note steps 2through 3 in the Programming portionof this document) while you pressand re-press ("cycle") your handheldtransmitter every two seconds untilthe frequency signal has beenlearned. The indicator light will flashslowly and then rapidly after severalseconds upon successful training.

Operating HomeLink®

To operate, simply press and releasethe programmed HomeLink® button.Activation will now occur for thetrained device (i.e. garage dooropener, gate operator, security sys-tem, entry door lock, home/officelighting, etc.). For convenience, thehand-held transmitter of the devicemay also be used at any time.


664

CAUTIONThe transceiver has been testedand complies with FCC andIndustry Canada rules. Changesor modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsi-ble for compliance could voidthe user's authority to operatethe device.

Reprogramming a singleHomeLink® buttonTo program a device to HomeLink®

using a HomeLink® button previouslytrained, follow these steps:1.Press and hold the desired

HomeLink® button. DO NOTrelease the button.

2.The indicator light will begin to flashafter 20 seconds. Without releasingthe HomeLink® button, proceedwith "Programming" step 2.

For questions or comments, contactHomeLink® at www.homelink.com or1-800-355-3515.

Erasing HomeLink® buttonsIndividual buttons cannot be erased.However, to erase all three pro-grammed buttons:1. Press and hold the two outer

HomeLink® buttons until the indi-cator light begins to flash after 10seconds.

2. Release both buttons. Do not holdfor longer than 20 seconds.

The Integrated HomeLink® WirelessControl System is now in the training(learn) mode and can be pro-grammed at any time following theappropriate steps in theProgramming sections above.

FCC ID: NZLTLMHL4IC: 4112A-TLMHL4

This device complies with Part 15of the FCC Rules.Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:1. This device may not cause harm-



4 67


NVS® is a registered trademark andZ-Nav™ is a trademark of theGentex Corporation, Zeeland,Michigan. HomeLink® is a registeredtrademark owned by JohnsonControls, Incorporated, Milwaukee,Wisconsin.

Blue Link® center

For the details, refer to the Blue Link®

Owner’s Guide, navigation manual oraudio manual.The audio manual is inthis section.

Outside rearview mirrorBe sure to adjust mirror anglesbefore driving.Your vehicle is equipped with both left-hand and right-hand outside rearviewmirrors. The mirrors can be adjustedremotely with the remote switch. Themirror heads can be folded back toprevent damage during an automaticcar wash or when passing in a narrowstreet.

CAUTION - Outsiderearviewmirrors

• The right outside rearviewmirror is convex. Objects seenin the mirror are closer thanthey appear.

• Use your interior rearview mir-ror or direct observation todetermine the actual distanceof following vehicles whenchanging lanes.

ONCNCO2009

OYF042250N

■ Type A

■ Type B


684

Remote control

The electric remote control mirrorswitch allows you to adjust the posi-tion of the left and right outsiderearview mirrors.

To adjust the position of the mirrors:1. Place the ignition switch in the ON

position.2. Move the lever(1) to R (right) or L

(left) to select the right side mirroror the left side mirror.

3. Press a corresponding point onthe mirror adjustment control toposition the selected mirror up,down, left or right.

4. After the adjustment, position thelever in the center to prevent inad-vertent movement.

CAUTIONIf the mirror is jammed with ice,do not adjust the mirror by force.Use an approved spray de-icer(not radiator antifreeze) torelease the frozen mechanism ormove the vehicle to a warmplace and allow the ice to melt.

WARNING Do not adjust or fold the outsiderearview mirrors while the vehi-cle is moving.This could result inloss of control, and an accidentwhich could cause death, seri-ous injury or property damage.

CAUTIONDo not scrape ice off the mirrorface; this may damage the sur-face of the glass. If ice shouldrestrict movement of the mirror,do not force the mirror foradjustment. To remove ice, usea deicer spray, or a sponge orsoft cloth with warm water.

OANNCO2076

CAUTION• The mirrors stop moving when

they reach the maximumadjusting angles, but themotor continues to operatewhile the switch is pressed.Do not press the switch longerthan necessary, the motormay be damaged.

• Do not attempt to adjust theoutside rearview mirror byhand. Doing so may damagethe mirror.

4 69


Reverse parking aid function (if equipped)

When you shift the shift lever to the R(Reverse) position, the outsiderearview mirror(s) will move down-ward to aid reverse parking.According to the position of the out-side rearview mirror control switch(1), the outside rearview mirror(s) willoperate as follows:

Left or Right : When the outsiderearview mirror con-trol switch is in the L(Left) or R (Right)position, both outsiderearview mirrors willmove downward.

Neutral : When the outside rearviewmirror control switch is inthe neutral (center) posi-tion, the outside rearviewmirrors will not operate.

✽✽ NOTICEThe outside rearview mirrors willautomatically revert to their originalpositions under the following condi-tions:• When the ignition switch or engine

start/stop button is set to the ACCor OFF position.

• When the shift lever is moved toany position except the R(Reverse) position.

Folding the outside rearview mir-ror

To fold outside rearview mirror, graspthe housing of mirror and then fold ittoward the rear of the vehicle.

ODM042035 ODM072031


704

Blind zone mirror (BZM) (if equipped)

The blind zone mirror (BZM) is sup-plemental mirror to reduce a driver'sblind zone that will show the rearside territory of your vehicle. Theblind zone mirror is equipped withthe driver's outside rearview mirror.

WARNING • Always check the road condi-

tion while driving for unex-pected situations even thoughthe vehicle is equipped with ablind zone mirror.

• The blind zone mirror is adevice made for convenience.Do not solely rely on the mir-ror but always pay attention todrive safely.

OFS053068

OFS043249

CAUTIONDo not clean the glass of anymirror with harsh abrasives, fuelor other petroleum-based oncleaning products.

4 71


INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

1. Tachometer

2. Speedometer

3. Engine coolant temperature gauge

4. Fuel gauge

5. LCD display

6. Warning and indicator lights (if equipped)

7. Turn signal indicator lights

ODMNMM2054/ODMNMM2055

■■ Type A

❈ The actual cluster in the vehicle may differfrom the illustration.For more details, refer to the "Gauges" inthis chapter.

■■ Type B


724

Instrument Cluster ControlAdjusting Instrument ClusterIllumination

The brightness of the instrumentpanel illumination is changed bymoving the illumination control knobright or left when the ignition switchor Engine Start/Stop button is ON, orthe tale lights are turned on.

• The brightness has 20 levels : 1(MIN) ~ 20 (MAX)

• If you hold the illumination controlknob on the right end (+) or left end(-), the brightness will be changedcontinuously.

• If the brightness reaches to themaximum or minimum level, analarm will sound.

LCD Display Control

The LCD display modes can bechanged by using the control buttonson the steering wheel.

(1) : MODE button for changingmodes

(2) : MOVE button for changingitems

(3) : SELECT/RESET button forsetting or resetting theselected item

❈ For the LCD modes, refer to “LCDDisplay” in this chapter.

ODM042224

ODM042056 ODMEDI2001/ODMEDI2029

■ Type A ■ Type B

4 73


GaugesSpeedometer

The speedometer indicates thespeed of the vehicle and is calibratedin miles per hour (mph) and/or kilo-meters per hour (km/h).

Tachometer

The tachometer indicates theapproximate number of engine revo-lutions per minute (rpm).

Use the tachometer to select the cor-rect shift points and to prevent lug-ging and/or over-revving the engine.

ODMNMM2057

ODMNMM2058

■ Type A

■ Type B

ODMNMM2059

ODMNMM2221

■ Type A

■ Type B

CAUTIONDo not operate the engine with-in the tachometer's RED ZONE.This may cause severe enginedamage.


744

Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge

This gauge indicates the tempera-ture of the engine coolant when theignition switch or Engine Start/Stopbutton is ON.

Fuel Gauge

This gauge indicates the approxi-mate amount of fuel remaining in thefuel tank.

✽✽ NOTICE• The fuel tank capacity is given in

chapter 8.• The fuel gauge is supplemented by

a low fuel warning light, whichwill illuminate when the fuel tankis nearly empty.

• On inclines or curves, the fuelgauge pointer may fluctuate or thelow fuel warning light may comeon earlier than usual due to themovement of fuel in the tank.

WARNINGNever remove the radiator capwhen the engine is hot. Theengine coolant is under pressureand could severely burn. Waituntil the engine is cool beforeadding coolant to the reservoir.

CAUTIONIf the gauge pointer movesbeyond the normal range areatoward the “H” position, it indi-cates overheating that maydamage the engine.Do not continue driving with anoverheated engine. If your vehi-cle overheats, refer to “If theEngine Overheats” in chapter 6.





4 75


Odometer

The odometer Indicates the total dis-tance that the vehicle has been driv-en and should be used to determinewhen periodic maintenance shouldbe performed.- Odometer range : 0 ~ 999999 miles

or kilometers.

Outside Temperature Gauge

This gauge indicates the current out-side air temperatures by 1°F (1°C).- Temperature range : -40°F ~ 140°F

(-40°C ~ 60°C)The outside temperature on the dis-play may not change immediatelylike a general thermometer to pre-vent the driver from being inattentive.The temperature unit (from °F to °Cor from °C to °F) can be changed byusing the “User Settings” mode of theLCD display.

❈ For more details, refer to “LCDDisplay” in this chapter.

WARNING - Fuel GaugeRunning out of fuel can exposevehicle occupants to danger.You must stop and obtain addi-tional fuel as soon as possibleafter the warning light comeson or when the gauge indicatorcomes close to the “E (Empty)”level.

CAUTIONAvoid driving with a extremelylow fuel level. Running out offuel could cause the engine tomisfire damaging the catalyticconverter.

ODMEDI2902/ODMEDI2904


OANNDI2901/OANNDI2902



764

Transaxle Shift IndicatorAutomatic Transaxle Shift Indicator

This indicator displays which auto-matic transaxle shift lever is select-ed.

• Park : P• Reverse : R• Neutral : N• Drive : D• Sports Mode : 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6

ODMEDI2907/OVF041049


4 77


LCD ModesLCD DISPLAY

Modes Symbol

ExplanationType A Type B

Trip Computer This mode displays driving information like the tripmeter,fuel economy, and so on.For more details, refer to “Trip Computer” in this chapter.

Service

This mode informs of the tire pressure information (if equipped), service interval (mileage or days) and warningmessages related to TPMS, washer fluid, or active hood liftsystem.

User SettingsOn this mode, you can change settings of the doors, lamps,and so on.

A/V(if equipped)

- This mode displays the state of the A/V system.

Turn By Turn(if equipped)

- This mode displays the state of the navigation.

or or

❈ For controlling the LCD modes, refer to "LCD Display Control" in this chapter.❈ For "Trip Computer" mode, refer to "Trip Computer" in this chapter.


784

Service ModeService Interval

Service in

It calculates and displays when youneed a scheduled maintenanceservice (mileage or days).If the remaining mileage or timereaches 900 mi. (1,500 km) or 30days, "Service in" message is dis-played for several seconds each timeyou set the ignition switch or EngineStart/Stop Button to the ON position.

Service required

If you do not have your vehicle serv-iced according to the already inputtedservice interval, “Service required”message is displayed for several sec-onds each time you set the ignitionswitch or Engine Start/Stop Button tothe ON position (The mileage andtime changes to "---").To reset the service interval to themileage and days you inputted before:- Press the SELECT/RESET button

for more than 1 second.

Service in OFF

If the service interval is not set,“Service in OFF” message is dis-played on the LCD display.

✽✽ NOTICE If any of the following conditionsoccurs, the mileage and days may beincorrect.- The battery cable is disconnected.- The fuse switch is turned off.- The battery is discharged.







4 79


User Settings ModeDescription

On this mode, you can change set-ting of the doors, lamps, and so on.

DoorAuto Door Lock (if equipped)

• Off:The auto door lock operation willbe deactivated.

• Speed:All doors will be automaticallylocked when the vehicle speedexceeds 15km/h (9.3mph).

• Shift Lever:All doors will be automaticallylocked if the automatic transaxleshift lever is shifted from the P(Park) position to the R (Reverse),N (Neutral), or D (Drive) position.

Auto Door Unlock (if equipped)

• Off:The auto door unlock operation willbe canceled.

• Key Out or Power Off:All doors will be automaticallyunlocked when the ignition key isremoved from ignition switch orEngine Start/Stop Button is set tothe OFF position.

• Shift Lever:All doors will be automaticallyunlocked if the automatic transaxleshift lever is shifted to the P (Park)position.




804

Two Press Unlock (if equipped)

• Off (not checked) :The two press unlock function willbe deactivated.Therefore, all doorswill unlock if the door is unlocked.

• On (checked) :The driver’s door will unlock if thedoor is unlocked. When the door isunlocked again within 4 seconds,all doors will unlock.

Horn Feedback (if equipped)

• Off (not checked) :The Horn feedback operation willbe deactivated.

• On (checked) :After locking the door by pressingthe lock button on the transmitter, ifyou press the lock button againwithin 4 seconds, the warningsound will operate once to indicatethat all doors are locked.

Power Tailgate (if equipped) - Type A

• Off (not checked) :The power tailgate function will bedeactivated.

• On (checked) :The power tailgate function will beactivated.

Power Tailgate (if equipped) - Type B

If this item is checked, the power tail-gate function will be activated.

Smart Tailgate (if equipped)

If this item is checked, the smart tail-gate system function will be activated.

For more details, refer to "Tailgate" inthis chapter.

LampHead Lamp Delay (if equipped)

If this item is checked, the headlampdelay and headlamp welcome func-tion will be activated.

Welcome Light (if equipped)

If this item is checked, the welcomelight function of the puddle lamp willbe activated.

Auto Triple Turn (One-touch triple turn signal) (if equipped)

If this item is checked, the lanechange signals will blink 3 times whenthe turn signal lever is moved slightly.

One Touch Turn Signal (if equipped)

• Off:The one touch turn signal functionwill be deactivated.

• 3, 5, 7 Flashing :The lane change signals will blink3, 5, or 7 times when the turn sig-nal lever is moved slightly.

For more details, refer to ''Light'' inthis chapter.

4 81


SettingsTemperature Unit

Convert the temperature unit from °Cto °F or from °F to °C.

Welcome Sound

If this item is checked, the welcomesound function will be activated.

Shift Indicator (if equipped)

If this item is checked, the shift indi-cator function will be activated.For more details, refer to “InstrumentCluster” in this chapter.

Seat Easy Access (if equipped)

If this item is checked, the driver’sseat will automatically move forwardor rearward for the driver to enter orexit the vehicle comfortably.

Tire Pressure Unit (if equipped)

Choose the tire pressure unit.(psi, kPa, Bar)

AVG Fuel Eco Reset

• Auto Reset:The average fuel economy willreset automatically when refueling.

• Manual Reset:The average fuel economy will notreset automatically whenever refu-eling.

For more details, refer to “TripComputer” in this chapter.

Service Interval

On this mode, you can activate theservice interval function with mileage(mi. or km) and period (months).




824

A/V Mode (if equipped)

This mode displays the state of theA/V system.

Turn By Turn Mode (if equipped)

This mode displays the state of thenavigation.

Warning MessagesShift to "P" position (for smart key system)

• This warning message illuminates ifyou try to turn off the engine withoutthe shift lever in P (Park) position.

• At this time, the Engine Start/StopButton turns to the ACC position (Ifyou press the Engine Start/StopButton once more, it will turn to theON position).

ODMEDI2910ODMEDI2909



4 83


Low Key Battery (for smart key system)

• This warning message illuminatesif the battery of the smart key isdischarged when the EngineStart/Stop Button changes to theOFF position.

Press start button while turnsteering (for smart key system)

• This warning message illuminatesif the steering wheel does notunlock normally when the EngineStart/Stop Button is pressed.

• It means that you should press theEngine Start/Stop Button whileturning the steering wheel rightand left.

Steering wheel unlocked (for smart key system)

• This warning message illuminatesif the steering wheel does not lockwhen the Engine Start/Stop Buttonchanges to the OFF position.








844

Check steering wheel lock system (for smart key system)

• This warning message illuminatesif the steering wheel does not locknormally when the EngineStart/Stop Button changes to theOFF position.

Press brake pedal to start engine (for smart key system)

• This warning message illuminatesif the Engine Start/Stop Buttonchanges to the ACC position twiceby pressing the button repeatedlywithout depressing the brake pedal.

• It means that you should depressthe brake pedal to start the engine.

Key not in vehicle (for smart key system)

• This warning message illuminatesif the smart key is not in the vehiclewhen you press the EngineStart/Stop Button.

• It means that you should alwayshave the smart key with you.







4 85


Key not detected (for smart key system)

• This warning message illuminatesif the smart key is not detectedwhen you press the EngineStart/Stop Button.

Press start button again (for smart key system)

• This warning message illuminatesif you can not operate the EngineStart/Stop Button when there is aproblem with the Engine Start/StopButton system.

• It means that you could start theengine by pressing the EngineStart/ Stop Button once more.

• If the warning illuminates eachtime you press the EngineStart/Stop Button, have your vehi-cle inspected by an authorizedHYUNDAI dealer.

Press start button with smart key (for smart key system)

• This warning message illuminatesif you press the Engine Start/StopButton while the warning message“Key not detected” is illuminating.

• At this time, the immobilizer indica-tor light blinks.








864

Check fuse "BRAKE SWITCH" (for smart key system)

• This warning message illuminatesif the brake switch fuse is discon-nected.

• It means that you should replacethe fuse with a new one. If that isnot possible, you can start theengine by pressing the EngineStart/Stop Button for 10 seconds inthe ACC position.

Shift to "P" or "N" to start engine (for smart key system)

• This warning message illuminatesif you try to start the engine withthe shift lever not in the P (Park) orN (Neutral) position.

✽✽ NOTICEYou can start the engine with theshift lever in the N (Neutral) position.But, for your safety, we recommendthat you start the engine with theshift lever in the P (Park) position.

Door Open

• It means that any door is open.ODMEDI2013/ODMEDI2041






4 87


Tailgate Open

• It means that the tailgate is open.

Sunroof Open (if equipped)

• The warning message illuminatesif you turn off the engine (and thenopen the driver's door, if equipped)when the sunroof is open.

Align steering wheel

• This warning message illuminatesif you start the engine when thesteering wheel is turned to morethan 90 degrees to the left or right.

• It means that you should turn thesteering wheel and make the angleof the steering wheel be less than30 degrees.








884

Low Washer Fluid (if equipped)

• This warning message illuminateson the service reminder mode ifthe washer fluid level in the reser-voir is nearly empty.

• It means that you should refill thewasher fluid.

Low Tire Pressure (if equipped)

• This warning message illuminatesif the tire pressure is low with theignition switch or the Engine/StartButton in ON position.

For more information, refer to "TirePressure Monitoring System(TPMS)" in chapter 6.

Turn on "FUSE SWITCH" (if equipped)

• This warning message illuminatesif the fuse switch on the fuse box isOFF.

• It means that you should turn thefuse switch on.

For more details, refer to “Fuses” inchapter 7.





ODM064023L/ODM064020L


4 89


OverviewDescription

The trip computer is a microcomput-er-controlled driver information sys-tem that displays information relatedto driving.

✽✽ NOTICESome driving information stored inthe trip computer (for exampleAverage Vehicle Speed) resets if thebattery is disconnected.

Trip Modes

TRIP COMPUTER

• Tripmeter [A]

• Average Vehicle Speed [A]

• Elapsed Time [A]

TRIP A

• Tripmeter [B]

• Average Vehicle Speed [B]

• Elapsed Time [B]

TRIP B

• Distance To Empty

• Average Fuel Economy

• Instant Fuel Economy

FUEL ECONOMY

To change the trip mode, press theMOVE button .


904

Trip A/B Tripmeter (1)• The tripmeter is the total driving dis-

tance since the last tripmeter reset.- Distance range: 0.0 ~ 9999.9 mi.

or km• To reset the tripmeter, press the

SELECT/RESET button on thesteering wheel for more than 1second when the tripmeter is dis-played.

Average Vehicle Speed (2)• The average vehicle speed is cal-

culated by the total driving dis-tance and driving time since thelast average vehicle speed reset.- Speed range: 0 ~ 999 MPH or km/h

• To reset the average vehicle speed,press the SELECT/RESET button

on the steering wheel for morethan 1 second when the averagevehicle speed is displayed.

✽✽ NOTICE• The average vehicle speed is not dis-

played if the driving distance is lessthan 0.03 miles (50 meters) or thedriving time is less than 10 secondssince the ignition switch or EngineStart/Stop button is turned to ON.

• Even if the vehicle is not in motion,the average vehicle speed keepsgoing while the engine is running.

Elapsed Time (3)• The elapsed time is the total driv-

ing time since the last elapsed timereset.- Time range (hh:mm): 00:00 ~ 99:59

• To reset the elapsed time, pressthe SELECT/RESET button onthe steering wheel for more than 1second when the elapsed time isdisplayed.

✽✽ NOTICEEven if the vehicle is not in motion,the elapsed time keeps going whilethe engine is running.


■ Type A


■ Type B

- Trip A - Trip B

- Trip A - Trip B

4 91


Fuel Economy

Distance To Empty (1)• The distance to empty is the esti-

mated distance the vehicle can bedriven with the remaining fuel.- Distance range : 30 ~ 9999 mi or

50 ~ 9999 km.• If the estimated distance is below

30 mi. (50 km), the trip computer willdisplay “---” as distance to empty.

✽✽ NOTICE• If the vehicle is not on level ground

or the battery power has beeninterrupted, the distance to emptyfunction may not operate correctly.

• The distance to empty may differfrom the actual driving distance asit is an estimate of the availabledriving distance.

• The trip computer may not registeradditional fuel if less than 6 liters(1.6 gallons) of fuel are added to thevehicle.

• The fuel economy and distance toempty may vary significantly basedon driving conditions, drivinghabits, and condition of the vehicle.

Average Fuel Economy (2)• The average fuel economy is calcu-

lated by the total driving distanceand fuel consumption since the lastaverage fuel economy reset.- Fuel economy range: 0.0 ~ 99.9

MPG or L/100km• The average fuel economy can be

reset both manually and automati-cally.

Manual reset

To clear the average fuel economymanually, press the SELECT/RESETbutton on the steering wheel formore than 1 second when the aver-age fuel economy is displayed.

Automatic reset

To make the average fuel economybe reset automatically whenever refu-eling, select the “Auto Reset” mode inUser Setting menu of the LCD display(Refer to “LCD Display”).Under “Auto Reset” mode, the aver-age fuel economy will be cleared tozero (---) when the vehicle speedexceeds 1 km/h after refueling morethan 1.6 gallons (6 liters).

✽✽ NOTICEThe average fuel economy is not dis-played for more accurate calculationif the vehicle does not drive morethan 10 seconds or 0.03 miles (50meters) since the ignition switch orEngine Start/Stop button is turnedto ON.




924

Instant Fuel Economy (3)• This mode displays the instant fuel

economy during the last few sec-onds when the vehicle speed ismore than 6.2 MPH (10 km/h).- Fuel economy range: 0 ~ 50 MPG

or 0 ~ 30 L/100km

One time driving informationmode (if equipped)

This display shows trip distance (1),average fuel economy (2) and thevehicle can be driven with theremaining fuel (3).This information is displayed for afew seconds when you turn off theengine and then goes off automati-cally. The information provided is cal-culated according to each trip.If the estimated distance is below 1 mi. (1km), the distance to empty (3)will display as "---" and a refuel mes-sage will appear (4).

✽✽ NOTICEIf "Window Open" or "SunroofOpen" warning message are dis-played in the cluster, this displaymay not be displayed in the cluster.

OAN064002/OAN064001


4 93


Warning lights

✽✽ NOTICE - Warning lightsMake sure that all warning lightsare OFF after starting the engine. Ifany light is still ON, this indicates asituation that needs attention.

Air bag Warning Light

This warning light illuminates:

• Once you set the ignition switch orEngine Start/Stop Button to the ONposition.- It illuminates for approximately 6

seconds and then goes off.• When there is a malfunction with

the SRS.In this case, have your vehicleinspected by an authorizedHYUNDAI dealer.

Seat Belt Warning Light

This warning light informs the driverthat the seat belt is not fastened.For more details, refer to the “SeatBelts” in chapter 3.

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS


944

Parking Brake & BrakeFluid Warning Light



seconds- It remains on if the parking brake

is applied.• When the parking brake is applied.• When the brake fluid level in the

reservoir is low.- If the warning light illuminates

with the parking brake released, itindicates the brake fluid level inreservoir is low.

If the brake fluid level in the reservoiris low:

1. Drive carefully to the nearest safelocation and stop your vehicle.

2. With the engine stopped, check thebrake fluid level immediately and addfluid as required (For more details,refer to “Brake Fluid” in chapter 7).

Then check all brake componentsfor fluid leaks. If any leak on thebrake system is still found, thewarning light remains on, or thebrakes do not operate properly, donot drive the vehicle.In this case, have your vehicletowed to an authorized HYUNDAIdealer and inspected.

Dual-diagonal braking system

Your vehicle is equipped with dual-diagonal braking systems. Thismeans you still have braking on twowheels even if one of the dual sys-tems should fail.With only one of the dual systemsworking, more than normal pedaltravel and greater pedal pressure arerequired to stop the vehicle.Also, the vehicle will not stop in asshort a distance with only a portionof the brake system working.If the brakes fail while you are driv-ing, shift to a lower gear for addition-al engine braking and stop the vehi-cle as soon as it is safe to do so.

WARNING - ParkingBrake & Brake FluidWarning Light

Driving the vehicle with a warn-ing light ON is dangerous. If theParking Brake & Brake FluidWarning Light illuminates withthe parking brake released, itindicates that the brake fluidlevel is low.In this case, have your vehicleinspected by an authorizedHYUNDAI dealer.

4 95


Anti-lock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light




the ABS (The normal braking sys-tem will still be operational withoutthe assistance of the anti-lockbrake system).In this case, have your vehicleinspected by an authorizedHYUNDAI dealer.

ElectronicBrake forceDistribution(EBD) SystemWarning LightThese two warning lights illuminate atthe same time while driving:

• When the ABS and regular brakesystem may not work normally.In this case, have your vehicleinspected by an authorizedHYUNDAI dealer.

✽✽ NOTICE - Electronic Brakeforce Distribution(EBD) SystemWarning Light

When the ABS Warning Light is onor both ABS and Parking Brake &Brake Fluid Warning Lights are on,the speedometer, odometer, or trip-meter may not work. Also, the EPSWarning Light may illuminate andthe steering effort may increase ordecrease.In this case, have your vehicle inspect-ed by an authorized HYUNDAI deal-er as soon as possible.WARNING - Electronic

Brake force Distribution(EBD) System Warning Light

When both ABS and ParkingBrake & Brake Fluid WarningLights are on, the brake systemwill not work normally and youmay experience an unexpectedand dangerous situation duringsudden braking.In this case, avoid high speeddriving and abrupt braking.Have your vehicle inspected byan authorized HYUNDAI dealeras soon as possible.


964

Electronic PowerSteering (EPS) WarningLight (if equipped)


• Once you set the ignition switch orEngine Start/Stop Button to the ONposition.- It remains on until the engine is

started.• When there is a malfunction with

the EPS.In this case, have your vehicleinspected by an authorizedHYUNDAI dealer.

Malfunction IndicatorLamp (MIL)




the emission control system.In this case, have your vehicleinspected by an authorizedHYUNDAI dealer.

CAUTION - MalfunctionIndicatorLamp (MIL)

Driving with the MalfunctionIndicator Lamp (MIL) on maycause damage to the emissioncontrol systems which couldeffect drivability and/or fueleconomy.

CAUTION - GasolineEngine

If the Malfunction IndicatorLamp (MIL) illuminates, poten-tial catalytic converter damageis possible which could result inloss of engine power.In this case, have your vehicleinspected by an authorizedHYUNDAI dealer as soon aspossible.

4 97


Charging SystemWarning Light




either the alternator or electricalcharging system.

If there is a malfunction with eitherthe alternator or electrical chargingsystem:


2. Turn the engine off and check thealternator drive belt for loosenessor breakage.If the belt is adjusted properly,there may be a problem in theelectrical charging system.In this case, have your vehicleinspected by an authorizedHYUNDAI dealer as soon as pos-sible.

Engine CoolantTemperature WarningLight (if equipped)


• When the engine coolant tempera-ture is above 120°C (248°F). Thismeans that the engine is overheat-ed and may be damaged.If your vehicle is overheated, referto “Overheating” in chapter 6.

CAUTION - EngineOverheating

Do not continue driving with theengine overheated. Otherwiseengine may be damaged.


984

Engine Oil PressureWarning Light



started.• When the engine oil pressure is low.

If the engine oil pressure is low:


2. Turn the engine off and check theengine oil level (For more details,refer to “Engine Oil” in section 7). Ifthe level is low, add oil as required.If the warning light remains onafter adding oil or if oil is not avail-able, have your vehicle inspectedby an authorized HYUNDAI dealeras soon as possible.

Low Fuel Level WarningLight


When the fuel tank is nearly empty.

If the fuel tank is nearly empty:

Add fuel as soon as possible.

CAUTION - Engine OilPressureWarning Light

• If the engine does not stopimmediately after the EngineOil Pressure Warning Light isilluminated, severe damagecould result.

• If the warning light stays onwhile the engine is running, itindicates that there may beserious engine damage ormalfunction. In this case,1. Stop the vehicle as soon as

it is safe to do so.2. Turn off the engine and

check the oil level. If the oillevel is low, fill the engineoil to the proper level.

3. Start the engine again. If thewarning light stays on afterthe engine is started, turnthe engine off immediately.In this case, have your vehi-cle inspected by an author-ized HYUNDAI dealer.

CAUTION - Low FuelLevel

Driving with the Low Fuel Levelwarning light on or with the fuellevel below “0 or E” can causethe engine to misfire and dam-age the catalytic converter (ifequipped).

4 99


Low Tire PressureWarning Light



seconds and then goes off.• When one or more of your tires are

significantly underinflated.For more details, refer to “TirePressure Monitoring System(TPMS)” in chapter 6.

This warning light remains on afterblinking for approximately 60 secondsor repeats blinking and off at theintervals of approximately 3 seconds:

• When there is a malfunction withthe TPMS.In this case, have your vehicleinspected by an authorizedHYUNDAI dealer as soon as possi-ble.For more details, refer to “TirePressure Monitoring System(TPMS)” in chapter 6.

WARNING - Safe Stopping• The TPMS cannot alert you to

severe and sudden tire damagecaused by external factors.

• If you notice any vehicle insta-bility, immediately take yourfoot off the accelerator pedal,apply the brakes gradually withlight force, and slowly move toa safe position off the road.

WARNING - Low tire pressure

• Significantly low tire pressuremakes the vehicle unstableand can contribute to loss ofvehicle control and increasedbraking distances.

• Continued driving or low pres-sure tires will cause the tires tooverheat and fail.


1004

Door Ajar Warning Light


When a door is not closed securely.

Tailgate Open WarningLight


When the tailgate is not closedsecurely.

All Wheel Drive (AWD)Warning Light (if equipped)




the AWD system.In this case, have your vehicleinspected by an authorizedHYUNDAI dealer.

4 101


Indicator LightsElectronic StabilityControl (ESC) IndicatorLight This indicator light illuminates:



the ESC system.In this case, have your vehicleinspected by an authorizedHYUNDAI dealer.

This indicator light blinks:

While the ESC is operating.

For more details, refer to “ElectronicStability Control (ESC)” in chapter 5.

Electronic StabilityControl (ESC) OFFIndicator Light

This indicator light illuminates:


seconds and then goes off.• When you deactivate the ESC sys-

tem by pressing the ESC OFF but-ton.

For more details, refer to “ElectronicStability Control (ESC)” in chapter 5.

ECO Indicator Light


When you activate the active ECOsystem by pressing the ACTIVEECO button.

For more details, refer to “ActiveECO System” in chapter 5.

ECO


1024

Immobilizer IndicatorLight (Without Smart Key)(if equipped)


• When the vehicle detects theimmobilizer in your key properlywhile the ignition switch is ON.- At this time, you can start the

engine.- The indicator light goes off after

starting the engine.


• When there is a malfunction withthe immobilizer system.In this case, have your vehicleinspected by an authorizedHYUNDAI dealer.

Immobilizer IndicatorLight (With Smart Key) (if equipped)

This indicator light illuminates for upto 30 seconds:

• When the vehicle detects thesmart key in the vehicle properlywhile the Engine Start/Stop Buttonis ACC or ON.- At this time, you can start the

engine.- The indicator light goes off after

starting the engine.

This indicator light blinks for a fewseconds:

• When the smart key is not in thevehicle.- At this time, you can not start the

engine.

This indicator light illuminates for 2seconds and goes off:

• When the vehicle can not detectthe smart key which is in the vehi-cle while the Engine Start/StopButton is ON.In this case, have your vehicleinspected by an authorizedHYUNDAI dealer.


• When the battery of the smart keyis weak.- At this time, you can not start the

engine. However, you can startthe engine if you press the EngineStart/Stop Button with the smartkey. (For more details, refer to“Starting the Engine” in section 5).

• When there is a malfunction withthe immobilizer system.In this case, have your vehicleinspected by an authorizedHYUNDAI dealer.

4 103


Turn Signal IndicatorLight


• When you turn the turn signal lighton.

If any of the following occurs, theremay be a malfunction with the turnsignal system. In this case, have yourvehicle inspected by an authorizedHYUNDAI dealer.

- The indicator light does not blinkbut illuminates.

- The indicator light blinks morerapidly.

- The indicator light does not illumi-nate at all.

High Beam IndicatorLight


• When the headlights are on and inthe high beam position

• When the turn signal lever is pulledinto the Flash-to-Pass position.

Light ON Indicator Light


• When the tail lights or headlightsare on.

Front Fog IndicatorLight (if equipped)


• When the front fog lights are on.

All Wheel Drive (AWD)LOCK Indicator Light (if equipped)



seconds and then goes off.• When you select AWD Lock mode

by pressing the AWD LOCK button.- The AWD LOCK mode is to

increase the drive power whendriving on wet pavement, snowcovered roads and/or off-road.

CAUTION - AWD LockMode

Do not use AWD LOCK mode ondry paved roads or highway, itcan cause noise, vibration ordamage of AWD related parts.


1044

Cruise Indicator Light (if equipped)


• When the cruise control system isenabled.

For more details, refer to “CruiseControl System” in section 5.

Cruise SET IndicatorLight (if equipped)


• When the cruise control speed is set.

For more details, refer to “CruiseControl System” in section 5.

Downhill Brake Control(DBC) Indicator Light



seconds and then goes off.• When you activate the DBC sys-

tem by pressing the DBC button.

This warning light blinks:

• When the DBC is operating.

This warning light illuminates yellow:

• When there is a malfunction withthe DBC system.

In this case, we recommend that youhave the vehicle inspected by anauthorized HYUNDAI dealer.

For more details, refer to “DownhillBrake Control (DBC) System” inchapter 5.

CRUISE

SET

4 105


The rear parking assist systemassists the driver during backwardmovement of the vehicle by chimingif any object is sensed within a dis-tance of 47 in. (120 cm) behind thevehicle. This system is a supplemen-tal system and it is not intended tonor does it replace the need forextreme care and attention by thedriver. The sensing range andobjects detectable by the back sen-sors are limited. Whenever backing-up, pay as much attention to what isbehind you as you would in a vehiclewithout a rear parking assist system.

Operation of the rear parkingassist systemOperating condition

• This system will activate when theindicator on the rear parking assistOFF button is not illuminated.If you desire to deactivate the rearparking assist system, press therear parking assist OFF buttonagain. (The indicator on the buttonwill illuminate.) To turn the systemon, press the button again. (Theindicator on the button will go off.)

REAR PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNINGThe rear parking assist systemis a supplementary functiononly. The operation of the rearparking assist system can beaffected by several factors(including environmental condi-tions). It is the responsibility ofthe driver to always check thearea behind the vehicle beforeand while backing up.ONCNCO2040Sensors

OANNDR2100


1064

• This system will activate whenbacking up with the ignition switchON.If the vehicle is moving at a speedover 10 km/h (6 mph), the systemwill be deactivated.

• The sensing distance while therear parking assist system is inoperation is approximately 47 in.(120 cm).

• When more than two objects aresensed at the same time, the clos-est object will be recognized first.

Types of warning sound• When an object is 47 in. to 24 in.

(120 cm to 61 cm) from the rearbumper: Buzzer beeps intermit-tently.

• When an object is 23 in. to 12 in.(60 cm to 31 cm) from the rearbumper: Buzzer beeps more fre-quently.

• When an object is within 11.8 in.(30 cm) of the rear bumper:Buzzer sounds continuously.

Non-operational conditions ofrear parking assist systemThe rear parking assist systemmay not operate properly when:1. Moisture is frozen to the sensor. (It

will operate normally when themoisture has been cleared.)

2. The sensor is covered with foreignmatter, such as snow or water, orthe sensor cover is blocked. (It willoperate normally when the materi-al is removed or the sensor is nolonger blocked.)

3. Driving on uneven road surfaces(unpaved roads, gravel, bumps,gradient).

4. Objects generating excessivenoise (vehicle horns, loud motor-cycle engines, or truck air brakes)are within range of the sensor.

5. Heavy rain or water spray exists.6. Wireless transmitters or mobile

phones are within range of thesensor.

7. Trailer towing.

4 107


The detecting range may decreasewhen:1. The sensor is covered with foreign

matter such as snow or water.(The sensing range will return tonormal when removed.)

2. Outside air temperature isextremely hot or cold.

The following objects may not berecognized by the sensor:1. Sharp or slim objects such as

ropes, chains or small poles.2. Objects which tend to absorb the

sensor frequency such as clothes,spongy material or snow.

3. Undetectable objects smaller than40 in. (1 m) and narrower than 6in. (14 cm) in diameter.

Rear parking assist systemprecautions• The rear parking assist system

may not sound sequentiallydepending on the speed andshapes of the objects detected.

• The rear parking assist system maymalfunction if the vehicle bumperheight or sensor installation hasbeen modified or damaged. Anynon-factory installed equipment oraccessories may also interfere withthe sensor performance.

• The sensor may not recognizeobjects less than 15 in. (40 cm)from the sensor, or it may sense anincorrect distance. Use caution.

• When the sensor is frozen or cov-ered with snow, dirt, or water, thesensor may be inoperative until theitems are removed and the sen-sors are cleaned using a soft cloth.

• Do not push, scratch or strike thesensor. Sensor damage could occur.

✽✽ NOTICEThis system can only sense objectswithin the range and location of thesensors; it can not detect objects inother areas where sensors are notinstalled. Also, small or slim objects,such as poles or objects locatedbetween sensors may not be detectedby the sensors.Always visually check behind thevehicle when backing up.Be sure to inform any drivers of thevehicle that may be unfamiliar withthe system regarding the systemscapabilities and limitations.


1084

Self-diagnosis (if equipped)When you shift the gear to the R(Reverse) position and if one or moreof the below occurs you may have amalfunction in the rear parking assistsystem.• You don't hear an audible warning

sound or if the buzzer sounds inter-mittently.

If this occurs, have your vehiclechecked by an authorized HYUNDAIdealer as soon as possible.

WARNINGYour new vehicle warranty doesnot cover any accidents or dam-age to the vehicle or injuries toits occupants due to a rearparking assist system malfunc-tion. Always drive safely andcautiously.

WARNINGPay close attention when thevehicle is driven close toobjects on the road, particularlypedestrians, and especiallychildren. Be aware that someobjects may not be detected bythe sensors, due to the object’sdistance, size or material, all ofwhich can limit the effective-ness of the sensor. Always per-form a visual inspection tomake sure the vehicle is clear ofall obstructions before movingthe vehicle in any direction.

4 109


REAR VIEW CAMERA (IF EQUIPPED)

The rearview camera will activatewhen the back-up light is ON with theignition switch ON and the shift leverin the R position.This system is a supplemental sys-tem that shows behind the vehiclethrough the monitor while backing-up.

✽✽ NOTICEThe rearview camera may not oper-ate normally, in extremely high orlow temperatures (operating temper-ature : -13°F~149°F (-20°C~65°C)).

WARNING• This system is a supplemen-

tary function only. It is theresponsibility of the driver toalways check the inside/out-side rearview mirror and thearea behind the vehicle beforeand while backing up.

• Always keep the camera lensclean. If the lens is coveredwith foreign matter, the cam-era may not operate normally.

ONCNCO2037

ODM042239


1104

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER

The hazard warning flasher shouldbe used whenever you find it neces-sary to stop the car in a hazardouslocation. When you must make suchan emergency stop, always pull offthe road as far as possible.The hazard warning lights are turnedon by pushing in the hazard switch.

This causes all turn signal lights toblink. The hazard warning lights willoperate even though the key is not inthe ignition switch.To turn the hazard warning lights off,push the switch a second time.

ODM042242

ODM042243

■ Type A

■ Type B

4 111


Battery saver function• The purpose of this feature is to

prevent the battery from being dis-charged. The system automaticallyturns off the parking lights whenthe driver removes the ignition key(smart key : turns off the engine)and opens the driver-side door.

• With this feature, the parking lightswill be turned off automatically ifthe driver parks on the side of theroad at night.If necessary, to keep the lights onwhen the ignition key is removed(smart key : turns off the engine),perform the following:1) Open the driver-side door.2) Turn the parking lights OFF and

ON again using the light switchon the steering column.

Headlamp delay (if equipped)If you turn the ignition switch to theACC or OFF position with the head-lights ON, the headlights remain onfor about 5 minutes. However, if thedriver’s door is opened and closed,the headlights are turned off after 15seconds.The headlights can be turned off bypressing the lock button on the trans-mitter (or smart key) twice or turningthe light switch to the OFF or Autoposition.However, if you turn the light switchto the Auto position when it is darkoutside, the headlights will not beturned off.

You can activate or deactivate thisfeature. Refer to “User Settings” inthis section.

LIGHTING

CAUTIONIf the driver gets out of the vehi-cle through other doors (otherthan the driver's door), the bat-tery saver function does notoperate and the headlamp delaydoes not turn off automatically.This will cause the battery to bedischarged. In this case, makesure to turn off the lamp beforegetting out of the vehicle.


1124

Daytime running light (if equipped)Daytime Running Lights (DRL) canmake it easier for others to see thefront of your vehicle during the day.DRL can be helpful in many differentdriving conditions, and it is especiallyhelpful after dawn and before sunset.The DRL system will turn OFF when:• The headlights are ON.• Engine stops.• The parking brake is applied.

Lighting control

The light switch has a Headlight anda Parking light position.To operate the lights, turn the knob atthe end of the control lever to one ofthe following positions:

(1) OFF position(2) Auto light position (if equipped)(3) Parking light position(4) Headlight position

ODMCCO2006

ODMCCO2007

■ Type A

■ Type B

4 113


Parking light position ( )

When the light switch is in the park-ing light position, the tail, position,license plate lights and the tail lightindicator will turn on.

Headlight position ( )

When the light switch is in the head-light position, the head, tail, licenseand instrument panel lights will turnon.

✽✽ NOTICEThe ignition switch must be in theON position to turn on the head-lights.

ONCNCO2016

ONCNCO2017

■ Type A

■ Type BONCNCO2018

ONCNCO2019

■ Type A

■ Type B


1144

Auto light position (if equipped)

When the light switch is in the AUTOlight position, the taillights and head-lights will be turned ON or OFF auto-matically depending on the amountof light outside the vehicle.

High beam operation

To turn on the high beam headlights,push the lever away from you. Pull itback for low beams.The high beam indicator will lightwhen the headlight high beams areswitched on.To prevent the battery from beingdischarged, do not leave the lightson for a prolonged time while theengine is not running.

ONCNCO2020

CAUTION• Never place anything over

sensor (1) located on theinstrument panel. This willensure better auto-light sys-tem control.

• Don’t clean the sensor using awindow cleaner. The cleanermay leave a light film whichcould interfere with sensoroperation.

• If your vehicle has window tintor other types of metallic coat-ing on the front windshield,the Auto light system may notwork properly.

ODMCCO2013

4 115


To flash the headlights, pull the levertowards you. It will return to the nor-mal (low beam) position whenreleased. The headlight switch doesnot need to be on to use this flashingfeature.

Turn signals and lane changesignals

The ignition switch must be on for theturn signals to function. To turn onthe turn signals, move the lever up ordown (A). Green arrow indicators onthe instrument panel indicate whichturn signal is operating. They willself-cancel after a turn is completed.If the indicator continues to flashafter a turn, manually return the leverto the OFF position.

WARNINGDo not use the high beamswhen there are other vehicles.Using high beam could obstructthe other driver's vision.

ONCNCO2022

ONCNCO2023


1164

To signal a lane change, move theturn signal lever slightly and hold it inposition (B). The lever will return tothe OFF position when released.If an indicator stays on and does notflash or if it flashes abnormally, one ofthe turn signal bulbs may be burnedout and will require replacement.

One-touch triple turn signal (One Touch Turn Signal)To activate the one-touch lanechange function, move the turn sig-nal lever slightly and then release it.The lane change signals will blink 3(5 or 7, if equipped) times.

You can activate/deactivate the OneTouch Turn Signal function or choosethe number of blinking (3, 5, or 7)from the User Settings Mode on theLCD display (if equipped).

✽✽ NOTICEIf an indicator flash is abnormallyquick or slow, a bulb may be burnedout or have a poor electrical connec-tion in the circuit.

Front fog light

Fog lights are used to provide illumi-nation close to the road surface whenvisibility is poor due to fog, rain orsnow, etc. The fog lights will turn onwhen the fog light switch (1) is turnedto the on position after the headlight isturned on.To turn off the fog lights, turn the foglight switch (1) to the OFF position.

ODMECO2015

CAUTIONWhen in operation, the foglights consume large amountsof vehicle electrical power. Onlyuse the fog lights when visibilityis poor or unnecessary batteryand generator drain couldoccur.

4 117


A : Wiper speed control· MIST – Single wipe· OFF – Off· INT – Intermittent wipe · LO – Low wiper speed· HI – High wiper speed

B : Intermittent wipe time adjust-ment

C : Wash with brief wipes (front)*

D : Rear wiper/washer control*· HI – High wiper speed· LO – Low wiper speed· OFF – Off

E : Wash with brief wipes (rear)

* : if equipped

Windshield wipers Operates as follows when the igni-tion switch is turned ON.MIST : For a single wiping cycle,

move the lever to this (MIST)position and release it. Thewipers will operate continu-ously if the lever is held in thisposition.

OFF : Wiper is not in operationINT : Wiper operates intermittently at

the same wiping intervals. Usethis mode in a light rain or mist.To vary the speed setting, turnthe speed control knob.

LO : Normal wiper speedHI : Fast wiper speed

WIPERS AND WASHERS

OANNCO43007

OANNCO43008

Windshield wiper/washer

Rear window wiper/washer


1184

✽✽ NOTICEIf there is heavy accumulation ofsnow or ice on the windshield,defrost the windshield for about 10minutes, or until the snow and/or iceis removed before using the wind-shield wipers to ensure proper oper-ation.

✽✽ NOTICE• When you operate the wipers, if

your vehicle has a problem in anypart of the wiper operation sys-tem, the wiper may operate in theLO mode regardless of the wiperswitch position. In this case, haveyour vehicle checked by anauthorized HYUNDAI dealer assoon as possible.

• When the ignition key is removed,the wiper blade sometimes maymove slightly for reducing thedeterioration of the windshieldwipers.

Windshield washers

In the OFF position, pull the levergently toward you to spray washerfluid on the windshield and to run thewipers 1-3 cycles.Use this function when the wind-shield is dirty.The spray and wiper operation willcontinue until you release the lever.If the washer does not work, checkthe washer fluid level. If the fluid levelis not sufficient, you will need to addappropriate non-abrasive windshieldwasher fluid to the washer reservoir.

The reservoir filler neck is located inthe front of the engine compartmenton the passenger side.

OANNCO43009

CAUTIONTo prevent possible damage tothe washer pump, do not oper-ate the washer when the fluidreservoir is empty.

WARNINGDo not use the washer in freez-ing temperatures without firstwarming the windshield withthe defrosters; the washer solu-tion could freeze on the wind-shield and obscure your vision.

4 119


Rear window wiper and wash-er switch

The rear window wiper and washerswitch is located at the end of thewiper and washer switch lever. Turnthe switch to the desired position tooperate the rear wiper and washer.HI : High wiper speedLO : Low wiper speedOFF : Off

Push the lever away from you tospray rear washer fluid and to run therear wipers 1~3 cycles. The sprayand wiper operation will continueuntil you release the lever.

CAUTION• To prevent possible damage

to the wipers or windshield,do not operate the wiperswhen the windshield is dry.

• To prevent damage to the wiperblades, do not use gasoline,kerosene, paint thinner, orother solvents on or near them.

• To prevent damage to thewiper arms and other compo-nents, do not attempt to movethe wipers manually.

OANNCO43010

OANNCO43011


1204

Automatic turn off function (if equipped) The interior lights automatically turnoff approximately 20 minutes afterthe ignition switch is turned off.If your vehicle is equipped with thetheft alarm system, the interior lightsautomatically turn off approximately5 seconds after the system is in thearmed stage.

Map lamp

Press the lens (1) to turn the maplamp on or off• ON (2): The map lamp and room

lamp stays on at all times.

• OFF (3): The lamps are off even if adoor is opened.

• ROOM (4): The map lamp androom lamp stays on atall times.

• DOOR (5):- The map lamp and room lamp

comes on for approximately 30seconds when doors are unlockedwith a transmitter or smart key aslong as the doors are not opened.

- When the ignition switch is in theACC or LOCK/OFF position, ifany door is opened, the maplamp and room lamp will stay onfor approximately 20 minutes. Ifthe door is closed, the lamps willgo out in 30 seconds.

- The map lamp and room lamp willgo out immediately if the ignitionswitch is changed to the ON posi-tion with all doors closed.

- When the ignition switch is in theON position, if any door is opened,the map lamp and room lamp willstay on continuously. If the door isclosed, the lamps will go outimmediately.

INTERIOR LIGHT

CAUTIONDo not use the interior lights forextended periods when theengine is not running.It may cause battery discharge.

WARNINGDo not use the interior lightswhen driving in the dark.Accidents could happenbecause the view may beobscured by interior lights.

ODM042258

ODM042259

■ Type A

■ Type B

4 121


✽✽ NOTICEWhen the lamp is turned on bypressing the lens (1), the lamp doesnot turn off even if the switch is inthe OFF position (3).

Room lamp

Press the button to turn the light onor off.

ODM042341

■ Type BODM042260

■ Type ACAUTION

Do not leave the lamp switcheson for an extended period oftime when the vehicle is not run-ning because the battery maydrain.


1224

Luggage room lamp

• ON : The luggage room lamp stayson at all times.

• DOOR : The luggage room lampcomes on when the tail-gate is opened.

• OFF : The luggage room lamp is off.

Vanity mirror lamp

Opening the lid of the vanity mirrorwill automatically turn on the mirrorlight.

Glove box lamp

The glove box lamp comes on whenthe light switch is in the parking lightposition or headlight position and theglove box is opened.

OXM049136

CAUTIONTo prevent unnecessary charg-ing system drain, close the van-ity mirror cover after using themirror.

OEN046081 ODM042262

4 123


Headlamp welcomeWhen the headlight(light switch inthe headlight or AUTO position) is onand all doors (and tailgate) arelocked and closed, the headlight,position light and tail light will comeon for 15 seconds if any of the belowis performed.• Without smart key system

- When the door unlock button ispressed on the transmitter.

• With the smart key system- When the door unlock button is

pressed on the smart key.

At this time, if you press the door lockbutton (on the transmitter or smartkey), the lights will turn off immedi-ately.

Interior light When the interior light switch is in theDOOR position and all doors (andtailgate) are locked and closed, theroom lamp will come on for 30 sec-onds if any of the below is per-formed.• Without smart key system



pressed on the smart key.- When the button of the outside

door handle is pressed.

At this time, if you press the door lockbutton, the lamps will turn off imme-diately.

Pocket lampWhen all doors are locked andclosed, the pocket lamp will come onfor 15 seconds if any of the below isperformed.• Without smart key system



pressed on the smart key.- When the button of the outside

door handle is pressed.- When the vehicle is approached

with the smart key in possession.

At this time, if you press the door lockbutton, the lamps will turn off imme-diately.

WELCOME SYSTEM


1244

✽✽ NOTICEIf you want to defrost and defog thefront windshield, refer to“Windshield defrosting and defog-ging” in this section.

Rear window defroster

The defroster heats the window toremove frost, fog and thin ice fromthe rear window, while the engine isrunning.

To activate the rear windowdefroster, press the rear windowdefroster button located in the centerfacia switch panel.The indicator on the rear windowdefroster button illuminates when thedefroster is ON.If there is heavy accumulation ofsnow on the rear window, brush it offbefore operating the rear defroster.The rear window defroster automati-cally turns off after approximately 20minutes or when the ignition switch isturned off. To turn off the defroster,press the rear window defroster but-ton again.

Outside rearview mirror defroster (if equipped)If your vehicle is equipped with theoutside rearview mirror defrosters,they will operate at the same time youturn on the rear window defroster.

Front wiper deicer (if equipped)If your vehicle is equipped with thefront wiper deicer, it will be operatingat the same time you operate thefront windshield defroster.

DEFROSTER

ODM042271

■ Manual climate controlCAUTION

To prevent damage to the con-ductors bonded to the insidesurface of the rear window,never use sharp instruments orwindow cleaners containingabrasives to clean the window.

■ Automatic climate control

ODM042272

4 125


MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

ONCNCL2001/ODM042273/ONCNCL2002

1. Front windshield defrost button

2. Temperature control button

3. Air conditioning button

4. MAX A/C (Max airconditioning) button

5. Rear window defroster button

6. Air intake control button

7. Mode selection button

8. Fan speed control knob

9. 3rd row climate control ON/OFF

button

10. 3rd row fan speed control knob

11. 3rd row blower ON/OFF button

12. 3rd row mode selection button

13. 3rd row temperature control knob

* if equipped

■■ Front climate control (Type A) ■■ Front climate control (Type B)

■■ 3rd row air climate control (for Type A)


1264

Heating and air conditioning1. Start the engine.2. Set the mode to the desired posi-

tion.For improving the effectiveness ofheating and cooling;- Heating:- Cooling:

3. Set the temperature control to thedesired position.

4. Set the air intake control to theoutside (fresh) air position. (ifequipped)

5. Set the fan speed control to thedesired speed.

6. If air conditioning is desired, turnthe air conditioning system (ifequipped) on. ONCNCL2003

❈❈ 2nd and 3rd row outlet vents (E, F, G, H) (G, H : if equipped)• The air flow of the 2nd and 3rd row outlet vents is controlled by the front climate

control system and delivered through the inside air duct of the floor (E, F, H).• The air flow of the 2nd and 3rd row outlet vents (E, F, H) may be weaker

than the instrument panel vents for the long air duct.• Close the air vents (F) in cold weather. The air flow of the 2nd and 3rd row

outlet vents may not be as warm during heating operation. (Use the 2ndand 3rd row outlet vents (F, G) during cooling operation.)

4 127


Mode selection

The mode selection button controlsthe direction of the air flow throughthe ventilation system.

Face-Level (B, D, F)

Air flow is directed toward the upperbody and face. Additionally, eachoutlet can be controlled to direct theair discharged from the outlet.

Bi-Level (B, D, E, C, F)

Air flow is directed towards the faceand the floor.

Floor-Level (C, A, D, E)

Most of the air flow is directed to thefloor, with a small amount of the airbeing directed to the windshield, sidewindow defrosters, and side vents.

Floor/Defrost-Level (A, C, D, E)

Most of the air flow is directed to thefloor and the windshield with a smallamount directed to the side windowdefrosters, and side vents.

Defrost-Level (A, D)

Most of the air flow is directed to thewindshield with a small amount of airdirected to the side vents.

ODMECL2002


1284

MAX A/C-Level (B, D)

To operate the MAX A/C, turn the fanspeed control knob to the right tomaximum fan speed, then press theMAX A/C button. Air flow is directedtoward the upper body and face.In this mode, the air conditioning, therecirculated air position and maxcool temperature will be selectedautomatically.

Instrument panel vents

The outlet vents can be opened orclosed separately using the thumb-wheel.Also, you can adjust the direction ofair delivered from these vents usingthe vent control lever as shown.

Temperature control

The temperature control switchallows you to control the temperatureof the airflow in the vehicle.To change the temperature:• Press the (red) switch to

increase temperature.• Press the (blue) switch to

decrease temperature.The temperature status will be dis-played at the above switch panel asan indicator.

ODM042277 ODM042280

ODM042279

4 129


Air intake control

This is used to select outside (fresh)air position or recirculated air position.To change the air intake control posi-tion, push the control button.

Recirculated air position

The indicator light on thebutton illuminates whenthe recirculated air posi-tion is selected.With the recirculated airposition selected, airfrom the passengercompartment will berecirculated and heatedor cooled according tothe function selected.

Outside (fresh) air position

With the outside (fresh)air position selected, airenters the vehicle fromoutside and is heated orcooled according to thefunction selected.

✽✽ NOTICEProlonged operation of the heater inthe recirculated air position (with-out air conditioning selected) maycause fogging of the windshield andside windows and the air within thepassenger compartment maybecome stale.In addition, prolonged operation ofthe air conditioning with the recir-culated air position selected willresult in excessively dry air in thepassenger compartment.

ONCNCL2004

ODM042281

■ Type A

■ Type B

■ Type A, B

■ Type B

■ Type A


1304

Fan speed control

The ignition switch must be in the ONposition for fan operation.The fan speed control knob allowsyou to control the fan speed of the airflowing from the ventilation system.To change the fan speed, turn theknob to the right for higher speed orleft for lower speed.Setting the fan speed control knob tothe “0” position turns off the fan.

To turn off the blowers

To turn off the blowers, turn the fanspeed control knob to the “0” position.

ODM042282

WARNING• Continued use of the climate

control system operation in therecirculated air position with-out A/C selected may allowhumidity to increase inside thevehicle which may fog theglass and obscure visibility.

• Do not sleep in a vehicle withthe air conditioning or heatingsystem on. This may causeserious harm or death due toa drop in the oxygen leveland/or body temperature.

• Continued use of the climatecontrol system operation inthe recirculated air positionmay cause drowsiness orsleepiness and loss of vehiclecontrol. Set the air intake con-trol to the outside (fresh) airposition as much as possiblewhile driving.

ODM042283

4 131


Air conditioning

Press the A/C button to turn the airconditioning system on (indicatorlight will illuminate). Press the buttonagain to turn the air conditioning sys-tem off.

3rd row climate control (if equipped)

1. To turn the 3rd row climate controlon or off, press the 3rd row climatecontrol ON/OFF button (1 or 5).

2. Set the fan speed control knob (2)to the desired position.

3. Set the temperature control knob(3) to the desired position.

4. Select the desired direction of theair flow by pressing the modeselecting button (4).

ODM042284

ONCNCL2002

■ Front

■ 3rd rowONCNCL2005


1324

System operationVentilation1. Set the mode to the position.2. Set the air intake control to the

outside (fresh) air position.3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position.4. Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.

Heating1. Set the mode to the position.2. Set the air intake control to the

outside (fresh) air position.3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position.4. Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.5. If dehumidified heating is desired,

turn the air conditioning system (ifequipped) on.

• If the windshield fogs up, set themode to the or position.

Operation Tips

• To prevent dust or unpleasantfumes from entering the vehiclethrough the ventilation system,temporarily set the air intake con-trol to the recirculated air position.Be sure to return the control to thefresh air position when the irritationhas passed to keep fresh air in thevehicle. This will help keep the driv-er alert and comfortable.

• Air for the heating/cooling systemis drawn in through the grilles justahead of the windshield. Careshould be taken that these are notblocked by leaves, snow, ice orother obstructions.

• To prevent interior fog on the wind-shield, set the air intake control tothe fresh air position and fan speedto the desired position, turn on theair conditioning system, and adjustthe temperature control to desiredtemperature.

Air conditioningHYUNDAI Air Conditioning Systemsare filled with environmentally friend-ly R-134a refrigerant.1. Start the engine. Push the air con-

ditioning button.2. Set the mode to the position.3. Set the air intake control to the

recirculated air position. However,prolonged operation of the recircu-lated air position will excessivelydry the air. In this case, change theair position.

4. Adjust the fan speed control andtemperature control to maintainmaximum comfort.

• When maximum cooling is desired,set the temperature control to theextreme left position then set thefan speed control to the highestspeed.

4 133


✽✽ NOTICE• While using the air conditioning

system, monitor the engine tem-perature gauge closely while driv-ing up hills or in heavy trafficwhen outside temperatures arehigh. Air conditioning systemoperation may cause engine over-heating. Continue to use the blow-er fan but turn the air condition-ing system off if the engine tem-perature gauge indicates engineoverheating.

• Opening the windows in humidweather while operating the airconditioning system may createwater droplets inside the vehicle.Since excessive water dropletsmay cause damage to electricalequipment, air conditioningshould only be used with the win-dows closed.

Air conditioning system operation tips

• If the vehicle has been parked indirect sunlight during hot weather,open the windows for a short timeto let the hot air inside the vehicleescape.

• To help reduce moisture inside ofthe windows on rainy or humiddays, decrease the humidity insidethe vehicle by operating the airconditioning system.

• During air conditioning systemoperation, you may occasionallynotice a slight change in enginespeed as the air conditioning com-pressor cycles. This is a normalsystem operation characteristic.

• During the winter months, use theair conditioning system everymonth for a few minutes to ensuremaximum system performance.

• When using the air conditioningsystem, you may notice clear waterdripping (or even puddling) on theground under the passenger sideof the vehicle. This condensation isa normal system operation charac-teristic.

• Operating the air conditioning sys-tem in the recirculated air positionprovides maximum cooling, how-ever, continual operation in thismode may cause the air inside thevehicle to become stale.

• During cooling operation, you mayoccasionally notice a misty air flowbecause of rapid cooling andhumid air intake. This is a normalsystem operation characteristic.

• If you operate air conditionerexcessively, the differencebetween the temperature of theoutside air and that of the wind-shield could cause the outer sur-face of the windshield to fog up,causing loss of visibility. In thiscase, set the mode selection knobor button to the position andfan speed control to the lowerspeed.


1344

Climate control air filter

The climate control air filter installedbehind the glove box filters the dustor other pollutants that come into thevehicle from the outside through theheating and air conditioning system.If dust or other pollutants accumulatein the filter over a period of time, theair flow from the air vents maydecrease, resulting in moisture accu-mulation on the inside of the wind-shield even when the outside (fresh)air position is selected. If this hap-pens, have the climate control air filterreplaced by an authorized HYUNDAIdealer.

✽✽ NOTICE• Replace the filter according to the

Maintenance Schedule.If the vehicle is being driven insevere conditions such as dusty,rough roads, more frequent cli-mate control air filter inspectionsand changes are required.

• When the air flow rate suddenlydecreases, the system should bechecked at an authorizedHYUNDAI dealer.

Checking the amount of airconditioner refrigerant andcompressor lubricantWhen the amount of refrigerant islow, the performance of the air con-ditioning is reduced. Overfilling alsohas a negative influence on the airconditioning system.Therefore, if abnormal operation isfound, have the system inspected byan authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNINGBecause the refriger-ant is at very highpressure, the air con-ditioning systemshould only be serv-

iced by trained and certifiedtechnicians. It is important thatthe correct type and amount ofoil and refrigerant is used, oth-erwise damage to the vehicleand personal injury may occur.

1LDA5047

Outside air

Recirculatedair

Climate controlair filter

Blower

Evaporatorcore

Heater core

4 135


AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

ONCNCL2006/ONCNCL2009/ONCNCL2002

1. Front windshield defrost button

2. Rear window defrost button

3. Display

4. Air conditioning button*


6. Dual temperature control selection button

7. Driver's temperature control button

8. Front fan speed control knob

9. AUTO (automatic control) button

10. Front blower OFF button

11. Air intake control button* or recirculatedair position button*

12. 3rd row climate control ON/OFF button(controlled from the front)

13. Passenger's temperature control button

14. 3rd row fan speed control knob

15. 3rd row blower ON/OFF button

16. 3rd row mode selection button

17. 3rd row temperature control knob

18. Climate control information screenselection button

* if equipped

■■ Front climate control (Type A) ■■ Front climate control (Type B)

■■ 3rd row climate control (for Type A and B)


1364

ODMECL2010/OANNMM2002

1. Front windshield defroster button

2. Rear window defrost button

3. A/C display

4. Air conditioning button*


6. Dual temperature control selection button

7. Driver's temperature control button

8. Front fan speed control knob

9. AUTO (automatic control) button

10. Blower OFF button

11. Air intake control button* or recirculatedair position button*

12. Passenger's temperature control button

13. Climate control information screenselection button

* if equipped

■■ Front climate control (Type C)

■■ Front climate control (Type D)

4 137


Automatic heating and air con-ditioning

1. Press the AUTO button.The modes, fan speeds, air intakeand air-conditioning will be controlledautomatically according to the tem-perature setting.

2. Set the driver’s temperature con-trol button to set the desired tem-perature.

✽✽ NOTICE• To turn the automatic operation

off, select any button or knob ofthe following:- Mode selection button- Front windshield defrost button- Fan speed control knobThe selected function will be con-trolled manually while other func-tions operate automatically.

• For your convenience and toimprove the effectiveness of theclimate control, use the AUTObutton and set the temperature to73°F (23°C).ODM042287

ODM042290


1384

✽✽ NOTICENever place anything over the sen-sor located on the instrument panelto ensure better control of the heat-ing and cooling system.

Manual heating and air condi-tioningThe heating and cooling system canbe controlled manually by pressingbuttons or turning knob(s) other thanthe AUTO button. In this case, thesystem works sequentially accordingto the order of buttons or knob(s)selected.1. Start the engine.2. Set the mode to the desired posi-

tion.For improving the effectiveness ofheating and cooling;- Heating:- Cooling:

3. Set the temperature control to thedesired position.

4. Set the air intake control to theoutside (fresh) air position.

5. Set the fan speed control to thedesired speed.

6. If air conditioning is desired, turnthe air conditioning system on.

Press the AUTO button in order toconvert to full automatic control ofthe system.

Mode selection

The mode selection button controlsthe direction of the air flow throughthe ventilation system.The air flow outlet port is convertedas follows:

Refer to the illustration in the“Manual climate control system”.

ODM042336

ODM042288

4 139


Face-Level

Air flow is directed toward the upperbody and face. Additionally, eachoutlet can be controlled to direct theair discharged from the outlet.

Bi-Level

Air flow is directed towards the faceand the floor.

Floor-Level

Most of the air flow is directed to thefloor, with a small amount of the airbeing directed to the windshield andside window defrosters.

Floor & Defrost

Most of the air flow is directed to thefloor and the windshield with a smallamount directed to the side windowdefrosters.

Defrost-Level

Most of the air flow is directed to thewindshield with a small amount of airdirected to the side window defrosters.

Instrument panel vents

The outlet vents can be opened orclosed separately using the thumb-wheel.Also, you can adjust the direction ofair delivered from these vents usingthe vent control lever as shown.

ODM042279ODM042289


1404

Temperature control

The temperature will increase bypushing the up button. Each push ofthe button will cause the temperatureto increase by 1°F/0.5°C.The temperature will decrease bypushing the down button. Each pushof the button will cause the tempera-ture to decrease by 1°F/0.5°C. Whenset to the lowest temperature setting,the air conditioning will operate con-tinuously.

Adjusting the driver and passengerside temperature individually

1. Press the DUAL button to operatethe driver and passenger sidetemperature individually. Pressingthe right temperature control but-ton will automatically switch to theDUAL mode as well.

2. Press the left temperature controlbutton to adjust the driver sidetemperature. Press the right tem-perature control button to adjustthe passenger side temperature.

When the driver side temperature isset to the highest or lowest tempera-ture setting, the DUAL mode is deacti-vated for maximum heating or cooling.

Adjusting the driver and passengerside temperature equally

1. Press the DUAL button again todeactivate DUAL mode. The pas-senger side temperature will beset to the same temperature asthe driver side temperature.

2. Press the left temperature controlbutton. The driver and passengerside temperature will be adjustedequally.

Temperature conversion

If the battery has been discharged ordisconnected, the temperature modedisplay will reset to Fahrenheit.This is a normal condition. You canswitch the temperature mode betweenFahrenheit to Celsius as follows;While pressing the OFF button,depress the AUTO button for 3 sec-onds or more. The display willchange from Fahrenheit to Celsius,or from Celsius to Fahrenheit.

ODMECL2003

■ Driver’s side ■ Passenger’s side

ODM042291


4 141


Air intake control

This is used to select the outside(fresh) air position or recirculated airposition.To change the air intake control posi-tion, push the control button.

Recirculated air position

The indicator light on thebutton illuminates whenthe recirculated air posi-ition is selected.

With the recirculated air positionselected, air from the passenger com-partment will be drawn through theheating system and heated or cooledaccording to the function selected.

Outside (fresh) air position

With the outside (fresh)air position selected, airenters the vehicle fromoutside and is heated orcooled according to thefunction selected.

✽✽ NOTICEProlonged operation of the heater inthe recirculated air position (with-out air conditioning selected) maycause fogging of the windshield andside windows and the air within thepassenger compartment maybecome stale.In addition, prolonged use of the airconditioning with the recirculatedair position selected will result inexcessively dry air in the passengercompartment.

OANNMM2003

■ Type A, B

■ Type A


■ Type B

WARNING• Continued use of the climate

control system operation inthe recirculated air positionmay allow humidity toincrease inside the vehiclewhich may fog the glass andobscure visibility.

• Do not sleep in a vehicle withthe air conditioning or heatingsystem on. This may causeserious harm or death due toa drop in the oxygen leveland/or body temperature.

• Continued use of the climatecontrol system operation inthe recirculated air positionmay cause drowsiness orsleepiness and loss of vehiclecontrol. Set the air intake con-trol to the outside (fresh) airposition as much as possiblewhile driving.


1424

Fan speed control

The fan speed can be set to thedesired speed by turning the fanspeed control knob.The higher the fan speed is, themore air is delivered.To turn off the fan speed, press theOFF button.

Air conditioning

Push the A/C button to turn the airconditioning system on (indicatorlight will illuminate).Push the button again to turn the airconditioning system off.

OFF mode

Push the OFF button to turn off theair climate control system. However,you can still operate the mode andair intake buttons as long as the igni-tion switch is in the ON position.

ODM042293 ONCNCL3012

■ Type A ■ Type C

■ Type B

ODM042295

4 143


Climate information screen selec-tion (if equipped)

Press the climate information screenselection button to display climateinformation on the screen.

3rd row climate control (if equipped)

1. To turn the 3rd row climate controlon or off, press the 3rd row climatecontrol ON/OFF button (1 or 5).

2. Set the fan speed control knob (2)to the desired position.

3. Set the temperature control knob(3) to the desired position.

4. Select the desired direction of theair flow by pressing the modeselecting button (4).

ODM042297

ONCNCL2007/ONCNCL3013

ONCNCL2002

■ Front

Type A Type B

■ 3rd row


1444

• For maximum defrosting, set thetemperature control to the extremeright/hot position and the fan speedcontrol to the highest speed.

• If warm air to the floor is desiredwhile defrosting or defogging, setthe mode to the floor-defrost posi-tion.

• Before driving, clear all snow andice from the windshield, rear win-dow, outside rear view mirrors, andall side windows.

• Clear all snow and ice from thehood and air inlet in the cowl grill toimprove heater and defroster effi-ciency and to reduce the probabili-ty of fogging up the inside of thewindshield.

✽✽ NOTICEBe sure to keep the interior surfaceof the windshield clean by wiping itwith a clean cloth and glass cleaner.This will help reduce the tendency ofthe glass fogging and also improvevisibility.

Manual climate control systemTo defog inside windshield

1. Select desired temperature.2. Select any fan speed except “0”

position.3. Select the or position.4. The outside (fresh) air will be

selected automatically.If the outside (fresh) air position isnot selected automatically, press thecorresponding button manually.

WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING

WARNING - Windshieldheating

Do not use the or posi-tion during cooling operation inextremely humid weather. Thedifference between the temper-ature of the outside air and thatof the windshield could causethe outer surface of the wind-shield to fog up, causing loss ofvisibility. In this case, set themode selection knob or buttonto the position and fanspeed control knob or button toa lower speed.

ODM042298

4 145


To defrost outside windshield

1. Set the temperature to theextreme hot position.

2. Set the fan speed to the highest(extreme right) position.

3. Select the position.4. The outside (fresh) air will be

selected automatically.

Automatic climate control sys-temTo defog inside windshield

1. Select desired temperature.2. Select desired fan speed.3. Press the defrost button ( ).4. The outside (fresh) air position will

be selected automatically.If the outside (fresh) air position isnot selected automatically, adjust thecorresponding button manually.If the position is selected, lowerfan speed is adjusted to a higher fanspeed.

To defrost outside windshield

1. Set the temperature to theextreme hot (HI) position.

2. Set the fan speed to the highest(extreme right) position.

3. Press the defrost button ( ).4. The outside (fresh) air position will

be selected automatically.If the position is selected, lowerfan speed is adjusted to a higher fanspeed.

ODM042299

OANNMM2005

OANNMM2006


1464

Auto defogging system (if equipped)

Auto defogging reduces the probabil-ity of fogging up the inside of thewindshield by automatically sensingthe moisture of inside the windshield.The auto defogging system operateswhen the heater or air conditioning ison.

This indicator illuminateswhen the auto defoggingsystem senses the mois-ture of inside the wind-shield and operates.

If more moisture is in the vehicle, theautomated steps operate as follows:If auto defogging does not defog thewindow at step 1, outside air position,step 2, blowing air toward the wind-shield occurs.

Step 1 : Outside air positionStep 2 : Blowing air toward the wind-

shieldStep 3 : Increasing air flow toward

the windshieldStep 4 : Operating the air conditioning Step 5 : Maximizing the air conditioning

The auto defogging system is auto-matically activated when the condi-tions are met. However, if you wouldlike to cancel the auto defogging sys-tem, press the front defroster button4 times within 2 seconds while press-ing the AUTO button. The indicator ofthe front defroster button will blink 3times to notify you that the system iscancelled. To use the auto defoggingsystem again, follow the proceduresmentioned above.If the battery has been disconnectedor discharged, it resets to the autodefogging status.

✽✽ NOTICEWhen the air conditioning is turnedon and the outside air position isselected by the auto defogging sys-tem, if you try to turn off the air con-ditioning and select the recirculatedair position, the indicator will blink3 times and the air conditioning willnot be turned off and recirculatedair position will not be selected.

ONCNCO2038

CAUTIONDo not remove the sensor coverlocated on the upper end of thedriver side windshield glass.Damage to system parts couldoccur and may not be coveredby your vehicle warranty.

4 147


Center console storage

To open the center console storage,pull up the lever.

Glove box

The glove box can be locked andunlocked with the mechanical key (1).To open the glove box, push the but-ton (2) and the glove box will auto-matically open (3). Close the glovebox after use.

STORAGE COMPARTMENTS

WARNING - Flammablematerials

Do not store cigarette lighters,propane cylinders, or otherflammable/explosive materialsin the vehicle. These items maycatch fire and/or explode if thevehicle is exposed to hot tem-peratures for extended periods.

CAUTION• To avoid possible theft, do not

leave valuables in the storagecompartments.

• Always keep the storage com-partment covers closed whiledriving. Do not attempt toplace so many items in thestorage compartment that thestorage compartment covercannot close securely.

ODM042304

ODMECO2033

ODMECO2032

■ Type A

■ Type B


1484

Multi box (if equipped)

To open the cover, push the lever (1)and the multi box will open automati-cally.It can be used for storing small items.

Sunglass holder

To open the sunglass holder, pressthe cover and the holder will slowlyopen. Place your sunglasses in thecompartment door with the lensesfacing out. Push to close.

WARNING To reduce the risk of injury in anaccident or sudden stop, alwayskeep the glove box door closedwhile driving.

CAUTIONDo not drive with the multi boxopen.

ODM042307 ODM042308

4 149


Luggage tray

You can place a first aid kit, a reflec-tor triangle, tools, etc. in the luggagetray for easy access.Grasp the handle on the top of thecover and lift it.

ONCNCO2024

WARNING• Do not keep objects except

sunglasses inside the sun-glass holder. Such objects canbe thrown from the holder inthe event of a sudden stop oran accident, possibly injuringthe passengers in the vehicle.

• Do not open the sunglassholder while the vehicle ismoving. The rear view mirrorof the vehicle can be blockedby an open sunglass holder.

• Do not put the glasses forciblyinto a sunglass holder to pre-vent breakage or deformationof glasses. It may cause per-sonal injury if you try to openit forcibly when the glassesare jammed in holder.


1504

INTERIOR FEATURESCigarette lighter (if equipped)

For the cigarette lighter to work, theignition switch must be in the ACCposition or the ON position.To use the cigarette lighter:1. Open the cover by pressing the

switch.2. Push the lighter all the way into the

socket.When the element has heated, thelighter will pop out to the "ready"position.

If it is necessary to replace the ciga-rette lighter, use only a genuineHYUNDAI replacement or itsapproved equivalent.

Cup holder

OANNCO43014

ODM042316

ONCNCO2026

■ Front

■ Rear

■ Center

CAUTIONThe use of plug-in accessories(shavers, hand-held vacuums,and coffee pots, for example)may damage the socket orcause electrical failure.

WARNING • Holding the lighter in after it is

heated will cause it to over-heat.

• If the lighter does not pop outwithin 30 seconds, remove itto prevent overheating.

ONCDCO3055

4 151


Cups or small beverage cans may beplaced in the cup holders.To use the center cup holder, pulldown the armrest and press theopen button.

Sunvisor

Use the sunvisor to shield direct lightthrough the front or side windows.To use a sunvisor, pull it downward.To use a sunvisor for a side window,pull it downward, unsnap it from thebracket (1) and swing it to the side (2).

OYF049145

HTG2174

WARNING - Hot liquids• Do not place uncovered cups

of hot liquid in the cup holderwhile the vehicle is in motion.If the hot liquid spills, you mayburn yourself. Such a burn tothe driver could lead to loss ofcontrol of the vehicle.

• To reduce the risk of personalinjury in the event of suddenstop or collision, do not placeuncovered or unsecured bot-tles, glasses, cans, etc., in thecup holder while the vehicle isin motion.

WARNINGKeep cans or bottles out ofdirect sun light and do not putthem in a vehicle that is hot up.It may explode.

CAUTIONWhen cleaning spilled liquids,do not dry the cup holder athigh temperatures. This maydamage the chrome trim of thecup holder.

CAUTIONDo not place uncovered cups inthe cup holder while the vehicleis in motion. If the liquid spills,electric systems may malfunc-tion.


1524

To use the vanity mirror, pull down thevisor and slide the mirror cover (3).Adjust the sunvisor extension (ifequipped) forward or backward (4).

Power outlet The power outlet is designed to pro-vide power for mobile telephones orother devices designed to operatewith vehicle electrical systems. Thedevices should draw less than 10amps with the engine running.

CAUTION• Use the power outlet only

when the engine is runningand remove the accessoryplug after use. Using theaccessory plug for prolongedperiods of time with theengine off could cause thebattery to discharge.

• Only use 10V electric acces-sories which are less than 10Ain electric capacity. If not, itcould lead to an overheatedpower outlet or electric wiringin the vehicle and electric sys-tems may malfunction.

(Continued)

CAUTION• Always have the switch in the

off position when the vanitymirror lamp is not in use. If thesunvisor is closed without thelamp off, it may discharge thebattery or damage the sunvisor.

• Always use the sunvisorextension, after swinging thesunvisor to the side.

ODMECO2037

ODM042318

ONCNCO2039

■ Center

■ Front

■ Rear (if equipped)

4 153


AC inverter (if equipped)

The AC inverter supplies 115V/150Welectric power to operate electricaccessories or equipments.

ONCNCO2027

ONCNCO2028

(Continued)• Adjust the air-conditioner or

heater to the lowest operatinglevel when using the poweroutlet.

• Close the cover when not inuse.

• Some electronic devices cancause electronic interferencewhen plugged into a vehicle’spower outlet. These devicesmay cause excessive audiostatic and malfunctions inother electronic systems ordevices used in your vehicle.

• Make sure that the electricdevices are plugged in secure-ly. If not, it could cause a mal-function of electric systems.

• If you use an electric devicewith a battery, electric currentmay flow from the electricdevice into the vehicle andmay cause a malfunction ofelectric systems. Only useelectric devices which couldprevent inverse current.

WARNINGDo not put fingers or foreignelements (pin, etc.) into a poweroutlet and do not touch with awet hand. You may get an elec-tric shock.


1544

If you wish to use the AC inverter,pressthe AC inverter button while the engineis running. The light on the AC inverterbutton will illuminate.If you press the AC inverter buttonagain, the AC inverter will be deacti-vated and the light on the AC invert-er button will turn off.

✽✽ NOTICEWhen turning on the AC inverter, theindicator on the AC inverter buttonis delayed while the system conductsa self-check.

(Continued)• Some electronic accessories

or equipments can cause elec-tronic interference. It maycause excessive audio noiseand malfunctions in otherelectronic systems or devicesin the vehicle.

• Do not use broken electronicaccessories or equipments,which may damage the ACinverter and electrical sys-tems of the vehicle.

• Do not use two or more elec-tronic accessories or equip-ments at the same time. It maycause damage to the electricalsystems of the vehicle.

• When the input voltage is under11V, the outlet LED will blinkand the AC inverter will turn offautomatically. If the input volt-age goes up to normal, the ACinverter will turn on again.

• Do not use extensions or powerstrips.

WARNINGTo reduce a risk of serious orfatal injuries:• Do not use a heated electric

device such as a coffeepot,toaster, heater, iron, etc.

• Do not insert foreign objectsinto the outlet and do nottouch the outlet as you mayget shocked.

• Do not let children touch theAC inverter.

CAUTION• To prevent the battery from

being discharged, do not usethe AC inverter while theengine is not running.

• When not using the AC invert-er,make sure to turn off the ACinverter (the indicator on thebutton does not illuminate) andclose the AC inverter cover.

• After using an electronicaccessory or equipment, pullthe plug out. Leaving theaccessory or equipmentplugged in for a long time maycause battery discharge.

• Do not use an electronic acces-sory or equipment with thepower consumption greaterthan 150W(115V).

(Continued)

4 155


WARNINGThe floor mat must be properlyanchored so that it will notinterfere with the operation ofthe accelerator pedal. Any inter-ference with the acceleratorpedal could cause the accelera-tor pedal not to return to theidle position. A pedal that can-not return to the idle positioncould lead to an accident whichmay result in severe personalinjury or death.

Clothes hanger (if equipped)

To use the hanger, pull down theupper portion of hanger.

Floor mat anchor(s)

When using a floor mat on the frontfloor carpet, make sure it attaches tothe floor mat anchor(s) in your vehi-cle. This keeps the floor mat fromsliding forward.

ODMECO2038

CAUTIONDo not hang heavy clothes,because it may damage the hook.

ODMECO2034



1564

Aux, USB and iPod® port

If your vehicle has an aux and/orUSB(universal serial bus) port oriPod® port, you can use an aux portto connect audio devices and a USBport to plug in a USB and also in aniPod®.

✽✽ NOTICEWhen using a portable audio deviceconnected to the power outlet, noisemay occur during playback. If thishappens, use the power source of theportable audio device.

❈ iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc.

WARNINGThe following must be observedwhen installing ANY floor matto the vehicle, so that it will notinterfere with the pedal.• Ensure that the floor mats are

securely attached to the vehi-cle’s floor mat anchor(s)before driving the vehicle.

• Do not use ANY floor mat thatcannot be firmly attached tothe vehicle’s floor mat anchors.

• Do not stack floor mats on topof one another (e.g. all-weath-er rubber mat on top of a car-peted floor mat). Only a singlefloor mat should be installedin each position.

IMPORTANT – Your vehicle wasmanufactured with driver’s sidefloor mat anchors that aredesigned to securely hold thefloor mat in place. To avoid anyinterference with pedal opera-tion, HYUNDAI recommendsthat only the HYUNDAI floor matdesigned for use in your vehiclebe installed.

ONCDCO3053

4 157


Luggage net (holder) (if equipped)

To keep items from shifting in thecargo area, you can use the fourholders located in the cargo area toattach the luggage net.

If necessary, contact your authorizedHYUNDAI dealer to obtain a luggagenet.

✽✽ NOTICEVehicles equipped with a luggagerail system may use the shackles tohook the luggage net.

Cargo security screen(if equipped)

Use the cargo security screen tohide items stored in the cargo area.

ONCNCO2029

ONCNCO3030

■ Type A

■ Type B

WARNINGTo avoid eye injury, DO NOToverstretch the luggage net.ALWAYS keep your face andbody out of the luggage net’srecoil path. DO NOT use the lug-gage net when the strap has vis-ible signs of wear or damage.

CAUTIONTo prevent damage to the goodsor the vehicle, care should betaken when carrying fragile orbulky objects in the luggagecompartment.

ONCNCO3031


1584

To use the cargo security screen

1. Pull the cargo security screentowards the rear of the vehicle bythe handle (1).

2. Insert the guide pin into the guide(2).

✽✽ NOTICEPull out the cargo security screenwith the handle in the center to pre-vent the guide pin from falling out ofthe guide.

When the cargo security screen is notin use:

1. Pull the cargo security screenbackward and up to release it fromthe guides.

2. The cargo security screen willautomatically slide back in.

✽✽ NOTICEThe cargo security screen may notautomatically slide back in if thecargo security screen is not fullypulled out. Fully pull it out and thencarefully slide back in.

To remove the cargo securityscreen (if equipped)

1. Push in the guide pin.2. While pushing the lever, pull out

the cargo security screen.3. Open the luggage tray and keep the

cargo security screen in the tray.

ONCNCO3032ONCNCO3033

ONCNCO2034

4 159


To remove the cargo securityscreen from the luggage tray

1. Push in the guide pin.2. While pushing the guide pin, pull

out the cargo security screen.

Side curtain (if equipped)

To use the side curtain:1. Lift the curtain by the hook (1).2. Hang the curtain on both sides of

the hook.

ONCNCO2035

WARNING• Do not place objects on the

cargo security screen. Suchobjects may be thrown aboutinside the vehicle and possi-bly injure vehicle occupantsduring an accident or whenbraking.

• Never allow anyone to ride inthe luggage compartment. Itis designed for luggage only.

CAUTIONSince the cargo security screenmay be damaged or deformed,do not put luggage on it when itis used.

ODM042343

EXTERIOR FEATURESRoof rack (if equipped)

If the vehicle has a roof rack, you canload cargo on top of your vehicle.

✽✽ NOTICEIf the vehicle is equipped with a sun-roof, be sure not to position cargoonto the roof rack in such a way thatit could interfere with sunroof oper-ation.

CAUTION• When carrying cargo on the

roof rack, take the necessaryprecautions to make sure thecargo does not damage theroof of the vehicle.

• When carrying large objectson the roof rack, make surethey do not exceed the overallroof length or width.

WARNING• The following specification is

the maximum weight that canbe loaded onto the roof rack.Distribute the load as evenlyas possible onto the roof rackand secure the load firmly.

Loading cargo or luggage inexcess of the specified weightlimit on the roof rack maydamage your vehicle.

(Continued)

ROOF 100 kg (220 lbs.)RACK EVENLY DISTRIBUTED

ODM042345

(Continued)• The vehicle center of gravity will

be higher when items areloaded onto the roof rack. Avoidsudden starts, braking, sharpturns, abrupt maneuvers orhigh speeds that may result inloss of vehicle control orrollover resulting in an accident.

• Always drive slowly and turncorners carefully when carryingitems on the roof rack. Severewind updrafts, caused by pass-ing vehicles or natural causes,can cause sudden upward pres-sure on items loaded on theroof rack. This is especially truewhen carrying large, flat itemssuch as wood panels or mat-tresses. This could cause theitems to fall off the roof rack andcause damage to your vehicleor others around you.

• To prevent damage or loss ofcargo while driving, check fre-quently before or while drivingto make sure the items on theroof rack are securely fastened.

4 160


4 161


✽✽ NOTICE • If you install an aftermarket HID

headlamp, your vehicle's audioand electronic device may mal-function.

• Prevent chemicals such as per-fume, cosmetic oil, sun cream,hand cleaner, and air freshenerfrom contacting the interior partsbecause they may cause damageor discoloration.

AntennaRoof antenna

Your vehicle uses a roof antenna toreceive both AM and FM broadcastsignals.

Steering wheel audio control

The steering wheel incorporatesaudio control buttons on the left handside of the steering wheel.

AUDIO SYSTEM

OANNMM2901

CAUTIONDo not operate audio remotecontrol buttons simultaneously.

ODM042327


1624

MODE (1)Press the button to change audiosource.

PRESET/SEEK ( / ) (2)The SEEK/PRESET button has dif-ferent functions based on the systemmode.For the following functions the buttonshould be pressed for 0.8 second ormore.

RADIO mode

It will function as the AUTO SEEKselect button.

CD/USB/iPod® mode

It will function as the FF/REW button.

If the SEEK/PRESET button ispressed for less than 0.8 second, itwill work as follows in each mode.

RADIO mode

It will function as the PRESET STA-TION buttons.

CD/USB/iPod® mode

It will function as TRACK UP/DOWNbutton.

VOLUME (VOL+/-) (3)• Push the lever upward (+) to

increase the volume.• Push the lever downward (-) to

decrease the volume.

MUTE (4)• Press the button to mute the sound.• Press the button to turn off the

microphone during a telephone call.

Detailed information for audio controlbuttons are described in the followingpages in this section.

4 163


How vehicle audio works

AM and FM radio signals are broad-cast from transmitter towers locatedaround your city. They are intercept-ed by the radio antenna on your vehi-cle. This signal is then processed bythe radio and sent to your vehiclespeakers.When a strong radio signal hasreached your vehicle, the preciseengineering of your audio systemensures the best possible qualityreproduction. However, in somecases the signal coming to your vehi-cle may not be strong and clear.

This can be due to factors, such asthe distance from the radio station,closeness of other strong radio sta-tions or the presence of buildings,bridges or other large obstructions inthe area.

AM broadcasts can be received atgreater distances than FM broad-casts. This is because AM radiowaves are transmitted at low fre-quencies. These long distance, lowfrequency radio waves can follow thecurvature of the earth rather thantravelling straight. In addition, theycurve around obstructions resultingin better signal coverage.

JBM001

FM reception

JBM002

AM reception


1644

FM broadcasts are transmitted athigh frequencies and do not bend tofollow the earth's surface. Becauseof this, FM broadcasts generallybegin to fade within short distancesfrom the station. Also, FM signals areeasily affected by buildings, moun-tains, and obstructions. This can leadto undesirable or unpleasant listen-ing conditions which might lead youto believe a problem exists with yourradio. The following conditions arenormal and do not indicate radiotrouble:

• Fading - As your vehicle movesaway from the radio station, thesignal will weaken and sound willbegin to fade. When this occurs,we suggest that you select anotherstronger station.

• Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals orlarge obstructions between thetransmitter and your radio can dis-turb the signal causing static orfluttering noises to occur. Reducingthe treble level may lessen thiseffect until the disturbance clears.

• Station Swapping - As an FM sig-nal weakens, another more power-ful signal near the same frequencymay begin to play. This is becauseyour radio is designed to lock ontothe clearest signal. If this occurs,select another station with astronger signal.

• Multi-Path Cancellation - Radiosignals being received from sever-al directions can cause distortionor fluttering. This can be caused bya direct and reflected signal fromthe same station, or by signalsfrom two stations with close fre-quencies. If this occurs, selectanother station until the conditionhas passed.

JBM003

FM radio station

JBM004 JBM005

4 165


Using a cellular phone or a two-way radio When a cellular phone is used insidethe vehicle, noise may be producedfrom the audio system. This does notmean that something is wrong withthe audio equipment. In such a case,try to operate mobile devices as farfrom the audio equipment as possible.

Caring for CDs• If the temperature inside the car is too

high, open the car windows to venti-late before using the system.

• It is illegal to copy and useMP3/WMA files without permission.Use CDs that are created only bylawful means.

• Do not apply volatile agents, suchas benzene and thinner, normalcleaners and magnetic spraysmade for analogue disc onto CDs.

• To prevent the disc surface fromgetting damaged, hold CDs by theedges or the center hole only.

• Clean the disc surface with a pieceof soft cloth before playback (wipeit from the center to the outsideedge).

• Do not damage the disc surface orattach pieces of sticky tape orpaper.

• Make certain only CDs are insert-ed into the CD player (Do not insertmore than one CD at a time).

• Keep CDs in their cases after use toprotect them from scratches or dirt.

• Depending on the type of CD-R/CD-RW CDs, certain CDs maynot operate normally according tothe manufacturing companies. Insuch circumstances, continueduse may cause malfunctions toyour audio system.

✽✽ NOTICE - Playing an Incompatible

Copy Protected Audio CDSome copy protected CDs, which donot comply with international audioCD standards (Red Book), may notplay on your car audio. Please notethat inabilities to properly play acopy protected CD may indicatethat the CD is defective, not the CDplayer.

CAUTIONWhen using a communicationsystem such as a cellular phoneor a radio set inside the vehicle,a separate external antennamust be fitted. When a cellularphone or a radio set is usedwith an internal antenna alone,it may interfere with the vehi-cle's electrical system andadversely affect safe operationof the vehicle.

WARNINGDo not use a cellular phonewhile driving. Stop at a safelocation to use a cellular phone.


1664

NOTE:Order of playing files (folders) :1. Song playing order : to

sequentially.2. Folder playing order :❋ If no song file is contained in the

folder, that folder is not displayed.

WARNING• Do not stare at the screen

while driving. Staring at thescreen for prolonged periodsof time could lead to trafficaccidents.

• Do not disassemble, assem-ble, or modify the audio sys-tem. Such acts could result inaccidents, fire, or electricshock.

• Using the phone while drivingmay lead to a lack of attention oftraffic conditions and increasethe likelihood of accidents.Use the phone feature afterparking the vehicle.

• Heed caution not to spill wateror introduce foreign objectsinto the device. Such actscould lead to smoke, fire, orproduct malfunction.

(Continued)

4 167


(Continued)• Turn on the car ignition before

using this device. Do not oper-ate the audio system for longperiods of time with the ignitionturned off as such operationsmay lead to battery discharge.

• Do not subject the device tosevere shock or impact. Directpressure onto the front side ofthe monitor may cause dam-age to the LCD or touchscreen.

• When cleaning the device,make sure to turn off thedevice and use a dry andsmooth cloth. Never usetough materials, chemicalcloths, or solvents (alcohol,benzene, thinners, etc.) assuch materials may damagethe device panel or causecolor/quality deterioration.

(Continued)

CAUTION• Operating the device while

driving could lead to accidentsdue to a lack of attention toexternal surroundings. Firstpark the vehicle before operat-ing the device.

• Adjust the volume to levels thatallow the driver to hear soundsfrom outside of the vehicle.Driving in a state where exter-nal sounds cannot be heardmay lead to accidents.

• Pay attention to the volume set-ting when turning the deviceon. A sudden output of extremevolume upon turning thedevice on could lead to hearingimpairment. (Adjust the volumeto a suitable levels before turn-ing off the device.)

(Continued)

(Continued)• Please refrain from use if the

screen is blank or no soundcan be heard as these signsmay indicate product malfunc-tion. Continued use in suchconditions could lead to acci-dents(fires, electric shock) orproduct malfunctions.

• Do not touch the antenna dur-ing thunder or lightening assuch acts may lead to light-ning induced electric shock.

• Do not stop or park in park-ing-restricted areas to operatethe product. Such acts couldlead to traffic accidents.

• Use the system with the vehi-cle ignition turned on.Prolonged use with the igni-tion turned off could result inbattery discharge.


1684

(Continued)• Do not place beverages close

to the audio system. Spillingbeverages may lead to systemmalfunction.

• In case of product malfunction,please contact your place of pur-chase or After Service center.

• Placing the audio systemwithin an electromagneticenvironment may result innoise interference.

• Prevent caustic solutionssuch as perfume and cosmet-ic oil from contacting thedashboard because they maycause damage or discol-oration.

4 169


✽✽ NOTICE - USING THEUSB DEVICE

• To use an external USB device,make sure the device is not con-nected when starting up thevehicle. Connect the device afterstarting up.

• If you start the engine when theUSB device is connected, it maydamage the USB device. (USBflashdrives are very sensitive toelectric shock.)

• If the engine is started up orturned off while the external USBdevice is connected, the externalUSB device may not work.

• The System may not play unau-thenticated MP3 or WMA files.

1) It can only play MP3 files withthe compression rate between8Kbps~320Kbps.

2) It can only play WMA musicfiles with the compression ratebetween 8Kbps~320Kbps.

• Take precautions for static elec-tricity when connecting or dis-connecting the external USBdevice.

(Continued)

(Continued)• An encrypted MP3 PLAYER is

not recognizable.• Depending on the condition of

the external USB device, theconnected external USB devicecan be unrecognizable.

• When the formatted byte/sectorsetting of External USB deviceis not either 512BYTE or2048BYTE, then the device willnot be recognized.

• Use only a USB device format-ted to FAT 12/16/32.

• USB devices without USB I/Fauthentication may not be rec-ognizable.

• Make sure the USB connectionterminal does not come in con-tact with the human body orother objects.

• If you repeatedly connect or dis-connect the USB device in ashort period of time, it maybreak the device.

• You may hear a strange noisewhen connecting or disconnect-ing a USB device.

(Continued)

(Continued)• If you disconnect the external

USB device during playback inUSB mode, the external USBdevice can be damaged or maymalfunction. Therefore, discon-nect the external USB devicewhen the audio is turned off orin another mode. (e.g, Radio,CD)

• Depending on the type andcapacity of the external USBdevice or the type of the filesstored in the device, there is adifference in the time taken forrecognition of the device.

• Do not use the USB device forpurposes other than playingmusic files.

• Playing videos through the USBis not supported.

• Use of USB accessories such asrechargers or heaters using USBI/F may lower performance orcause trouble.

(Continued)


1704

(Continued)• Some USB flash memory read-

ers (such as CF, SD, micro SD,etc.) or external-HDD typedevices can be unrecognizable.

• Music files protected by DRM(DIGITAL RIGHTS MANAGE-MENT) are not recognizable.

• The data in the USB memorymay be lost while using thisaudio. Always back up impor-tant data on a personal storagedevice.

• Please avoid usingUSB memory prod-ucts which can beused as key chains orcellular phone acces-sories as they could cause dam-age to the USB jack. Pleasemake certain only to use plugtype connector products.

(Continued)• If you use devices such as a USB

hub purchased separately, thevehicle’s audio system may notrecognize the USB device. In thatcase, connect the USB devicedirectly to the multimedia termi-nal of the vehicle.

• If the USB device is divided bylogical drives, only the music fileson the highest-priority drive arerecognized by car audio.

• Devices such as MP3 Player/Cellular phone/Digital camera canbe unrecognizable by standardUSB I/F can be unrecognizable.

• Charging through the USB maynot be supported in some mobiledevices.

• USB HDD or USB types liable toconnection failures due to vehiclevibrations are not supported. (i-stick type)

• Some non-standard USB devices(METAL COVER TYPE USB)can be unrecognizable.

(Continued)

✽✽ NOTICE - USING THEiPod® DEVICE

• Some iPod® models may notsupport communication proto-col and files may not properlyplay.Supported iPod® models:- iPhone® 3GS/4- iPod® touch 1st~4th generation- iPod® nano 1st~6th generation- iPod® classic

• The order of search or playbackof songs in the iPod® can be dif-ferent from the order searchedin the audio system.

• If the iPod® is disabled due to itsown malfunction, reset theiPod®. (Reset: Refer to iPod®

manual)• An iPod® may not operate nor-

mally on low battery.(Continued)

4 171


(Continued)• Some iPod® devices, such as the

iPhone® , can be connectedthrough the Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology interface. Thedevice must have audioBluetooth® Wireless Technologycapability (such as for stereoheadphone Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology).The device can play, but it willnot be controlled by the audiosystem.

• To use iPod® features within theaudio, use the cable providedupon purchasing an iPod®

device.• Skipping or improper operation

may occur depending on thecharacteristics of your iPod®/iPhone® device.

• If your iPhone® is connected toboth the Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology and USB, the soundmay not be properly played. Inyour iPhone®, select the Dockconnector or Bluetooth®Wireless Technology to changethe sound output (source).

(Continued)

(Continued)• When connecting iPod® with the

iPod® Power Cable, insert theconnector to the multimediasocket completely. If not insert-ed completely, communicationsbetween iPod® and audio maybe interrupted.

• When adjusting the soundeffects of the iPod® and theaudio system, the sound effectsof both devices will overlap andmight reduce or distort thequality of the sound.

• Deactivate (turn off) the equal-izer function of an iPod® whenadjusting the audio system’svolume, and turn off the equal-izer of the audio system whenusing the equalizer of an iPod®.

• When not using iPod® with caraudio, detach the iPod® cablefrom iPod®. Otherwise, iPod®

may remain in accessory mode,and may not work properly.

✽✽ NOTICE - Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology

• The Bluetooth® word mark andlogos are registered trademarksowned by Bluetooth SIG, lnc.and any use of such marks isunder license.A Bluetooth® enabled call phoneis required to use Bluetooth®wireless technology.

• Bluetooth® Wireless Technologyphone compatibility can bechecked by visiting www.hyundaiusa.com and under theCARING FOR YOUR CAR -BLUETOOTH COMPATIBILI-TY menu.


1724

✽✽ NOTICE - BEFORE USINGTHE Bluetooth®

HANDSFREE

What is Bluetooth® ?• Bluetooth® refers to a short-dis-

tance wireless networking technol-ogy which uses a 2.4GHz ~2.48GHz frequency to connectvarious devices within a certaindistance.

• Supported within PCs, externaldevices, Bluetooth® phones, PDAs,various electronic devices, andautomotive environments,Bluetooth® allows data to be trans-mitted at high speeds without hav-ing to use a connector cable.

• Bluetooth® Handsfree refers to adevice which allows the user toconveniently make phone callswith Bluetooth® mobile phonesthrough the audio system.

• Bluetooth®Handsfree may not be sup-ported in some mobile phones. Tolearn more about mobile device com-patibility, visit www. hyundaiusa.com.

✽✽ NOTICE - PRECAUTIONSFOR SAFE DRIVING

• Bluetooth® Handsfree is a featurethat enables drivers to practicesafe driving. Connecting the headunit with a Bluetooth® phoneallows the user to convenientlymake and receive calls and usecontacts. Before using Bluetooth®,carefully read the contents of thisuser’s manual.

• Excessive use or operations whiledriving may lead to negligent driv-ing practices and result in acci-dents. Refrain from excessiveoperations while driving.

• Viewing the screen for prolongedperiods of time is dangerous andmay lead to accidents. When driv-ing, view the screen only for shortperiods of time.

✽✽ NOTICE -WHEN CON-NECTING A Bluetooth®

PHONE

• Before connecting the head unitwith the mobile phone, check tosee that the mobile phone supportsBluetooth® features.

• Even if the phone supportsBluetooth®, the phone will not befound during device searches if thephone has been set to hidden stateor the Bluetooth® power is turnedoff. Disable the hidden state orturn on the Bluetooth® powerprior to searching/connecting withthe Head unit.

• After a Bluetooth phone has beensuccessfully paired, the phone willautomatically connect when theignition is turned on.

• If you do not want automatic con-nection with your Bluetooth®device, turn off the Bluetooth® fea-ture within your mobile phone.

• The Handsfree call volume andquality may differ depending onthe mobile phone.

(Continued)

4 173


(Continued)

• Park the vehicle when connectingthe head unit with the mobilephone.

• Bluetooth® connection maybecome intermittently disconnect-ed in some mobile phones. Followthese steps to try again.1. Within the mobile phone, turn

the Bluetooth® function off/onand try again.

2. Turn the mobile phone powerOff/On and try again.

3. Completely remove the mobilephone battery, reboot, and thenagain.

4. Reboot the Audio System andtry again.

5. Delete all paired devices, pairand try again.

• Handsfree call quality and volumemay differ depending on themodel of your mobile phone.

✽✽ NOTICE - USING THEVoice Recognition

• When using the voice recognitionfeature, only commands listedwithin the user's manual are sup-ported.

• Be aware that during the opera-tion of the voice recognition sys-tem, pressing any key other thanthe key terminate voice recog-nition mode.

• For superior voice recognitionperformance, position the micro-phone used for voice recognitionabove the head of the driver’s seatand maintain a proper positionwhen saying commands.

• Within the following situations,voice recognition may not functionproperly due to background noiseswhich may be picked up by theoverhead microphone.- When the windows and sunroof

are open- When the heating and air condi-

tioning fan blower speed is high- When entering and passing

through tunnels(Continued)

(Continued)

- When driving on rugged anduneven roads

- During severe rain (heavy rains,windstorms)

• Phone related voice commandscan be used only when aBluetooth® Wireless Technologydevice is connected.

• When making calls by stating aname, the corresponding contactmust be downloaded and storedwithin the audio system.

• After downloading the Bluetooth®Wireless Technology phone book,it takes some times to convert thephone book data into voice infor-mation. During this time, voicerecognition may not properlyoperate.

• Pronounce the voice commandsnaturally and clearly as if in a nor-mal conversation.


1744

■ DOT LCD type audio

Press the key Select [Phone]

1. If you CAN find “Audio Streaming” menu,(Go to 175 page)

2. If you CANNOT find “Audio Streaming” menu,(Go to 347 page)

■ Color LCD type audio

Press the key Select [Phone]

1. If you CAN find “Streaming Audio” menu,(Go to 244 page)

2. If you CANNOT find “Streaming Audio” menu,(Go to 395 page)

SETUPSETUP

The Bluetooth and Voice Recognition Manual is provided in two versions due to software version differences.Before reading the manual, check the following.

4 175


■■ CD Player : AM1B2DMKN, AM1B3DMAN


1764

SYSTEM CONTROLLERSAND FUNCTIONS

❈ Display and settings may differdepending on the selected audio.

Audio Head Unit1. (EJECT)• Ejects the disc.

2.• Changes to FM/AM/XM mode.

• Each time the key is pressed, themode is changed in order of FM1 ➟FM2 ➟ AM ➟ XM1 ➟ XM2 ➟ XM3.

❈ In Setup>Display, the radio pop upscreen will be displayed when[Mode Pop up] is turned .When the pop up screen is dis-played, use the TUNE knob orkeys ~ to select thedesired mode.

3.• Changes to CD, USB(iPod®), AUX,

My Music, BT Audio mode.• Each time the key is pressed, the

mode is changed in order of CD,USB(iPod®), AUX, My Music, BTAudio.

❈ In Setup>Display, the media popup screen will be displayed when[Mode Pop up] is turned .When the pop up screen is dis-played, use the TUNE knob orkeys ~ to select thedesired mode.

4.• Operates Phone Screen❈ When a phone is not connected,

the connection screen is displayed.

5. PWR/VOL knob• Power : Turns power On/Off by

pressing the knob• Volume : Sets volume by turning

the knob left/right

6.• Radio Mode : Automatically search-

es for broadcast frequencies.• CD, USB, iPod®, My Music modes

- Shortly press the key (under 0.8 sec-onds): Moves to next or previous song(file)

- Press and hold the key (over 0.8seconds): Rewinds or fast-forwardsthe current song.

• BT Audio mode : Moves to next orprevious song(file)

❈ The Play/Pause feature may oper-ate differently depending on themobile phone.

SEEKTRACK

PHONE

51

On

MEDIA

61

On

RADIO

4 177


7.• Radio Mode

- XM RADIO™ : Category Search• MP3, CD, USB mode : Folder

Search

8. ~ (Preset)• Radio Mode: Saves frequencies

(channels) or receives saved fre-quencies (channels)

• CD, USB, iPod®, My Music mode- : Repeat- : Random

• In the Radio, Media, Setup, andMenu pop up screen, the numbermenu is selected.

9.• Each time the button is shortly

pressed (under 0.8 seconds), itsets the screen Off ➟ Screen On ➟Screen Off

❈ Audio operation is maintained andonly the screen will be turned Off.In the screen Off state, press anykey to turn the screen On again.

10.• Radio Mode- Shortly press the key (under 0.8

seconds): Previews each broad-cast for 5 seconds each.

- Press and hold the key (over 0.8seconds): Previews the broadcastssaved in Preset ~ for 5seconds each.

❈ Press the key again tocontinue listening to the currentfrequency.

❈ XM Radio™ does not support thePreset scan feature.

• CD, USB, My Music mode- Shortly press the key (under 0.8

seconds): Previews each song(file) for 10 seconds each.

❈ Press the key again tocontinue listening to the currentsong (file).

11.• Shortly press the key (under 0.8

seconds) : Moves to the Display,Sound, Clock, Phone, System set-ting modes.

• Press and hold the key (over 0.8seconds) : Move to the Time set-ting screen.

12.• Displays menus for the current mode.

13. TUNE knob• Radio mode : Changes frequency

by turning the knob left/right.• CD, USB, iPod®, My Music mode:

Searches songs (files) by turningthe knob left/right.

MENU

SETUPCLOCK

SCAN

SCAN

61

SCAN

DISP

2

1

61

CATFOLDER


1784

❈ When the desired song is dis-played, press the knob to play thesong.

• Moves focus in all selection menusand selects menus.

14. DISC-IN LED• LED that indicates whether a disc is

inserted

4 179


SETUP

Display Settings

Press the key Select [Display]through TUNE knob or keySelect menu through TUNE knob

Mode Pop up[Mode Pop up] Changes /selection mode• During On state, press the

or key to display the modechange pop up screen.

Text Scroll[Text Scroll] Set /• : Maintains scroll• : Scrolls only one (1) time.

Media DisplayWhen playing an MP3 file, select thedesired display info from ‘Folder/File’or ‘Album/Artist/Song’.

Sound Settings

Press the key Select [Sound]through TUNE knob or keySelect menu through TUNE knob

2SETUP

Off

On

OffOn

MEDIARADIO

OffOn

1SETUP


1804

Sound SettingsThis menu allows you to set the ‘Bass,Middle, Treble’ and the Sound Fader andBalance.Select [Sound Settings] Selectmenu through TUNE knob Turn

TUNE knob left/right to set• Bass, Middle, Treble : Selects the

sound tone.• Fader, Balance : Moves the sound

fader and balance.• Default : Restores default settings.❈ Back : While adjusting values, re-

pressing the TUNE knob willrestore the parent menu.

Virtual SoundThe PoewrBass, PowerTreble, andSurround can be set.Select [Virtual Sound] Set menuthrough TUNE knob Set /

through TUNE knob• PowerBass : This is a sound sys-

tem feature that provides live bass.• PowerTreble :This is a sound system

feature that provides live tremble.• Surround : This is a sound system

feature that provides surroundsound.

❈ May differ depending on the selectedaudio.

Speed Dependent Volume ControlThis feature is used to automaticallycontrol the volume level according tothe speed of the vehicle.Select [Speed Dependent Vol.] Setin 4 levels [Off/Low/Mid/High] of

TUNE knob

Voice Recognition VolumeAdjusts voice recognition volume.Select [Voice Recognition Vol.] Setvolume of TUNE knob

Off

On

4 181


Blue Link® Voice Volume(for Blue Link® equipped model)

Sets the Blue Link® voice recognitionvolume.❈ While using Blue Link® voice

recognition, turning the tune knobwill display the volume controlpopup screen.

❈ May differ depending on theselected audio.

Clock Settings

Press the key Select [Clock]through TUNE knob or keySelect menu through TUNE knob

Clock SettingsThis menu is used to set the time.Select [Clock Settings] Set through

TUNE knob Press TUNE knob

❈ Adjust the number currently infocus to set the [hour] and pressthe tune knob to set the [minute].

3

SETUPCLOCK


1824

Calendar SettingsThis menu is used to set the date(MM/DD/YYYY).Select [Calendar Settings]] Setthrough TUNE knob Press TUNE knob

❈ Adjust the number currently infocus to make the settings andpress the tune knob to move to thenext setting. (Set in order ofYear/Month/Day)

Time FormatThis function is used to set the 12/24hour time format of the audio system.Select [Time Format] Set 12Hr /24Hr through TUNE knob

Clock Display when Power isOFFSelect [Clock Disp.(Pwr Off)] Set

/ through TUNE knob• : Displays time/date on screen• : Turn off.Off

On

OffOn

4 183


SYSTEM SETTINGS

Press the key Select[System] through tune knob or key Select menu through TUNEknob

Memory InformationDisplays currently used memory andtotal system memory.Select [Memory Information] OKThe currently used memory is dis-played on the left side while the totalsystem memory is displayed on theright side.

Prompt FeedbackThis feature is used to change voicecommand feedback between Normaland Expert modes.Select [Prompt Feedback] Setthrough TUNE knob• On : This mode is for beginner

users and provides detailedinstructions during voice commandoperation.

• Off : This mode is for expert usersand omits some information duringvoice command operation. (Whenusing Expert mode, guidanceinstructions can be heard throughthe [Help] or [Menu] commands.

LanguageThis menu is used to set the displayand voice recognition language.Select [Language]Set through TUNE knob

❈ The system will reboot after thelanguage is changed.

❈ Language support by region- English, Francais, Espanol

5SETUP


1844

RADIO : FM, AM OR XM

SEEKPress the key• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8

seconds): Changes the frequency.• Pressing and holding the key (over

0.8 seconds): Automatically search-es for the next frequency.

Preset SEEKPress the ~ key• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8

seconds): Plays the frequencysaved in the corresponding key.

• Pressing and holding the key (over0.8 seconds): Pressing and holdingthe desired key from ~ will save the currently playingbroadcast to the selected key andsound a BEEP.

SCANPress the key• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8

seconds): The broadcast frequencyincreases and previews eachbroadcast for 5 seconds each. Afterscanning all frequencies, returnsand plays the current broadcast fre-quency.

• Pressing and holding the key (over0.8 seconds): Previews the broad-casts saved in Preset ~ for 5 seconds each.

Selecting through manualsearchTurn the TUNE knob left/right toadjust the frequency.• FM : Changes by 200KHz• AM : Changes by 10MHz

61

SCAN

61

61

SEEKTRACK

4 185


MENUWithin key are the A.Store(Auto Store) and Info functions.

A.StorePress the key Set [A.Store]through TUNE knob or key.Saves broadcasts with superiorreception to ~ keys. If nofrequencies are received, then themost recently received frequency willbe broadcast.

61

1MENU

MENU


1864

XM RADIO

Using XM satellite™ RadioYour vehicle is equipped with a 3month complimentary period of XMSatellite™ Radio. XM providesaccess to over 130 channels ofmusic, information, and entertain-ment programming.

SEEKPress the key• Shortly pressing the key: select

previous or next channel.• Pressing and holding the key (over

0.8 seconds): continuously move toprevious or next channel.

❈ If the “Category” icon is displayed,channels are changed within thecurrent category.

SCANPress the key• Shortly pressing the key: Previews

each broadcast for 5 secondseach

❈ Press the key again tocontinue listening to the currentfrequency


CategoryPress the key Set throughthe TUNE knob

• The display will indicate the catego-ry menus, highlight the categorythat the current channel belongs to.

• In the Category List Mode, pressthe key to navigate cat-egory list.

• Press the tune knob to select thelowest channel in the highlightedcategory.

❈ If channel is selected by selectingcategory, then the “CATEGORY”icon is displayed at the top of thescreen.

PresetPress the ~ key• Shortly pressing the key: Plays the

frequency saved in the correspon-ding key.

• Pressing and holding the key (over0.8 seconds): Pressing and holdingthe desired key from ~ will save the current broadcast tothe selected key and sound aBEEP.

61

61

CATFOLDER

CATFOLDER

SCAN

SCAN

SEEKTRACK

4 187


Tune• Rotate TUNE knob : Changes the

channel number or scrolls categorylist.

• Press TUNE knob : Selects themenu.

MenuSelect category menu through the

TUNE knob Press the keySelect [ Info] through the TUNE

knob or key

Info (Information)

Displays the Artist/Song info of thecurrent song.

1

MENU


1884

BASIC METHOD OF USE :Audio CD / MP3 CD / USB /iPod® / My Music

Press the key to change themod mode in order of CD ➟

USB(iPod®) ➟ AUX ➟ My Music ➟ BTAudio.The folder/file name is displayed onthe screen.

<Audio CD>

<CD MP3>

<USB>

<My Music>

❈ The CD is automatically playedwhen a CD is inserted.

❈ The USB music is automaticallyplayed when a USB is connected.

RepeatWhile song (file) is playing(RPT) keyAudio CD, MP3 CD, USB, iPod®, MyMusic mode: RPT on screen• To repeat one song (Press the key):

Repeats the current song.MP3 CD, USB mode: FLD.RPT onscreen• To repeat folder (pressing twice):

repeats all files within the currentfolder.

❈ Press the key again to turnoff repeat.

RandomWhile song (file) is playing(RDM) keyAudio CD, My Music mode: RDM onscreen• Random (Press the key): Plays all

songs in random order.

2 RDM

1 RPT

1 RPT

MEDIA

4 189


MP3 CD, USB mode: FLD.RDM onscreen• Folder Random (Press the key) :

Plays all files within the current fold-er in random order.

iPod® mode: ALB RDM on screen• Album Random (Press the key) :

Plays all files within albums of thecurrent category in random order.

MP3 CD, USB, iPod® mode: ALLRDM on screen• All Random (pressing twice): Plays

all files in random order.❈ Press the key again to turn

off repeat.

Changing Song/FileWhile song (file) is playingkey• Shortly pressing the key : Plays the

current song from the beginning.❈ If the key is pressed

again within 3 second, the previ-ous song is played.

• Pressing and holding the key (over0.8 seconds): Rewinds the song.

While song (file) is playingkey

• Shortly pressing the key : Plays thenext song.

• Pressing and holding the key (over0.8 seconds): Fast forwards thesong.

ScanWhile song (file) is playingkey• Shortly pressing the key : Scans all

songs from the next song for 10seconds each.

❈ Press the key again to turnoff.

❈ The SCAN function is not support-ed in iPod® mode.

Folder Search : MP3 CD, USBModeWhile file is playing(Folder Up) key• Searches the next folder.While file is playing(Folder Down) key• Searches the parent folder.❈ If a folder is selected by pressing

the TUNE knob, the first filewithin the selected folder will beplayed.

❈ In iPod® mode, moves to theParent Folder.

Searching Songs (File)• Turning TUNE knob : Searches

for songs (files)• Pressing TUNE knob : Plays

selected song (file).

CATFOLDER

CATFOLDER

SCAN

SCAN

SEEKTRACK

SEEKTRACK

SEEKTRACK

2 RDM


1904

MENU : Audio CDPress the CD MP3 mode keyto set the Repeat, Random,Information features.

RepeatPress the key Set [ RPT]through the TUNE knob or key to repeat the current song.❈ Press RPT again to turn off.

RandomPress the key Set [ RDM]through the TUNE knob or key to randomly play songs withinthe current folder.❈ Press RDM again to turn off.

InformationPress the key Set [ Info]through the TUNE knob or key to display information of the cur-rent song.❈ Press the key to turn off

info display.

MENU : MP3 CD / USBPress the CD MP3 mode keyto set the Repeat, Folder Random,Folder Repeat, All Random,Information, and Copy features.


1 RPT

MENU

MENU

MENU

3MENU

2 RDM

MENU

1 RPT

MENU

MENU

4 191


Folder RandomPress the key Set [ F.RDM]through the TUNE knob or key to randomly play songs within thecurrent folder.❈ Press F.RDM again to turn off.

Folder RepeatPress the key Set [ F.RPT]through the TUNE knob or key to repeat songs within the cur-rent folder.❈ Press F.RPT again to turn off.

All RandomPress the key Set [ A.RDM]through the TUNE knob or keyto randomly play all songs within theCD.❈ Press A.RDM again to turn off.

InformationPress the key Set [ Info]through the TUNE knob or key to display information of the cur-rent song.

❈ Press the key to turn offinfo display.

CopyPress the key Set [ Copy]through the TUNE knob or key.• This is used to copy the current

song into My Music. You can playthe copied Music in My Musicmode.

❈ If another key is pressed whilecopying is in progress, a pop upasking you whether to cancelcopying is displayed.

❈ If another media is connected orinserted (USB, CD, iPod®, AUX)while copying is in progress, copy-ing is canceled.

❈ Music will not be played whilecopying is in progress.

MENU : iPod®

In iPod® mode, press the keyto set the Repeat, Album Random, AllRandom, Information and Search fea-tures.

RepeatPress the key Set [ RPT]through the TUNE knob or key to repeat the current song.❈ Press RPT again to turn repeat off.

Album RandomPress the key Set [ Alb.RDM]through the TUNE knob or key.Plays albums within the currentlyplaying category in random order.❈ Press Alb.RDM again to turn off.

2 RDM

MENU

1 RPT

MENU

MENU

6MENU

MENU

5MENU

4MENU

3MENU

2 RDM

MENU


1924

All RandomPress the key Set [A.RDM] through the TUNE knobor key.Plays all songs within the currentlyplaying category in random order.❈ Press A.RDM again to turn off.

InformationPress the key Set [ Info]through the TUNE knob or key.Displays information of the currentsong.❈ Press the key to turn off

info display.

SearchPress the key Set [ Search]through the TUNE knob or key.Displays iPod® category list.❈ Searching iPod® category is

key pressed, move to par-ent category.MENU

5MENU

MENU

4MENU

3

MENU

4 193


MENU : My Music Mode

In My Music mode, press the key to set the Repeat, Random,Information, Delete, Delete All, andDelete Selection features.

RepeatPress the key Set [ RPT]through the TUNE knob or key.Repeats the currently playing song.❈ Press RPT again to turn repeat

off.

RandomPress the key Set [ RDM]through the TUNE knob or key.Plays all songs in random order.❈ Press RDM again to turn random off.


info display.

DeletePress the key Set [ Delete]through the TUNE knob or key.• Deletes currently playing fileIn the play screen, pressing deletewill delete the currently playing song.• Deletes file from list

➀ Select the file you wish to deleteby using the TUNE knob.

➁ Press the key and selectthe delete menu to delete theselected file.

MENU

4MENU

MENU

3MENU

2 RDM

MENU

1 RPT

MENU

MENU


1944

Delete AllPress the key Set [ Del.All]through the TUNE knob or key.Deletes all songs of My Music.

Delete SelectionPress the key Set [ Del.Sel]through the TUNE knob or key.Songs within My Music are selectedand deleted.➀ Select the songs you wish to

delete from the list.

➁ After selecting, press the key andselect the delete menu.

✽✽ NOTICE - USING THE MyMusic Feature

• Even if memory is available, amaximum of 6,000 songs can bestored.

• The same song can be copied up to1,000 times.

• Memory info can be checked inthe System menu of Setup.

AUXAUX is used to play external MEDIAcurrently connected with the AUXterminal.AUX mode will automatically startwhen an external device is connect-ed with the AUX terminal.If an external device is connected,you can also press the key tochange to AUX mode.❈ AUX mode cannot be started

unless there is an external deviceconnected to the AUX terminal.

✽✽ NOTICE - USING THE AUXFully insert the AUX cable into theAUX terminal for use.

MEDIA6MENU

5MENU

4 195


Bluetooth® Wireless TechnologyAUDIO

What is Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology?Bluetooth® Wireless Technology allowsdevices to be connected in a short dis-tance, including hands-free devices,stereo headsets, wireless remote con-trollers, etc. For more information, visitthe Bluetooth® Wireless Technologywebsite at www.Bluetooth.com

Before using Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology audio features• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology

audio may not be supporteddepending on the compatibility ofyour Bluetooth® Wireless Technologymobile phone.

• In order to use Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology audio, you must firstpair and connect the Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology mobile phone.• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology

audio can be used only when the[Audio Streaming] of Phone isturned .

❈ Setting Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology Audio Streaming : Pressthe key Select [Phone]through the tune knob or keySelect [Audio Streaming] throughthe TUNE knob Set /

Starting Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology Audio• Press the key to change the

mode in order of CD ➟ USB ➟ AUX➟ My Music ➟ BT Audio.

• If BT Audio is selected, Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology audio will startplaying.

❈ Audio may not automatically startplaying in some mobile phones.

Using the Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology audio features• Play / StopPress the TUNE knob to play andpause the current song.

❈ The play / pause functions maynot be supported in some mobilephones.

MEDIA

OffOn

4SETUP

On

■ Type A

■ Type B


1964

PHONE

Before using the Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology phone features

• In order to use Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology phone, you must firstpair and connect the Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology mobile phone.• If the mobile phone is not paired or

connected, it is not possible toenter Phone mode. Once a phoneis paired or connected, the guid-ance screen will be displayed.

• If Priority is set upon vehicle igni-tion(IGN/ACC ON), the Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology phone will beautomatically connected. Even ifyou are outside, the first Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology phone will beautomatically connected once youare in the vicinity of the vehicle. Ifyou do not want automaticBluetooth® Wireless Technologyphone connection, set theBluetooth® Wireless Technologypower to OFF.

PHONE

Making a call using the Steering-wheel mount controls

1) button : Activates voice recog-nition.

2) button : Places and transferscalls.

3) button : Ends calls or cancelsfunctions.

• Check call history and making call➀ Shortly press (under 0.8 seconds)

the key on the steeringremote controller .

➁ The call history list will be dis-played on the screen.

➂ Press the key again to con-nect a call to the selected number.

• Redialing the most recently callednumber

➀ Press and hold (over 0.8 seconds)the key on the steeringremote controller.

➁ The most recently called numberis redialed.

❈ If call history does not exist, ascreen asking whether to down-load call history is displayed. (Thedownload feature may not be sup-ported in some mobile phones)

4 197


✽✽ NOTICE - PAIRINGTHROUGH [PHONE]SETUP

• The Bluetooth® and VoiceRecognition Manual is provided intwo versions due to software ver-sion differences.

• Before reading the manual, checkthe following.

• Press the key Select[Phone] Select [Pair Phone]

• From your Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology device (i.e. MobilePhone), search and select your caraudio system.

• If you entered the Passkey withinthe Bluetooth®Wireless Technologydevice (Go to page 4-200)

• If the following screen is displayedand a 6-digit passkey is checked andconfirmed within the Bluetooth®Wireless Technology device(Go to page 4-220)

SETUP


1984

Pairing a Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology Device

What is Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology Pairing?Pairing refers to the process of syn-chronizing your Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology phone or device with thecar audio system for connection.Pairing is necessary to connect anduse the Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology feature.

WARNINGDriving while distracted canresult in a loss of vehicle controlthat may lead to an accident,severe personal injury, anddeath. The driver’s primaryresponsibility is in the safe andlegal operation of a vehicle, anduse of any handheld devices,other equipment, or vehicle sys-tems which take the driver’seyes, attention and focus awayfrom the safe operation of a vehi-cle or which are not permissibleby law should never be usedduring operation of the vehicle.

4 199




Pairing Key / Keyon the Steering RemoteController

When No Devices have beenPaired1. Press the key or the

key on the steering remote con-troller. The following screen is dis-played.

2. Select [OK] button to enter thePair Phone screen.

1) Car Name : Name of device asshown when searching from yourBluetooth® Wireless Technologydevice

2) Passkey : Passkey used to pairthe device

3. From your Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology device (i.e. MobilePhone), search and select yourcar audio system.

4. After a few moments, a screen isdisplayed where the passkey isentered. Here, enter thepasskey “0000” to pair yourBluetooth® Wireless Technologydevice with the car audio system.

5. Once pairing is complete, the fol-lowing screen is displayed.

PHONE

PHONE


2004

✽✽ NOTICE

If Bluetooth® Wireless Technologydevices are paired but none are cur-rently connected, pressing the

key or the key on thesteering wheel displays the followingscreen. Select [Pair] button to pair anew device or select [Connect] toconnect a previously paired device.

Pairing through [PHONE]Setup

Press the key Select[Phone] Select [Pair Phone] Select TUNE knob

1. The following steps are the sameas those described in the section"When No Devices have beenPaired" on the previous page.

✽✽ NOTICE • Bluetooth® Wireless Technology

features supported within the vehi-cle are as follows. Some featuresmay not be supported dependingon your Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology device.- Outgoing/Incoming Handsfree

calls- Operations during a call (Switch to

Private, Switch to call waiting,MIC on/off)

- Downloading Call History- Downloading Mobile Contacts- Bluetooth® Wireless Technologydevice auto connection

- Bluetooth Audio Streaming• Up to five Bluetooth® Wireless

Technology devices can be pairedto the Car Handsfree system.

• Only one Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology device can be connect-ed at a time.

• Other devices cannot be pairedwhile a Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology device is connected.

• Only Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology Handsfree andBluetooth audio related featuresare supported.

SETUP

PHONE

4 201


• Bluetooth related operations arepossible only with devices that sup-port Handsfree or audio features,such as a Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology mobile phone or aBluetooth audio device.

• If a connected Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology device becomes discon-nected due to being out of commu-nication range, turning the deviceOFF, or a Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology communication error,corresponding Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology devices are automati-cally searched and reconnected.

• If the system becomes unstable dueto communication errors betweenthe car Handsfree and theBluetooth® Wireless Technologydevice, reset the device by turningoff and back on again. Upon reset-ting Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology device, the system willbe restored.

• After pairing is complete, a con-tacts download request is sent onceto the mobile phone. Some mobilephones may require confirmationupon receiving a downloadrequest, ensure your mobile phoneaccepts the connection. Refer toyour phones user’s manual foradditional information regardingphone pairing and connections.

Connecting a Device

Press the key Select[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]

1) Connected Phone : Device that iscurrently connected

2) Paired Phone : Device that ispaired but not connected

From the paired phone list, select thedevice you want to connect andselect [Connect].

SETUP


2024

Changing Priority

What is Priority?It is possible to pair up to fiveBluetooth® Wireless Technologydevices with the car audio system.The "Change Priority" feature is usedto set the connection priority ofpaired phones.


From the paired phone list, selectthe phone you want to switch to thehighest priority, then select [ChangePriority] button from the Menu. Theselected device will be changed tothe highest priority.

✽✽ NOTICE Priority icon will be displayed whenthe selected phone is set as a priorityphone.

SETUP

4 203


Disconnecting a Device


From the paired phone list, select thecurrently connected device andselect [Disconnect] button.

Deleting a Device


From the paired phone list, select thedevice you want to delete and select[Delete] button.

✽✽ NOTICE • When deleting the currently con-

nected device, the device will auto-matically be disconnected to pro-ceed with the deleting process.

• If a paired Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology device is deleted, thedevice’s call history and contactsdata will also be deleted.

• To re-use a deleted device, youmust pair the device again.

SETUP SETUP


2044

USING Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology

Phone Menu Screen

Phone MenusWith a Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology device connected, pressthe key to display the Phonemenu screen.

1) Favorite : Up to 20 frequently usedcontacts saved for easy access

2) Call History : Device the call histo-ry list screen

3) Contacts : Displays the Contactslist screen

4) Setup : Displays Phone relatedsettings.

✽✽ NOTICE • If you select the [Call History] but-

ton but there is no call historydata, a prompt is displayed whichasks to download call history data.

• If you select the [Contacts] buttonbut there is no contacts datastored, a prompt is displayedwhich asks to download contactsdata.

• This feature may not be supportedin some mobile phones. For moreinformation on download support,refer to your mobile phone user’smanual.

Answering Calls

Answering a CallAnswering a call with a Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology device connect-ed will display the following screen.To accept the call, press key onthe steering wheel while the call isincoming.

1) Caller : Displays the other party’sname when the incoming caller issaved within your contacts

2) Incoming Number : Displays theincoming number

PHONE

4 205


✽✽ NOTICE • When an incoming call pop-up is

displayed, most Audio andSETUP mode features are dis-abled. Only the call volume willoperate.

• The telephone number may not beproperly displayed in some mobilephones.

• When a call is answered with themobile phone, the call mode willautomatically revert to Privatemode.

FavoritesPress the key Select[Favorites]

1) Saved favorite contact : Connectscall upon selection

2) To add favorite : Downloaded con-tacts be saved as favorite.

✽✽ NOTICE • To save Favorite, contacts should

be downloaded.• Contact saved in Favorites will not

be automatically updated if thecontact has been updated in thephone. To update Favorites, deletethe Favorite and create a newFavorite.

Call History

Press the key Select [CallHistory]

A list of incoming, outgoing andmissed calls is displayed.• Call history may not be saved in the

call history list in some mobile phones.

• Calls received with hidden caller IDwill not be saved in the call history list.

• Calling through the call history isnot possible when there is no callhistory stored or a Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology phone is notconnected.

• Up to 20 received, dialed and missedcalls are stored in Call History.

• Time of received/dialed calls and calltime information are not saved.

PHONE

PHONE


2064

Contacts

Press the key Select[Contacts]

The list of saved phone book entriesis displayed.

NOTE:Find a contact in an alphabeticalorder, press the key.

✽✽ NOTICE • Up to 1,000 contacts saved in yourBluetooth® Wireless Technologyphone can be downloaded into thecar contacts. Contacts that havebeen downloaded to the car cannotbe edited or deleted on the phone.

• Mobile phone contacts are man-aged separately for each pairedBluetooth® Wireless Technologydevice (max 5 devices x 1,000 con-tacts each). Previously downloadeddata is maintained even if theBluetooth® Wireless Technologydevice has been disconnected.(However, the contacts and callhistory saved to the phone will bedeleted if a paired phone is delet-ed.)

• It is possible to download contactsduring Bluetooth streaming audio.

• When downloading contacts, theicon will be displayed within thestatus bar.

• It is not possible to begin down-loading a contact list when the con-tact download feature has beenturned off within the Bluetooth®Wireless Technology device. Inaddition, some devices may requiredevice authorization uponattempting to download contacts.If downloading does not normallyoccur, check the Bluetooth®Wireless Technology device set-tings or the screen state.

• The contacts download featuremay not be supported in somemobile phones. For more informa-tion of supported Bluetooth®devices and function support, referto your phone’s user manual.

MENU

PHONE

4 207


Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology Setting

Pairing a New DevicePress the key Select[Phone] Select [Pair Phone]

Bluetooth® Wireless Technologydevices can be paired with the audiosystem.For more information, refer to the“Pairing through Phone Setup” sec-tion within Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology.

Viewing Paired Phone ListPress the key Select[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]

This feature is used to view mobilephones that have been paired withthe audio system. Upon selecting apaired phone, the setup menu is dis-played.For more information, refer to the“Setting Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology Connection” sectionwithin Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology.

1) Connect/Disconnect Phone :Connect/ disconnects currentlyselected phone

2) Change Priority : Sets currentlyselected phone to highest connec-tion priority

3) Delete : Deletes the currentlyselected phone

4) Return : Moves to the previousscreen

SETUP

SETUP


2084

✽✽ NOTICE BEFORE DOWN-LOADING CONTACTS

• Only contacts within connectedphones can be downloaded. Alsocheck to see that your mobilephone supports the download fea-ture.

• To learn more about whether yourmobile phone supports contactsdownloads, refer to your mobilephone user’s manual.

• The contacts for only the connect-ed phone can be downloaded.

Downloading ContactsPress the key Select[Phone] Select [Contacts Download]

As the contacts are downloadedfrom the mobile phone, a downloadprogress bar is displayed.

✽✽ NOTICE • Upon downloading phone contacts,

the previous corresponding data isdeleted.

• This feature may not be supportedin some mobile phones.

• Voice Recognition may not operatewhile contacts are being down-loaded.

Audio StreamingPress the key Select[Phone] Select [Audio Streaming]

When Audio Streaming is turned on,you can play music files saved in yourBluetooth® Wireless Technologydevice through the audio system.

SETUP SETUP

4 209


Outgoing VolumePress the key Select[Phone] Select [Outgoing Volume]

Use TUNE knob to adjust the out-going volume level.

✽✽ NOTICE While on a call, the volume can bechanged by using the key.

Turning Bluetooth System OffPress the key Select[Phone] Select [Bluetooth SystemOff]Once Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology is turned off, Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology related featureswill not be supported within the audiosystem.

✽✽ NOTICE To turn Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology back on, go to [Phone] and select “Yes”.

SETUP

SETUP

SEEKTRACK

SETUP


2104

VOICE RECOGNITION

Using Voice Recognition

Starting Voice RecognitionShortly press the key on thesteering wheel. Say a command.

If prompt feedback is in [ON], thenthe system will say “Please say acommand after the beep (BEEP)”• If prompt feedback is in [OFF]

mode, then the system will only say“(BEEP)”

• To change Prompt Feedback[On]/[Off], go to [System]

[Prompt Feedback]

✽✽ NOTICE For proper recognition, say the com-mand after the voice instruction andbeep tone.

Contact List Best Practices1) Do not store single-name entries

(e.g., “Bob”, “Mom”, “Kim”, etc.).Instead, always use full names(including first and last names) forall contacts (e.g., use “JacobStevenson” instead of “Dad”).

2) Do not use abbreviations (i.e., use“Lieutenant” instead of “Lt.” or“Sergeant” instead of “Sgt.”).

3) Do not use acronyms (i.e., use“County Finance Department”instead of “CFD”).

4) Do not use special characters(e.g., “@”, “hyphen -”, “asterisk *”,“ampersand &”).

5) If a name is not recognized fromthe contact list, change it to amore descriptive name (e.g., use“Grandpa Joseph” instead of “PaJoe”).

Skipping Prompt MessagesWhile prompt message is being stat-ed Shortly press the key on thesteering remote controllerThe prompt message is immediatelyended and the beep tone will sound.After the “beep”, say the voice com-mand.

Re-starting Voice RecognitionWhile system waits for a commandShortly press the key on thesteering remote controllerThe command wait state is immedi-ately ended and the beep ton willsound. After the “beep”, say the voicecommand.

SETUP

4 211


ENDING VOICERECOGNITION

While Voice Recognition is operatingPress and hold the key on the

steering remote controller

✽✽ NOTICE • While using voice command,

pressing any steering wheel controlor a different key will end voicecommand.

• When the system is waiting for avoice command, say “cancel” or“end” to end voice command.

• When the system is waiting for avoice command, press and hold the

key on the steering wheel toend voice command.

Voice Recognition and PhoneContact Tips:The Hyundai Voice RecognitionSystem may have difficulty under-standing some accents or uncom-mon names.When using Voice Recognition toplace a call, speak in a moderatetone, with clear pronunciation Tomaximize the use of VoiceRecognition, consider these guide-lines when storing contacts:• Do not store single-name entries

(e.g., “Bob”, “Mom”, etc.). Instead,always use full names (including firstand last names) for these contacts

• Do not use special characters (e.g.,'@', '-', '*', '&', etc.)

• Do not use abbreviations (i.e., use"Lieutenant" instead of "Lt.") oracronyms (i.e., use "County FinanceDepartment" instead of "C. F. D."; Besure to say the name exactly as it isentered in the contacts list


2124

Illustration on using voice commands

• Starting voice command.Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):

• Skipping Voice RecognitionShortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):

• End voice command.Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):

while guidance message is being stated

More Help

Contacts

Cancel

More Help

Please say a command afterthe beep (BEEP)

Please say a...

More Help.You can say Radio, FM, AM, XM, Media, CD, USB,Aux, My Music, iPod®, Bluetooth Audio, Phone, CallHistory or Contacts. Please say a command.

Contacts.Please say the name of the contact you want to call.

More Help.You can say Radio, FM, AM, XM, Media, CD, USB,Aux, My Music, iPod®, Bluetooth Audio, Phone, CallHistory or Contacts. Please say a command.

(BEEP)

(BEEP)

Beep Beep.. (end beep)

Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds)

Beep~

4 213


Voice Command List• Common Commands: These commands can be used in most operations. (However a few commands may not be

available during certain operations)Command Function

More Help Provides guidance on commands that can beused anywhere in the system.

Help Provides guidance on commands that can beused within the current mode.

Call<Name> Calls <Name> saved in ContactsEx) Call John Smith

Phone Provides guidance on Phone related com-mands. After saying this command, say“Favorites”,“Call History”, “Contacts” or ”DialNumber” execute corresponding functions.

Favorites Display the Favorite screen.

Call History Displays the Call History screen.

Contacts Displays the Contacts screen. After sayingthis command, say the name of a contactsaved in the Contacts to automatically con-nect the call.

Dial Number Display the Dial number screen. After sayingthis command, you can say the number thatyou want to call.

Redial Connects the most recently called number.

Tutorial Provide guidance on how to use voice recognition and Bluetooth® connections.

Command Function• When listening to the radio, displays the

next radio screen. (FM1➟FM2➟AM➟XM1➟

XM2➟XM3➟FM1)

Radio • When listening to a different mode, displaysthe most recently played radio screen.

• When currently listening to the FM radio,maintains the current state.

• When listening to a different mode, displaysthe most recently played FM screen.

FM1(FM One) Displays the FM1 screen.

FM2(FM Two) Displays the FM2 screen.

AM Displays the AM screen.

FM Preset 1~6 Plays the most recently played broadcastsaved in FM Preset 1~6.

AM Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in AM Preset 1~6.

FM 87.5~107.9 Plays the FM broadcast of the correspondingfrequency.

AM 530~1710 Plays the AM broadcast of the correspondingfrequency.

XM (Satellite) • When currently listening to the XM, main-tains the current state.

• When listening to a different mode, displaysthe most recently played XM screen.

(Call by Name)


2144

Command FunctionXM (Satellite) 1~3 Displays the selected XM screen.

XM Channel Plays the selected XM channel.

Media Moves to the most recently played mediascreen.

CD Plays the music saved in the CD.

USB Plays USB music.

iPod® Plays iPod® music.

Command FunctionMy Music Plays the music saved in My Music.

AUX (Auxiliary) Plays the connected external device.

Bluetooth® Audio Plays the music saved in connected Bluetooth®

device.

Please repeat Repeats the most recent comment.

Cancel (Exit) Ends voice command.

0~255

4 215


• FM/AM radio commands: Commands available duringFM, AM radio operation

• Satellite radio commands: Commands that can beused while listening to Satellite Radio.

Command FunctionPreset 1~6 Plays the broadcast station saved in Preset 1~6.

Auto Store Automatically selects radio broadcast fre-quencies with superior reception and saves inPresets 1~6.

Seek up Plays the next (higher) receivable broadcast.

Seek down Plays the previous (lower) receivable broadcast.

Scan Scans receivable frequencies from the currentbroadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.

Preset Scan Moves to the next preset from the currentpresent and plays for 10 seconds each.

Information Displays the information of the current broad-cast.(This feature can be used when receivingRBDS broadcasts.)

Command FunctionScan Scans receivable channels from the current

broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.

Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6.

Information Displays the information of the current broad-cast.


2164

• Audio CD commands: Commands available duringAudio CD operation

• MP3 CD / USB commands: Commands available dur-ing USB and MP3 CD operation

Command FunctionRandom Randomly plays the tracks within the CD.

Random Off Cancels random play to play tracks in sequen-tial order.

Repeat Repeats the current track.

Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play tracks in sequen-tial order.

Scan Scans the tracks from the next track for 10seconds each.

Track 1~30 Plays the desired track number.

Information Displays the information screen of the currenttrack.

Command FunctionRandom Randomly plays the files within the current

folder.

All Random Randomly plays all saved files.

Random Off Cancels random play to play files in sequentialorder.

Repeat Repeats the current file.

Folder Repeat Repeats all files in the current folder.

Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequentialorder.

Next File Plays the next file.

Previous File Plays the previous file.

Scan Scans the files from the next files for 10 sec-onds each.

Information Displays the information screen of the currentfile.

Copy Copies the current file into My Music.

4 217


• iPod® Commands: Commands available during iPod®

operation• My Music Commands: Commands available during

My Music operation

Command FunctionRandom Randomly plays the songs within the current

category.

Random Off Cancels random play to play songs in sequen-tial order.

Repeat Repeats the current song.

Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play songs in sequen-tial order.

Information Displays the information screen of the currentsong.

Command FunctionRandom Randomly plays all saved files.






Delete Deletes the current file. You will bypass anadditional confirmation process.

Delete All Deletes all files saved in My Music. You willbypass an additional confirmation process.


2184

• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Audio Commands:Commands available during Bluetooth® WirelessTechnologyaudio streaming from mobile phone opera-tion Command Operation

Command FunctionPlay Plays the currently paused song.

Pause Pauses the current song.

4 219









[Non SSP supported device](SSP: Secure Simple Pairing)4. After a few moments, a screen is

displayed where the passkey isentered.Hear, enter the passkey “0000” topair your Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology device with the caraudio system.

[SSP supported device]4. After a few moments, a screen is

displayed 6 digits passkey.Hear, check the passkey on yourBluetooth® Wireless Technologydevice and confirm.


PHONE

PHONE


2204

✽✽ NOTICE
















SETUP

PHONE

4 221






Connecting a Device




SETUP


2224


Changing Priority




SETUP

4 223






Deleting a Device



SETUP SETUP


2244

✽✽ NOTICE• When deleting the currently con-




4 225



Phone Menu Screen

Phone MenusWith a Bluetooth® Wireless Technologydevice connected, press the key to display the Phone menu screen.


2) Call History : Displays call historylist screen

3) Contacts : Displays the Contactslist






Answering Calls





PHONE


2264











Call History









PHONE

PHONE

4 227


Contacts



NOTE:Find a contact in an alphabeticalorder, press the key.







MENU

PHONE


2284





This feature is used to view mobilephones that have been paired withthe audio system. Upon selecting apaired phone, the setup menu is dis-played.For more information, refer to the“Setting Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology Connection” section with-in Bluetooth® Wireless Technology.





SETUP

SETUP

4 229








✽✽ NOTICE • Upon downloading phone con-

tacts, the previous correspondingdata is deleted.


• Voice Recognition may not oper-ate while contacts are being down-loaded.

Auto Download (Contacts)Press the key Select[Phone] Select [Auto Download]

This feature is used to automaticallydownload mobile contacts entriesonce a Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology phone is connected.

✽✽ NOTICE • The Auto Download feature will

download mobile contacts entriesevery time the phone is connected.The download time may differdepending on the number of savedcontacts entries and the communi-cation state.

• Before downloading contacts, firstcheck to see that your mobilephone supports the contactsdownload feature.

SETUP SETUP


2304

Audio StreamingPress the key Select[Phone] Select [Audio Streaming]

When Audio Streaming is turned on,you can play music files saved inyour Bluetooth® Wireless Technologydevice through the audio system.



✽✽ NOTICEWhile on a call, the volume can bechanged by using the key.

Turning Bluetooth System OffPress the key Select[Phone] Select [Bluetooth SystemOff]Once Bluetooth® Wireless Technologyis turned off, Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology related features will not besupported within the audio system.


SETUP

SETUP

SEEKTRACK

SETUP SETUP

4 231


VOICE RECOGNITION






[Prompt Feedback]









Re-starting Voice RecognitionWhile system waits for a commandShortly press the key on thesteering remote controllerThe command wait state is immedi-ately ended and the beep will sound.After the “beep”, say the voice com-mand.

SETUP


2324













4 233







More Help

Contacts

Cancel

More Help


Please say a...


(BEEP)

(BEEP)

Beep Beep.. (end beep)Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds)

Beep~

More HelpHere are some examples of mode commands.You can say a radio type like 'FM', 'AM', or 'Satellite'.You can also say a media source like 'USB', 'MyMusic', or 'iPod®'.Additionally, there are phone commands like"Contacts', 'Call History', or 'Dial Number".You can find more detailed commands in the user'smanual.Please say a command after the beep.



2344


available during certain operations)

Command FunctionMore Help Provides guidance on commands that can be

used anywhere in the system.


Call<Name> Calls <Name> saved in ContactsEx) Call “John Smith”










XM2➟XM3➟FM1)













(Call by Name)

4 235











device.


Mute Mutes the sound.


0~255


2364







Command FunctionChannel 0~255 Play the selected Satellite Radio channel.

Scan Scans receivable channels from the currentbroadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.



4 237










folder.




Information Displays the information screen of the current file.

Next Folder Play the first file in the next folder

Previous Folder Play the first file in the previous folder


2384



My Music operation


category.









4 239






2404

Blue Link®

Hyundai aims to offer differentiatedcustomer values through a‘Connected Car Life,’ which providesconsumers with fast and reliable ITtechnology. As consumers’ lifestylesbecome more and more mobile inthanks to remarkable advances insmart phones, tablet PCs and overallwireless telecommunication, newlifestyle patterns demand seamlessconnection between one’s office,home, outdoors and automobiles.Blue Link® is Hyundai's innovativetelematics solution that combinessafety, service, and infotainment intoa complete package. It works to bothhelp simplify Hyundai owners' livesand reduce distracted driving. TheBlue Link® " " button offersaccess to a voice-response menu ofservices.

The Blue Link® button offersaccess to enhanced navigation serv-ices. The " " button offersimmediate contact to SOSEmergency Assistance. A detailedlist of commands is available in theBlue Link User's Manual.

Using Rear View Mirror ButtonsPressing the Blue Link® buttonslocated on the rear view mirror willallow you to make service requiredinquiries, POI info searches, andemergency rescues by connecting tothe Blue Link® Center.Such features can be used only aftersubscribing to the Blue Link® service.

➀ (Blue Link® Center)Makes requests for Blue Link® serv-ice related inquiries and consulta-tions.A call is connected to the Blue Link®

service center employee.Pressing the key again will end thecall.This feature does not operate whenyou are on a Bluetooth® phone call.

➁ (Blue Link® for POI)• Blue Link® for Voice commandStarts Blue Link® voice command.Voice receiving voice guidance,shortly press the button to convert tovoice command mode. Press andhold the button to end voice com-mand.

• TBT VR Commands1. Navigate to“Navigate to” voice command is usedto request the download of routedata for a new destination, saveddestinations, daily routes and previ-ous destinations.

4 241


2. Save Destination“Save Destination” VR command isused to assign a voice tag to the lastdownloaded destination and store itin a destination directory.

NOTE:The Turn by Turn(TBT) feature sup-ports the store of ten(10) destina-tions in the TBT destinationsdirectory.

3. Route Preview“Route Preview” VR command allowsthe user to preview the route instruc-tions (upcoming maneuver instruc-tions) at any time during the routeguidance.

4. Destinations List“Destinations List” VR commandallows the user to preview and deletethe stored destinations with theirassociated voice tags in the Turn byTurn destinations directory.

5. Voice Guidance“Voice Guidance” VR commandallows the user to mute/unmute theTurn by Turn(TBT) directionannouncements.

6. Suspend Route“Suspend Route” VR commandallows the user to suspend andpause Turn by Turn(TBT) route guid-ance while in the guidance mode.

7. Resume Route“Resume Route” VR commandallows the user to resume Turn byTurn(TBT) route guidance.

➂ (Blue Link® for SOS)In the case of an emergency,requests for help to the Blue Link®

center.Call is connected to the Blue Link®

emergency rescue center. Pressingthe key again will end the call.If you are already on a Bluetooth®

phone call, the call will end to connectyou to the Blue Link® EmergencyRescue Center.

CAUTION• You cannot talk simultaneous-

ly on the Bluetooth® phonecall and a Blue Link® servicesphone all.

• While on a Bluetooth® call,pressing the key or key will display a messageindicating that you are cur-rently on a call.

• A message will be displayed ifyou receive a Bluetooth® callwhile already on a Blue Link®

call. To answer the incomingcall, press the button onthe steering wheel controls.You will not hear a ring to alertyou that there is an incomingcall.


2424

Eco Coach

• What is Eco Coach?Every 2.5 minutes, Eco Coach com-pares your fuel economy against thegovernment tested average (EPA) orother similar Hyundai models (com-munity), based on your preference.Each month, or after every tank fillup, Eco Coach rates your extendedaverage and gives you a reward starif you best the average.See your My Hyundai web page formore information.

• What does the bar graph and hori-zontal line mean?

The horizontal line is adjusted onceper month or at each tank full, basedon your preference; it represents theEPA combined average or communi-ty average fuel economy target.

• What is My Eco MPG?Your actual fuel economy averageover 2.5 minutes.This value is also shown in bar graphas your “now” rating.

• What are Eco Rewards?If you beat the average (the EPA orcommunity), you will receive an EcoReward point.See your my Hyundai web page formore information.

[Eco Driving] will not operate if thevehicle ignition is not turned on.Please operate with the ignitionturned on.

4 243


Turn by TurnThe Turn by Turn feature can be usedthrough Blue Link®.

1. Direction Indicator Image2. Remaining distance until next point3. The Count bar is divided into a

total of 9 levels.

9 Level 0.5mi 8 Level 0.4mi7 Level 0.3mi 6 Level 0.2mi5 Level 0.1mi 4 Level 400ft 3 Level 300ft 2 Level 200ft1 Level 100ft

4. Next Street name5. Distance to destination6. Expected Time Arrival

❈ For information on specific Blue Link® operations, please referto the Blue Link® User's Manualthat was provided with your vehi-cle.


2444

■■ CD Player : AM9B2DMKN, AM943DMAN

❋ logo will be shown if the HD RadioTM feature is supported.

4 245



Audio Head Unit (for HD RADIOTM equipped model)

1. (EJECT)• Ejects the disc.

2.• Convert to Radio mode.• Each time the key is pressed,the

mode is changed in order of FM1,FM2, AM, XM1, XM2, XM3.

3.• Convert to Media Mode• Each time the key is pressed, the


4. (for Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology equipped model)• Converts to Phone mode❈ When a phone is not connected,

the connection screen is dis-played.

5. PWR/VOL knob• Power : Press to turn power

on/off.• Volume : Turn left/right to control

volume.

6.• When pressed shortly(under 0.8 sec-

onds)- Radio mode : plays previous/next

frequency.- Media (CD/USB/iPod®/My Music)

modes : changes the track,Song(file)

• When pressed and held (Over 0.8seconds)- Radio mode : continuously

changes the frequency. Uponrelease, plays the current frequency.

- Media(CD/USB/iPod®/My Music)modes : rewinds or fast forwards thetrack or file

- During a Handsfree call, controlsthe call volume.

7.• HD RADIO™ : Channel Change• XM RADIO™ : Category Search• CD/USB/MP3 mode : Search

Folder

HD/CATFOLDER

SEEKTRACK

PHONE

MEDIA

RADIO


2464

8.• Turns the monitor display on/off.

9.Displays the time/date/day.

10.• Radio Mode : previews all receiv-

able broadcasts for 5 seconds each• Media (CD/USB/My Music) modes

: previews each song (file) for 10seconds each.

11.Converts to Setup mode.

12. TUNE knob• Radio mode : turn to change broad-

cast frequencies.• Media (CD/USB/iPod®/My Music)

modes : turn to search tracks/chan-nels/files.


inserted.

14. RESET• Forced system termination and

system restart.

Audio Head Unit

15.• XM RADIO™ : Category Search• CD, USB/MP3 mode : Search

Folder

CATFOLDER

SETUP

SCAN

CLOCK

DISP

4 247


Steering remote controller

1. VOLUME• Used to control volume.

2. MUTE• Mutes audio volume.

3. SEEK• When pressed shortly (under 0.8 sec-

onds)- Radio mode : searches broadcast

frequencies saved to presets.- M e d i a ( C D / U S B / i P o d ® / M y

Music/BT Audio) modes :changes the track, file or chapter.

• When pressed and held (over 0.8 sec-onds)- Radio mode, automatically search-

es broadcast frequencies andchannels

- Media(CD/USB/iPod®/My Music)modes, rewinds or fast forwardsthe track or song(file)

- BT Audio mode may not be sup-ported in some mobile phones.

4. MODE• Each time this key is pressed, the

mode is changed in order ofFM1➟FM2➟AM➟XM1➟XM2➟XM3➟CD➟USB or iPod®➟AUX➟MyMusic➟BT Audio

• If the media is not connected or adisc is not inserted, correspondingmodes will be disabled.

5.• When pressed shortly

- Starts voice recognition- When selecting during a voice

prompt, stops the prompt andconverts to voice command wait-ing state

• When pressed and held (over 0.8 sec-onds)- Ends voice recognition


2484


- When pressed in the phonescreen, displays call historyscreen

- When pressed in the dial screen,makes a call

- When pressed in the incomingcall screen, answers the call

- When pressed during call waiting,switches to waiting call (CallWaiting)

• When pressed and held (over 0.8 sec-onds)- When pressed in the Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology Handsfreewait mode, redials the last call

- When pressed during aBluetooth® Wireless TechnologyHandsfree call, switches call backto mobile phone (Private)

- When pressed while calling on themobile phone, switches call backto Bluetooth® Wireless TechnologyHandsfree (Operates only whenBluetooth® Wireless TechnologyHandsfree is connected)

7.• Ends phone call

4 249


HD RadioTM Technology(for HD RADIOTM equipped model)

HD Radio Technology manufacturedunder license from iBiquity DigitalCorporation. U.S. and ForeignPatents. HD Radio™ and the HD, HDRadio, and “Arc” logos are propri-etary trademarks of iBiquity DigitalCorp.

Program Service Data: Contributesto the superior user experience ofHD Radio Technology. Presents songname, artist, station IDs, HD2/HD3Channel Guide, and other relevantdata streams.

Adjacent to traditional main stationsare extra local FM channels. TheseHD2/HD3 Channels provide new,original music as well as deep cutsinto traditional genre.

Digital, CD-quality sound. HD RadioTechnology enables local radio sta-tions to broadcast a clean digital sig-nal. AM sounds like today’s FM andFM sounds like a CD.

HD RadioTM signal delayTo overcome the delay that digitalsystems inherently produce, HDRadioTM technology first uses theaudio signal of the analog broadcast-ing when you tune to an AM stationor to the main channel of a FM sta-tion. After that, the system will blendfrom analog to digital signal.

Normally, this blending is verysmooth. If you experience a skip inprogram content of several seconds,the radio station has not implement-ed HD RadioTM broadcasting correct-ly. This is not a problem with youraudio system.

Due to the fact that sub channels areonly broadcasting digital, blendingfrom analog to digital signal is not pos-sible if you tune to a sub channel. Inthis case playback of the sub channelstarts after several seconds, this is anormal function.


2504

RADIO MODE

Basic Mode Screen

1. Mode DisplayDisplays currently operating mode.

2. FrequencyDisplays the current frequency.

3. PresetDisplays current preset number [1] ~[6].

4. Preset DisplayDisplays preset buttons.

5. InfoDisplays broadcast information.

6. HD Changes HD Radio channels.

7. A.storeAutomatically saves frequencies withsuperior reception to Preset buttons.

4 251


HD RADIO MODE(for HD RADIOTM equipped model)

Basic Mode Screen


2. HD ChannelDisplays information for the currentlyplaying HD Radio broadcast.

3. Song InformationDisplays the album, artist, and titleinformation.


5. HD Radio Broadcast StationDisplays the HD Radio broadcaststation name.

6. PresetDisplays currently playing presetnumber [1] ~ [6].

7. Preset DisplayDisplays saved presets.



10. A.StoreAutomatically saves frequencies withsuperior reception to Preset buttons.


2524

Switching to Radio Mode

Pressing the key will changethe operating mode in order of FM1➟FM2➟AM➟XM1➟XM2➟XM3

If [Mode Pop up] is turned on within[Display], then pressing thekey will display the Radio

Pop-up Mode screen.

Turn the TUNE knob to move thefocus. Press the knob to select.

Searching Radio Frequencies

Using SeekPress the key to play theprevious/next frequency.

Using TUNETurn the TUNE knob to select thedesired frequency.• FM : Increases/decreased by

200kHz• AM : Increases/decreased by

10kHz

Using Radio Mode

Selecting Presets/Saving PresetsPress the button to displaythe broadcast information for the fre-quency saved to each button.

Press the ~ buttons to playthe desired preset.

✽✽ NOTICE While listening to a frequency youwant to save as a preset, press andhold one of the ~ presetbuttons (over 0.8 seconds) to savethe current frequency to the selectedpreset.

61

61

PresetSEEK

TRACK

RADIOSETUP

RADIO

4 253


Auto StorePress the button to automati-cally save receivable frequencies toPreset buttons.

✽✽ NOTICE While Auto Store is operating, press-ing the [Cancel] button again willcancel Auto Store and restore theprevious frequency.

ScanPress the key to preview fre-quencies with superior reception for5 seconds each.Press and hold the key (over0.8 seconds) to preview presets for 5seconds each.Once scan is complete, the previousfrequency will be restored.While Scan is operating, pressingthe key will cancel the scanoperation.

Listening to HD RadioStations

HD Radio Technology is a digitalradio technology used by AM andFM radio station to transmit audioand data via a digital signal in con-junction with their analog signals.

While listening to the radio, the HDRadio icon will become displayed ifreceiving an HD Radio broadcast.

Changing HD Radio stations

Press the button to changeHD Radio station.

Viewing Station Information

Press the button to view sta-tion information.

Info

SCAN

SCAN

SCAN

A.Store


2544

XM RADIO™ MODE

Features of your vehicleSatellite radio reception

You may experience difficulties inreceiving XM satellite™ radio signalsin the following situations.• If you are driving in a tunnel or a

covered parking area.• If you are driving beneath the top

level of a multi-level freeway.• If you are driving under a bridge.• If you are driving next to a tall vehi-

cle (such as a truck or a bus) thatblocks the signal.

• If you are driving in a valley wherethe surrounding hills or peaksblock the signal from the satellite.

• If you are driving on a mountainroad where is the signal blocked bymountains.

• If you are driving in an area with talltrees that block the signal (30 ft./10m or more), for example on anroad that goes through a dense for-est.

• The signal can become weak insome areas that are not coveredby the XM repeater network.

NOTE:There may also be additionalunforeseen circumstances leadingto reception problems with the XMsatellite™ radio signal.Advisory Messages, such as ‘CHUnavailable’ may occur when start-ing XM Radio™.

SATELLITE2

SATELLITE1

4 255


XM RADIO™ MODE

Basic Mode Screen


2. Channel InformationDisplays the category, channel num-ber, channel name, artist and titleinformation.




2564

Using SEEKPress the key to play theprevious/next channel.❈ If the “Category” icon is displayed,

channels are changed within thecurrent category.

Using TuneTurn the TUNE knob to select thedesired channel.

SCANPress the key to scan allchannels with superior reception for5 seconds each.Once scan is complete, the previous-ly played channel will be restored.During Scan, pressing the key again will cancel the scan opera-tion and restore the previouslyplayed channel.If the “Category” icon is displayed,channels are changed within the cur-rent category.

Searching CategoriesSelect the category by using the

( ) key and pressthe TUNE knob to select.

Channels for the selected categoryare played.

Selecting Presets/SavingPresetsPress the button to displaythe broadcast information for thechannel saved to each button.


✽✽ NOTICEWhile listening to a channel youwant to save as a preset, press andhold one of the ~ presetbuttons (over 0.8 seconds) to savethe current channel to the selectedpreset.

61

61

PresetCATFOLDER

HD/CATFOLDER

SCAN

SCAN

SEEKTRACK

4 257


✽✽ NOTICE - USING CDs• This device has been manufac-

tured to be compatible with soft-ware bearing the following logomarks.

• Do not clean discs with chemicalsolutions, such as record sprays,antistatic sprays, antistatic liq-uids, benzene, or thinners.

• After using a disc, put the discback in its original case to preventdisc scratches.

• Hold discs by their edges or with-in the center hole to prevent dam-ages to disc surfaces.

• Do not introduce foreign sub-stances into the disc insert/eject slot.Introducing foreign substancescould damage the device interior.

• Do not insert two discs simultane-ously.

• When using CD-R/CD-RW discs,differences in disc reading andplaying times may occur depend-ing on the disc manufacturer, pro-duction method and the recordingmethod as used by the user.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Clean fingerprints and dust off

the disc surface (coated side) witha soft cloth.

• The use of CD-R/CD-RW discsattached with labels may result indisc slot jams or difficulties in discremoval. Such discs may alsoresult in noise while playing.

• Some CD-R/CD-RW discs maynot properly operate dependingon the disc manufacturer, produc-tion method and the recordmethod as used by the user. Ifproblems persist, trying using adifferent CD as continued usemay result in malfunctions.

• The performance of this productmay differ depending on the CD-RW Drive Software.

• Copy-protected CDs such as S-type CDs may not function in thedevice. DATA discs cannot beplayed. (However, such discs maystill operate but will do so abnor-mally.)

(Continued)

(Continued)• Do not use abnormally shaped

discs (8cm, heart-shaped, octa-gon-shaped) as such discs couldlead to malfunctions.

• If the disc is straddled on the discslot without removal for 10 sec-onds, the disc will automaticallybe re-inserted into the disc player.

• Only genuine audio CDs are sup-ported. Other discs may result inrecognition failure. (e.g. copy CD-R, CDs with labels)


2584

MEDIA MODE

Pressing the key will changethe operating mode in order ofCD➟USB(iPod®)➟AUX➟My Music ➟

BT Audio.

If [Mode Pop up] is turned on within[Display], then pressing thekey will display the Media

Pop-up Mode screen.Turn the TUNE knob to move thefocus. Press the knob to select.

✽✽ NOTICE • The media mode pop up screen

can be displayed only when thereare two or more media modesturned on.

Title Icon When a Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology, iPod®, USB, or AUXdevice is connected or a CD isinserted, the corresponding modeicon will be displayed.

Icon TitleBluetooth® Wireless TechnologyCDiPod®

USBAUX

MEDIASETUP

MEDIA

4 259


AUDIO CD MODE

Basic Mode Screen

1. ModeDisplays currently operating mode.

2. Operation StateFrom Repeat/Random(Shuffle)/ Scan,displays the currently operating func-tion.

3. Track InfoDisplays information about the cur-rent track.

4. Play/PauseChanges the play/pause state.

5. Play TimeDisplays the current play time.

6. InfoShows detailed information aboutthe current track.

7. Random(Shuffle)Turns the Random(Shuffle) featureon/off.

8. RepeatTurns the Repeat feature on/off.

9. ListMoves to the list screen.


2604

Using Audio CD ModePlaying/Pausing CD TracksOnce an audio CD is inserted, themode will automatically start andbegin playing.

While playing, press the buttonto pause and press button toplay.

✽✽ NOTICE • Only genuine audio CDs are sup-

ported. Other discs may result inrecognition failure (e.g. copy CD-R, CDs with labels)

• The artist and title information aredisplayed on the screen if trackinformation is included within theaudio CD.

Changing TracksPress the key to move tothe previous or next track.

✽✽ NOTICE • Pressing the key after the

track has been playing for 2 sec-onds will start the current trackfrom the beginning.

• Pressing the key beforethe track has been playing for 1seconds will start the previoustrack.

Selecting from the ListTurn the TUNE knob left/right tosearch for the desired track.

Once you find the desired track,press the TUNE knob to startplaying.

Rewinding / Fast-forwardingTracksWhile playing, press and hold the

key (over 0.8 seconds) torewind or fast-forward the currenttrack.

ScanPress the key to play the first10 seconds of each file.

SCAN

SEEKTRACK

SEEKTRACK

SEEKTRACK

SEEKTRACK

4 261


Audio CD Mode MenuWithin this mode, you will haveaccess to the Info, Random(Shuffle),Repeat and List features.

InfoPress the button to displaydetails about the current disc.

Random(Shuffle)Press the button to play tracksin random(Shuffle) order.Press the button again to turnthe Random(Shuffle) feature off.• Random(Shuffle): Plays all tracks in

random(Shuffle) order.

RepeatPress the button to repeat thecurrent track. Press the button againto turn the repeat feature off.• Repeat : Repeats the current track.

ListPress the button to display thetrack list screen.

Turn the TUNE knob left/right tosearch for tracks. Once the desiredtrack is displayed, press the knob toselect and play.

List

Repeat

Shuffle

Shuffle

Info


2624

MP3 CD MODE

Basic Mode Screen


2. Operation StateFrom Repeat/Random(Shuffle)/Scan, displays the currently operat-ing function.

3. File IndexDisplays the current file number.

4. File InfoDisplays information about the cur-rent file.



7. InfoShows detailed information aboutthe current file.



10. CopyCopies the current file into My Music


4 263


Using MP3 CD Mode

Playing/Pausing MP3 FilesOnce an MP3 disc is inserted themode will automatically start andbeing playing.


✽✽ NOTICE If there are numerous files and fold-ers within the disc, reading timecould take more than 10 secondsand the list may not be displayed orsong searches may not operate.Once loading is complete, try again.

Changing FilesPress the key to move tothe previous or next file.


file has been playing for 2 secondswill start the current file from thebeginning.

• Pressing the key beforethe file has been playing for 1 sec-onds will start the previous file.

Selecting from the ListTurn the TUNE knob left/right tosearch for the desired file.

Once you find the desired file, pressthe TUNE knob to start playing.

Rewinding / Fast-forwarding FilesWhile playing, press and hold the

key (over 0.8 seconds) torewind or fast-forward the current file.


Searching FoldersPress the ( ) key toselect and search folders.Once the desired folder is displayed,press the TUNE knob to select.

The first file within the selected fold-er will begin playing.

CATFOLDER

HD/CATFOLDER

SCAN

SEEKTRACK

SEEKTRACK

SEEKTRACK

SEEKTRACK


2644

MP3 CD Mode MenuWithin this mode, you will haveaccess to the Info, Random(Shuffle),Repeat, Copy and List features.

InfoPress the button to displaydetails about the current file.

✽✽ NOTICE • When the ‘Folder File’ option is set

as the default display withinDisplay setup, the album/artist/fileinformation are displayed asdetailed file information.

• When the ‘Album Artist Song’option is set as the default display,the folder name/file name are dis-played as detailed file information.

• The title, artist and album info aredisplayed only when such informa-tion are recorded within the MP3file ID3 tag.

Random(Shuffle)Press the button to play filesin random(Shuffle) order.Each time the button is pressed, thefeature changes in order of Random(Shuffle) Folder ➟ Random (Shuffle)All➟ Off.• Random(Shuffle) Folder : Plays all

files within the current folder inRandom (Shuffle) order.

• Random(Shuffle) All : Plays all filesin Random(Shuffle) order.

RepeatPress the button to repeat thecurrent file or folder.Each time the button is pressed, thefeature changes in order of Repeat➟Repeat Folder➟Off.• Repeat: Repeats the current file.• Repeat Folder: Repeats all files

within the current Folder.

Copying FilesPress the button to copy thecurrent file into My Music.

✽✽ NOTICE Selecting another feature duringcopying will display a pop-up askingwhether you wish to cancel copying.To cancel, select 'Yes’.

Copy

Repeat

ShuffleInfo

4 265


ListPress the button to display thefile list screen.

Turn the TUNE knob left/right tosearch for files. Once the desired fileis displayed, press the knob to selectand play.

List


2664


• Connect the USB device afterturning on the engine. The USBdevice may become damaged ifit is already connected when theignition is turned on.The USBdevice may not operate properlyif the car ignition is turned on oroff with the USB device connect-ed.

• Heed caution to static electricitywhen connecting/disconnectingUSB devices.

• Encoded MP3 Players will notbe recognized when connectedas an external device.

• When connecting an externalUSB device, the device may notproperly recognize the USB is insome states.

• Only products formatted withbyte/sectors under 64Kbyte willbe recognized.

• This device recognizes USBdevices formatted in FAT12/16/32 file formats. Thisdevice does not recognize files inNTFS file format.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Some USB devices may not be

supported due to compatibilityissues.

• Avoid contact between the USBconnector with bodily parts orforeign objects.

• Repeated connecting/discon-necting of USB devices withinshort periods of time may resultin product malfunction.

• A strange noise may occur whendisconnecting the USB.

• Make sure to connect/discon-nect external USB devices withthe audio power turned off.

• The amount of time required torecognize the USB device maydiffer depending on the type,size or file formats stored in theUSB. Such differences in timeare not indications of malfunc-tions.

• The device only supports USBdevices used to play music files.

• USB images and videos are notsupported.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Do not use the USB I/F to

charge batteries or USB acces-sories that generate heat. Suchacts may lead to worsened per-formance or damage to thedevice.

• The device may not recognizethe USB device if separatelypurchased USB hubs and exten-sion cables are being used.Connect the USB directly withthe multimedia terminal of thevehicle.

• When using mass storage USBdevices with separate logicaldrives, only files saved to theroot drive can be played.

• Files may not properly operateif application programs areinstalled to the USBs.

• The device may not operate nor-mally if MP3 Players, cellularphones, digital cameras, orother electronic devices (USBdevices not recognized asportable disk drives) are con-nected with the device.

4 267


(Continued)• Avoid use of USB

memory productsthat can also be usedas key chains ormobile phone acces-sories. Use of such products maycause damage to the USB jack.

• Connecting an MP3 device orphone through various chan-nels, such as AUX/BT or Audio/USB mode may result in popnoises or abnormal operation.

(Continued)• Charging through the USB may

not work for some mobiledevices.

• The device may not supportnormal operation when using aUSB memory type besides(Metal Cover Type) USBMemory.

• The device may not supportnormal operation when usingformats such as HDD Type, CF,or SD Memory.

• The device will not support fileslocked by DRM (Digital RightsManagement.)

• USB memory sticks used byconnecting an Adaptor (SDType or CF Type) may not beproperly recognized.

• The device may not operateproperly when using USB HDDsor USBs subject to connectionfailures caused by vehicle vibra-tions. (e.g. i-stick type)

(Continued)


2684

USB MODE

Basic Mode Screen







7. InfoDisplays detailed information for thecurrent file.



10. CopyCopies the current file into My Music.


4 269


Using USB Mode

Playing/Pausing USB FilesOnce a USB is connected, the modewill automatically start and beginplaying a USB file.


✽✽ NOTICE • Loading may require additional

time if there are many files andfolders within the USB and resultin faulty list display or file search-ing. Normal operations will resumeonce loading is complete.

• The device may not support nor-mal operation when using a USBmemory type besides (Metal CoverType) USB Memory.

Changing FilesPress the keys to move tothe previous or next file.









SCAN

SEEKTRACK

SEEKTRACK

SEEKTRACK

SEEKTRACK


2704

Searching FoldersPress the ( )keyto select and search folders.

Once the desired folder is displayed,press the TUNE knob to select.The first file within the selected fold-er will begin playing.

USB Mode MenuWithin this mode, you will haveaccess to the Info, Random(Shuffle),Repeat, Copy and List features.



as the default display within Displaysetup, the album/artist/file informa-tion are displayed as detailed fileinformation.



Random(Shuffle)Press the button to play filesin random(Shuffle) order.Each time the button is pressed, thefeature changes in order ofRandom(Shuffle) Folder➟Random(Shuffle) All➟Off.• Random(Shuffle) Folder : Plays the

files in the current folder in ran-dom(Shuffle) order.

• Random(Shuffle) All : Plays all filesin random(Shuffle) order.

ShuffleInfo

CATFOLDER

HD/CATFOLDER

4 271


RepeatPress the button to repeat thecurrent file or folder.Each time the button is pressed, thefeature changes in order of Repeat➟Repeat Folder ➟ Off.• Repeat (Icon) : Repeats the current

file.• Repeat Folder (Icon) : Repeats all

files within the current folder.





List

Copy

Repeat


2724


• iPod® is a registered trademarkof Apple Inc.

• In order to use the iPod® whileoperating the keys, you must usea dedicated iPod® cable. (thecable that is supplied when pur-chasing iPod®/iPhone® prod-ucts)

• If the iPod® is connected to thevehicle while it is playing, a highpitch sound could occur forapproximately 1-2 secondsimmediately after connecting. Ifpossible, connect the iPod® tothe vehicle with the iPod®

stopped/paused.• During ACC ON state, connect-

ing the iPod® through the iPod®

cable will charge the iPod®

through the car audio system.• When connecting with the iPod®

cable, make sure to fully insertthe jack to prevent communica-tion interference.

(Continued)

(Continued)• When the EQ features of an

external device, such as theiPod®, and the audio system areboth active, EQ effects couldoverlap and cause sound deteri-oration and distortion.Whenever possible, turn off theEQ feature within the externaldevice upon use by connectingwith the audio system.

• Noise may occur when an iPod®

or AUX device is connected.When such devices are notbeing used, disconnect thedevice for storage.

• When the iPod® or AUX devicepower is connected to the powerjack, playing the external devicemay result in noise. In suchcases, disconnect the power con-nection before use.

• Skipping or improper operationmay occur depending on thecharacteristics of your iPod®

/iPhone® device.(Continued)

(Continued)• If your iPhone® is connected to

both the Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology and USB, the soundmay not be properly played. Inyour iPhone®, select the Dockconnector or Bluetooth®Wireless Technology to changethe sound output (source).

• iPod® mode cannot be operatedwhen the iPod® cannot be recog-nized due to versions that do notsupport communication proto-cols.

• For fifth generation iPod® Nanodevices, the iPod® may not berecognized when the batterylevel is low. Please charge theiPod® for use.

• Search/play orders shown withinthe iPod® device may differ withthe orders shown within theaudio system.

• If the iPod® malfunctions due toan iPod® device defect, reset theiPod® and try again. (To learnmore, refer to your iPod® manu-al)

(Continued)

4 273


iPod® MODE

Basic Mode Screen


2. Operation StateFrom Repeat/Random(Shuffle), dis-plays the currently operating func-tion.

3. Song IndexDisplays the current song/total num-ber of songs.

4. Song InfoDisplays information about the cur-rent song.






(Continued)• Some iPod®s may not sync with

the System depending on its ver-sion. If the Media is removedbefore the Media is recognized,then the system may not proper-ly restore the previously operat-ed mode. (iPad® charging is notsupported.)


2744

Using iPod® Mode

Playing/Pausing iPod® SongsOnce an iPod® is connected, themode will automatically start andbegin playing an iPod® song.


✽✽ NOTICE iPod®s with unsupported communi-cation protocols may not properlyoperate in the audio system.

Changing SongsPress the key to move tothe previous or next song.


song has been playing for 2 sec-onds will start the current songfrom the beginning.

• Pressing the key beforethe song has been playing for 1 sec-onds will start the previous song.

• Slight time differences may existdepending your iPod® product.

Rewinding / Fast-forwardingSongsWhile playing, press and hold the

key (over 0.8 seconds) torewind or fast-forward the currentsong.

Searching CategoriesTurn the TUNE knob left/right tosearch for the desired category.

Once you find the desired category,press the TUNE knob to selectand play.

✽✽ NOTICE There are eight categories that can besearched, including Playlists, Artists,Albums, Genres, Songs, Composers,Audiobooks and Podcasts.

SEEKTRACK

SEEKTRACK

SEEKTRACK

SEEKTRACK

4 275


Category MenuWithin the iPod® Category menu,you will have access to the ,Home, and features.

1. : Displays the play screen2. Home : Moves to the iPod® root cat-

egory screen3. : Moves to the previous cate-

gory

✽✽ NOTICE • If the search mode is accessed

while playing a song, the mostrecently searched category is dis-played.

• Search steps upon initial connec-tion may differ depending on thetype of iPod® device.


2764

iPod® Mode MenuWithin this mode, you will haveaccess to the Random(Shuffle),Repeat and List features.

Random(Shuffle)Press the button to playsongs in random(Shuffle) order.Each time the button is pressed, thefeature changes in order ofRandom(Shuffle) Album➟Random(Shuffle) All➟Off.• Random(Shuffle) Album : Shuffle

Album plays album inRandom(Shuffle) order.

• Random(Shuffle) All : Plays allsongs in Random(Shuffle) order.

RepeatPress the button to repeat thecurrent song. Press the button againto turn the repeat feature off.• Repeat : Repeats the current song

ListPress the button to display theCategory Menu.

Turn the TUNE knob left/right tosearch for the desired category.Once you find the desired category,press the TUNE knob to selectand play.

AUX MODE

Using AUX Mode

Press the key Select [AUX]

An external device can be connectedto play music.

MEDIA

List

Repeat

Shuffle

4 277


Connecting an External DeviceExternal audio players (Camcorders,car VCR, etc.) can be played througha dedicated cable.

✽✽ NOTICE • If an external device connector is

connected with the AUX terminal,then AUX mode will automaticallyoperate. Once the connector is dis-connected, the previous mode willbe restored.

• AUX mode can be used only whenan external audio player (cam-corder, car VCR, etc.) has beenconnected.

• The AUX volume can be con-trolled separately from otheraudio modes.

• Connecting a connector jack to theAUX terminal without an externaldevice will convert the system toAUX mode, but only output noise.When an external device is notbeing used, also remove the con-nector jack.

• When the external device power isconnected to the power jack, play-ing the external device may outputnoise. In such cases, disconnect thepower connection before use.

• Fully insert the AUX cable to theAUX jack upon use.


2784

MY MUSIC MODE

Basic Mode Screen



3. File IndexDisplays the current file/total numberof files.







10. DeleteDeletes the current file.


4 279


Using My Music Mode

Playing/Pausing My Music Files


✽✽ NOTICE If there are no files saved within MyMusic, the [My Music] button willbe disabled.










SCAN

SEEKTRACK

SEEKTRACK

SEEKTRACK

SEEKTRACK


2804

My Music Mode MenuWithin this mode, you will haveaccess to the Info, Random(Shuffle),Repeat, Delete and List features.


✽✽ NOTICE The title, artist and album info aredisplayed only when such informa-tion is recorded within the MP3 fileID3 tag.

RandomPress the button to play filesin random order. Press the buttonagain to turn the Random feature off.

RepeatPress the button to repeat thecurrent song. Press the button againto turn the repeat feature off.

Deleting FilesPress the button to delete thecurrent file.



List

Delete

Repeat

Shuffle

Info

4 281


List MenuFrom the List screen, it is possible todelete files you previously saved intoMy Music.

Press the button or individ-ually select the files you want todelete. Once files are selected, the

button and buttonswill be enabled.

1) :Moves to the previous screen2) Sellect All: Selects all files3) Unsellet All: Deselects all selected

files4) Delete: Deletes selected files

After selecting the files you want todelete, press the button todelete the selected files.

✽✽ NOTICE • If there is memory available, up to

6,000 files can be saved.• Identical files cannot be copied

more than 1,000 times.• To check memory information, go

to [System] [MemoryInformation]

SETUP

Delete

DeleteUnselect All

Select All


2824

✽✽ NOTICE - USING THEBluetooth® WirelessTechnology Audio Mode

• Bluetooth® Wireless TechnologyAudio Mode can be used onlywhen a Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology phone has been con-nected.

• Bluetooth® Wireless TechnologyAudio Mode will not be availablewhen connecting mobile phonesthat do not support this feature.

• While Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology Audio is playing, if theBluetooth® Wireless Technologyphone is connected, then the musicwill also stop.

• Moving the Track up/down whileplaying Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology audio mode mayresult in pop noises in some mobilephones.

• Bluetooth® Wireless Technologystreaming audio may not be sup-ported in some mobile phones.

(Continued)

(Continued)• When returning to Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology Audio modeafter ending a call, the mode maynot automatically restart in somemobile phones.

• Receiving an incoming call or mak-ing an outgoing call while playingBluetooth® Wireless TechnologyAudio may result in audio interfer-ence.

4 283


Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology AUDIO MODE

Using Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology Audio Mode

Playing/Pausing Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology AudioOnce a Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology device is connected, themode will automatically start.


✽✽ NOTICE The play/pause feature may operatedifferently depending on the mobilephone.


Setting ConnectionIf a Bluetooth® Wireless Technologydevice has not been connected, pressthe key [Phone] button todisplay the Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology connection screen.It is possible to use the pair phone,connect/disconnect and delete fea-tures from your Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology phone.

SETUP

SEEKTRACK


2844

✽✽ NOTICE • If the Bluetooth® Wireless

Technology audio is not operatingproperly, check whether the fea-ture is turned off at [Phone] [Streaming Audio]. If thefeature is off, turn back on and tryagain.

• If music is not yet playing fromyour mobile device after convertingto Bluetooth® Wireless TechnologyAudio mode, pressing the play but-ton once may start playing themode. Check to see that music isplaying from the Bluetooth®Wireless Technology device afterconverting to Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology Audio Mode.

✽✽ NOTICE - PAIRINGTHROUGH [PHONE]SETUP

• The Bluetooth® and VoiceRecognition Manual is provided intwo versions due to software ver-sion differences.

• Before reading the manual, checkthe following.

• Press the key Select[Phone] Select [Pair Phone]

• From your Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology device (i.e. MobilePhone), search and select your caraudio system.

• If you entered the Passkey withinthe Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology device

• If the following screen is displayedand a 6-digit passkey is checkedand confirmed within theBluetooth® Wireless Technologydevice.

SETUP

SETUP

4 285



What is Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology Pairing? Pairing refers to the process of syn-chronizing your Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology phone or device with thecar audio system for connection.Pairing is necessary to connect anduse the Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology feature.




2. Press the button to enterthe Pair Phone screen.




4. After a few moments, a screen isdisplayed where the passkey isentered. Here, enter thepasskey “0000” to pair yourBluetooth® Wireless Technologydevice with the car audio system.


OK

PHONE

PHONE


2864

✽✽ NOTICE


key or the key on thesteering wheel displays the followingscreen. Press the [Pair] button topair a new device or press the[Connect] to connect a previouslypaired device.



The following steps are the same asthose described in the section"When No Devices have beenPaired" on the previous page.










• Only Bluetooth®Wireless TechnologyHandsfree and Bluetooth audiorelated features are supported.

SETUP

PHONE

4 287






Connecting a DevicePress the key Select[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]



From the paired phone list, select thedevice you want to connect andpress the button.Connect

SETUP


2884

Changing Priority



From the paired phone list, selectthe phone you want to switch to thehighest priority, then press the

button from the Menu.The selected device will be changedto the highest priority.




From the paired phone list, select thecurrently connected device andpress the button.Disconnect

SETUP Change priority

SETUP

4 289


Deleting a Device


From the paired phone list, select thedevice you want to delete and pressthe button.





Delete

SETUP


2904


Phone Menu Screen



2) Dial Number : Displays the dialscreen where numbers can bedialed to make calls




✽✽ NOTICE • If you press the [Call History] but-


• If you press the [Contacts] buttonbut there is no contacts datastored, a prompt is displayedwhich asks to download contactsdata.





3) Delete All : Delete all storedfavorite contacts




PHONE

PHONE

4 291


Calling by Dialing a Number

Press the key Select [DialNumber]

1) Dial Pad : Used to enter phonenumber

2) Call : If a number has been entered,calls the number If no number hasbeen entered, switches to call histo-ry screen

3) End : Deletes the entered phonenumber

4) Delete : Deletes entered numbersone digit at a time

Answering Calls


Wireless Technology device connect-ed will display the following screen.



3) Accept : Accept the incoming call4) Reject : Reject the incoming call





PHONE


2924

During a Handsfree Call

1) Caller : Displays the other party’sname if the incoming caller issaved within your contacts


3) Call time : Displays the call time4) End : Ends call5) Private : Converts to Private mode6) Out Vol. : Sets call volume as

heard by the other party7) Mute : Turns Mic Mute On/Off

✽✽ NOTICE If the mic is muted, the other partywill not be able to hear your voice.

Call History


A list of incoming, outgoing andmissed calls is displayed.Press the button to down-load the call history.

1) Call History :- Displays recent calls (call history)- Connects call upon selection

2) Download : Download Recent CallHistory

• Call history may not be saved in thecall history list in some mobilephones.

• Calls received with hidden caller IDwill not be saved in the call historylist.

• Calling through the call history is notpossible when there is no call histo-ry stored or a Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology phone is not connected.



Download

PHONE

4 293


Contacts


The list of saved phone book entriesis displayed. Press the but-ton to download the call history.

1) Contacts List :- Displays downloaded contacts

entries- Connects call upon selection

2) Sort by : Find a contact in analphabetical order.

3) Download : Download contactsentries







Download

PHONE


2944






1) :Moves to the previous screen2) Connect/Disconnect Phone :

Connect/ disconnects currentlyselected phone



SETUP

SETUP

4 295












Streaming AudioPress the key Select[Phone] Select [Streaming Audio]

When Streaming Audio is turned on,you can play music files saved in yourBluetooth® Wireless Technologydevice through the audio system.

SETUP SETUP


2964


Use the , buttons to adjust theoutgoing volume level.




✽✽ NOTICE To turn Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology back on, go to [Phone] and press “Yes”.

SETUP

SETUP

SEEKTRACK

SETUP

4 297


VOICE RECOGNITION






[Prompt Feedback]









Re-starting Voice RecognitionWhile system waits for a commandShortly press the key on thesteering remote controllerThe command wait state is immedi-ately ended and the beep ton willsound. After the “beep”, say the voicecommand.

SETUP


2984

❈ Illustration on using voice commands


• Skipping Voice RecognitionShortly pressing the key(under 0.8 seconds):


More Help

Contacts

Cancel

More Help



Please say a...

More Help.You can say Radio, FM, AM, Media, CD, USB, Aux,My Music, iPod®, Bluetooth Audio, Phone, CallHistory or Phone book. Please say a command.

ContactsPlease say the name of the contacts you wantto call (BEEP)

More Help.You can say Radio, FM, AM, Media, CD, USB, Aux,My Music, iPod®, Bluetooth Audio, Phone, CallHistory or Phone book. Please say a command.

Ding~

(BEEP)

Ding~

Di-Ding~(Cancel Sound)

Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds)

4 299





Call<Name> Calls <Name> saved in ContactsEx) Call John Smith

Phone Provides guidance on Phone related com-mands. After saying this command, say“Favorites”,“Dial Number”, “Call History” or“Contacts” execute corresponding functions.









XM2➟XM3➟FM1)













(Call by Name)




3004

0~255










device.




4 301


• FM/AM radio commands: available during FM, AMradio operation


Command FunctionPreset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6.

Auto Store Automatically selects radio broadcast fre-quencies with superior reception and saves inPresets 1~6.

Seek up Plays the next (higher) receivable broadcast.

Seek down Plays the previous (lower) receivable broadcast.




Command FunctionScan Scans receivable channels from the current

broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.




3024



Command FunctionPlay Plays the currently paused track.

Pause Pauses the current track.

Shuffle Randomly plays the tracks within the CD.

Shuffle Off Cancels random play to play tracks in sequen-tial order.



Scan Scans the tracks from the next track for 10seconds each.


Information Displays the information screen of the currenttrack.

Command FunctionPlay Plays the currently paused file.

Pause Pauses the current file.

Shuffle Randomly plays the files within the currentfolder.

All Shuffle Randomly plays all saved files.

Shuffle Off Cancels random play to play files in sequen-tial order.


Folder Repeat Repeats all files in the current folder.


Next File Plays the next file.

Previous File Plays the previous file.



Copy Copies the current file into My Music.

4 303




My Music operation



Shuffle Randomly plays the songs within the currentcategory.

Shuffle Off Cancels random play to play songs in sequen-tial order.





Shuffle Randomly plays all saved files.

Shuffle Off Cancels random play to play files in sequentialorder.






Delete All Deletes all files saved in My Music. You willbypass an additional confirmation process.


3044



Pairing Using the Buttonor the Steering Wheel Control

Button







OK

PHONE

PHONE

4 305







✽✽ NOTICE






SETUP

PHONE


3064















4 307





From the paired phone list, select thedevice you want to connect andpress the button.

Changing Priority



SETUP

ConnectSETUP


3084








4 309


Deleting a Device







Delete

SETUP


3104


Phone Menu Screen


















PHONE

PHONE

4 311





2) Call : If a number has beenentered, calls the number If nonumber has been entered, switch-es to call history screen



Answering Calls










PHONE


3124







Call History





• Call history may not be saved inthe call history list in some mobilephones.




• Up to 20 received, dialed andmissed calls are stored in CallHistory.

• Time of received/dialed calls andcall time information are not saved.

Download

PHONE

4 313


Contacts



1) Contacts List :- Displays downloaded contacts

entries- Connects call upon selection

2) Sort by : Find a contact in analphabetical order.

3) Download : Download contactsentries







Download

PHONE


3144






1) :Moves to the previous screen2) Connect/Disconnect Phone :

Connect/ disconnects currentlyselected phone



SETUP

SETUP

4 315












Auto Download (Contacts)Press the key Select[Phone] Select [Auto Download]

This feature is used to automaticallydownload mobile contacts entriesonce a Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology phone is connected.

✽✽ NOTICE • The Auto Download feature will

download mobile contacts entriesevery time the phone is connected. Thedownload time may differ dependingon the number of saved contactsentries and the communication state.

• Before downloading contacts, firstcheck to see that your mobilephone supports the contactsdownload feature.

SETUP SETUP


3164

Streaming AudioPress the key Select[Phone] Select [Streaming Audio]

When Streaming Audio is turned on,you can play music files saved inyour Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology device through the audiosystem.






SETUP

SEEKTRACK

SETUP SETUP

4 317



SETUP


3184

VOICE RECOGNITION


Starting Voice RecognitionShortly press the key on thesteering wheel remote controller. Saya command.




[Prompt Feedback]








Skipping Prompt MessagesWhile prompt message is being stat-ed Shortly press the key on thesteering remote controller.The prompt message is immediatelyended and the beep tone will sound.After the “beep”, say the voice com-mand.

Re-starting Voice RecognitionWhile system waits for a commandShortly press the key on thesteering remote controller.The command wait state is immedi-ately ended and the beep ton willsound. After the “beep”, say the voicecommand.

SETUP

4 319






More Help

Contacts

Cancel

More Help



Please say a...


Ding~

(BEEP)

Ding~

Di-Ding~(Cancel Sound)Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds)




3204














XM2➟XM3➟FM1)













(Call by Name)



4 321


0~255










device.


Mute Mutes the sound



3224











4 323


















• MP3 CD / USB commands: Commands available duringUSB and MP3 CD operation


3244



My Music operation














4 325


SETUP

Starting ModePress the key to display theSetup screen.

You can select and control optionsrelated to [Display], [Sound],[Clock/Calendar], [Phone] and[System].

Display Settings

Adjusting the BrightnessPress the key Select[Display] Select [Brightness]

Use the , buttons to adjust thescreen brightness or set theBrightness on Automatic, Daylight, orNight mode.Press the button to reset.

1) Automatic : Adjusts the brightnessautomatically

2) Daylight : Always maintains thebrightness on high

3) Night: Always maintains thebrightness on low

Pop-up ModePress the key Select[Display] Select [Mode Pop up]

This feature is used to display thePop-up Mode screen when enteringradio and media modes.When this feature is turned on,pressing the or keywill display the Pop-up Mode screen.

✽✽ NOTICE The media Pop-up Mode screen canbe displayed only when two or moremedia modes have been connected.

MEDIA RADIO

SETUP

Default

SETUP SETUP


3264

Text Scroll

Press the key Select[Display] Select [Text Scroll]

This feature is used to scroll text dis-played on the screen when it is toolong to be displayed at once.When turned on, the text is repeat-edly scrolled. When turned off, thetext is scrolled just once.

MP3 Information DisplayPress the key Select[Display] Select [Media Display]

This feature is used to change theinformation displayed within USBand MP3 CD modes.

1) Folder File : Displays file nameand folder name

2) Album Artist Song : Displaysalbum name/artist name/song

Sound Settings

Sound SettingsPress the key Select[Sound] Select [Sound Setting]

SETUP

SETUP

SETUP

4 327


Use the , , , buttons toadjust the Fader/Balance settings.Use the , buttons to adjust theBass/Middle/Treble settings.Press the button to reset.

Virtual SoundPress the key Select[Sound] Select [Virtual Sound]

This feature is used to set the PowerBass, Power Treble and Surroundsound options.

SDVC (Speed Dependent VolumeControl)Press the key Select[Sound] Select [Speed DependentVol.]

The volume level is controlled auto-matically according to the vehiclespeed. SDVC can be set by selectingfrom Off/Low/Mid/High.

Voice Recognition VolumePress the key Select[Sound] Select [Voice RecognitionVol.]

Turn the TUNE knob to adjust theVoice Recognition volume.

SETUP SETUP

SETUP

Default


3284

Touch Screen BeepPress the key Select[Sound] Select [Touch ScreenBeep]

This feature is used to turn the touchscreen beep on/off.

Blue Link Voice VolumePress the key Select[Sound] Select [Blue Link VoiceVol.]

Turn the TUNE knob to adjust theBlue Link Voice Volume.

❈ Blue Link® may differ dependingon the selected audio.

Clock/Calendar SettingClock SettingPress the key Select[Clock/Calendar] Select [ClockSettings]Use the , buttons to set theHour, Minutes and AM/PM setting.

✽✽ NOTICE Press and hold the key (over0.8 seconds) to set theClock/Calendar screen.

CLOCK

SETUP

SETUP SETUP

4 329


Calendar SettingPress the key Select[Clock/Calendar] Select [CalendarSettings]

Use the , buttons to set theMonth, Day and Year setting.

Time FormatPress the key Select[Clock/Calendar] Select [Time Format]

This feature is used to change theclock format between 12hr or 24hr.

Clock DisplayPress the key Select[Clock/Calendar] Select [ClockDisplay (Power off)]This feature is used to display a clockon the screen when the audio sys-tem is turned off.

SETUP SETUP SETUP


3304

System Setting

HD Radio™ On/OffPress the key Select[System] Select [FM], [AM]

This feature is used to set whether toreceive FM/AM HD Radio™ broad-casts.

Prompt FeedbackPress the key Select[System] Select [Prompt Feedback]

This feature is used to select thedesired prompt feedback option fromON and OFF.

1) ON : When using voice recognition,provides detailed guidanceprompts

2) OFF : When using voice recogni-tion, omits some guidance prompts

LanguagePress the key Select[System] Select [Language]

This feature is used to change thesystem and voice recognition lan-guage.If the language is changed, the sys-tem will restart and apply the select-ed language.

SETUP SETUP

SETUP

4 331


Memory InformationPress the key Select[System] Select [Memory Information]

This feature displays informationrelated to system memory.

1) Using : Displays capacity currentlyin use

2) Capacity : Displays total capacity

REAR VIEW CAMERA(if equipped)

• The system has been equippedwith a rear view camera for usersafety by allowing a wider rearrange of vision.

• The rear view camera will automat-ically operate when the ignition keyis turned ON and the transmissionshift lever is positioned into reverse(R).

• The rear view camera will automat-ically stop operating when set to athe transmission shift lever is posi-tioned to another gear.

SETUP

CAUTIONThe rear view camera has beenequipped with an optical lens toprovide a wider range of visionand may appear different fromthe actual distance. For safety,directly check the rear andleft/right sides.


3324

Blue Link®


The Blue Link® button offersaccess to enhanced navigation serv-ices. The " " button offers imme-diate contact to SOS EmergencyAssistance. A detailed list of com-mands is available in the Blue LinkUser's Manual.






4 333



NOTE:The Turn by Turn(TBT) feature sup-ports the store of ten(10) destina-tions in the TBT destinationsdirectory.
















3344

Eco Coach







4 335




total of 9 levels.


4. Next Street name5. Distance to destination6. Expected Time Arrival7. Current Street name



3364

How vehicle audio works

AM and FM radio signals are broad-cast from transmitter towers locatedaround your city. They are intercept-ed by the radio antenna on your vehi-cle. This signal is then processed bythe radio and sent to your vehiclespeakers.When a strong radio signal hasreached your vehicle, the preciseengineering of your audio systemensures the best possible qualityreproduction. However, in somecases the signal coming to your vehi-cle may not be strong and clear.

This can be due to factors, such asthe distance from the radio station,closeness of other strong radio sta-tions or the presence of buildings,bridges or other large obstructions inthe area.

AM broadcasts can be received atgreater distances than FM broad-casts. This is because AM radiowaves are transmitted at low fre-quencies. These long distance, lowfrequency radio waves can follow thecurvature of the earth rather thantravelling straight. In addition, theycurve around obstructions resultingin better signal coverage.

JBM001

FM reception

JBM002

AM reception

4 337


FM broadcasts are transmitted athigh frequencies and do not bend tofollow the earth's surface. Becauseof this, FM broadcasts generallybegin to fade within short distancesfrom the station. Also, FM signals areeasily affected by buildings, moun-tains, and obstructions. This can leadto undesirable or unpleasant listen-ing conditions which might lead youto believe a problem exists with yourradio. The following conditions arenormal and do not indicate radiotrouble:

• Fading - As your vehicle movesaway from the radio station, thesignal will weaken and sound willbegin to fade. When this occurs,we suggest that you select anotherstronger station.

• Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals orlarge obstructions between thetransmitter and your radio can dis-turb the signal causing static orfluttering noises to occur. Reducingthe treble level may lessen thiseffect until the disturbance clears.

• Station Swapping - As an FM sig-nal weakens, another more power-ful signal near the same frequencymay begin to play. This is becauseyour radio is designed to lock ontothe clearest signal. If this occurs,select another station with astronger signal.

• Multi-Path Cancellation - Radiosignals being received from sever-al directions can cause distortionor fluttering. This can be caused bya direct and reflected signal fromthe same station, or by signalsfrom two stations with close fre-quencies. If this occurs, selectanother station until the conditionhas passed.

JBM003

FM radio station

JBM004 JBM005


3384

Using a cellular phone or a two-way radio When a cellular phone is used insidethe vehicle, noise may be producedfrom the audio system. This does notmean that something is wrong withthe audio equipment. In such a case,try to operate mobile devices as farfrom the audio equipment as possible.

Caring for CDs• If the temperature inside the car is too

high, open the car windows to venti-late before using the system.

• It is illegal to copy and useMP3/WMA files without permission.Use CDs that are created only bylawful means.

• Do not apply volatile agents, suchas benzene and thinner, normalcleaners and magnetic spraysmade for analogue disc onto CDs.

• To prevent the disc surface fromgetting damaged, hold CDs by theedges or the center hole only.

• Clean the disc surface with a pieceof soft cloth before playback (wipeit from the center to the outsideedge).

• Do not damage the disc surface orattach pieces of sticky tape orpaper.

• Make certain only CDs are insert-ed into the CD player (Do not insertmore than one CD at a time).

• Keep CDs in their cases after use toprotect them from scratches or dirt.

• Depending on the type of CD-R/CD-RW CDs, certain CDs maynot operate normally according tothe manufacturing companies. Insuch circumstances, continueduse may cause malfunctions toyour audio system.

✽✽ NOTICE - Playing an Incompatible

Copy Protected Audio CDSome copy protected CDs, which donot comply with international audioCD standards (Red Book), may notplay on your car audio. Please notethat inabilities to properly play acopy protected CD may indicatethat the CD is defective, not the CDplayer.

CAUTIONWhen using a communicationsystem such as a cellular phoneor a radio set inside the vehicle,a separate external antennamust be fitted. When a cellularphone or a radio set is usedwith an internal antenna alone,it may interfere with the vehi-cle's electrical system andadversely affect safe operationof the vehicle.

WARNINGDo not use a cellular phonewhile driving. Stop at a safelocation to use a cellular phone.

4 339


NOTE:Order of playing files (folders) :1. Song playing order : to

sequentially.2. Folder playing order :❋ If no song file is contained in the

folder, that folder is not displayed.

WARNING• Do not stare at the screen

while driving. Staring at thescreen for prolonged periodsof time could lead to trafficaccidents.

• Do not disassemble, assem-ble, or modify the audio sys-tem. Such acts could result inaccidents, fire, or electricshock.

• Using the phone while drivingmay lead to a lack of attention oftraffic conditions and increasethe likelihood of accidents.Use the phone feature afterparking the vehicle.

• Heed caution not to spill wateror introduce foreign objectsinto the device. Such actscould lead to smoke, fire, orproduct malfunction.

(Continued)


3404

(Continued)• Turn on the car ignition before

using this device. Do not oper-ate the audio system for longperiods of time with the ignitionturned off as such operationsmay lead to battery discharge.

• Do not subject the device tosevere shock or impact. Directpressure onto the front side ofthe monitor may cause dam-age to the LCD or touchscreen.

• When cleaning the device,make sure to turn off thedevice and use a dry andsmooth cloth. Never usetough materials, chemicalcloths, or solvents (alcohol,benzene, thinners, etc.) assuch materials may damagethe device panel or causecolor/quality deterioration.

(Continued)

CAUTION• Operating the device while

driving could lead to accidentsdue to a lack of attention toexternal surroundings. Firstpark the vehicle before operat-ing the device.

• Adjust the volume to levels thatallow the driver to hear soundsfrom outside of the vehicle.Driving in a state where exter-nal sounds cannot be heardmay lead to accidents.

• Pay attention to the volume set-ting when turning the deviceon. A sudden output of extremevolume upon turning thedevice on could lead to hearingimpairment. (Adjust the volumeto a suitable levels before turn-ing off the device.)

(Continued)

(Continued)• Please refrain from use if the

screen is blank or no soundcan be heard as these signsmay indicate product malfunc-tion. Continued use in suchconditions could lead to acci-dents(fires, electric shock) orproduct malfunctions.

• Do not touch the antenna dur-ing thunder or lightening assuch acts may lead to light-ning induced electric shock.

• Do not stop or park in park-ing-restricted areas to operatethe product. Such acts couldlead to traffic accidents.

• Use the system with the vehi-cle ignition turned on.Prolonged use with the igni-tion turned off could result inbattery discharge.

4 341


(Continued)• Do not place beverages close

to the audio system. Spillingbeverages may lead to systemmalfunction.

• In case of product malfunction,please contact your place of pur-chase or After Service center.

• Placing the audio systemwithin an electromagneticenvironment may result innoise interference.

• Prevent caustic solutionssuch as perfume and cosmet-ic oil from contacting thedashboard because they maycause damage or discol-oration.


• To use an external USB device,make sure the device is not con-nected when starting up thevehicle. Connect the device afterstarting up.

• If you start the engine when theUSB device is connected, it maydamage the USB device. (USBflashdrives are very sensitive toelectric shock.)

• If the engine is started up orturned off while the external USBdevice is connected, the externalUSB device may not work.

• The System may not play unau-thenticated MP3 or WMA files.

1) It can only play MP3 files withthe compression rate between8Kbps~320Kbps.

2) It can only play WMA musicfiles with the compression ratebetween 8Kbps~320Kbps.

• Take precautions for static elec-tricity when connecting or dis-connecting the external USBdevice.

(Continued)

(Continued)• An encrypted MP3 PLAYER is

not recognizable.• Depending on the condition of

the external USB device, theconnected external USB devicecan be unrecognizable.

• When the formatted byte/sectorsetting of External USB deviceis not either 512BYTE or2048BYTE, then the device willnot be recognized.

• Use only a USB device format-ted to FAT 12/16/32.

• USB devices without USB I/Fauthentication may not be rec-ognizable.

• Make sure the USB connectionterminal does not come in con-tact with the human body orother objects.

• If you repeatedly connect or dis-connect the USB device in ashort period of time, it maybreak the device.

• You may hear a strange noisewhen connecting or disconnect-ing a USB device.

(Continued)


3424

(Continued)• If you disconnect the external

USB device during playback inUSB mode, the external USBdevice can be damaged or maymalfunction. Therefore, discon-nect the external USB devicewhen the audio is turned off orin another mode. (e.g, Radio,CD)

• Depending on the type andcapacity of the external USBdevice or the type of the filesstored in the device, there is adifference in the time taken forrecognition of the device.

• Do not use the USB device forpurposes other than playingmusic files.

• Playing videos through the USBis not supported.

• Use of USB accessories such asrechargers or heaters using USBI/F may lower performance orcause trouble.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Some USB flash memory read-

ers (such as CF, SD, micro SD,etc.) or external-HDD typedevices can be unrecognizable.

• Music files protected by DRM(DIGITAL RIGHTS MANAGE-MENT) are not recognizable.

• The data in the USB memorymay be lost while using thisaudio. Always back up impor-tant data on a personal storagedevice.

• Please avoid usingUSB memory prod-ucts which can beused as key chains orcellular phone acces-sories as they could cause dam-age to the USB jack. Pleasemake certain only to use plugtype connector products.

(Continued)• If you use devices such as a USB

hub purchased separately, thevehicle’s audio system may notrecognize the USB device. In thatcase, connect the USB devicedirectly to the multimedia termi-nal of the vehicle.

• If the USB device is divided bylogical drives, only the music fileson the highest-priority drive arerecognized by car audio.

• Devices such as MP3 Player/Cellular phone/Digital camera canbe unrecognizable by standardUSB I/F can be unrecognizable.

• Charging through the USB maynot be supported in some mobiledevices.

• USB HDD or USB types liable toconnection failures due to vehiclevibrations are not supported. (i-stick type)

• Some non-standard USB devices(METAL COVER TYPE USB)can be unrecognizable.

(Continued)

4 343



• Some iPod® models may notsupport communication proto-col and files may not properlyplay.Supported iPod® models:- iPhone® 3GS/4- iPod® touch 1st~4th generation- iPod® nano 1st~6th generation- iPod® classic

• The order of search or playbackof songs in the iPod® can be dif-ferent from the order searchedin the audio system.

• If the iPod® is disabled due to itsown malfunction, reset theiPod®. (Reset: Refer to iPod®

manual)• An iPod® may not operate nor-

mally on low battery.(Continued)

(Continued)• Some iPod® devices, such as the

iPhone® , can be connectedthrough the Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology interface. Thedevice must have audioBluetooth® Wireless Technologycapability (such as for stereoheadphone Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology).The device can play, but it willnot be controlled by the audiosystem.

• To use iPod® features within theaudio, use the cable providedupon purchasing an iPod®

device.• Skipping or improper operation

may occur depending on thecharacteristics of your iPod®/iPhone® device.

• If your iPhone® is connected toboth the Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology and USB, the soundmay not be properly played. Inyour iPhone®, select the Dockconnector or Bluetooth®Wireless Technology to changethe sound output (source).

(Continued)

(Continued)• When connecting iPod® with the

iPod® Power Cable, insert theconnector to the multimediasocket completely. If not insert-ed completely, communicationsbetween iPod® and audio maybe interrupted.

• When adjusting the soundeffects of the iPod® and theaudio system, the sound effectsof both devices will overlap andmight reduce or distort thequality of the sound.

• Deactivate (turn off) the equal-izer function of an iPod® whenadjusting the audio system’svolume, and turn off the equal-izer of the audio system whenusing the equalizer of an iPod®.

• When not using iPod® with caraudio, detach the iPod® cablefrom iPod®. Otherwise, iPod®

may remain in accessory mode,and may not work properly.


3444

✽✽ NOTICE - Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology

• The Bluetooth® word mark andlogos are registered trademarksowned by Bluetooth SIG, lnc. andany use of such marks is underlicense.A Bluetooth® enabled call phone isrequired to use Bluetooth® wire-less technology.

• Bluetooth® Wireless Technologyphone compatibility can be checkedby visiting www. hyundaiusa.comand under the CARING FORYOUR CAR - BLUETOOTHCOMPATIBILITY menu.

✽✽ NOTICE - BEFORE USINGTHE Bluetooth®

HANDSFREE

What is Bluetooth® ?• Bluetooth® refers to a short-dis-

tance wireless networking technol-ogy which uses a 2.4GHz ~2.48GHz frequency to connectvarious devices within a certaindistance.

• Supported within PCs, externaldevices, Bluetooth® phones, PDAs,various electronic devices, andautomotive environments,Bluetooth® allows data to be trans-mitted at high speeds without hav-ing to use a connector cable.

• Bluetooth® Handsfree refers to adevice which allows the user toconveniently make phone callswith Bluetooth® mobile phonesthrough the audio system.

• Bluetooth®Handsfree may not be sup-ported in some mobile phones. Tolearn more about mobile device com-patibility, visit www. hyundaiusa.com.

✽✽ NOTICE - PRECAUTIONSFOR SAFE DRIVING

• Bluetooth® Handsfree is a featurethat enables drivers to practicesafe driving. Connecting the headunit with a Bluetooth® phoneallows the user to convenientlymake and receive calls and usecontacts. Before using Bluetooth®,carefully read the contents of thisuser’s manual.

• Excessive use or operations whiledriving may lead to negligent driv-ing practices and result in acci-dents. Refrain from excessiveoperations while driving.

• Viewing the screen for prolongedperiods of time is dangerous andmay lead to accidents. When driv-ing, view the screen only for shortperiods of time.

4 345


✽✽ NOTICE -WHEN CON-NECTING A Bluetooth®

PHONE

• Before connecting the head unitwith the mobile phone, check tosee that the mobile phone supportsBluetooth® features.

• Even if the phone supportsBluetooth®, the phone will not befound during device searches if thephone has been set to hidden stateor the Bluetooth® power is turnedoff. Disable the hidden state orturn on the Bluetooth® powerprior to searching/connecting withthe Head unit.

• After a Bluetooth phone has beensuccessfully paired, the phone willautomatically connect when theignition is turned on.

• If you do not want automatic con-nection with your Bluetooth®device, turn off the Bluetooth® fea-ture within your mobile phone.

• The Handsfree call volume andquality may differ depending onthe mobile phone.

• Park the vehicle when connectingthe head unit with the mobilephone.

• Bluetooth® connection may becomeintermittently disconnected insome mobile phones. Follow thesesteps to try again.

1. Within the mobile phone, turnthe Bluetooth® function off/onand try again.

2. Turn the mobile phone powerOff/On and try again.

3. Completely remove the mobilephone battery, reboot, and thenagain.

4. Reboot the Audio System andtry again.

5. Delete all paired devices, pairand try again.

• Handsfree call quality and volumemay differ depending on themodel of your mobile phone.


3464

✽✽ NOTICE - USING THEVoice Recognition

• When using the voice recognitionfeature, only commands listedwithin the user's manual are sup-ported.

• Be aware that during the opera-tion of the voice recognition sys-tem, pressing any key other thanthe key terminate voice recog-nition mode.

• For superior voice recognitionperformance, position the micro-phone used for voice recognitionabove the head of the driver’s seatand maintain a proper positionwhen saying commands.

• Within the following situations,voice recognition may not functionproperly due to background noiseswhich may be picked up by theoverhead microphone.- When the windows and sunroof

are open- When the heating and air condi-

tioning fan blower speed is high- When entering and passing

through tunnels(Continued)

(Continued)- When driving on rugged and

uneven roads- During severe rain (heavy rains,

windstorms)• Phone related voice commands

can be used only when aBluetooth® Wireless Technologydevice is connected.

• When making calls by stating aname, the corresponding contactmust be downloaded and storedwithin the audio system.

• After downloading the Bluetooth®Wireless Technology phone book,it takes some times to convert thephone book data into voice infor-mation. During this time, voicerecognition may not properlyoperate.

• Pronounce the voice commandsnaturally and clearly as if in a nor-mal conversation.

4 347


■■ CD Player : AM1B2DMKN, AM1B3DMAN


3484


❈ Display and settings may differdepending on the selected audio.

Audio Head Unit1. (EJECT)• Ejects the disc.

2.• Changes to FM/AM/XM mode.

• Each time the key is pressed, themode is changed in order of FM1 ➟FM2 ➟ AM ➟ XM1 ➟ XM2 ➟ XM3.

❈ In Setup>Display, the radio pop upscreen will be displayed when[Mode Pop up] is turned .When the pop up screen is dis-played, use the TUNE knob orkeys ~ to select thedesired mode.

3.• Changes to CD, USB(iPod®), AUX,

My Music, BT Audio mode.• Each time the key is pressed, the


❈ In Setup>Display, the media popup screen will be displayed when[Mode Pop up] is turned .When the pop up screen is dis-played, use the TUNE knob orkeys ~ to select thedesired mode.

4.• Operates Phone Screen❈ When a phone is not connected,

the connection screen is displayed.

5. PWR/VOL knob• Power : Turns power On/Off by

pressing the knob• Volume : Sets volume by turning

the knob left/right

6.• Radio Mode : Automatically search-

es for broadcast frequencies.• CD, USB, iPod®, My Music modes

- Shortly press the key (under 0.8 sec-onds): Moves to next or previous song(file)

- Press and hold the key (over 0.8seconds): Rewinds or fast-forwardsthe current song.

• BT Audio mode : Moves to next orprevious song(file)

❈ The Play/Pause feature may oper-ate differently depending on themobile phone.

SEEKTRACK

PHONE

51

On

MEDIA

61

On

RADIO

4 349


7.• Radio Mode

- XM RADIO™ : Category Search• MP3, CD, USB mode : Folder

Search

8. ~ (Preset)• Radio Mode: Saves frequencies

(channels) or receives saved fre-quencies (channels)

• CD, USB, iPod®, My Music mode- : Repeat- : Random

• In the Radio, Media, Setup, andMenu pop up screen, the numbermenu is selected.

9.• Each time the button is shortly

pressed (under 0.8 seconds), itsets the screen Off ➟ Screen On ➟Screen Off

❈ Audio operation is maintained andonly the screen will be turned Off.In the screen Off state, press anykey to turn the screen On again.

10.• Radio Mode- Shortly press the key (under 0.8

seconds): Previews each broad-cast for 5 seconds each.

- Press and hold the key (over 0.8seconds): Previews the broadcastssaved in Preset ~ for 5seconds each.

❈ Press the key again tocontinue listening to the currentfrequency.

❈ XM Radio™ does not support thePreset scan feature.

• CD, USB, My Music mode- Shortly press the key (under 0.8

seconds): Previews each song(file) for 10 seconds each.

❈ Press the key again tocontinue listening to the currentsong (file).

11.• Shortly press the key (under 0.8

seconds) : Moves to the Display,Sound, Clock, Phone, System set-ting modes.

• Press and hold the key (over 0.8seconds) : Move to the Time set-ting screen.

12.• Displays menus for the current mode.

13. TUNE knob• Radio mode : Changes frequency

by turning the knob left/right.• CD, USB, iPod®, My Music mode:

Searches songs (files) by turningthe knob left/right.

MENU

SETUPCLOCK

SCAN

SCAN

61

SCAN

DISP

2

1

61

CATFOLDER


3504

❈ When the desired song is dis-played, press the knob to play thesong.

• Moves focus in all selection menusand selects menus.


inserted

4 351


SETUP

Display Settings

Press the key Select [Display]through TUNE knob or keySelect menu through TUNE knob

Mode Pop up[Mode Pop up] Changes /selection mode• During On state, press the

or key to display the modechange pop up screen.

Media DisplayWhen playing an MP3 file, select thedesired display info from ‘Folder/File’or ‘Album/Artist/Song’.

Sound Settings

Press the key Select [Sound]through TUNE knob or keySelect menu through TUNE knob

2SETUP

MEDIARADIO

OffOn

1SETUP


3524

Sound SettingsThis menu allows you to set the ‘Bass,Middle, Treble’ and the Sound Fader andBalance.Select [Sound Settings] Selectmenu through TUNE knob Turn

TUNE knob left/right to set• Bass, Middle, Treble : Selects the

sound tone.• Fader, Balance : Moves the sound

fader and balance.• Default : Restores default settings.❈ Back : While adjusting values, re-

pressing the TUNE knob willrestore the parent menu.

Virtual SoundThe PoewrBass, PowerTreble, andSurround can be set.Select [Virtual Sound] Set menuthrough TUNE knob Set /

through TUNE knob• PowerBass : This is a sound sys-

tem feature that provides live bass.• PowerTreble :This is a sound system

feature that provides live tremble.• Surround : This is a sound system

feature that provides surroundsound.

❈ May differ depending on the selectedaudio.

Speed Dependent Volume ControlThis feature is used to automaticallycontrol the volume level according tothe speed of the vehicle.Select [Speed Dependent Vol.] Set[On/Off] TUNE knob

Voice Recognition VolumeAdjusts voice recognition volume.Select [Voice Recognition Vol.] Setvolume of TUNE knob

Off

On

4 353


Blue Link® Voice Volume(for Blue Link® equipped model)

Sets the Blue Link® voice recognitionvolume.❈ While using Blue Link® voice

recognition, turning the tune knobwill display the volume controlpopup screen.

❈ May differ depending on theselected audio.

Clock Settings

Press the key Select [Clock]through TUNE knob or keySelect menu through TUNE knob

Clock SettingsThis menu is used to set the time.Select [Clock Settings] Set through

TUNE knob Press TUNE knob

❈ Adjust the number currently infocus to set the [hour] and pressthe tune knob to set the [minute]and [AM/PM].

3

SETUPCLOCK


3544

Calendar SettingsThis menu is used to set the date(MM/DD/YYYY).Select [Calendar Settings]] Setthrough TUNE knob Press TUNE knob

❈ Adjust the number currently infocus to make the settings andpress the tune knob to move to thenext setting. (Set in order ofYear/Month/Day)

Time FormatThis function is used to set the 12/24hour time format of the audio system.Select [Time Format] Set 12Hr /24Hr through TUNE knob

Clock Display when Power isOFFSelect [Clock Disp.(Pwr Off)] Set

/ through TUNE knob• : Displays time/date on screen• : Turn off.Off

On

OffOn

4 355


SYSTEM SETTINGS

Press the key Select[System] through tune knob or key Select menu through TUNEknob

Memory InformationDisplays currently used memory andtotal system memory.Select [Memory Information] OKThe currently used memory is dis-played on the left side while the totalsystem memory is displayed on theright side.

Prompt FeedbackThis feature is used to change voicecommand feedback between Normaland Expert modes.Select [Prompt Feedback] Setthrough TUNE knob• On : This mode is for beginner

users and provides detailedinstructions during voice commandoperation.

• Off : This mode is for expert usersand omits some information duringvoice command operation. (Whenusing Expert mode, guidanceinstructions can be heard throughthe [Help] or [Menu] commands.

LanguageThis menu is used to set the displayand voice recognition language.Select [Language]Set through TUNE knob

❈ The system will reboot after thelanguage is changed.

❈ Language support by region- English, Francais, Espanol

5SETUP


3564

RADIO : FM, AM OR XM

SEEKPress the key• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8

seconds): Changes the frequency.• Pressing and holding the key (over

0.8 seconds): Automatically search-es for the next frequency.

Preset SEEKPress the ~ key• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8

seconds): Plays the frequencysaved in the corresponding key.

• Pressing and holding the key (over0.8 seconds): Pressing and holdingthe desired key from ~ will save the currently playingbroadcast to the selected key andsound a BEEP.

SCANPress the key• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8

seconds): The broadcast frequencyincreases and previews eachbroadcast for 5 seconds each. Afterscanning all frequencies, returnsand plays the current broadcast fre-quency.

• Pressing and holding the key (over0.8 seconds): Previews the broad-casts saved in Preset ~ for 5 seconds each.

Selecting through manualsearchTurn the TUNE knob left/right toadjust the frequency.• FM : Changes by 200KHz• AM : Changes by 10MHz

61

SCAN

61

61

SEEKTRACK

4 357


MENUWithin key are the A.Store(Auto Store) and Info functions.

A.StorePress the key Set [A.Store]through TUNE knob or key.Saves broadcasts with superiorreception to ~ keys. If nofrequencies are received, then themost recently received frequency willbe broadcast.

61

1MENU

MENU


3584

XM RADIO

Using XM satellite™ RadioYour vehicle is equipped with a 3month complimentary period of XMSatellite™ Radio. XM providesaccess to over 130 channels ofmusic, information, and entertain-ment programming.

SEEKPress the key• Shortly pressing the key: select

previous or next channel.• Pressing and holding the key (over

0.8 seconds): continuously move toprevious or next channel.


SCANPress the key• Shortly pressing the key: Previews

each broadcast for 5 secondseach

❈ Press the key again tocontinue listening to the currentfrequency


CategoryPress the key Set throughthe TUNE knob

• The display will indicate the catego-ry menus, highlight the categorythat the current channel belongs to.

• In the Category List Mode, pressthe key to navigate cat-egory list.

• Press the tune knob to select thelowest channel in the highlightedcategory.

❈ If channel is selected by selectingcategory, then the “CATEGORY”icon is displayed at the top of thescreen.

CATFOLDER

CATFOLDER

SCAN

SCAN

SEEKTRACK

4 359


PresetPress the ~ key• Shortly pressing the key: Plays the

frequency saved in the correspon-ding key.

• Pressing and holding the key (over0.8 seconds): Pressing and holdingthe desired key from ~ will save the current broadcast tothe selected key and sound aBEEP.

Tune• Rotate TUNE knob : Changes the

channel number or scrolls categorylist.

• Press TUNE knob : Selects themenu.

MenuSelect category menu through the

TUNE knob Press the keySelect [ Info] through the TUNE

knob or key

Info (Information)

Displays the Artist/Song info of thecurrent song.

1

MENU

61

61


3604

BASIC METHOD OF USE :Audio CD / MP3 CD / USB /iPod® / My Music

Press the key to change themod mode in order of CD ➟

USB(iPod®) ➟ AUX ➟ My Music ➟ BTAudio.The folder/file name is displayed onthe screen.

<Audio CD>

<CD MP3>

<USB>

<My Music>

❈ The CD is automatically playedwhen a CD is inserted.

❈ The USB music is automaticallyplayed when a USB is connected.

RepeatWhile song (file) is playing(RPT) keyAudio CD, MP3 CD, USB, iPod®, MyMusic mode: RPT on screen• To repeat one song (Press the key):

Repeats the current song.MP3 CD, USB mode: FLD.RPT onscreen• To repeat folder (pressing twice):

repeats all files within the currentfolder.

❈ Press the key again to turnoff repeat.

RandomWhile song (file) is playing(RDM) keyAudio CD, My Music mode: RDM onscreen• Random (Press the key): Plays all

songs in random order.

2 RDM

1 RPT

1 RPT

MEDIA

4 361


MP3 CD, USB mode: FLD.RDM onscreen• Folder Random (Press the key) :

Plays all files within the current fold-er in random order.

iPod® mode: ALB RDM on screen• Album Random (Press the key) :

Plays all files within albums of thecurrent category in random order.

MP3 CD, USB, iPod® mode: ALLRDM on screen• All Random (pressing twice): Plays

all files in random order.❈ Press the key again to turn

off repeat.

Changing Song/FileWhile song (file) is playingkey• Shortly pressing the key : Plays the

current song from the beginning.❈ If the key is pressed

again within 3 second, the previ-ous song is played.

• Pressing and holding the key (over0.8 seconds): Rewinds the song.

While song (file) is playingkey

• Shortly pressing the key : Plays thenext song.

• Pressing and holding the key (over0.8 seconds): Fast forwards thesong.

ScanWhile song (file) is playingkey• Shortly pressing the key : Scans all

songs from the next song for 10seconds each.

❈ Press the key again to turnoff.

❈ The SCAN function is not support-ed in iPod® mode.

Folder Search : MP3 CD, USBModeWhile file is playing(Folder Up) key• Searches the next folder.While file is playing(Folder Down) key• Searches the parent folder.❈ If a folder is selected by pressing

the TUNE knob, the first filewithin the selected folder will beplayed.

❈ In iPod® mode, moves to theParent Folder.

Searching Songs (File)• Turning TUNE knob : Searches

for songs (files)• Pressing TUNE knob : Plays

selected song (file).

CATFOLDER

CATFOLDER

SCAN

SCAN

SEEKTRACK

SEEKTRACK

SEEKTRACK

2 RDM


3624

MENU : Audio CDPress the CD MP3 mode keyto set the Repeat, Random,Information features.


RandomPress the key Set [ RDM]through the TUNE knob or key to randomly play songs withinthe current folder.❈ Press RDM again to turn off.


info display.

MENU : MP3 CD / USBPress the CD MP3 mode keyto set the Repeat, Folder Random,Folder Repeat, All Random,Information, and Copy features.


1 RPT

MENU

MENU

MENU

3MENU

2 RDM

MENU

1 RPT

MENU

MENU

4 363


Folder RandomPress the key Set [ F.RDM]through the TUNE knob or key to randomly play songs within thecurrent folder.❈ Press F.RDM again to turn off.

Folder RepeatPress the key Set [ F.RPT]through the TUNE knob or key to repeat songs within the cur-rent folder.❈ Press F.RPT again to turn off.

All RandomPress the key Set [ A.RDM]through the TUNE knob or keyto randomly play all songs within theCD.❈ Press A.RDM again to turn off.


info display.

CopyPress the key Set [ Copy]through the TUNE knob or key.• This is used to copy the current

song into My Music. You can playthe copied Music in My Musicmode.

❈ If another key is pressed whilecopying is in progress, a pop upasking you whether to cancelcopying is displayed.

❈ If another media is connected orinserted (USB, CD, iPod®, AUX)while copying is in progress, copy-ing is canceled.

❈ Music will not be played whilecopying is in progress.

6MENU

MENU

5MENU

4MENU

3MENU

2 RDM

MENU


3644

MENU : iPod®

In iPod® mode, press the keyto set the Repeat, Album Random, AllRandom, Information and Search fea-tures.

RepeatPress the key Set [ RPT]through the TUNE knob or key to repeat the current song.❈ Press RPT again to turn repeat off.

Album RandomPress the key Set [ Alb.RDM]through the TUNE knob or key.Plays albums within the currentlyplaying category in random order.❈ Press Alb.RDM again to turn off.

All RandomPress the key Set [A.RDM] through the TUNE knobor key.Plays all songs within the currentlyplaying category in random order.❈ Press A.RDM again to turn off.


info display.

SearchPress the key Set [ Search]through the TUNE knob or key.Displays iPod® category list.❈ Searching iPod® category is

key pressed, move to par-ent category.MENU

5MENU

MENU

4MENU

3

MENU

2 RDM

MENU

1 RPT

MENU

MENU

4 365


MENU : My Music Mode

In My Music mode, press the key to set the Repeat, Random,Information, Delete, Delete All, andDelete Selection features.

RepeatPress the key Set [ RPT]through the TUNE knob or key.Repeats the currently playing song.❈ Press RPT again to turn repeat

off.

RandomPress the key Set [ RDM]through the TUNE knob or key.Plays all songs in random order.❈ Press RDM again to turn random off.


info display.

DeletePress the key Set [ Delete]through the TUNE knob or key.• Deletes currently playing fileIn the play screen, pressing deletewill delete the currently playing song.• Deletes file from list

➀ Select the file you wish to deleteby using the TUNE knob.

➁ Press the key and selectthe delete menu to delete theselected file.

MENU

4MENU

MENU

3MENU

2 RDM

MENU

1 RPT

MENU

MENU


3664

Delete AllPress the key Set [ Del.All]through the TUNE knob or key.Deletes all songs of My Music.

Delete SelectionPress the key Set [ Del.Sel]through the TUNE knob or key.Songs within My Music are selectedand deleted.➀ Select the songs you wish to

delete from the list.

➁ After selecting, press the key andselect the delete menu.

✽✽ NOTICE - USING THE MyMusic Feature

• Even if memory is available, amaximum of 6,000 songs can bestored.

• The same song can be copied up to1,000 times.

• Memory info can be checked inthe System menu of Setup.

AUXAUX is used to play external MEDIAcurrently connected with the AUXterminal.AUX mode will automatically startwhen an external device is connect-ed with the AUX terminal.If an external device is connected,you can also press the key tochange to AUX mode.❈ AUX mode cannot be started

unless there is an external deviceconnected to the AUX terminal.

✽✽ NOTICE - USING THE AUXFully insert the AUX cable into theAUX terminal for use.

MEDIA6MENU

5MENU

4 367


Bluetooth® Wireless TechnologyAUDIO

What is Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology?Bluetooth® Wireless Technology allowsdevices to be connected in a short dis-tance, including hands-free devices,stereo headsets, wireless remote con-trollers, etc. For more information, visitthe Bluetooth® Wireless Technologywebsite at www.Bluetooth.com

Before using Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology audio features• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology

audio may not be supporteddepending on the compatibility ofyour Bluetooth® Wireless Technologymobile phone.

• In order to use Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology audio, you must firstpair and connect the Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology mobile phone.• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology

audio can be used only when the[Audio Streaming] of Phone isturned .

❈ Setting Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology Audio Streaming :Press the key Select[Phone] through the tune knob or

key Select [AudioStreaming] through the TUNEknob Set /

Starting Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology Audio• Press the key to change the

mode in order of CD ➟ USB ➟ AUX➟ My Music ➟ BT Audio.

• If BT Audio is selected, Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology audio will startplaying.

❈ Audio may not automatically startplaying in some mobile phones.

Using the Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology audio features• Play / StopPress the TUNE knob to play andpause the current song.

❈ The play / pause functions maynot be supported in some mobilephones.

MEDIA

OffOn

4

SETUP

On


3684

PHONE

Before using the Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology phone features

• In order to use Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology phone, you must firstpair and connect the Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology mobile phone.• If the mobile phone is not paired or

connected, it is not possible toenter Phone mode. Once a phoneis paired or connected, the guid-ance screen will be displayed.

• If Priority is set upon vehicle igni-tion(IGN/ACC ON), the Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology phone will beautomatically connected. Even ifyou are outside, the first Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology phone will beautomatically connected once youare in the vicinity of the vehicle. Ifyou do not want automaticBluetooth® Wireless Technologyphone connection, set theBluetooth® Wireless Technologypower to OFF.

PHONE

Making a call using the Steering-wheel mount controls

1) button : Activates voice recog-nition.

2) button : Places and transferscalls.

3) button : Ends calls or cancelsfunctions.

• Check call history and making call➀ Shortly press (under 0.8 seconds)

the key on the steeringremote controller .

➁ The call history list will be dis-played on the screen.

➂ Press the key again to con-nect a call to the selected number.

• Redialing the most recently callednumber

➀ Press and hold (over 0.8 seconds)the key on the steeringremote controller.

➁ The most recently called numberis redialed.

❈ If call history does not exist, ascreen asking whether to down-load call history is displayed. (Thedownload feature may not be sup-ported in some mobile phones)

4 369




WARNINGDriving while distracted canresult in a loss of vehicle controlthat may lead to an accident,severe personal injury, anddeath. The driver’s primaryresponsibility is in the safe andlegal operation of a vehicle, anduse of any handheld devices,other equipment, or vehicle sys-tems which take the driver’seyes, attention and focus awayfrom the safe operation of a vehi-cle or which are not permissibleby law should never be usedduring operation of the vehicle.


3704













PHONE

PHONE

4 371


✽✽ NOTICE







features supported within thevehicle are as follows. Some fea-tures may not be supporteddepending on your Bluetooth®Wireless Technology device.

- Outgoing/Incoming Handsfreecalls

- Operations during a call (Switch toPrivate, Switch to call waiting,MIC on/off)

- Downloading Call History- Downloading Mobile Contacts-Bluetooth® Wireless Technology

device auto connection- Bluetooth Audio Streaming

• Up to five Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology devices can be pairedto the Car Handsfree system.




(Continued)

SETUP

PHONE


3724

(Continued)• Bluetooth related operations are

possible only with devices thatsupport Handsfree or audio fea-tures, such as a Bluetooth®Wireless Technology mobile phoneor a Bluetooth audio device.

• If a connected Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology device becomes dis-connected due to being out of com-munication range, turning thedevice OFF, or a Bluetooth®Wireless Technology communica-tion error, correspondingBluetooth® Wireless Technologydevices are automatically searchedand reconnected.

• If the system becomes unstabledue to communication errorsbetween the car Handsfree and theBluetooth® Wireless Technologydevice, reset the device by turningoff and back on again. Upon reset-ting Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology device, the system willbe restored.

(Continued)

(Continued)• After pairing is complete, a con-

tacts download request is sentonce to the mobile phone. Somemobile phones may require confir-mation upon receiving a downloadrequest, ensure your mobile phoneaccepts the connection. Refer toyour phones user’s manual foradditional information regardingphone pairing and connections.

Connecting a Device




SETUP

4 373



Changing Priority




SETUP


3744





Deleting a Device



SETUP SETUP

4 375


✽✽ NOTICE• When deleting the currently con-





3764


Phone Menu Screen

Phone MenusWith a Bluetooth® Wireless Technologydevice connected, press the key to display the Phone menu screen.


2) Call History : Displays call historylist screen

3) Contacts : Displays the Contactslist






Answering Calls





PHONE

4 377












Call History









PHONE

PHONE


3784

Contacts



✽✽ NOTICE Find a contact in an alphabeticalorder, press the key.


• Mobile phone contacts are man-aged separately for each pairedBluetooth® Wireless Technologydevice (max 5 devices x 1,000 con-tacts each). Previously down-loaded data is maintained even ifthe Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology device has been dis-connected. (However, the contactsand call history saved to the phonewill be deleted if a paired phone isdeleted.)



(Continued)

(Continued)• It is not possible to begin down-

loading a contact list when thecontact download feature has beenturned off within the Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology device. Inaddition, some devices mayrequire device authorization uponattempting to download contacts.If downloading does not normallyoccur, check the Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology device set-tings or the screen state.

• The contacts download featuremay not be supported in somemobile phones. For more informa-tion of supported Bluetooth®

devices and function support,refer to your phone’s user manual.

MENU

PHONE

4 379











SETUP

SETUP


3804













✽✽ NOTICEWhile on a call, the volume can bechanged by using the key.SEEK

TRACK

SETUP SETUP

4 381


Turning Bluetooth System OffPress the key Select[Phone] Select [Bluetooth SystemOff]Once Bluetooth® Wireless Technologyis turned off, Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology related features will not besupported within the audio system.


SETUP

SETUP


3824

VOICE RECOGNITION






[Prompt Feedback]









Re-starting Voice RecognitionWhile system waits for a commandShortly press the key on thesteering remote controllerThe command wait state is immedi-ately ended and the beep will sound.After the “beep”, say the voice com-mand.

SETUP

4 383















3844






More Help

Contacts

Cancel

More Help


Please say a...


(BEEP) Beep Beep.. (end beep)Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds)

Beep~




4 385








Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as"Mobile" in Contacts Ex) Call "John Smith" on Mobile

Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as"Office" in Contacts Ex) Call "John Smith" in Office

Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as "Home" in Contacts Ex) Call "John Smith" at Home

Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as "Other" in Contacts Ex) Call "John Smith" on Other




Command FunctionContacts Displays the Contacts screen. After saying

this command, say the name of a contactsaved in the Contacts to automatically con-nect the call.




• When listening to the radio, displays thenext radio screen. (FM1➟FM2➟AM➟XM1➟

XM2➟XM3➟FM1)







(Call by Name)

on Mobile

in Office

at Home

on Other


3864

Command FunctionFM Preset 1~6 Plays the most recently played broadcast

saved in FM Preset 1~6.






XM (Satellite) 1~3 Displays the selected XM screen.









device.




0~255

4 387













3884









folder.




Information Displays the information screen of the current file.



4 389




My Music operation


category.










3904




4 391


Blue Link®


The Blue Link® button offersaccess to enhanced navigation serv-ices. The " " button offersimmediate contact to SOSEmergency Assistance. A detailedlist of commands is available in theBlue Link User's Manual.







3924


✽✽ NOTICE The Turn by Turn(TBT) featuresupports the store of ten(10) destina-tions in the TBT destinations direc-tory.















4 393


Eco Coach








3944



total of 9 levels.


4. Next Street name5. Distance to destination6. Expected Time Arrival


4 395


■■ CD Player : AM9B2DMKN, AM943DMAN

❋ logo will be shown if the HD RadioTM feature is supported.


3964


Audio Head Unit (for HD RADIOTM equipped model)

1. (EJECT)• Ejects the disc.

2.• Convert to Radio mode.• Each time the key is pressed,the

mode is changed in order of FM1,FM2, AM, XM1, XM2, XM3.

3.• Convert to Media Mode• Each time the key is pressed, the


4. (for Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology equipped model)• Converts to Phone mode❈ When a phone is not connected,

the connection screen is dis-played.

5. PWR/VOL knob• Power : Press to turn power

on/off.• Volume : Turn left/right to control

volume.

6.• When pressed shortly(under 0.8 sec-

onds)- Radio mode : plays previous/next

frequency.- Media (CD/USB/iPod®/My Music)

modes : changes the track,Song(file)

• When pressed and held (Over 0.8seconds)

- Radio mode : continuously changesthe frequency. Upon release, playsthe current frequency.

- Media(CD/USB/iPod®/My Music)modes : rewinds or fast forwards thetrack or file

- During a Handsfree call, controlsthe call volume.

7.• HD RADIO™ : Channel Change• XM RADIO™ : Category Search• CD/USB/MP3 mode : Search

Folder

HD/CATFOLDER

SEEKTRACK

PHONE

MEDIA

RADIO

4 397


8.• Turns the monitor display on/off.

9.Displays the time/date/day.

10.• Radio Mode : previews all receiv-

able broadcasts for 5 seconds each• Media (CD/USB/My Music) modes

: previews each song (file) for 10seconds each.

11.Converts to Setup mode.

12. TUNE knob• Radio mode : turn to change broad-

cast frequencies.• Media (CD/USB/iPod®/My Music)

modes : turn to search tracks/chan-nels/files.


inserted.

14. RESET• Forced system termination and

system restart.

Audio Head Unit

15.• XM RADIO™ : Category Search• CD, USB/MP3 mode : Search

Folder

CATFOLDER

SETUP

SCAN

CLOCK

DISP


3984

Steering remote controller

1. VOLUME• Used to control volume.

2. MUTE• Mutes audio volume.

3. SEEK• When pressed shortly (under 0.8

seconds)- Radio mode : searches broad-

cast frequencies saved to pre-sets.

- Media (CD/USB/iPod®/My Music/BT Audio) modes : changes thetrack, file or chapter.

• When pressed and held (over 0.8seconds)- Radio mode, automatically

searches broadcast frequenciesand channels

- Media (CD/USB/iPod®/My Music)modes, rewinds or fast forwardsthe track or song(file)

- BT Audio mode may not be sup-ported in some mobile phones.

4. MODE• Each time this key is pressed, the

mode is changed in order ofFM1➟FM2➟AM➟XM1➟XM2➟XM3➟CD➟USB or iPod®➟AUX➟MyMusic➟BT Audio

• If the media is not connected or adisc is not inserted, correspondingmodes will be disabled.


- Starts voice recognition- When selecting during a voice

prompt, stops the prompt andconverts to voice command wait-ing state

• When pressed and held (over 0.8 sec-onds)- Ends voice recognition

4 399


6.• When pressed shortly- When pressed in the phone screen,

displays call history screen- When pressed in the dial screen,

makes a call- When pressed in the incoming call

screen, answers the call- When pressed during call waiting,

switches to waiting call (CallWaiting)

• When pressed and held (over 0.8 sec-onds)

- When pressed in the Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology Handsfreewait mode, redials the last call

- When pressed during a Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology Handsfreecall, switches call back to mobilephone (Private)

- When pressed while calling on themobile phone, switches call back toBluetooth® Wireless TechnologyHandsfree (Operates only whenBluetooth® Wireless TechnologyHandsfree is connected)

7.• Ends phone call


4004

HD RadioTM Technology(for HD RADIOTM equipped model)

HD Radio Technology manufacturedunder license from iBiquity DigitalCorporation. U.S. and ForeignPatents. HD Radio™ and the HD, HDRadio, and “Arc” logos are propri-etary trademarks of iBiquity DigitalCorp.

Program Service Data: Contributesto the superior user experience ofHD Radio Technology. Presents songname, artist, station IDs, HD2/HD3Channel Guide, and other relevantdata streams.

Adjacent to traditional main stationsare extra local FM channels. TheseHD2/HD3 Channels provide new,original music as well as deep cutsinto traditional genre.

Digital, CD-quality sound. HD RadioTechnology enables local radio sta-tions to broadcast a clean digital sig-nal. AM sounds like today’s FM andFM sounds like a CD.

HD RadioTM signal delayTo overcome the delay that digitalsystems inherently produce, HDRadioTM technology first uses theaudio signal of the analog broadcast-ing when you tune to an AM stationor to the main channel of a FM sta-tion. After that, the system will blendfrom analog to digital signal.

Normally, this blending is verysmooth. If you experience a skip inprogram content of several seconds,the radio station has not implement-ed HD RadioTM broadcasting correct-ly. This is not a problem with youraudio system.

Due to the fact that sub channels areonly broadcasting digital, blendingfrom analog to digital signal is not pos-sible if you tune to a sub channel. Inthis case playback of the sub channelstarts after several seconds, this is anormal function.

4 401


RADIO MODE

Basic Mode Screen



3. PresetDisplays current preset number [1] ~[6].

4. Preset DisplayDisplays preset buttons.



7. A.storeAutomatically saves frequencies withsuperior reception to Preset buttons.


4024

HD RADIO MODE(for HD RADIOTM equipped model)

Basic Mode Screen


2. HD ChannelDisplays information for the currentlyplaying HD Radio broadcast.

3. Song InformationDisplays the album, artist, and titleinformation.


5. HD Radio Broadcast StationDisplays the HD Radio broadcaststation name.





10. A.StoreAutomatically saves frequencies withsuperior reception to Preset buttons.

4 403


Switching to Radio Mode

Pressing the key will changethe operating mode in order of FM1➟FM2➟AM➟XM1➟XM2➟XM3

If [Mode Pop up] is turned on within[Display], then pressing thekey will display the Radio

Pop-up Mode screen.

Turn the TUNE knob to move thefocus. Press the knob to select.

Searching Radio Frequencies

Using SeekPress the key to play theprevious/next frequency.

Using TUNETurn the TUNE knob to select thedesired frequency.• FM : Increases/decreased by

200kHz• AM : Increases/decreased by

10kHz

Using Radio Mode

Selecting Presets/Saving PresetsPress the button to displaythe broadcast information for the fre-quency saved to each button.


✽✽ NOTICE While listening to a frequency youwant to save as a preset, press andhold one of the ~ presetbuttons (over 0.8 seconds) to savethe current frequency to the selectedpreset.

61

61

PresetSEEK

TRACK

RADIOSETUP

RADIO


4044

Auto StorePress the button to automati-cally save receivable frequencies toPreset buttons.

✽✽ NOTICE While Auto Store is operating, press-ing the [Cancel] button again willcancel Auto Store and restore theprevious frequency.

ScanPress the key to preview fre-quencies with superior reception for5 seconds each.Press and hold the key (over0.8 seconds) to preview presets for 5seconds each.Once scan is complete, the previousfrequency will be restored.While Scan is operating, pressingthe key will cancel the scanoperation.

Listening to HD RadioStations

HD Radio Technology is a digitalradio technology used by AM andFM radio station to transmit audioand data via a digital signal in con-junction with their analog signals.

While listening to the radio, the HDRadio icon will become displayed ifreceiving an HD Radio broadcast.

Changing HD Radio stations

Press the button to changeHD Radio station.

Viewing Station Information

Press the button to view sta-tion information.

Info

SCAN

SCAN

SCAN

A.Store

4 405


XM RADIO™ MODE

Features of your vehicleSatellite radio reception

You may experience difficulties inreceiving XM satellite™ radio signalsin the following situations.• If you are driving in a tunnel or a

covered parking area.• If you are driving beneath the top

level of a multi-level freeway.• If you are driving under a bridge.• If you are driving next to a tall vehi-

cle (such as a truck or a bus) thatblocks the signal.

• If you are driving in a valley wherethe surrounding hills or peaksblock the signal from the satellite.

• If you are driving on a mountainroad where is the signal blocked bymountains.

• If you are driving in an area with talltrees that block the signal (30 ft./10m or more), for example on anroad that goes through a dense for-est.

• The signal can become weak insome areas that are not coveredby the XM repeater network.

✽✽ NOTICE There may also be additionalunforeseen circumstances leading toreception problems with the XMsatellite™ radio signal.Advisory Messages, such as ‘CHUnavailable’ may occur when start-ing XM Radio™.

SATELLITE2

SATELLITE1


4064

XM RADIO™ MODE

Basic Mode Screen


2. Channel InformationDisplays the category, channel num-ber, channel name, artist and titleinformation.



4 407


Using SEEKPress the key to play theprevious/next channel.❈ If the “Category” icon is displayed,

channels are changed within thecurrent category.

Using TuneTurn the TUNE knob to select thedesired channel.

SCANPress the key to scan allchannels with superior reception for5 seconds each.Once scan is complete, the previous-ly played channel will be restored.During Scan, pressing the key again will cancel the scan opera-tion and restore the previouslyplayed channel.If the “Category” icon is displayed,channels are changed within the cur-rent category.

Searching CategoriesSelect the category by using the

( ) key and pressthe TUNE knob to select.

Channels for the selected categoryare played.

Selecting Presets/SavingPresetsPress the button to displaythe broadcast information for thechannel saved to each button.


✽✽ NOTICEWhile listening to a channel youwant to save as a preset, press andhold one of the ~ presetbuttons (over 0.8 seconds) to savethe current channel to the selectedpreset.

61

61

PresetCATFOLDER

HD/CATFOLDER

SCAN

SCAN

SEEKTRACK


4084

✽✽ NOTICE - USING CDs• This device has been manufac-

tured to be compatible with soft-ware bearing the following logomarks.

• Do not clean discs with chemicalsolutions, such as record sprays,antistatic sprays, antistatic liq-uids, benzene, or thinners.

• After using a disc, put the discback in its original case to preventdisc scratches.

• Hold discs by their edges or with-in the center hole to prevent dam-ages to disc surfaces.

• Do not introduce foreign sub-stances into the disc insert/eject slot.Introducing foreign substancescould damage the device interior.

• Do not insert two discs simultane-ously.

• When using CD-R/CD-RW discs,differences in disc reading andplaying times may occur depend-ing on the disc manufacturer, pro-duction method and the recordingmethod as used by the user.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Clean fingerprints and dust off

the disc surface (coated side) witha soft cloth.

• The use of CD-R/CD-RW discsattached with labels may result indisc slot jams or difficulties in discremoval. Such discs may alsoresult in noise while playing.

• Some CD-R/CD-RW discs maynot properly operate dependingon the disc manufacturer, produc-tion method and the recordmethod as used by the user. Ifproblems persist, trying using adifferent CD as continued usemay result in malfunctions.

• The performance of this productmay differ depending on the CD-RW Drive Software.

• Copy-protected CDs such as S-type CDs may not function in thedevice. DATA discs cannot beplayed. (However, such discs maystill operate but will do so abnor-mally.)

(Continued)

(Continued)• Do not use abnormally shaped

discs (8cm, heart-shaped, octa-gon-shaped) as such discs couldlead to malfunctions.

• If the disc is straddled on the discslot without removal for 10 sec-onds, the disc will automaticallybe re-inserted into the disc player.

• Only genuine audio CDs are sup-ported. Other discs may result inrecognition failure. (e.g. copy CD-R, CDs with labels)

4 409


MEDIA MODE

Pressing the key will changethe operating mode in order ofCD➟USB(iPod®)➟AUX➟My Music ➟

BT Audio.

If [Mode Pop up] is turned on within[Display], then pressing thekey will display the Media

Pop-up Mode screen.Turn the TUNE knob to move thefocus. Press the knob to select.

✽✽ NOTICE The media mode pop up screen canbe displayed only when there aretwo or more media modes turnedon.

Title Icon When a Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology, iPod®, USB, or AUXdevice is connected or a CD isinserted, the corresponding modeicon will be displayed.

Icon TitleBluetooth® Wireless TechnologyCDiPod®

USBAUX

MEDIASETUP

MEDIA


4104

AUDIO CD MODE

Basic Mode Screen


2. Operation StateFrom Repeat/Random(Shuffle)/ Scan,displays the currently operating func-tion.

3. Track InfoDisplays information about the cur-rent track.



6. InfoShows detailed information aboutthe current track.




4 411


Using Audio CD ModePlaying/Pausing CD TracksOnce an audio CD is inserted, themode will automatically start andbegin playing.


✽✽ NOTICE • Only genuine audio CDs are sup-

ported. Other discs may result inrecognition failure (e.g. copy CD-R, CDs with labels)

• The artist and title information aredisplayed on the screen if trackinformation is included within theaudio CD.

Changing TracksPress the key to move tothe previous or next track.


track has been playing for 2 sec-onds will start the current trackfrom the beginning.

• Pressing the key beforethe track has been playing for 1seconds will start the previoustrack.

Selecting from the ListTurn the TUNE knob left/right tosearch for the desired track.

Once you find the desired track,press the TUNE knob to startplaying.

Rewinding / Fast-forwardingTracksWhile playing, press and hold the

key (over 0.8 seconds) torewind or fast-forward the currenttrack.


SCAN

SEEKTRACK

SEEKTRACK

SEEKTRACK

SEEKTRACK


4124

Audio CD Mode MenuWithin this mode, you will haveaccess to the Info, Random(Shuffle),Repeat and List features.

InfoPress the button to displaydetails about the current disc.

Random(Shuffle)Press the button to play tracksin random(Shuffle) order.Press the button again to turnthe Random(Shuffle) feature off.• Random(Shuffle): Plays all tracks in

random(Shuffle) order.

RepeatPress the button to repeat thecurrent track. Press the button againto turn the repeat feature off.• Repeat : Repeats the current track.

ListPress the button to display thetrack list screen.

Turn the TUNE knob left/right tosearch for tracks. Once the desiredtrack is displayed, press the knob toselect and play.

List

Repeat

Shuffle

Shuffle

Info

4 413


MP3 CD MODE

Basic Mode Screen







7. InfoShows detailed information aboutthe current file.



10. CopyCopies the current file into My Music



4144

Using MP3 CD Mode

Playing/Pausing MP3 FilesOnce an MP3 disc is inserted themode will automatically start andbeing playing.


✽✽ NOTICE If there are numerous files and fold-ers within the disc, reading timecould take more than 10 secondsand the list may not be displayed orsong searches may not operate.Once loading is complete, try again.










Searching FoldersPress the ( ) key toselect and search folders.Once the desired folder is displayed,press the TUNE knob to select.

The first file within the selected fold-er will begin playing.

CATFOLDER

HD/CATFOLDER

SCAN

SEEKTRACK

SEEKTRACK

SEEKTRACK

SEEKTRACK

4 415


MP3 CD Mode MenuWithin this mode, you will haveaccess to the Info, Random(Shuffle),Repeat, Copy and List features.



as the default display withinDisplay setup, the album/artist/fileinformation are displayed asdetailed file information.



Random(Shuffle)Press the button to play filesin random(Shuffle) order.Each time the button is pressed, thefeature changes in order of Random(Shuffle) Folder ➟ Random (Shuffle)All➟ Off.• Random(Shuffle) Folder : Plays all

files within the current folder inRandom (Shuffle) order.

• Random(Shuffle) All : Plays all filesin Random(Shuffle) order.

RepeatPress the button to repeat thecurrent file or folder.Each time the button is pressed, thefeature changes in order of Repeat➟Repeat Folder➟Off.• Repeat: Repeats the current file.• Repeat Folder: Repeats all files

within the current Folder.



Copy

Repeat

ShuffleInfo


4164



List

4 417



• Connect the USB device afterturning on the engine. The USBdevice may become damaged ifit is already connected when theignition is turned on.The USBdevice may not operate properlyif the car ignition is turned on oroff with the USB device connect-ed.

• Heed caution to static electricitywhen connecting/disconnectingUSB devices.

• Encoded MP3 Players will notbe recognized when connectedas an external device.

• When connecting an externalUSB device, the device may notproperly recognize the USB is insome states.

• Only products formatted withbyte/sectors under 64Kbyte willbe recognized.

• This device recognizes USBdevices formatted in FAT12/16/32 file formats. Thisdevice does not recognize files inNTFS file format.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Some USB devices may not be

supported due to compatibilityissues.

• Avoid contact between the USBconnector with bodily parts orforeign objects.

• Repeated connecting/discon-necting of USB devices withinshort periods of time may resultin product malfunction.

• A strange noise may occur whendisconnecting the USB.

• Make sure to connect/discon-nect external USB devices withthe audio power turned off.

• The amount of time required torecognize the USB device maydiffer depending on the type,size or file formats stored in theUSB. Such differences in timeare not indications of malfunc-tions.

• The device only supports USBdevices used to play music files.

• USB images and videos are notsupported.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Do not use the USB I/F to

charge batteries or USB acces-sories that generate heat. Suchacts may lead to worsened per-formance or damage to thedevice.

• The device may not recognizethe USB device if separatelypurchased USB hubs and exten-sion cables are being used.Connect the USB directly withthe multimedia terminal of thevehicle.

• When using mass storage USBdevices with separate logicaldrives, only files saved to theroot drive can be played.

• Files may not properly operateif application programs areinstalled to the USBs.

• The device may not operate nor-mally if MP3 Players, cellularphones, digital cameras, orother electronic devices (USBdevices not recognized asportable disk drives) are con-nected with the device.


4184

(Continued)• Avoid use of USB

memory productsthat can also be usedas key chains ormobile phone acces-sories. Use of such products maycause damage to the USB jack.

• Connecting an MP3 device orphone through various chan-nels, such as AUX/BT or Audio/USB mode may result in popnoises or abnormal operation.

(Continued)• Charging through the USB may

not work for some mobiledevices.

• The device may not supportnormal operation when using aUSB memory type besides(Metal Cover Type) USBMemory.

• The device may not supportnormal operation when usingformats such as HDD Type, CF,or SD Memory.

• The device will not support fileslocked by DRM (Digital RightsManagement.)

• USB memory sticks used byconnecting an Adaptor (SDType or CF Type) may not beproperly recognized.

• The device may not operateproperly when using USB HDDsor USBs subject to connectionfailures caused by vehicle vibra-tions. (e.g. i-stick type)

(Continued)

4 419


USB MODE

Basic Mode Screen










10. CopyCopies the current file into My Music.



4204

Using USB Mode

Playing/Pausing USB FilesOnce a USB is connected, the modewill automatically start and beginplaying a USB file.


✽✽ NOTICE • Loading may require additional

time if there are many files andfolders within the USB and resultin faulty list display or file search-ing. Normal operations will resumeonce loading is complete.

• The device may not support nor-mal operation when using a USBmemory type besides (Metal CoverType) USB Memory.

Changing FilesPress the keys to move tothe previous or next file.









SCAN

SEEKTRACK

SEEKTRACK

SEEKTRACK

SEEKTRACK

4 421


Searching FoldersPress the ( )keyto select and search folders.

Once the desired folder is displayed,press the TUNE knob to select.The first file within the selected fold-er will begin playing.

USB Mode MenuWithin this mode, you will haveaccess to the Info, Random(Shuffle),Repeat, Copy and List features.



as the default display within Displaysetup, the album/artist/file informa-tion are displayed as detailed fileinformation.



Random(Shuffle)Press the button to play filesin random(Shuffle) order.Each time the button is pressed, thefeature changes in order ofRandom(Shuffle) Folder➟Random(Shuffle) All➟Off.• Random(Shuffle) Folder : Plays the

files in the current folder in ran-dom(Shuffle) order.

• Random(Shuffle) All : Plays all filesin random(Shuffle) order.

ShuffleInfo

CATFOLDER

HD/CATFOLDER


4224

RepeatPress the button to repeat thecurrent file or folder.Each time the button is pressed, thefeature changes in order of Repeat➟Repeat Folder ➟ Off.• Repeat (Icon) : Repeats the current

file.• Repeat Folder (Icon) : Repeats all

files within the current folder.





List

Copy

Repeat

4 423



• iPod® is a registered trademarkof Apple Inc.

• In order to use the iPod® whileoperating the keys, you must usea dedicated iPod® cable. (thecable that is supplied when pur-chasing iPod®/iPhone® prod-ucts)

• If the iPod® is connected to thevehicle while it is playing, a highpitch sound could occur forapproximately 1-2 secondsimmediately after connecting. Ifpossible, connect the iPod® tothe vehicle with the iPod®

stopped/paused.• During ACC ON state, connect-

ing the iPod® through the iPod®

cable will charge the iPod®

through the car audio system.• When connecting with the iPod®

cable, make sure to fully insertthe jack to prevent communica-tion interference.

(Continued)

(Continued)• When the EQ features of an

external device, such as theiPod®, and the audio system areboth active, EQ effects couldoverlap and cause sound deteri-oration and distortion.Whenever possible, turn off theEQ feature within the externaldevice upon use by connectingwith the audio system.

• Noise may occur when an iPod®

or AUX device is connected.When such devices are notbeing used, disconnect thedevice for storage.

• When the iPod® or AUX devicepower is connected to the powerjack, playing the external devicemay result in noise. In suchcases, disconnect the power con-nection before use.

• Skipping or improper operationmay occur depending on thecharacteristics of your iPod®

/iPhone® device.(Continued)

(Continued)• If your iPhone® is connected to

both the Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology and USB, the soundmay not be properly played. Inyour iPhone®, select the Dockconnector or Bluetooth®Wireless Technology to changethe sound output (source).

• iPod® mode cannot be operatedwhen the iPod® cannot be recog-nized due to versions that do notsupport communication proto-cols.

• For fifth generation iPod® Nanodevices, the iPod® may not berecognized when the batterylevel is low. Please charge theiPod® for use.

• Search/play orders shown withinthe iPod® device may differ withthe orders shown within theaudio system.

• If the iPod® malfunctions due toan iPod® device defect, reset theiPod® and try again. (To learnmore, refer to your iPod® manu-al)

(Continued)


4244

iPod® MODE

Basic Mode Screen


2. Operation StateFrom Repeat/Random(Shuffle), dis-plays the currently operating func-tion.

3. Song IndexDisplays the current song/total num-ber of songs.

4. Song InfoDisplays information about the cur-rent song.






(Continued)• Some iPod®s may not sync with

the System depending on its ver-sion. If the Media is removedbefore the Media is recognized,then the system may not proper-ly restore the previously operat-ed mode. (iPad® charging is notsupported.)

4 425


Using iPod® Mode

Playing/Pausing iPod® SongsOnce an iPod® is connected, themode will automatically start andbegin playing an iPod® song.


✽✽ NOTICE iPod®s with unsupported communi-cation protocols may not properlyoperate in the audio system.

Changing SongsPress the key to move tothe previous or next song.


song has been playing for 2 sec-onds will start the current songfrom the beginning.

• Pressing the key beforethe song has been playing for 1 sec-onds will start the previous song.

• Slight time differences may existdepending your iPod® product.

Rewinding / Fast-forwardingSongsWhile playing, press and hold the

key (over 0.8 seconds) torewind or fast-forward the currentsong.

Searching CategoriesTurn the TUNE knob left/right tosearch for the desired category.

Once you find the desired category,press the TUNE knob to selectand play.

✽✽ NOTICE There are eight categories that can besearched, including Playlists, Artists,Albums, Genres, Songs, Composers,Audiobooks and Podcasts.

SEEKTRACK

SEEKTRACK

SEEKTRACK

SEEKTRACK


4264

Category MenuWithin the iPod® Category menu,you will have access to the ,Home, and features.

1. : Displays the play screen2. Home : Moves to the iPod® root cat-

egory screen3. : Moves to the previous cate-

gory

✽✽ NOTICE • If the search mode is accessed

while playing a song, the mostrecently searched category is dis-played.

• Search steps upon initial connec-tion may differ depending on thetype of iPod® device.

4 427


iPod® Mode MenuWithin this mode, you will haveaccess to the Random(Shuffle),Repeat and List features.

Random(Shuffle)Press the button to playsongs in random(Shuffle) order.Each time the button is pressed, thefeature changes in order ofRandom(Shuffle) Album➟Random(Shuffle) All➟Off.• Random(Shuffle) Album : Shuffle

Album plays album inRandom(Shuffle) order.

• Random(Shuffle) All : Plays allsongs in Random(Shuffle) order.

RepeatPress the button to repeat thecurrent song. Press the button againto turn the repeat feature off.• Repeat : Repeats the current song

ListPress the button to display theCategory Menu.

Turn the TUNE knob left/right tosearch for the desired category.Once you find the desired category,press the TUNE knob to selectand play.

AUX MODE

Using AUX Mode

Press the key Select [AUX]

An external device can be connectedto play music.

MEDIA

List

Repeat

Shuffle


4284

Connecting an External DeviceExternal audio players (Camcorders,car VCR, etc.) can be played througha dedicated cable.

✽✽ NOTICE • If an external device connector is

connected with the AUX terminal,then AUX mode will automaticallyoperate. Once the connector is dis-connected, the previous mode willbe restored.

• AUX mode can be used only whenan external audio player (cam-corder, car VCR, etc.) has beenconnected.

• The AUX volume can be con-trolled separately from otheraudio modes.

• Connecting a connector jack to theAUX terminal without an externaldevice will convert the system toAUX mode, but only output noise.When an external device is notbeing used, also remove the con-nector jack.

• When the external device power isconnected to the power jack, play-ing the external device may outputnoise. In such cases, disconnect thepower connection before use.

• Fully insert the AUX cable to theAUX jack upon use.

4 429


MY MUSIC MODE

Basic Mode Screen



3. File IndexDisplays the current file/total numberof files.







10. DeleteDeletes the current file.



4304

Using My Music Mode

Playing/Pausing My Music Files


✽✽ NOTICE If there are no files saved within MyMusic, the [My Music] button willbe disabled.










SCAN

SEEKTRACK

SEEKTRACK

SEEKTRACK

SEEKTRACK

4 431


My Music Mode MenuWithin this mode, you will haveaccess to the Info, Random(Shuffle),Repeat, Delete and List features.


✽✽ NOTICE The title, artist and album info aredisplayed only when such informa-tion is recorded within the MP3 fileID3 tag.

RandomPress the button to play filesin random order. Press the buttonagain to turn the Random feature off.

RepeatPress the button to repeat thecurrent song. Press the button againto turn the repeat feature off.

Deleting FilesPress the button to delete thecurrent file.



List

Delete

Repeat

Shuffle

Info


4324

List MenuFrom the List screen, it is possible todelete files you previously saved intoMy Music.

Press the button or individ-ually select the files you want todelete. Once files are selected, the

button and buttonswill be enabled.

1) :Moves to the previous screen2) Sellect All: Selects all files3) Unsellet All: Deselects all selected

files4) Delete: Deletes selected files

After selecting the files you want todelete, press the button todelete the selected files.

✽✽ NOTICE • If there is memory available, up to

6,000 files can be saved.• Identical files cannot be copied

more than 1,000 times.• To check memory information, go

to [System] [MemoryInformation]

SETUP

Delete

DeleteUnselect All

Select All

4 433


✽✽ NOTICE - USING THEBluetooth® WirelessTechnology Audio Mode

• Bluetooth® Wireless TechnologyAudio Mode can be used onlywhen a Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology phone has been con-nected.

• Bluetooth® Wireless TechnologyAudio Mode will not be availablewhen connecting mobile phonesthat do not support this feature.

• While Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology Audio is playing, if theBluetooth® Wireless Technologyphone is connected, then the musicwill also stop.

• Moving the Track up/down whileplaying Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology audio mode mayresult in pop noises in some mobilephones.

• Bluetooth® Wireless Technologystreaming audio may not be sup-ported in some mobile phones.

(Continued)

(Continued)• When returning to Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology Audio modeafter ending a call, the mode maynot automatically restart in somemobile phones.

• Receiving an incoming call or mak-ing an outgoing call while playingBluetooth® Wireless TechnologyAudio may result in audio interfer-ence.


4344

Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology AUDIO MODE

Using Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology Audio Mode

Playing/Pausing Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology AudioOnce a Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology device is connected, themode will automatically start.


✽✽ NOTICE The play/pause feature may operatedifferently depending on the mobilephone.


Setting ConnectionIf a Bluetooth® Wireless Technologydevice has not been connected, pressthe key [Phone] button todisplay the Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology connection screen.It is possible to use the pair phone,connect/disconnect and delete fea-tures from your Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology phone.

SETUP

SEEKTRACK

4 435


✽✽ NOTICE • If the Bluetooth® Wireless

Technology audio is not operatingproperly, check whether the fea-ture is turned off at [Phone] [Streaming Audio]. If thefeature is off, turn back on and tryagain.

• If music is not yet playing fromyour mobile device after convertingto Bluetooth® Wireless TechnologyAudio mode, pressing the play but-ton once may start playing themode. Check to see that music isplaying from the Bluetooth®Wireless Technology device afterconverting to Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology Audio Mode.

SETUP


4364



Pairing Using the Buttonor the Steering Wheel Control

Button





2) Passkey : Passkey used to pair thedevice


OK

PHONE

PHONE

4 437







✽✽ NOTICE






SETUP

PHONE


4384















4 439





From the paired phone list, select thedevice you want to connect andpress the button.

Changing Priority



SETUP

ConnectSETUP


4404








4 441


Deleting a Device







Delete

SETUP


4424


Phone Menu Screen


















PHONE

PHONE

4 443





2) Call : If a number has beenentered, calls the number If nonumber has been entered, switch-es to call history screen



Answering Calls










PHONE


4444







Call History





• Call history may not be saved inthe call history list in some mobilephones.




• Up to 50 received, dialed andmissed calls are stored in CallHistory.

• Time of received/dialed calls andcall time information are not saved.

Download

PHONE

4 445


Contacts



1) Contacts List :-Displays downloaded contactsentries

-Connects call upon selection2) Sort by : Find a contact in an

alphabetical order.3) Download : Download contacts

entries







Download

PHONE


4464






1) : Moves to the previousscreen




SETUP

SETUP

4 447




• To learn more about whetheryour mobile phone supports con-tacts downloads, refer to yourmobile phone user’s manual.










✽✽ NOTICE While on a call, the volume can bechanged by using the key.SEEK

TRACK

SETUP SETUP


4484




SETUP

SETUP

4 449


VOICE RECOGNITION


Starting Voice RecognitionShortly press the key on thesteering wheel remote controller. Saya command.




[Prompt Feedback]








Skipping Prompt MessagesWhile prompt message is being stat-ed Shortly press the key on thesteering remote controller.The prompt message is immediatelyended and the beep tone will sound.After the “beep”, say the voice com-mand.

Re-starting Voice RecognitionWhile system waits for a commandShortly press the key on thesteering remote controller.The command wait state is immedi-ately ended and the beep ton willsound. After the “beep”, say the voicecommand.

SETUP


4504





More Help

Contacts

Cancel

More Help



Please say a...


Ding~

(BEEP)

Ding~

Di-Ding~(Cancel Sound)Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds)



4 451






Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as"Mobile" in Contacts Ex) Call "John Smith" on Mobile

Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as"Office" in Contacts Ex) Call "John Smith" in Office

Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as "Home" in Contacts Ex) Call "John Smith" at Home

Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as "Other" in Contacts Ex) Call "John Smith" on Other




Command FunctionContacts Displays the Contacts screen. After saying

this command, say the name of a contactsaved in the Contacts to automatically con-nect the call.




• When listening to the radio, displays thenext radio screen. (FM1➟FM2➟AM➟XM1➟

XM2➟XM3➟FM1)







(Call by Name)



on Mobile

in Office

at Home

on Other


4524

Command FunctionFM Preset 1~6 Plays the most recently played broadcast

saved in FM Preset 1~6.






XM (Satellite) 1~3 Displays the selected XM screen.









device.


Mute Mutes the sound


0~255

4 453













4544

















• MP3 CD / USB commands: Commands available duringUSB and MP3 CD operation

4 455




My Music operation















4564

SETUP

Starting ModePress the key to display theSetup screen.

You can select and control optionsrelated to [Display], [Sound],[Clock/Calendar], [Phone] and[System].

Display Settings

Adjusting the BrightnessPress the key Select[Display] Select [Brightness]

Use the , buttons to adjust thescreen brightness or set theBrightness on Automatic, Daylight, orNight mode.Press the button to reset.

1) Automatic : Adjusts the brightnessautomatically

2) Daylight : Always maintains thebrightness on high

3) Night : Always maintains thebrightness on low

Mode Pop-upPress the key Select[Display] Select [Mode Pop up]

This feature is used to display theMode Pop-up screen when enteringradio and media modes.When this feature is turned on,pressing the or keywill display the Mode Pop-up screen.

✽✽ NOTICE The media Mode Pop-up screen canbe displayed only when two or moremedia modes have been connected.

MEDIA RADIO

SETUP

Default

SETUP SETUP

4 457


MP3 Information DisplayPress the key Select[Display] Select [Media Display]

This feature is used to change theinformation displayed within USBand MP3 CD modes.

1) Folder File : Displays file nameand folder name

2) Album Artist Song : Displaysalbum name/artist name/song

Sound Settings

Sound SettingsPress the key Select[Sound] Select [Sound Setting]

Use the , , , buttons toadjust the Fader/Balance settings.Use the , buttons to adjust theBass/Middle/Treble settings.Press the button to reset.DefaultSETUP

SETUP


4584

Virtual SoundPress the key Select[Sound] Select [Virtual Sound]

This feature is used to set the PowerBass, Power Treble and Surroundsound options.

SDVC (Speed Dependent VolumeControl)Press the key Select[Sound] Select [Speed DependentVol.]

The volume level is controlled auto-matically according to the vehiclespeed. SDVC can be set by selectingfrom On/Off.

Voice Recognition VolumePress the key Select[Sound] Select [Voice RecognitionVol.]

Turn the TUNE knob to adjust theVoice Recognition volume.

SETUP SETUP

SETUP

4 459


Touch Screen BeepPress the key Select[Sound] Select [Touch ScreenBeep]

This feature is used to turn the touchscreen beep on/off.

Blue Link Voice VolumePress the key Select[Sound] Select [Blue Link VoiceVol.]

Turn the TUNE knob to adjust theBlue Link Voice Volume.

❈ Blue Link® may differ dependingon the selected audio.

Clock/Calendar SettingClock SettingPress the key Select[Clock/Calendar] Select [ClockSettings]Use the , buttons to set theHour, Minutes setting and selectAM/PM.

✽✽ NOTICE Press and hold the key (over0.8 seconds) to set theClock/Calendar screen.

CLOCK

SETUP

SETUP SETUP


4604

Calendar SettingPress the key Select[Clock/Calendar] Select [CalendarSettings]

Use the , buttons to set theMonth, Day and Year setting.

Time FormatPress the key Select[Clock/Calendar] Select [Time Format]

This feature is used to change theclock format between 12hr or 24hr.

Clock DisplayPress the key Select[Clock/Calendar] Select [ClockDisplay (Power off)]This feature is used to display a clockon the screen when the audio sys-tem is turned off.

SETUP SETUP SETUP

4 461


System Setting

HD Radio™ On/OffPress the key Select[System] Select [FM], [AM]

This feature is used to set whether toreceive FM/AM HD Radio™ broad-casts.

Prompt FeedbackPress the key Select[System] Select [Prompt Feedback]

This feature is used to select thedesired prompt feedback option fromON and OFF.

1) ON : When using voice recognition,provides detailed guidanceprompts

2) OFF : When using voice recogni-tion, omits some guidance prompts

LanguagePress the key Select[System] Select [Language]

This feature is used to change thesystem and voice recognition lan-guage.If the language is changed, the sys-tem will restart and apply the select-ed language.

SETUP SETUP

SETUP


4624

Memory InformationPress the key Select[System] Select [Memory Information]

This feature displays informationrelated to system memory.

1) Using : Displays capacity currentlyin use

2) Capacity : Displays total capacity

REAR VIEW CAMERA(if equipped)

• The system has been equippedwith a rear view camera for usersafety by allowing a wider rearrange of vision.

• The rear view camera will automat-ically operate when the ignition keyis turned ON and the transmissionshift lever is positioned into reverse(R).

• The rear view camera will automat-ically stop operating when set to athe transmission shift lever is posi-tioned to another gear.

SETUP

CAUTIONThe rear view camera has beenequipped with an optical lens toprovide a wider range of visionand may appear different fromthe actual distance. For safety,directly check the rear andleft/right sides.

4 463


Blue Link®


The Blue Link® button offersaccess to enhanced navigation serv-ices. The " " button offers imme-diate contact to SOS EmergencyAssistance. A detailed list of com-mands is available in the Blue LinkUser's Manual.







4644


✽✽ NOTICEThe Turn by Turn(TBT) featuresupports the store of ten(10) destina-tions in the TBT destinations direc-tory.















4 465


Eco Coach








4664



total of 9 levels.


4. Next Street name5. Distance to destination6. Expected Time Arrival7. Current Street name


Driving your vehicle

Before driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Engine start/stop button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Automatic transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14• Automatic transaxle operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

All wheel drive (AWD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

Brake system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28• Power brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28

• Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30

• Anti-lock brake system (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32

• Electronic stability control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35

• Vehicle stability management (VSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39

• Downhill brake control (DBC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40

• Hill-start assist control (HAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42

Cruise control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45

Blind spot detection system (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50

Active ECO system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56

Economical operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57

Special driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59• Hazardous driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59

• Rocking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-60

• Smooth cornering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61

• Driving at night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61

• Driving in the rain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62

• Driving in flooded areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63

• Driving off-road. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63

• Highway driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63

Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65

Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70

Vehicle load limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-79

Vehicle weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84• Base curb weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84

• Vehicle curb weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84

• Cargo weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84

• GAW (Gross axle weight) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84

• GAWR (Gross axle weight rating). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84

• GVW (Gross vehicle weight) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84

• GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84

5


25

WARNING - ENGINE EXHAUST CAN BE DANGEROUS!Engine exhaust fumes can be extremely dangerous. If, at any time, you smell exhaust fumes inside the vehicle,open the windows immediately.

• Do not inhale exhaust fumes.Exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless gas that can cause unconsciousness and deathby asphyxiation.

• Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose.If you hear a change in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath sideof the vehicle, have the exhaust system checked as soon as possible by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

• Do not run the engine in an enclosed area.Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Never run theengine in your garage any longer than it takes to start the engine and back the vehicle out.

• Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the vehicle.If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the vehicle, be sure to do so only inan open area with the air intake set at "Fresh" and fan operating at one of the higher speeds so fresh air is drawninto the interior.

If you must drive with the tailgate open because you are carrying objects that make this necessary:1. Close all windows.2. Open side vents.3. Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face" and the fan at one of the higher speeds.

To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, be sure the ventilation air intakes located just in front of thewindshield are kept clear of snow, ice, leaves or other obstructions.

Before entering vehicle• Be sure that all windows, outside

mirror(s), and outside lights areclean.

• Check the condition of the tires.• Check under the vehicle for any

sign of leaks.• Be sure there are no obstacles

behind you if you intend to back up.

Necessary inspections Fluid levels, such as engine oil,engine coolant, brake fluid, andwasher fluid should be checked on aregular basis, with the exact intervaldepending on the fluid. Furtherdetails are provided in Section 7,“Maintenance”.

5 3


BEFORE DRIVING


Engine exhaust and a wide vari-ety of automobile componentsand parts, including compo-nents found in the interior fur-nishings in a vehicle, contain oremit chemicals known to theState of California to cause can-cer and birth defects and repro-ductive harm. In addition, cer-tain fluids contained in vehiclesand certain products of compo-nent wear contain or emit chem-icals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer andbirth defects or other reproduc-tive harm.

WARNINGDriving while distracted canresult in a loss of vehicle con-trol, that may lead to an accident,severe personal injury, anddeath. The driver’s primaryresponsibility is in the safe andlegal operation of a vehicle, anduse of any handheld devices,other equipment, or vehicle sys-tems which take the driver’seyes, attention and focus awayfrom the safe operation of a vehi-cle or which are not permissibleby law should never be usedduring operation of the vehicle.


45

Before starting • Close and lock all doors.• Position the seat so that all con-

trols are easily reached.• Adjust the inside and outside

rearview mirrors.• Be sure that all lights work.• Check all gauges.• Check the operation of warning

lights when the ignition switch isturned to the ON position.

• Release the parking brake andmake sure the brake warning lightgoes out.

For safe operation, be sure you arefamiliar with your vehicle and itsequipment.

WARNING - Driving underthe influence of alcohol ordrugs

Drinking and driving is danger-ous. Drunk driving is the num-ber one contributor to the high-way death toll each year. Even asmall amount of alcohol willaffect your reflexes, percep-tions and judgement. Drivingwhile under the influence ofdrugs is as dangerous or moredangerous than driving drunk.You are much more likely tohave a serious accident if youdrink or take drugs and drive.If you are drinking or takingdrugs, do not drive. Do not ridewith a driver who has been drink-ing or taking drugs. Choose adesignated driver or call a cab.

WARNINGAll passengers must be proper-ly belted whenever the vehicleis moving. Refer to “Seat belts”in section 3 for more informa-tion on their proper use.

WARNINGAlways check the surroundingareas near your vehicle for peo-ple, especially children, beforeputting a vehicle into D (Drive)or R (Reverse).

5 5


WARNING• When you intend to park or

stop the vehicle with theengine on, be careful not todepress the accelerator pedalfor a long period of time. It mayoverheat the engine or exhaustsystem and cause fire.

• When you make a suddenstop or turn the steeringwheel rapidly, loose objectsmay drop on the floor and itcould interfere with the opera-tion of the foot pedals, possi-bly causing an accident. Keepall things in the vehicle safelystored.

• If you do not focus on driving,it may cause an accident. Becareful when operating whatmay disturb driving such asaudio or heater. It is theresponsibility of the driver toalways drive safely.


65

Illuminated ignition switch (if equipped)

Whenever a front door is opened, theignition switch will be illuminated foryour convenience, provided the igni-tion switch is not in the ON position.The light will go off immediatelywhen the ignition switch is turned onor go off after about 30 secondswhen the door is closed.

Ignition switch positionLOCK

The steering wheel locks to protectagainst theft. The ignition key can beremoved only in the LOCK position.When turning the ignition switch tothe LOCK position, push the keyinward at the ACC position and turnthe key toward the LOCK position.

ACC (Accessory)The steering wheel is unlocked andelectrical accessories are operative.

✽✽ NOTICEIf difficulty is experienced turningthe ignition switch to the ACC posi-tion, turn the key while turning thesteering wheel right and left torelease the tension.

OCM050001 OCM050002

KEY POSITIONS

5 7


ONThe warning lights can be checkedbefore the engine is started. This isthe normal running position after theengine is started.Do not leave the ignition switch ON ifthe engine is not running to preventbattery discharge.

STARTTurn the ignition switch to the STARTposition to start the engine. Theengine will crank until you releasethe key; then it returns to the ONposition. The brake warning light canbe checked in this position.

WARNING - Ignition key• Never turn the ignition switch

to LOCK or ACC while the vehi-cle is moving.This would resultin loss of directional controland braking function, whichcould cause an accident.

• The anti-theft steering columnlock is not a substitute for theparking brake. Before leavingthe driver’s seat, always makesure the shift lever is engagedin P (Park), set the parkingbrake fully and shut the engineoff. Unexpected and suddenvehicle movement may occur ifthese precautions are nottaken.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Never reach for the ignition

switch, or any other controlsthrough the steering wheelwhile the vehicle is in motion.The presence of your hand orarm in this area could cause aloss of vehicle control, an acci-dent and serious bodily injuryor death.

• Do not place any movableobjects around the driver’s seatas they may move while driving,interfere with the driver and leadto an accident.


85

Starting the engine

1. Make sure the parking brake isapplied.

2. Place the transaxle shift lever in P(Park). Depress the brake pedalfully.You can also start the enginewhen the shift lever is in the N(Neutral) position.

3. Turn the ignition switch to STARTand hold it there until the enginestarts (a maximum of 10 seconds),then release the key.

It should be started withoutdepressing the accelerator pedal.

4.Do not wait for the engine to warmup while the vehicle remains sta-tionary.Start driving at moderate enginespeeds. (Steep accelerating anddecelerating should be avoided.)

WARNINGAlways wear appropriate shoeswhen operating your vehicle.Unsuitable shoes (high heels,ski boots,etc.) may interferewith your ability to use thebrake or the accelerator pedal.

CAUTIONIf the engine stalls while you arein motion, do not attempt tomove the shift lever to the P(Park) position. If traffic androad conditions permit, you mayput the shift lever in the N(Neutral) position while thevehicle is still moving and turnthe ignition switch to the STARTposition in an attempt to restartthe engine.

CAUTIONDo not engage the starter formore than 10 seconds. If theengine stalls or fails to start, wait5 to 10 seconds before re-engag-ing the starter. Improper use ofthe starter may damage it.

5 9


Illuminated engine start/stopbutton

Whenever the front door is opened,the engine start/stop button will illu-minate for your convenience. Thelight will go off after about 30 sec-onds when the door is closed. It willalso go off immediately when thetheft-alarm system is armed.

Engine start/stop button posi-tionOFF

To turn off the engine (START/RUNposition) or vehicle power (ON posi-tion), press the engine start/stop but-ton with the shift lever in the P (Park)position. When you press the enginestart/stop button without the shiftlever in the P (Park) position, theengine start/stop button will notchange to the OFF position but to theACC position.

✽✽ NOTICEYou are able to turn off the engine(START/RUN) or vehicle power(ON), only when the vehicle is not inmotion.

ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON (IF EQUIPPED)

ODM052006

White CAUTIONIn an emergency situation whilethe vehicle is in motion, you areable to turn the engine off andto the ACC position by pressingthe engine start/stop button formore than 2 seconds or 3 timessuccessively within 3 seconds.If the vehicle is still moving, youcan restart the engine withoutdepressing the brake pedal bypressing the engine start/stopbutton with the shift lever in theN (Neutral) position.


105

ACC(Accessory)

With automatic transaxle

Press the engine start/stop buttonwhile it is in the OFF position withoutdepressing the brake pedal.

The electrical accessories are opera-tional.If the engine start/stop button is inthe ACC position for more than 1hour, the button is turned off auto-matically to prevent battery dis-charge.

ON


Press the engine start/stop buttonwhile it is in the ACC position withoutdepressing the brake pedal.

The warning lights can be checkedbefore the engine is started. Do notleave the engine start/stop button inthe ON position for a long time. Thebattery may discharge, because theengine is not running.

START/RUN


To start the engine, depress thebrake pedal and press the enginestart/stop button with the shift lever inthe P (Park) or the N (Neutral) posi-tion. For your safety, start the enginewith the shift lever in the P (Park)position.

Not illuminated Orange Blue

5 11


✽✽ NOTICEIf you press the engine start/stopbutton without depressing the brakepedal, the engine will not start andthe engine start/stop button changesas follow:OFF ➔➔ACC ➔➔ ON ➔➔ OFF or ACC

✽✽ NOTICEIf you leave the engine start/stopbutton in the ACC or ON positionfor a long time, the battery will dis-charge.

WARNING• Never press the engine

start/stop button while thevehicle is in motion. Thiswould result in loss of direc-tional control and brakingfunction, which could causean accident.

• Before leaving the driver'sseat, always make sure theshift lever is engaged in P(Park), set the parking brakefully and shut the engine off.Unexpected and sudden vehi-cle movement may occur ifthese precautions are nottaken.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Never reach for the engine

start/ stop button or any othercontrols through the steeringwheel while the vehicle is inmotion. The presence of yourhand or arm in the area couldcause loss of vehicle control,an accident and serious bodi-ly injury or death.

• Do not place any movableobjects around the driver'sseat as they may move whiledriving, interfere with the driv-er and lead to an accident.


125

Starting the engine

1. Carry the smart key or leave itinside the vehicle.

2. Make sure the parking brake isfirmly applied.

3. Place the transaxle shift lever in P(Park). Depress the brake pedalfully.You can also start the engine whenthe shift lever is in the N (Neutral)position.

4. Press the engine start/stop button.It should be started without depress-ing the accelerator pedal.

5.Do not wait for the engine to warmup while the vehicle remains sta-tionary.Start driving at moderate enginespeeds. (Steep accelerating anddecelerating should be avoided.)

• Even if the smart key is in the vehi-cle, if it is far away from you, theengine may not start.

• When the engine start/stop buttonis in the ACC position or above, ifany door is opened, the systemchecks for the smart key. If thesmart key is not in the vehicle, the“ ” indicator and a message“Key is not in the vehicle” will appearon the instrument cluster and LCDdisplay. And if all doors are closed,the chime will sound for 5 seconds.The indicator or warning will turn offwhile the vehicle is moving. Alwayshave the smart key with you.

WARNINGThe engine will start, only whenthe smart key is in the vehicle.Never allow children or any per-son who is unfamiliar with thevehicle to press the enginestart/stop button or related parts.

WARNINGAlways wear appropriate shoeswhen operating your vehicle.Unsuitable shoes (high heels,ski boots,etc.) may interfere withyour ability to use the brake,accelerator pedal.

5 13


✽✽ NOTICE• If the battery is weak or the smart

key does not work correctly, youcan start the engine by pressingthe engine start/stop button withthe smart key.The side with the lock buttonshould contact the enginestart/stop button directly.When you press the enginestart/stop button directly with thesmart key, the smart key shouldcontact the button at a right angle.

(Continued)

(Continued)• When the stop lamp fuse is blown,

you cannot start the engine nor-mally.Replace the fuse with a new one. Ifit is not possible, you can start theengine by pressing the enginestart/stop button for 10 secondswhile it is in the ACC position. Theengine can start without depressingthe brake pedal. But for your safe-ty always depress the brake pedalbefore starting the engine.

CAUTIONIf the engine stalls while thevehicle is in motion, do notattempt to move the shift leverto the P (Park) position. If thetraffic and road conditions per-mit, you may put the shift leverin the N (Neutral) position whilethe vehicle is still moving andpress the engine start/stop but-ton in an attempt to restart theengine.

CAUTIONDo not press the enginestart/stop button for more than10 seconds except when thestop lamp fuse is blown.

ODM052007


145

Automatic transaxle operationThe highly efficient automatictransaxle has 6 forward speeds andone reverse speed. The individualspeeds are selected automatically,depending on the position of the shiftlever.The individual speeds are selectedautomatically in Drive, depending onthe position of the accelerator pedal.

✽✽ NOTICEThe first few shifts on a new vehiclemay be somewhat abrupt. This is anormal condition, and the shiftingsequence will adjust after shifts arecycled a few times by the PCM(Powertrain Control Module).

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE

ODM052011

++++ ((((UUUUPPPP))))

---- ((((DDDDOOOOWWWWNNNN))))

The shift lever can be shifted freely.

Press the knob button when shifting.

Depress the brake pedal and the knob button when shifting.

5 15


For smooth operation, depress thebrake pedal when shifting from N(Neutral) to a forward or reverse gear.

Transaxle rangesThe indicator lights in the instrumentcluster displays the shift lever posi-tion when the ignition switch is in theON position.

P (Park)

Always come to a complete stopbefore shifting into P (Park). Thisposition locks the transaxle and pre-vents the front wheels from rotating.

WARNING - Automatictransaxle

• Always check the surroundingareas near your vehicle forpeople, especially children,before shifting a vehicle intoD (Drive) or R (Reverse).

• Before leaving the driver’sseat, always make sure theshift lever is in the P (Park)position; then set the parkingbrake fully and shut theengine off. Unexpected andsudden vehicle movementcan occur if these precautionsare not followed in the orderidentified.

CAUTION• To avoid damage to your

transaxle, do not acceleratethe engine in R (Reverse) orany forward gear position withthe brakes on.

• When stopped on an incline,do not hold the vehicle sta-tionary with engine power.Use the service brake or theparking brake.

• Do not shift from N (Neutral)or P (Park) into D (Drive), or R(Reverse) when the engine isabove idle speed.


165

R (Reverse)

Use this position to drive the vehiclebackward.

N (Neutral)

The wheels and transaxle are notengaged. The vehicle will roll freelyeven on the slightest incline unlessthe parking brake or service brakesare applied.

D (Drive)

This is the normal forward drivingposition. The transaxle will automati-cally shift through a 6-gear sequence,providing the best fuel economy andpower.

For extra power when passing anoth-er vehicle or climbing grades,depress the accelerator fully, at whichtime the transaxle will automaticallydownshift to the next lower gear.

✽✽ NOTICEAlways come to a complete stopbefore shifting into D (Drive).

WARNING • Shifting into P (Park) while the

vehicle is in motion will causethe drive wheels to lock whichwill cause you to lose controlof the vehicle.

• Do not use the P (Park) posi-tion in place of the parkingbrake. Move the shift lever tothe P (Park) position and setthe parking brake fully.

• Never leave a child unattend-ed in a vehicle.

CAUTIONThe transaxle may be damagedif you shift into P (Park) whilethe vehicle is in motion.

CAUTIONAlways come to a complete stopbefore shifting into or out of R(Reverse); you may damage thetransaxle if you shift into R(Reverse) while the vehicle is inmotion, except as explained in“Rocking the vehicle”, in thismanual.

5 17


Sports mode

Whether the vehicle is stationary orin motion, sports mode is selected bypushing the shift lever from the D(Drive) position into the manual gate.To return to D (Drive) range opera-tion, push the shift lever back into themain gate.

In sports mode, moving the shiftlever backwards and forwards willallow you to make gearshifts rapidly.In contrast to a manual transaxle, thesports mode allows gearshifts withthe accelerator pedal depressed.Up (+) : Push the lever forward

once to shift up one gear.Down (-) : Pull the lever backwards

once to shift down one gear.

✽✽ NOTICE• In sports mode, the driver must

execute upshifts in accordancewith road conditions, taking careto keep the engine speed below thered zone.

• In sports mode, only the 6 forwardgears can be selected. To reverseor park the vehicle, move the shiftlever to the R (Reverse) or P(Park) position as required.

• In sports mode, downshifts aremade automatically when thevehicle slows down. When thevehicle stops, 1st gear is automati-cally selected.

(Continued)

(Continued)• In sports mode, when the engine

rpm approaches the red zone, thetransaxle will upshift automatically.

• To maintain the required levels ofvehicle performance and safety,the system may not execute cer-tain gearshifts when the shift leveris operated.

• When accelerating from a stop ona slippery road, push the shiftlever forward into the +(up) posi-tion. This causes the transaxle toshift into 2nd gear which is betterfor smooth accelerating on a slip-pery road.

OANNDR2102


185

Shift lock systemFor your safety, the automatictransaxle has a shift lock systemwhich prevents shifting the transaxlefrom P (Park) or N (Neutral) into R(Reverse) unless the brake pedal isdepressed.To shift the transaxle from P (Park) orN (Neutral) into R (Reverse):1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.2. Start the engine or turn the ignition

switch to the ON position to R.3. Move the shift lever to R.

Shift-lock override

If the shift lever cannot be movedfrom the P (Park) or N (Neutral) posi-tion into R (Reverse) position withthe brake pedal depressed, continuedepressing the brake, then do the fol-lowing:1. Carefully remove the cap covering

the shift-lock override access hole.2. Insert a screwdriver into the

access hole and press down onthe screwdriver.

3. Move the shift lever.4. Have you vehicle inspected by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer assoon as possible.

Ignition key interlock system (if equipped)

The ignition key cannot be removedunless the shift lever is in the P(Park) position. If the ignition switchis in any other position, the key can-not be removed.

WARNINGAlways fully depress the brakepedal before and while shiftingout of the P (Park) position intoanother position to avoid inad-vertent motion of the vehiclewhich could injure persons inor around the vehicle.

OANNDR3103

5 19


Good driving practices• Never move the shift lever from P

(Park) or N (Neutral) to any otherposition with the accelerator pedaldepressed.

• Never move the shift lever into "P"when the vehicle is in motion.

• Be sure the vehicle is completelystopped before you attempt to shiftinto R (Reverse) or D (Drive).

• Never take the vehicle out of gearand coast down a hill. This may beextremely hazardous. Always leavethe vehicle in gear when moving.

• Do not "ride" the brakes. This cancause them to overheat and mal-function. Instead, when you aredriving down a long hill, slow down,move the shift lever to sports modeand shift to a lower gear.

• When using sports mode, slowdown before shifting to a lowergear.

• Always use the parking brake andshift into P (Park) when parking thevehicle. Do not depend on placingthe transaxle in P (Park) to keepthe vehicle from moving.

• Exercise extreme caution whendriving on a slippery surface. Beespecially careful when braking,accelerating or shifting gears. On aslippery surface, an abrupt changein vehicle speed can cause thedrive wheels to lose traction andthe vehicle to go out of control.

• Optimum vehicle performance andeconomy is obtained by smoothlydepressing and releasing theaccelerator pedal.

WARNING• Always buckle-up! In a colli-

sion, an unbelted occupant issignificantly more likely to beseriously injured or killed thana properly belted occupant.

• Avoid high speeds when cor-nering or turning.

• Do not make quick steeringwheel movements, such assharp lane changes or fast,sharp turns.

• The risk of rollover is greatlyincreased if you lose controlof your vehicle at highwayspeeds.

• Loss of control often occurs iftwo or more wheels drop off theroadway and the driver over-steers to reenter the roadway.

• In the event your vehicleleaves the roadway, do notsteer sharply. Instead, slowdown before pulling back intothe travel lanes.

• Never exceed posted speedlimits.


205

Moving up a steep grade from astanding startTo move up a steep grade from astanding start, depress the brakepedal, move the shift lever to D(Drive) and release the parkingbrake. Depress the accelerator grad-ually while releasing the servicebrakes.

WARNINGIf your vehicle becomes stuck insnow, mud, sand, etc., then youmay attempt to rock the vehiclefree by moving it forward andbackward. Do not attempt thisprocedure if people or objectsare anywhere near the vehicle.During the rocking operationthe vehicle may suddenly moveforward or backward as itbecomes unstuck, causinginjury or damage to nearby peo-ple or objects.

5 21


Engine power can be delivered to thefront and rear wheels for maximumtraction. AWD is useful when extratraction is required, such as, whendriving on slippery, muddy, wet, orsnow-covered roads. Occasional off-road use such as establishedunpaved roads and trails are OK. It isalways important when traveling off-highway that the driver carefullyreduces the speed to a level thatdoes not exceed the safe operatingspeed for those conditions. In gener-al, off-road conditions provide lesstraction and braking effectivenessthan normal road conditions. Thedriver must be especially alert toavoid driving on slopes which tilt thevehicle to either side.These factors must be carefully con-sidered when driving off-road.Keeping the vehicle in contact withthe driving surface and under controlin these conditions is always the dri-ver's responsibility for the safety ofhim/herself and passengers.

Tight corner brake effect

Tight corner brake effect is a uniquecharacteristic of all-wheel drive vehi-cles caused by the difference in tirerotation at the four wheels.Sharp turns at low speeds should becarried out with caution.

ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNING - Off road driving

This vehicle is designed prima-rily for on road use although itcan operate effectively off road.It was not designed to drive inchallenging off-road conditions.Driving in conditions thatexceed the vehicle's intendeddesign or the driver's experi-ence level may result in severeinjury or death.

CAUTION - AWDWhen turning sharply on apaved road at low speed whilein all wheel drive, steering con-trol will be difficult.


225

✽✽ NOTICE• When driving on normal roads, deactivate the AWD LOCK mode by pushing the AWD LOCK button (the indi-

cator light goes off). Driving on normal roads with AWD LOCK mode(especially, when cornering) may causemechanical noise or vibration. The noise and vibration will disappear when the AWD LOCK mode is deactivat-ed. Some parts of the power train may be damaged by prolonged driving with the noise and vibration.

• When the AWD LOCK mode is deactivated, a shock may be felt as the drive power is delivered entirely to thefront wheels. This shock is not a mechanical failure.

ALL Wheel Drive (AWD) transfer mode selection

• This mode is used for climbing or descending sharpgrades, off-road driving, driving on sandy and muddyroads, etc., to maximize traction.

• This mode automatically begins to deactivate atspeeds above 30 km/h (19 mph) and is shifted to AWDAUTO mode at speed above 40 km/h (25 mph). If thevehicle decelerates to speeds below 30 km/h (19 mph),however, the transfer mode is shifted into AWD LOCKmode again.

AWD AUTO (AWD LOCK is

deactivated)(Indicator light isnot illuminated)

Transfer mode Selection button Indicator light Description

• When driving in AWD AUTO mode, the vehicle oper-ates similar to conventional 2WD vehicles under nor-mal operating conditions. However, if the system deter-mines that there is a need for the AWD mode, theengine’s driving power is distributed to all four wheelsautomatically without driver intervention.

• When driving on normal roads and pavement, the vehi-cle moves similar to conventional 2WD vehicles.

AWD LOCK(Indicator light is

illuminated)

5 23


For safe all wheel drive opera-tion

• Do not try to drive in deep standingwater or mud since such conditionscan stall your engine and clog yourexhaust pipes. Do not drive downsteep hills since it requires extremeskill to maintain control of the vehi-cle.

• When you are driving up or downhills drive as straight as possible.Use extreme caution in going up ordown steep hills, since you may flipyour vehicle over depending on thegrade, terrain and water/mud con-ditions.

WARNING - All wheeldriving

When conditions demand theuse of four-wheel drive, all func-tions of your vehicle areexposed to extreme stress.Slow down and be ready forchanges in the composition andtraction of the surface underyour tires. If you have anydoubt about the safety of theconditions you are facing, stopand consider the best way toproceed. Do not exceed the abil-ity of yourself or your vehicle tooperate safely.

WARNING - HillsDriving across the contour ofsteep hills can be extremelydangerous. This danger cancome from slight changes in thewheel angle which can destabi-lize the vehicle or, even if thevehicle is maintaining stabilityunder power, it can lose thatstability if the vehicle stops itsforward motion. Your vehiclemay roll over without warningand without time for you to cor-rect a mistake that could causeserious injury or death.

HILL1 HILL2


245

• You must consciously take theeffort to learn how to corner in anAWD vehicle. Do not rely on yourexperience in conventional 2WDvehicles in choosing safe corneringspeed in AWD mode. You mustdrive more slowly in AWD.

• Drive carefully off-road becauseyour vehicle may be damaged byrocks or roots of trees. Becomefamiliar with the off-road conditionswhere you are going to be beforeyou begin driving.

• Always hold the steering wheel firm-ly when you are driving off-road.

• Make sure all passengers arewearing seat belts.

• If you need to drive through water,stop your vehicle, set your transferto the AWD LOCK mode and driveat less than 5 mph (8 km/h).

WARNING - Steeringwheel

Do not grab the inside of thesteering wheel when you aredriving off-road. You may hurtyour arm by a sudden steeringmaneuver or from steeringwheel rebound due to impactwith objects on the ground. Youcould lose control of the steer-ing wheel.

WARNING - Wind dangerIf you are driving in heavy wind,the vehicle's higher center ofgravity decreases your steeringcontrol capacity and requiresyou to drive more slowly.

WARNING - Drivingthrough water

Drive slowly. If you are drivingtoo fast in water, the water canget into the engine compartmentand wet the ignition system,causing your vehicle to sudden-ly stop. If this happens and yourvehicle is in a tilted position,your vehicle may roll over.

ODMEDR2146

WARNING - AWDReduce speed when you turncorners. The center of gravity ofAWD vehicles is higher thanthat of conventional 2WD vehi-cles, making them more likely toroll over when you turn cornerstoo fast.

5 25


✽✽ NOTICE• Do not drive through water if the

level is higher than the bottom ofthe vehicle.

• Check your brake condition onceyou are out of mud or water. Pressthe brake pedal several times asyou move slowly until you feel nor-mal braking forces return.

• Shorten your scheduled mainte-nance interval if you drive in off-road conditions such as sand, mudor water (see “Maintenance undersevere usage conditions” in section7). Always wash your vehicle thor-oughly after off road use, especiallycleaning the bottom of the vehicle.

• Since the driving torque is alwaysapplied to the 4 wheels the per-formance of the AWD vehicle isgreatly affected by the condition ofthe tires. Be sure to equip the vehi-cle with four tires of the same sizeand type.

• A full time all wheel drive vehiclecannot be towed by an ordinarytow truck. Make sure that thevehicle is placed on a flat bedtruck for towing.

CAUTION - Mud or snowIf one of the front or rear wheelsbegins to spin in mud, snow,etc. the vehicle can sometimesbe driven out by depressing theaccelerator pedal further; how-ever avoid running the enginecontinuously at high rpmbecause doing so could dam-age the AWD system.

WARNING - AWD driving• Avoid high cornering speed.• Do not make quick steering

wheel movements, such assharp lane changes or fast,sharp turns.

• The risk of rollover is greatlyincreased if you lose controlof your vehicle at high speed.

• In a collision, an unbelted per-son is significantly more like-ly to die compared to a personwearing a seat belt.

• Loss of control often occurs iftwo or more wheels drop offthe roadway and the driverover steers to re-enter theroadway. In the event yourvehicle leaves the roadway, donot steer sharply. Instead,slow down before pullingback into the travel lanes.


265

Reducing the risk of a rolloverThis multi-purpose passenger vehicleis defined as a Sports Utility Vehicle(SUV). SUV’s have higher groundclearance and a narrower track tomake them capable of performing in awide variety of off-road applications.Specific design characteristics givethem a higher center of gravity thanordinary vehicles. An advantage of thehigher ground clearance is a betterview of the road, which allows you toanticipate problems. They are notdesigned for cornering at the samespeeds as conventional passengervehicles, any more than low-slungsports cars are designed to performsatisfactorily in off-road conditions.Due to this risk, driver and passengersare strongly recommended to buckletheir seat belts. In a rollover crash, anunbelted person is more likely to diethan a person wearing a seat belt.There are steps that a driver can maketo reduce the risk of a rollover. If at allpossible, avoid sharp turns or abruptmaneuvers, do not load your roof rackwith heavy cargo, and never modifyyour vehicle in any way.

WARNINGYour vehicle is equipped withtires designed to provide saferide and handling capability. Donot use a size and type of tireand wheel that is different fromthe one that is originallyinstalled on your vehicle. It canaffect the safety and perform-ance of your vehicle, whichcould lead to steering failure orrollover and serious injury.When replacing the tires, besure to equip all four tires withthe tire and wheel of the samesize, type, tread, brand andload-carrying capacity. If younevertheless decide to equipyour vehicle with any tire/wheelcombination not recommendedby HYUNDAI for off road driv-ing, you should not use thesetires for highway driving.

WARNING - Rollover As with other Sport UtilityVehicle (SUVs), failure to oper-ate this vehicle correctly mayresult in loss of control, an acci-dent or vehicle rollover.• Utility vehicles have a signifi-

cantly higher rollover ratethan other types of vehicles.

• Specific design characteris-tics (higher ground clearance,narrower track, etc.) give thisvehicle a higher center ofgravity than ordinary vehicles.

• SUVs not designed for corner-ing at the same speeds asconventional vehicles.

• Avoid sharp turns or abruptmaneuvers.

• In a rollover crash, an unbelt-ed person is significantlymore likely to die than a per-son wearing a seat belt. Makesure everyone in the vehicle isproperly buckled up.

5 27


• Full-time AWD vehicles must betested on a special four wheelchassis dynamometer.

✽✽ NOTICENever engage the parking brakewhile performing these tests.

• A full-time AWD vehicle should notbe tested on a 2WD roll tester. If a2WD roll tester must be used, per-form the following:

1. Check the tire pressures recom-mended for your vehicle.

2. Place the front wheels on the rolltester for a speedometer test asshown in the illustration.

3. Release the parking brake.4. Place the rear wheels on the tem-

porary free roller as shown in theillustration.

WARNING - Jacked vehicle

While a full-time AWD vehicle israised on a jack, never start theengine or cause the tires torotate.There is a danger that rotatingtires touching the ground couldcause the vehicle to fall off thejack and to jump forward orrearward.

WARNING - Dynamometertesting

Keep away from the front of thevehicle while the vehicle is ingear on the dynamometer. Thisis very dangerous as the vehi-cle can jump forward and causeserious injury or death.

ONCEDR3147Roll tester (speedometer)

Temporary free roller


285

BRAKE SYSTEMPower brakes Your vehicle has power-assistedbrakes that adjust automaticallythrough normal usage.In the event that the power-assistedbrakes lose power because of astalled engine or some other reason,you can still stop your vehicle byapplying greater force to the brakepedal than you normally would. Thestopping distance, however, will belonger.When the engine is not running, thereserve brake power is partiallydepleted each time the brake pedalis applied. Do not pump the brakepedal when the power assist hasbeen interrupted.Pump the brake pedal only whennecessary to maintain steering con-trol on slippery surfaces.

(Continued)• Wet brakes may impair the

vehicle’s ability to safely slowdown; the vehicle may alsopull to one side when thebrakes are applied. Applyingthe brakes lightly will indicatewhether they have been affect-ed in this way. Always test yourbrakes in this fashion afterdriving through deep water. Todry the brakes, apply themlightly while maintaining a safeforward speed until brake per-formance returns to normal.

• Always, confirm the positionof the brake and acceleratorpedal before driving. If youdon't check the position of theaccelerator and brake pedalbefore driving, you maydepress the acceleratorinstead of the brake pedal. Itmay cause a serious accident.

WARNING - Brakes• Do not drive with your foot

resting on the brake pedal.This will create abnormal highbrake temperatures, exces-sive brake lining and padwear, and increased stoppingdistances.

• When descending a long orsteep hill, shift to a lower gearand avoid continuous applica-tion of the brakes. Continuousbrake application will causethe brakes to overheat andcould result in a temporaryloss of braking performance.

(Continued)

5 29


In the event of brake failure If service brakes fail to operate whilethe vehicle is in motion, you canmake an emergency stop with theparking brake. The stopping dis-tance, however, will be much greaterthan normal.

Disc brakes wear indicator When your brake pads are worn andnew pads are required, you will heara high-pitched warning sound fromyour front brakes or rear brakes (ifequipped). You may hear this soundcome and go or it may occur when-ever you depress the brake pedal.Please remember that some drivingconditions or climates may cause abrake squeal when you first apply (orlightly apply) the brakes. This is nor-mal and does not indicate a problemwith your brakes.

WARNING - Parkingbrake

Applying the parking brakewhile the vehicle is moving atnormal speeds can cause asudden loss of control of thevehicle. If you must use theparking brake to stop the vehi-cle, use great caution in apply-ing the brake.

WARNING - Brake wearThis brake wear warning soundmeans your vehicle needs serv-ice. If you ignore this audiblewarning, you will eventuallylose braking performance,which could lead to a seriousaccident.

CAUTION• To avoid costly brake repairs,

do not continue to drive withworn brake pads.

• Always replace the front orrear brake pads as pairs.


305

Parking brakeApplying the parking brake

Foot type

To engage the parking brake, firstapply the foot brake and thendepress the parking brake pedaldown as far as possible.

Releasing the parking brake

Foot type

To release the parking brake,depress the parking brake pedal asecond time while applying the footbrake. The pedal will automaticallyextend to the fully released position.

OCM050015

CAUTION• Driving with the parking brake

applied will cause excessivebrake pad and brake rotor wear.

• Do not operate the parkingbrake while the vehicle ismoving except in an emer-gency situation. It could dam-age the vehicle system andendanger driving safety.

OCM050016

5 31


If the parking brake does not releaseor does not release all the way, havethe system checked by an authorizedHYUNDAI dealer.

Check the brake warning light byturning the ignition switch ON (do notstart the engine). This light will beilluminated when the parking brake isapplied with the ignition switch in theSTART or ON position.Before driving, be sure the parkingbrake is fully released and the brakewarning light is off.If the brake warning light remains onafter the parking brake is releasedwhile engine is running, there may bea malfunction in the brake system.Immediate attention is necessary.

WARNING• To prevent unintentional

movement when stopped andleaving the vehicle, do not usethe gearshift lever in place ofthe parking brake. Set theparking brake AND make surethe gearshift lever is securelypositioned in P (Park) forautomatic transaxle equippedvehicles.

• Never allow anyone who isunfamiliar with the vehicle totouch the parking brake. If theparking brake is releasedunintentionally, serious injurymay occur.

(Continued)

(Continued)• All vehicles should always

have the parking brake fullyengaged when parking toavoid inadvertent movementof the vehicle which can injureoccupants or pedestrians.

W-75


325

If at all possible, cease driving thevehicle immediately. If that is not pos-sible, use extreme caution whileoperating the vehicle and only con-tinue to drive the vehicle until youcan reach a safe location or repairshop.

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)

WARNINGABS (or ESC) will not preventaccidents due to improper ordangerous driving maneuvers.Even though vehicle control isimproved during emergencybraking, always maintain a safedistance between you andobjects ahead. Vehicle speedsshould always be reduced dur-ing extreme road conditions.The braking distance for vehi-cles equipped with an anti-lockbraking system or (ElectronicStability Control System) may belonger than for those without itin the following road conditions.During these conditions thevehicle should be driven atreduced speeds:

(Continued)

(Continued)• Rough, gravel or snow-cov-

ered roads.• With tire chains installed.• On roads where the road sur-

face is pitted or has differentsurface height.The safety features of an ABS(or ESC) equipped vehicleshould not be tested by highspeed driving or cornering.This could endanger the safe-ty of yourself or others.

5 33


The ABS continuously senses thespeed of the wheels. If the wheelsare going to lock, the ABS systemrepeatedly modulates the hydraulicbrake pressure to the wheels.When you apply your brakes underconditions which may lock thewheels, you may hear a “tik-tik’’sound from the brakes, or feel a cor-responding sensation in the brakepedal. This is normal and it meansyour ABS is active.In order to obtain the maximum ben-efit from your ABS in an emergencysituation, do not attempt to modulateyour brake pressure and do not try topump your brakes. Press your brakepedal as hard as possible or as hardas the situation warrants and allowthe ABS to control the force beingdelivered to the brakes.

✽✽ NOTICEA click sound may be heard in theengine compartment when the vehi-cle begins to move after the engine isstarted. These conditions are normaland indicate that the anti-lock brakesystem is functioning properly.

• Even with the anti-lock brake sys-tem, your vehicle still requires suf-ficient stopping distance. Alwaysmaintain a safe distance from thevehicle in front of you.

• Always slow down when cornering.The anti-lock brake system cannotprevent accidents resulting fromexcessive speeds.

• On loose or uneven road surfaces,operation of the anti-lock brakesystem may result in a longer stop-ping distance than for vehiclesequipped with a conventionalbrake system.


345

CAUTION• If the ABS warning light is on

and stays on, you may have aproblem with the ABS. In thiscase, however, your regularbrakes will work normally.

(Continued)

(Continued)• The ABS warning light will

stay on for approximately 3seconds after the ignitionswitch is ON. During that time,the ABS will go through self-diagnosis and the light will gooff if everything is normal. Ifthe light stays on, you mayhave a problem with yourABS. Contact an authorizedHYUNDAI dealer as soon aspossible.

W-78

CAUTION• When the brakes are operated

continuously on a road havingpoor traction, the ABS will beactive and the ABS warninglight may illuminate. Pull yourvehicle over to a safe placeand stop the engine.

• Restart the engine. If the ABSwarning light is off, then yourABS system is normal.Otherwise, you may have aproblem with the ABS. Contactan authorized HYUNDAI dealeras soon as possible.

5 35


✽✽ NOTICEWhen you jump start your vehiclebecause of a drained battery, theengine may not run as smoothly andthe ABS warning light may turn onat the same time. This happensbecause of the low battery voltage. Itdoes not mean your ABS is malfunc-tioning.• Do not pump your brakes!• Have the battery recharged before

driving the vehicle.

Electronic Stability Control(ESC)

The Electronic Stability Control(ESC) system helps to stabilize thevehicle during cornering maneuvers.ESC checks where you are steeringand where the vehicle is actuallygoing. ESC applies braking pressureto any one of the vehicle’s brakesand intervenes in the engine man-agement system to assist the driverwith keeping the vehicle on theintended path. It is not a substitutefor safe driving practices. Alwaysadjust your speed and driving to theroad conditions.

ODM052046

WARNINGNever drive too fast for the roadconditions or too quickly whencornering. The ESC system willnot prevent accidents. Excessivespeed in turns, abrupt maneu-vers, and hydroplaning on wetsurfaces can result in severeaccidents.


365

ESC operation ESC ON condition

When the ignition switch is in the ONposition, the ESC and the ESC OFFindicator lights illuminate for approxi-mately three seconds and goes off,then the ESC is turned on.If this light stays on, your vehicle mayhave a malfunction with the ESCsystem. Have your vehicle checkedby an authorized HYUNDAI dealeras soon as possible.

When operating

When the ESC is in opera-tion, the ESC indicator lightblinks:• When you apply your

brakes under conditionswhich may lock thewheels, you may hearsounds from the brakes, orfeel a corresponding sen-sation in the brake pedal.This is normal and itmeans your ESC is active.

• When the ESC activates,the engine may notrespond to the acceleratoras it does under routineconditions.

• If the Cruise Control wasin use when the ESC acti-vates, the cruise controlautomatically disengages.The Cruise Control can bereengaged when the roadconditions allow. See“Cruise Control System”later in this chapter.

• When moving out of themud or driving on a slip-pery road, the engine rpm(revolutions per minute)may not increase even ifyou press the acceleratorpedal deeply. This is tomaintain the stability andtraction of the vehicle anddoes not indicate a prob-lem.

5 37


ESC OFF condition

To cancel ESC operation :• State 1Press the ESC OFF button shortly(ESC OFF indicator light illumi-nates). At this state, the engine con-trol function does not operate. Inother words, the traction controlfunction does not operate but onlythe brake control function operates.

• State 2Press the ESC OFF button for morethan 3 seconds. ESC OFF indicatorlight illuminates and ESC OFF warn-ing chime will sound. At this state,the engine control function and brakecontrol function does not operate. Inother words, the vehicle stability con-trol function does not operate anymore.If the ignition switch is placed to theLOCK/OFF position when ESC is off,ESC remains off. Upon restarting theengine, the ESC will automaticallyturn on again.

Indicator lights

When the ignition switch is placed tothe ON position, the ESC indicatorlight illuminates, then goes off if theESC system is operating normally.The ESC indicator light blinks when-ever the ESC is operating.If ESC indicator light stays on, yourvehicle may have a malfunction withthe ESC system. When this warninglight illuminates have your vehiclechecked by an authorized HYUNDAIdealer as soon as possible.The ESC OFF indicator light comeson when the ESC is turned off withthe button.

■ ESC indicator light

■ ESC OFF indicator light


385

ESC OFF usage When driving

The ESC OFF mode should only beused briefly to help free the vehicle ifstuck in snow or mud by temporarilystopping operation of the ESC tomaintain wheel torque.To turn ESC off while driving, pressthe ESC OFF button while driving ona flat road surface.

✽✽ NOTICETurning the ESC OFF does notaffect ABS or standard brake sys-tem operation.

CAUTIONTo prevent damage to thetransaxle:• Do not allow wheel(s) of one

axle to spin excessively whilethe ESC, ABS, and brakewarning lights are displayed.The repairs would not be cov-ered by the vehicle warranty.Reduce engine power and donot spin the wheel(s) exces-sively while these lights aredisplayed.

• When operating the vehicle ona dynamometer, ensure theESC is turned off (ESC OFFlight illuminated).

WARNINGWhen the ESC is blinking, thisindicates the ESC is active:Drive slowly and NEVERattempt to accelerate. NEVERpress the ESC OFF button whilethe ESC indicator light is blink-ing or you may lose control ofthe vehicle resulting in an acci-dent.

CAUTIONDriving with varying tire orwheel sizes may cause the ESCsystem to malfunction. Whenreplacing tires, make sure theyare the same size as your origi-nal tires for this vehicle.

5 39


Vehicle stability management(VSM) (if equipped)This system provides furtherenhancements to vehicle stabilityand steering responses when a vehi-cle is driving on a slippery road or avehicle detected changes in coeffi-cient of friction between right wheelsand left wheels when braking.

VSM operationWhen the VSM is in operation, ESCindicator light ( ) blinks.When the vehicle stability manage-ment is operating properly, you canfeel a slight pulsation in the vehicleand/or abnormal steering responses(EPS). This is only the effect of brakeand EPS control and indicates noth-ing unusual.

The VSM does not operate when:

• Driving on a banked road such asgradient or incline

• Driving rearward• ESC OFF indicator light ( )

remains on the instrument cluster• EPS indicator light remains on the

instrument cluster

VSM operation offIf you press the ESC OFF button toturn off the ESC, the VSM will alsocancel and the ESC OFF indicatorlight ( ) illuminates.To turn on the VSM, press the buttonagain. The ESC OFF indicator lightgoes out.


405

Malfunction indicatorThe VSM system will automaticallybe deactivated if a malfunction hasbeen detected somewhere in theElectric Power Steering system orthe VSM system. If a malfunction isdetected, the ESC indicator light willilluminate and remain on. If the ESCindicator light ( ) or EPS warninglight remains on, take your vehicle toan authorized HYUNDAI dealer andhave the system checked.

✽✽ NOTICE• The VSM is designed to function

above approximately 9 mph (15km/h) on curves.

• The VSM is designed to functionabove approximately 18 mph (30km/h) when a vehicle is braking ona split-mu road. The split-mu roadis made of surfaces which have dif-ferent friction forces.

Downhill brake control (DBC)

The Downhill Brake Control (DBC)assists the driver when descending asteep hill without the driver depress-ing the brake pedal. It slows the vehi-cle to approximately 6.3 mph (10km/h) and lets the driver concentrateon steering the vehicle.DBC defaults to the OFF positionwhenever the ignition is turned on.The DBC can be turned on or off bypushing the button.

ODM052047

WARNING • The Vehicle Stability

Management system is not asubstitute for safe drivingpractices but a supplemen-tary function only. It is theresponsibility of the driver toalways check the speed andthe distance to the vehicleahead. Always hold the steer-ing wheel firmly while driving.

• Your vehicle is designed tooperate according to the dri-ver's input through steering,acceleration, and braking,even with the VSM opera-tional. Always follow all thenormal precautions for driv-ing at safe speeds for the con-ditions – including driving ininclement weather and on aslippery road.

• Driving with varying tire orwheel sizes may cause theVSM system to malfunction.When replacing tires, makesure they are the same size asyour original tires.

5 41


WARNINGIf the DBC yellow indicator light illuminates, the system has overheated or there is an operational problem.The DBC will not activate. If the DBC yellow indicator light illuminates even though the DBC system hascooled, have the system checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

ModeIndicator

lightDescription

StandbyGreen lightilluminated

Press the DBC button when the vehicle speed is under25 mph (40 km/h). The DBC system will turn ON and enter the standby mode.The system maintains the standby mode when vehicle speed is under approximately38 mph (60km/h).

ActivatedGreen light

blink

In the standby mode, DBC will activate automatically under the following conditions:• The incline is over a certain degree.• The brake pedal or accelerator pedal is not depressed.

OFFGreen light

OFF

The DBC will turn OFF under the following conditions:• The DBC button is pressed again.• The vehicle speed is over approximately 38 mph (60 km/h).

Temporarilydeactivated

Green lightilluminated

In the activated mode, the DBC will temporarily deactivate under the following conditions:• The hill is not steep enough.• The brake pedal or accelerator pedal is depressed.

When the above conditions are gone, the DBC will automatically activate again.


425

✽✽ NOTICE• The DBC does not turn ON in the

P (Park) position.• The DBC may not activate if the

ESC (or ABS) is activated.• Noise or vibration may occur from

the brakes when the DBC is acti-vated.

• The rear stop light comes on whenthe DBC is activated.

• Always turn OFF the DBC on nor-mal roads. The DBC might acti-vate from the standby mode dur-ing abrupt cornering or drivingover speed bumps.

Hill-start assist control (HAC)A vehicle has the tendency to rollback on a steep hill when the driverbegins to accelerate after a stop. TheHill-start Assist Control (HAC) pre-vents the vehicle from rolling back byoperating the brakes automaticallyfor about 1.5 seconds. The brakesare released when the acceleratorpedal is depressed or after about 1.5seconds.

WARNING• Unnecessary or unwanted

DBC activation may result inan accident.

• On a very steep hill eventhough the brake pedal oraccelerator pedal is depressedthe DBC may not deactivate.

WARNINGThe HAC is activated only forabout 1.5 seconds, so alwaysdepress the accelerator pedal tobegin accelerating after a stop.

5 43


✽✽ NOTICE• The HAC does not operate when

the transaxle shift lever is in the P(Park) or N (Neutral) position.

• The HAC activates even thoughthe ESC is off but it does not acti-vate when the ESC has malfunc-tioned.

Good braking practices

• After being parked, check to besure the parking brake is notengaged and that the parkingbrake indicator light is out beforedriving away.

• Driving through water may get thebrakes wet. They can also get wetwhen the vehicle is washed. Wetbrakes can be dangerous! Yourvehicle will not stop as quickly if thebrakes are wet. Wet brakes maycause the vehicle to pull to one side.To dry the brakes, apply the brakeslightly until the braking action returnsto normal, taking care to keep thevehicle under control at all times. Ifthe braking action does not return tonormal, stop as soon as it is safe todo so and call an authorizedHYUNDAI dealer for assistance.

• Don't coast down hills with thevehicle out of gear.This is extreme-ly hazardous. Keep the vehicle ingear at all times, use the brakes toslow down, then shift to a lowergear so that engine braking willhelp you maintain a safe speed.

• Don't "ride" the brake pedal.Resting your foot on the brakepedal while driving can be danger-ous because it can result in thebrakes overheating and losing theireffectiveness. It also increases thewear of the brake components.

WARNING• Whenever you leave or park

your vehicle, always set theparking brake as far as possi-ble and fully engage the vehi-cle's transaxle into the P (Park)position. If the parking brake isnot fully engaged, the vehiclemay move inadvertently andinjure yourself and others.

• All vehicles should alwayshave the parking brake fullyengaged when parking toavoid inadvertent movementof the vehicle which can injureoccupants or pedestrians.


445

• If a tire goes flat while you are driv-ing, apply the brakes gently andkeep the vehicle pointed straightahead while you slow down. Whenyou are moving slowly enough for itto be safe to do so, pull off the roadand stop in a safe place.

• If your vehicle is equipped with anautomatic transaxle, don't let yourvehicle creep forward. To avoidcreeping forward, keep your footfirmly on the brake pedal when thevehicle is stopped.

• Use caution when parking on a hill.Firmly engage the parking brakeand place the shift lever in P (auto-matic transaxle). If your vehicle isfacing downhill, turn the frontwheels into the curb to help keepthe vehicle from rolling. If your vehi-cle is facing uphill, turn the frontwheels away from the curb to helpkeep the vehicle from rolling. Ifthere is no curb or if it is requiredby other conditions to keep thevehicle from rolling, block thewheels.

• Under some conditions your park-ing brake can freeze in theengaged position. This is most like-ly to happen when there is anaccumulation of snow or icearound or near the rear brakes or ifthe brakes are wet. If there is a riskthat the parking brake may freeze,apply it only temporarily while youput the gear selector lever in P(automatic transaxle) and block therear wheels so the vehicle cannotroll. Then release the parkingbrake.

• Do not hold the vehicle on anincline with the accelerator pedal.This can cause the transaxle tooverheat. Always use the brakepedal or parking brake.

5 45


1.Cruise indicator2.Cruise set indicator

The cruise control system allows youto program the vehicle to maintain aconstant speed without depressingthe accelerator pedal.This system is designed to functionabove approximately 25 mph (40km/h).

CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM

ODM052024

WARNING• If the cruise control is left on,

(CRUISE indicator light in theinstrument cluster is illumi-nated), the cruise control canbe switched on accidentally.Keep the cruise control sys-tem off (CRUISE indicatorlight OFF) when the cruisecontrol is not in use, to avoidinadvertently setting a speed.

• Use the cruise control systemonly when driving on openhighways in good weather.

• Do not use the cruise controlwhen it may not be safe tokeep the vehicle at a constantspeed, for instance, driving inheavy or varying traffic, or onslippery (rainy, icy or snow-covered) or winding roads orover 6% up-hill or down-hillroads.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Pay particular attention to the

driving conditions wheneverusing the cruise control sys-tem.

• Be careful when drivingdownhill using the cruise con-trol system, which mayincrease the vehicle speed.


465

✽✽ NOTICE• During normal cruise control

operation, when the SET switch isactivated or reactivated afterapplying the brakes, the cruisecontrol will energize after approx-imately 3 seconds. This delay isnormal.

• To activate cruise control, depressthe brake pedal at least once afterturning the ignition switch to theON position or starting the engine.This is to check if the brake switchwhich is important part to cancelcruise control is in normal condi-tion.

Cruise control switch

CRUISE : Turns cruise control sys-tem on or off.

CANCEL: Cancels cruise controloperation.

RES+: Resumes or increases cruisecontrol speed.

SET-: Sets or decreases cruise con-trol speed.

To set cruise control speed:

1. Press the CRUISE button on thesteering wheel to turn the systemon. The CRUISE indicator light inthe instrument cluster will illumi-nate.

2. Accelerate to the desired speed,which must be more than 25 mph(40 km/h).

ODMEDR2016 ODM052025

5 47


3. Move the lever down (to SET-),and release it at the desiredspeed. The SET indicator light inthe instrument cluster will illumi-nate. Release the acceleratorpedal at the same time. Thedesired speed will automaticallybe maintained.

On a steep grade, the vehicle mayslow down or speed up slightly whilegoing uphill or downhill.

To increase cruise control setspeed:

Follow either of these procedures:• Move the lever up (to RES+) and

hold it. Your vehicle will accelerate.Release the lever at the speed youwant.

• Move the lever up (to RES+) andrelease it immediately.The cruising speed will increase by1 mph (or 2km/h) each time youmove the lever up (to RES+) in thismanner.

To decrease the cruisingspeed:

Follow either of these procedures:• Move the lever down (to SET-) and

hold it. Your vehicle will graduallyslow down. Release the lever at thespeed you want to maintain.

• Move the lever down (to SET-) andrelease it immediately.The cruising speed will decreaseby 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time youmove the lever down (to SET-) inthis manner.

ODM052027

ODM052026 ODM052027


485

To temporarily accelerate withthe cruise control on:If you want to speed up temporarilywhen the cruise control is on,depress the accelerator pedal.Increased speed will not interferewith cruise control operation orchange the set speed.To return to the set speed, take yourfoot off the accelerator pedal.

To cancel cruise control, doone of the following:

• Depress the brake pedal.• Shift into N (Neutral) with an auto-

matic transaxle.• Press the CANCEL switch located

on the steering wheel.• Decrease the vehicle speed lower

than the memory speed by 9 mph(15 km/h).

• Decrease the vehicle speed to lessthan approximately 25 mph (40km/h).

Each of these actions will cancelcruise control operation (the SETindicator light in the instrument clus-ter will go off), but it will not turn thesystem off. If you wish to resumecruise control operation, move up thelever (to RES+) located on yoursteering wheel.You will return to yourpreviously preset speed.

ODM052028

5 49


To resume cruising speed atmore than approximately 25mph (40 km/h):

If any method other than theCRUISE button was used to cancelcruising speed and the system is stillactivated, the most recent set speedwill automatically resume when youmove the lever up (to RES+).It will not resume, however, if thevehicle speed has dropped belowapproximately 25 mph (40 km/h).

✽✽ NOTICEAlways check the road conditionswhen you move the lever up (toRES+) to resume the speed.

To turn cruise control off, doone of the following:

• Press the CRUISE button (theCRUISE indicator light in theinstrument cluster will go off).

• Turn the ignition off.Both of these actions cancel cruisecontrol operation. If you want toresume cruise control operation,repeat the steps provided in “To setcruise control speed” on the previouspage.

ODM052026

ODM052025


505

The BSD (Blind spot detection) sys-tem uses a radar sensor to alert thedriver while driving.It senses the rear side territory of thevehicle and provides information tothe driver.

1 BSD (Blind spot detection)When a vehicle approaches you andis detected in your blind spot area,the system will warn you. The warn-ing range depends on your vehiclespeed. However, if your vehicle isabout 6 mph (10 km/h) faster than theother vehicle, the system will notwarn you.2 LCA (Lane change assist)When a vehicle approaches you athigh speed, the system will warn you.3 RCTA (Rear cross traffic alert)When your vehicle moves rearwardand the sensor detects an approach-ing vehicle on either the left or rightside, the system will warn you.

BLIND SPOT DETECTION SYSTEM (BSD) (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNING • While driving, keep your eyes

on the road and be aware ofyour surroundings eventhough the BSD (Blind spotdetection) system is operat-ing.

• The BSD (Blind spot detec-tion) system is a convenientfeature designed to assist thedriver. However, do not relysolely on the system to alertyou when vehicles areapproaching. Always payproper attention to your sur-roundings and use cautionwhen changing lanes.

OAN053105

OVI053129L

5 51


Operating conditionsThe indicator on the switch will illumi-nate when the BSD (Blind spotdetection) system switch is pressedwith the ignition switch ON.If the vehicle speed exceeds 18.6mph (30 km/h) the system will acti-vate.If you press the switch again, theswitch indicator and system will beturned off.If the ignition switch is turned OFFand ON the system returns to theprevious state.When the system is not used, turnthe system off by turning off theswitch.When the system is turned on, thewarning light will illuminate for 3 sec-onds on the outside rearview mirror.

Warning typeThe system will activate when:1.The system is on 2.Vehicle speed is above 18.6 mph

(30 km/h)3.Other vehicles are detected in the

boundaries of the radar system.

1st stage

If a vehicle is detected within theboundary of the system, a yellowwarning light will illuminate in theoutside rearview mirror glass.Once the detected vehicle moves outof the boundary of the system, thewarning will turn off.

ONCNDO3007


525

2nd stage

The second stage alarm will activatewhen:1.The first stage alert is on2.The turn signal is on to change a

lane.

When the second stage alert is acti-vated, a warning light will blink on theoutside rearview mirror housing anda warning alarm will sound.If you move the turn signal switchback to its original position, the sec-ond stage alert will be deactivated.

BSD Detecting Sensor

The sensors are located on theinside of the rear bumper.Always keep the rear bumper cleanfor the system to work properly.

ONCEDR3017

OVI053121

OVI053122

5 53


Warning message

If the detecting sensor performanceis low or overheated by foreign sub-stances on the rear bumper, themessage will appear to notify thedriver. Also, a warning message mayappear when there is heavy rain or ina large area with nothing to detect. Ifthis occurs, inspect the rear bumperfor any debris or dirt which mayaffect the operation of the BSD sen-sor. If the system does not activatenormally after removing the sub-stances on the rear bumper, consultan authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

If there is a problem with BSD, a warn-ing message will appear to notify thedriver. If this occurs, have a vehiclechecked by an authorized HYUNDAIdealer.

Rear cross traffic alert

When your vehicle moves backwardsfrom a parking position, the sensordetects approaching vehicles to theleft or right side direction and givesinformation to the driver.

OVI053131ONC043074N

ONC043075N


545

Operating conditions - RCTA• When the ignition is ON, if you

press the BSD switch, the switchindicator illuminates and the systemturns on.

• The system operates when thevehicle speed is below 6.2 mph (10km/h) when the gear shift lever is inreverse (R).

• The RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)detecting range is 0.5 - 20m (1.6 -65.6 ft) based on the side direction.If an approaching vehicle is withinthe sensing range and is travelingat a speed of 2.5 - 22 mph (4 - 36km/h), the system will detect thevehicle. However, the system sens-ing range may vary based on thesurrounding conditions. Alwaysuse good judgment and pay atten-tion to your surroundings whiledriving even while using the BSDsystem.

Warning type

• If the vehicle detected by sensorsapproaches your vehicle, the warn-ing chime will sound and the warn-ing light will blink on the outsiderearview mirror.

• If the detected vehicle is out of thesensing range from behind yourvehicle, moves in the oppositedirection away from your vehicle ormoves slowly, the warning is can-celled.

• The system may not operate prop-erly due to other factors or circum-stances. Always pay attention toyour surroundings.

❈ If the left or right side bumper ofyour vehicle is blocked by a barrieror another vehicle, the systemsensing ability may be limited.

WARNING • The warning light on the out-

side rearview mirror housingwill illuminate whenever avehicle is detected at the rearside by the system.To avoid accidents, do notfocus only on the warninglight and neglect to see thesurroundings of the vehicle.

• Drive safely even though thevehicle is equipped with aBSD (Blind spot detection)system. Do not solely rely onthe system but check for your-self before changing lanes.The system may not alert thedriver in some conditions soalways check the surround-ings while driving.

OVI053132

5 55


Non-operating conditionsDriver's AttentionThe driver must be extra cautious inthe following situations in which thesystem may not assist the driver andmay not function properly.- Curved roads, tollgates, etc.- The area around the sensor is cov-

ered by rain, snow, mud, etc

- The rear bumper near the sensor iscovered or hidden with foreign mat-ter such as a sticker, bumper guard,bicycle stand etc.

- The rear bumper is damaged or thesensor is out of place.

- The height of the vehicle ischanged or altered such as whenthe cargo area is loaded with heavyobjects, or has abnormal tire pres-sure etc.

- Due to bad weather such as heavyrain or snow.

- A fixed object is near such as aguardrail, tunnel etc.

- A large amount of metal sub-stances are near the vehicles suchas a construction area.

- A big vehicle is near such as a busor truck.

- A motorcycle or bicycle is near.- A flatbed trailer is near.- If the vehicle has been started at

the same time as the vehicle next toit and the vehicle has started tomove.

- When the other vehicle passes byvery fast.

- When changing lanes.

- When going down or up a steeproad where the height of the lane isdifferent.

- When the other vehicle drives atthe rear very nearby or drives veryclose.

- When the temperature of the rearbumper is high.

- When a trailer or carrier is installed.

Outside rearview mirror may notalert the driver when:- The outside rearview mirror hous-

ing is very muddy or dirty.- The driver or passenger window is

very muddy or dirty.- The driver or passenger window is

tinted with a very dark tint.

This device complies with Part15 of the FCC rules.Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:1. This device may not cause harm-



CAUTION• The system may not work

properly if the bumper hasbeen replaced or if repair workhas been done near the sen-sor.

• The detection area differsaccording to the roads width.If the road is narrow the sys-tem may detect other vehiclesin the next lane.

• Conversely, if the road is verywide the system may notdetect other vehicles.

• The system may turn off dueto strong electromagneticwaves.


565

Active ECO operation

Active ECO helps improve fuel effi-ciency by controlling certain engineand transaxle system operatingparameters. Fuel efficiency dependson the driver's driving habit and roadcondition.

• When the Active ECO button ispressed the ECO indicator (green)will illuminate to show that theActive ECO is operating.

• When the Active ECO is activated,it will remain on until the ActiveECO button is pressed again.Active ECO does not turn off whenthe engine is restarted. To turn offActive ECO, press the Active ECObutton again.

• If Active ECO is turned off, the sys-tem will return to normal mode.

When Active ECO is activated :• The engine noise may get louder.• The vehicle speed may slightly be

reduced.• The air conditioner performance

may be affected.

Limitation of Active ECO oper-ation:If the following conditions occur whileActive ECO is operating, the systemoperation is limited even though thereis no change in the ECO indicator.• When the coolant temperature is

low: The system will be limited untilengine performance becomes nor-mal.

• When driving up a hill: The systemwill be limited to gain power whendriving uphill because the enginetorque is restricted.

• When using sports mode: The sys-tem will be limited according to theshift location.

• When the accelerator pedal isdeeply depressed for a few sec-onds: The system will be limited,judging that the driver wants tospeed up.

ACTIVE ECO SYSTEM

ODM052050

5 57


Your vehicle's fuel economy dependsmainly on your style of driving, whereyou drive and when you drive.Each of these factors affects howmany miles (kilometers) you can getfrom a gallon (liter) of fuel. To oper-ate your vehicle as economically aspossible, use the following drivingsuggestions to help save money inboth fuel and repairs:• Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a

moderate rate. Don't make "jack-rabbit" starts or full-throttle shiftsand maintain a steady cruisingspeed. Don't race between stop-lights. Try to adjust your speed tothe traffic so you don't have tochange speeds unnecessarily.Avoid heavy traffic whenever possi-ble. Always maintain a safe dis-tance from other vehicles so youcan avoid unnecessary braking.This also reduces brake wear.

• Drive at a moderate speed. Thefaster you drive, the more fuel yourvehicle uses. Driving at a moderatespeed, especially on the highway,is one of the most effective ways toreduce fuel consumption.

• Don't "ride" the brake pedal. Thiscan increase fuel consumption andalso increase wear on these com-ponents. In addition, driving withyour foot resting on the brake pedalmay cause the brakes to overheat,which reduces their effectivenessand may lead to more serious con-sequences.

• Take care of your tires. Keep theminflated to the recommended pres-sure. Incorrect inflation, either toomuch or too little, results in unnec-essary tire wear. Check the tirepressures at least once a month.

• Be sure that the wheels arealigned correctly. Improper align-ment can result from hitting curbsor driving too fast over irregularsurfaces. Poor alignment causesfaster tire wear and may also resultin other problems as well asgreater fuel consumption.

• Keep your vehicle in good condi-tion. For better fuel economy andreduced maintenance costs, main-tain your vehicle in accordancewith the maintenance schedule inSection 7. If you drive your vehiclein severe conditions, more frequentmaintenance is required (seeSection 7 for details).

• Keep your vehicle clean. For maxi-mum service, your vehicle shouldbe kept clean and free of corrosivematerials. It is especially importantthat mud, dirt, ice, etc. not beallowed to accumulate on theunderside of the vehicle. This extraweight can result in increased fuelconsumption and also contribute tocorrosion.

• Travel lightly. Don't carry unneces-sary weight in your vehicle. Weightreduces fuel economy.

• Don't let the engine idle longerthan necessary. If you are waiting(and not in traffic), turn off yourengine and restart only whenyou're ready to go.

ECONOMICAL OPERATION


585

• Remember, your vehicle does notrequire extended warm-up. Afterthe engine has started, allow theengine to run for 10 to 20 secondsprior to placing the vehicle in gear.In very cold weather, however, giveyour engine a slightly longer warm-up period.

• Don't "lug" or "over-rev" the engine.Lugging is driving too slowly in toohigh a gear resulting engine buck-ing. If this happens, shift to a lowergear. Over-revving is racing theengine beyond its safe limit. Thiscan be avoided by shifting at therecommended speeds.

• Use your air conditioning sparingly.The air conditioning system isoperated by engine power so yourfuel economy is reduced when youuse it.

• Open windows at high speeds canreduce fuel economy.

• Fuel economy is less in crosswindsand headwinds. To help offsetsome of this loss, slow down whendriving in these conditions.

Keeping a vehicle in good operatingcondition is important both for econ-omy and safety. Therefore, have anauthorized HYUNDAI dealer performscheduled inspections and mainte-nance.

WARNING - Engine off duringmotion

Never turn the engine off tocoast down hills or anytime thevehicle is in motion. The powersteering and power brakes willnot function properly without theengine running. Instead, keepthe engine on and downshift toan appropriate gear for enginebraking effect. In addition, turn-ing off the ignition while drivingcould engage the steering wheellock resulting in loss of vehiclesteering which could causeserious injury or death.

5 59


Hazardous driving conditionsWhen hazardous driving conditionsare encountered such as water,snow, ice, mud, sand, or similar haz-ards, follow these suggestions:• Drive cautiously and allow extra

distance for braking.• Avoid sudden braking or steering.• When braking with non-ABS

brakes pump the brake pedal witha light up-and-down motion untilthe vehicle is stopped.

• If stalled in snow, mud, or sand, usesecond gear. Accelerate slowly toavoid spinning the drive wheels.

• Use sand, rock salt, tire chains, orother non-slip material under thedrive wheels to provide tractionwhen stalled in ice, snow, or mud.

Reducing the risk of a rolloverThis multi-purpose passenger vehicleis defined as a Sports Utility Vehicle(SUV). SUV’s have higher groundclearance and a narrower track tomake them capable of performing in awide variety of off-road applications.Specific design characteristics givethem a higher center of gravity thanordinary vehicles. An advantage of thehigher ground clearance is a betterview of the road, which allows you toanticipate problems. They are notdesigned for cornering at the samespeeds as conventional passengervehicles, any more than low-slungsports vehicles are designed to per-form satisfactorily in off-road condi-tions. Due to this risk, driver and pas-sengers are strongly recommended tobuckle their seat belts. In a rollovercrash, an unbelted person is more like-ly to die than a person wearing a seatbelt. There are steps that a driver canmake to reduce the risk of a rollover.If at all possible, avoid sharp turns orabrupt maneuvers, do not load yourroof rack with heavy cargo, andnever modify your vehicle in any way.

SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS

WARNING - DownshiftingDownshifting with an automatictransaxle, while driving on slip-pery surfaces can cause anaccident. The sudden change intire speed could cause the tiresto skid. Be careful when down-shifting on slippery surfaces.

WARNING - ABSDo not pump the brake pedal ona vehicle equipped with ABS.


605

Rocking the vehicleIf it is necessary to rock the vehicle tofree it from snow, sand, or mud, firstturn the steering wheel right and leftto clear the area around your frontwheels. Then, shift back and forthbetween R (Reverse) and any for-ward gear in vehicles equipped withan automatic transaxle. Do not racethe engine, and spin the wheels as lit-tle as possible. If you are still stuckafter a few tries, have the vehiclepulled out by a tow vehicle to avoidengine overheating and possibledamage to the transaxle.

WARNING - RolloverAs with other Sports UtilityVehicle (SUV), failure to operatethis vehicle correctly may resultin loss of control, an accident orvehicle rollover.• Utility vehicles have a signifi-

cantly higher rollover ratethan other types of vehicles.

• Specific design characteris-tics (higher ground clearance,narrower track, etc.) give thisvehicle a higher center ofgravity than ordinary vehicles.

• A SUV is not designed for cor-nering at the same speeds asconventional vehicles.

• Avoid sharp turns or abruptmaneuvers.

• In a rollover crash, an unbelt-ed person is significantlymore likely to die than a per-son wearing a seat belt. Makesure everyone in the vehicle isproperly buckled up.

WARNINGYour vehicle is equipped withtires designed to provide saferide and handling capability. Donot use a size and type of tireand wheel that is different fromthe one that is originallyinstalled on your vehicle. It canaffect the safety and perform-ance of your vehicle, whichcould lead to steering failure orrollover and serious injury.When replacing the tires, besure to equip all four tires withthe tire and wheel of the samesize, type, tread, brand andload-carrying capacity. If younevertheless decide to equipyour vehicle with any tire/wheelcombination not recommendedby HYUNDAI for off road driv-ing, you should not use thesetires for highway driving.

CAUTIONProlonged rocking may causeengine over-heating, transaxledamage or failure, and tire dam-age.

5 61


✽✽ NOTICEThe ESC system should be turnedOFF prior to rocking the vehicle.

Smooth cornering

Avoid braking or gear changing incorners, especially when roads arewet. Ideally, corners should alwaysbe taken under gentle acceleration. Ifyou follow these suggestions, tirewear will be held to a minimum.

Driving at night

Because night driving presents morehazards than driving in the daylight,here are some important tips toremember:• Slow down and keep more distance

between you and other vehicles, asit may be more difficult to see atnight, especially in areas wherethere may not be any street lights.

• Adjust your mirrors to reduce theglare from other driver's headlights.

OUN056051 OCM053010

WARNING - Spinning tiresDo not spin the wheels, espe-cially at speeds more than 35mph (56 km/h). Spinning thewheels at high speeds when thevehicle is stationary couldcause a tire to overheat whichcould result in tire damage thatmay injure bystanders.

WARNINGIf your vehicle becomes stuck insnow, mud, sand, etc., then youmay attempt to rock the vehiclefree by moving it forward andbackward. Do not attempt thisprocedure if people or objectsare anywhere near the vehicle.During the rocking operation thevehicle may suddenly move for-ward or backward as it becomesunstuck, causing injury or dam-age to nearby people or objects.


625

• Keep your headlights clean andproperly aimed on vehicles notequipped with the automatic head-light aiming feature. Dirty or improp-erly aimed headlights will make itmuch more difficult to see at night.

• Avoid staring directly at the head-lights of oncoming vehicles. Youcould be temporarily blinded, and itwill take several seconds for youreyes to readjust to the darkness.

Driving in the rain

Rain and wet roads can make drivingdangerous, especially if you’re notprepared for the slick pavement.Here are a few things to considerwhen driving in the rain:• A heavy rainfall will make it harder

to see and will increase the dis-tance needed to stop your vehicle,so slow down.

• Keep your windshield wipingequipment in good shape. Replaceyour windshield wiper blades whenthey show signs of streaking ormissing areas on the windshield.

• If your tires are not in good condi-tion, making a quick stop on wetpavement can cause a skid andpossibly lead to an accident. Besure your tires are in good shape.

• Turn on your headlights to make iteasier for others to see you.

• Driving too fast through large pud-dles can affect your brakes. If youmust go through puddles, try todrive through them slowly.

• If you believe you may have gottenyour brakes wet, apply them lightlywhile driving until normal brakingoperation returns.

1VQA3003

5 63


Driving in flooded areasAvoid driving through flooded areasunless you are sure the water is nohigher than the bottom of the wheelhub. Drive through any water slowly.Allow adequate stopping distancebecause brake performance may beaffected.After driving through water, dry thebrakes by gently applying them sev-eral times while the vehicle is movingslowly.

Driving off-roadDrive carefully off-road because yourvehicle may be damaged by rocks orroots of trees. Become familiar withthe off-road conditions where youare going to drive before you begindriving.

Highway drivingTires:

Adjust the tire inflation pressures tospecification. Low tire inflation pres-sures will result in overheating andpossible failure of the tires.Avoid using worn or damaged tireswhich may result in reduced tractionor tire failure.

✽✽ NOTICENever exceed the maximum tireinflation pressure shown on the tires.

1VQA1004

WARNING• Underinflated or overinflated

tires can cause poor handling,loss of vehicle control, andsudden tire failure leading toaccidents, injuries, and evendeath. Always check the tiresfor proper inflation beforedriving. For proper tire pres-sures, refer to section 8,“Tires and wheels”.

• Driving on tires with no orinsufficient tread is danger-ous. Worn-out tires can resultin loss of vehicle control, col-lisions, injury, and even death.Worn-out tires should bereplaced as soon as possibleand should never be used fordriving. Always check the tiretread before driving your vehi-cle. For further informationand tread limits, refer to sec-tion 7, “Tires and wheels”.


645

Fuel, engine coolant and engineoil:High speed travel consumes morefuel than urban motoring. Do not for-get to check both engine coolant andengine oil.

Drive belt:A loose or damaged drive belt mayresult in overheating of the engine.

5 65


WINTER DRIVING

Severe weather conditions in thewinter result in greater wear andother problems. To minimize theproblems of winter driving, youshould follow these suggestions:

Snowy or Icy conditionsTo drive your vehicle in deep snow, itmay be necessary to use snow tiresor to install tire chains on your tires.If snow tires are needed, it is neces-sary to select tires equivalent in sizeand type of the original equipmenttires. Failure to do so may adverselyaffect the safety and handling of yourvehicle. Furthermore, speeding,rapid acceleration, sudden brakeapplications, and sharp turns arepotentially very hazardous practices.During deceleration, use enginebraking to the fullest extent. Suddenbrake applications on snowy or icyroads may cause skids to occur. Youneed to keep sufficient distancebetween the vehicle in operation infront and your vehicle. Also, applythe brake gently. It should be notedthat installing tire chains on the tirewill provide a greater driving force,but will not prevent side skids.

✽✽ NOTICETire chains are not legal in all states.Check the state laws before fittingtire chains.

Snow tiresIf you mount snow tires on your vehi-cle, make sure they are radial tires ofthe same size and load range as theoriginal tires. Mount snow tires on allfour wheels to balance your vehicle’shandling in all weather conditions.Keep in mind that the traction provid-ed by snow tires on dry roads maynot be as high as your vehicle's orig-inal equipment tires.You should drivecautiously even when the roads areclear. Check with the tire dealer formaximum speed recommendations.

Do not install studded tires withoutfirst checking local, state and munic-ipal regulations for possible restric-tions against their use.

WARNING - Snow tire sizeSnow tires should be equivalentin size and type to the vehicle'sstandard tires. Otherwise, thesafety and handling of your vehi-cle may be adversely affected.

1VQA3005


665

Tire chains

Since the sidewalls of radial tires arethinner, they can be damaged bymounting some types of snow chainson them. Therefore, the use of snowtires is recommended instead ofsnow chains. Do not mount tirechains on vehicles equipped withaluminum wheels; snow chains maycause damage to the wheels. If snowchains must be used, use wire-typechains with a thickness of less than0.59 in (15 mm). Damage to yourvehicle caused by improper snowchain use is not covered by yourvehicle manufacturers warranty.

When using tire chains, attach themto the drive wheels as follows.2WD : Front wheelsAWD : All four wheels

If a full set of chains is notavailable for an AWD vehicle,chains may be installed onthe front wheels only.

CAUTION• Make sure the snow chains are

the correct size and type foryour tires. Incorrect snowchains can cause damage tothe vehicle body and suspen-sion and may not be coveredby your vehicle manufacturerwarranty. Also, the snow chainconnecting hooks may be dam-aged from contacting vehiclecomponents causing the snowchains to come loose from thetire. Make sure the snow chainsare SAE class “S” certified.

• Always check chain installa-tion for proper mounting afterdriving approximately 0.3 to0.6 miles (0.5 to 1 km) toensure safe mounting.Retighten or remount thechains if they are loose.

1VQA3007

5 67


Chain installation

When installing chains, follow themanufacturer's instructions andmount them as tightly as you can.Drive slowly with chains installed. Ifyou hear the chains contacting thebody or chassis, stop and tightenthem. If they still make contact, slowdown until it stops. Remove thechains as soon as you begin drivingon cleared roads.

Use high quality ethylene gly-col coolantYour vehicle is delivered with highquality ethylene glycol coolant in thecooling system. It is the only type ofcoolant that should be used becauseit helps prevent corrosion in the cool-ing system, lubricates the waterpump and prevents freezing. Be sureto replace or replenish your coolantin accordance with the maintenanceschedule in section 7. Before winter,have your coolant tested to assurethat its freezing point is sufficient forthe temperatures anticipated duringthe winter.

CAUTION• Chains that are the wrong size

or improperly installed candamage your vehicle's brakelines, suspension, body andwheels.

• Stop driving and retighten thechains any time you hear themhitting the vehicle.

WARNING - Tire chains• The use of chains may

adversely affect vehicle han-dling.

• Do not exceed 20 mph (30km/h) or the chain manufac-turer’s recommended speedlimit, whichever is lower.

• Drive carefully and avoidbumps, holes, sharp turns, andother road hazards, which maycause the vehicle to bounce.

• Avoid sharp turns or locked-wheel braking.

WARNING - Mountingchains

When mounting snow chains,park the vehicle on level groundaway from traffic. Turn on thevehicle Hazard Warning flashersand place a triangular emer-gency warning device behindthe vehicle if available. Alwaysplace the vehicle in P (Park),apply the parking brake andturn off the engine beforeinstalling snow chains.


685

Check battery and cablesWinter puts additional burdens onthe battery system. Visually inspectthe battery and cables as describedin section 7. The level of charge inyour battery can be checked by anauthorized HYUNDAI dealer or aservice station.

Change to "winter weight" oilif necessaryIn some climates it is recommendedthat a lower viscosity "winter weight"oil be used during cold weather. Seesection 8 for recommendations. Ifyou aren't sure what weight oil youshould use, consult an authorizedHYUNDAI dealer.

Check spark plugs and igni-tion systemInspect your spark plugs asdescribed in section 7 and replacethem if necessary. Also check allignition wiring and components to besure they are not cracked, worn ordamaged in any way.

To keep locks from freezingTo keep the locks from freezing,squirt an approved de-icer fluid orglycerine into the key opening. If alock is covered with ice, squirt it withan approved de-icing fluid to removethe ice. If the lock is frozen internally,you may be able to thaw it out byusing a heated key. Handle the heat-ed key with care to avoid injury.

Use approved window washeranti-freeze in systemTo keep the water in the windowwasher system from freezing, add anapproved window washer anti-freezesolution in accordance with instruc-tions on the container. Window wash-er anti-freeze is available from anauthorized HYUNDAI dealer andmost auto parts outlets. Do not useengine coolant or other types of anti-freeze as these may damage thepaint finish.

5 69


Don't let your parking brakefreezeUnder some conditions your parkingbrake can freeze in the engagedposition.This is most likely to happenwhen there is an accumulation ofsnow or ice around or near the rearbrakes or if the brakes are wet. Ifthere is a risk the parking brake mayfreeze, apply it only temporarily whileyou put the shift lever in P (automat-ic transaxle) and block the rearwheels so the vehicle cannot roll.Then release the parking brake.

Don't let ice and snow accu-mulate underneathUnder some conditions, snow andice can build up under the fendersand interfere with the steering. Whendriving in severe winter conditionswhere this may happen, you shouldperiodically check underneath thevehicle to be sure the movement ofthe front wheels and the steeringcomponents is not obstructed.

Carry emergency equipmentDepending on the severity of theweather, you should carry appropri-ate emergency equipment. Some ofthe items you may want to carryinclude tire chains, tow straps orchains, flashlight, emergency flares,sand, a shovel, jumper cables, a win-dow scraper, gloves, ground cloth,coveralls or a blanket, etc.

Don't place foreign objects ormaterials in the engine com-partmentPlacement of foreign objects ormaterials which prevent cooling ofthe engine, in the engine compart-ment, may cause a failure or com-bustion. The manufacturer is notresponsible for the damage causedby such placement.


705

TRAILER TOWINGIf you are considering towing withyour vehicle, you should first checkwith your state’s Department ofMotor Vehicles to determine theirlegal requirements.Since laws vary the requirements fortowing trailers, cars, or other types ofvehicles or apparatus may differ. Askan authorized HYUNDAI dealer forfurther details before towing.

Your vehicle can tow a trailer. Toidentify what the vehicle traileringcapacity is for your vehicle, youshould read the information in“Weight of the trailer” that appearslater in this section.

Remember that trailering is differentthan just driving your vehicle by itself.Trailering means changes in han-dling, durability, and fuel economy.Successful, safe trailering requirescorrect equipment, and it has to beused properly.

This section contains many time-test-ed, important trailering tips and safe-ty rules. Many of these are importantfor your safety and that of your pas-sengers. Please read this sectioncarefully before you pull a trailer.

Load-pulling components such asthe engine, transaxle, wheel assem-blies, and tires are forced to workharder against the load of the addedweight. The engine is required tooperate at relatively higher speedsand under greater loads. This addi-tional burden generates extra heat.The trailer also considerably addswind resistance, increasing thepulling requirements.

WARNING - Towing atrailer

If you don't use the correctequipment and/or drive improp-erly, you can lose control whenyou pull a trailer. For example, ifthe trailer is too heavy, thebrakes may not work well - oreven at all. You and your pas-sengers could be seriously orfatally injured. Pull a trailer onlyif you have followed all thesteps in this section.

WARNING - Weight limitsBefore towing, make sure thetotal trailer weight, GCW (grosscombination weight), GVW(gross vehicle weight), GAW(gross axle weight) and trailertongue load are all within thelimits.

CAUTIONPulling a trailer improperly candamage your vehicle and resultin costly repairs not covered byyour warranty. To pull a trailercorrectly, follow the advice inthis section.

5 71


Hitches It's important to have the correcthitch equipment. Crosswinds, largetrucks going by, and rough roads area few reasons why you’ll need theright hitch. Here are some rules tofollow:• If you have to make any holes in

the body of your vehicle when youinstall a trailer hitch, be sure to sealthe holes later when you removethe hitch.If not sealed, deadly carbon monox-ide (CO) from your exhaust can getinto your vehicle, as well as dirt andwater.

• The bumpers on your vehicle arenot intended for hitches. Do notattach rental hitches or otherbumper-type hitches to them. Useonly a frame-mounted hitch thatdoes not attach to the bumper.

• A HYUNDAI trailer hitch accessoryis available at an authorizedHYUNDAI dealer.

Safety chains You should always attach chainsbetween your vehicle and your trail-er. Cross the safety chains under thetongue of the trailer so that thetongue will not drop to the road if itbecomes separated from the hitch.Instructions about safety chains maybe provided by the hitch manufactur-er or by the trailer manufacturer.Follow the manufacturer’s recom-mendation for attaching safetychains. Always leave just enoughslack so you can turn with your trail-er. And, never allow safety chains todrag on the ground.

Trailer brakes If your trailer is equipped with a brak-ing system, make sure it conforms tofederal and/or local regulations andthat it is properly installed and oper-ating correctly.If your trailer weight exceeds themaximum allowed weight withouttrailer brakes, then the trailer will alsorequire its own brakes as well. Besure to read and follow the instruc-tions for the trailer brakes so you’ll beable to install, adjust and maintainthem properly.• Don’t tap into or modify your vehi-

cle's brake system.

WARNING - Trailer brakesDo not use a trailer with its ownbrakes unless you are absolute-ly certain that you have proper-ly set up the brake system. Thisis not a task for amateurs. Usean experienced, competenttrailer shop for this work.


725

Driving with a trailer Towing a trailer requires a certainamount of experience. Before settingout for the open road, you must get toknow your trailer. Acquaint yourselfwith the feel of handling and brakingwith the added weight of the trailer.And always keep in mind that thevehicle you are driving is now a gooddeal longer and not nearly so respon-sive as your vehicle is by itself.Before you start, check the trailerhitch and platform, safety chains,electrical connector(s), lights, tiresand mirror adjustment. If the trailerhas electric brakes, start your vehicleand trailer moving and then apply thetrailer brake controller by hand to besure the brakes are working.This letsyou check your electrical connectionat the same time.During your trip, check occasionallyto be sure that the load is secure,and that the lights and any trailerbrakes are still working.

Following distance Stay at least twice as far behind thevehicle ahead as you would whendriving your vehicle without a trailer.This can help you avoid situationsthat require heavy braking and sud-den turns.

Passing You’ll need more passing distanceup ahead when you’re towing a trail-er. And, because of the increasedvehicle length, you’ll need to gomuch farther beyond the passedvehicle before you can return to yourlane. Due to the added load to theengine when going uphill the vehiclemay also take longer to pass than itwould on flat ground.

Backing up Hold the bottom of the steering wheelwith one hand.Then, to move the trail-er to the left, just move your hand tothe left.To move the trailer to the right,move your hand to the right. Alwaysback up slowly and, if possible, havesomeone guide you.

Making turnsWhen you’re turning with a trailer,make wider turns than normal. Dothis so your trailer won’t strike softshoulders, curbs, road signs, trees,or other objects near the edge of theroad. Avoid jerky or sudden maneu-vers. Signal well in advance beforeturning or lane changes.

5 73


Turn signals when towing a trailer When you tow a trailer, your vehiclehas to have a different turn signalflasher and extra wiring. The greenarrows on your instrument panel willflash whenever you signal a turn orlane change. Properly connected,the trailer lights will also flash to alertother drivers you’re about to turn,change lanes, or stop.When towing a trailer, the greenarrows on your instrument panel willflash for turns even if the bulbs on thetrailer are burned out. Thus, you maythink drivers behind you are seeingyour signals when, in fact, they arenot. It’s important to check occasion-ally to be sure the trailer bulbs are stillworking. You must also check thelights every time you disconnect andthen reconnect the wires.Do not connect a trailer lighting sys-tem directly to your vehicle’s lightingsystem. Use only an approved trailerwiring harness.An authorized HYUNDAI dealer canassist you in installing the wiring har-ness.

Driving on grades Reduce speed and shift to a lowergear before you start down a long orsteep downgrade. If you don’t shiftdown, you might have to use yourbrakes so much that they would gethot and no longer operate efficiently.On a long uphill grade, shift downand reduce your speed to around 45mph (70 km/h) to reduce the possi-bility of engine and transaxle over-heating.Operating your vehicle in D (Drive)when towing a trailer will minimizeheat build up and extend the life ofyour transaxle.

WARNING Failure to use an approved trail-er wiring harness could resultin damage to the vehicle electri-cal system and/or personalinjury.


745

Parking on hills Generally, if you have a trailerattached to your vehicle, you shouldnot park your vehicle on a hill. Peoplecan be seriously or fatally injured,and both your vehicle and the trailercan be damaged if they unexpected-ly roll down hill.

However, if you ever have to park yourtrailer on a hill, here's how to do it:1. Pull the vehicle into the parking

space.Turn the steering wheel in thedirection of the curb (right if headeddown hill, left if headed up hill).

2. If the vehicle has an automatictransaxle, place the car in P (Park).

3. Set the parking brake and shut offthe vehicle.

4. Place chocks under the trailerwheels on the down hill side of thewheels.

5. Start the vehicle, hold the brakes,shift to neutral, release the parkingbrake and slowly release thebrakes until the trailer chocksabsorb the load.

6. Reapply the brakes, reapply theparking brake and shift the vehicleto P (Park) for automatic transaxle.

7. Shut off the vehicle and releasethe vehicle brakes but leave theparking brake set.

WARNING - Parking on a hill

Parking your vehicle on a hillwith a trailer attached couldcause serious injury or death,should the trailer break loose orthe brake stops working.

CAUTION• When towing a trailer on steep

grades (in excess of 6%) payclose attention to the enginecoolant temperature gauge toensure the engine does notoverheat.If the needle of the coolanttemperature gauge movesacross the dial towards “H”(HOT), pull over and stop assoon as it is safe to do so, andallow the engine to idle until itcools down. You may proceedonce the engine has cooledsufficiently.

• Use caution when driving onan uphill grade to reduce thepossibility of engine andtransaxle overheating.

5 75


When you are ready to leave afterparking on a hill

1. With the automatic transaxle in P(Park), apply your brakes and holdthe brake pedal down while you:• Start your engine;• Shift into gear; and• Release the parking brake.

2. Slowly remove your foot from thebrake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clearof the chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick upand store the chocks.

Maintenance when trailer towingYour vehicle will need service moreoften when you regularly pull a trail-er. Important items to pay particularattention to include engine oil, auto-matic transaxle fluid, axle lubricantand cooling system fluid. Brake con-dition is another important item tofrequently check. Each item is cov-ered in this manual, and the Indexwill help you find them quickly. Ifyou’re trailering, it’s a good idea toreview these sections before youstart your trip.Don’t forget to also maintain yourtrailer and hitch. Follow the mainte-nance schedule that accompaniedyour trailer and check it periodically.Preferably, conduct the check at thestart of each day’s driving. Mostimportantly, all hitch nuts and boltsshould be tight.

WARNING - Parkingbrake

It can be dangerous to get outof your vehicle if the parkingbrake is not firmly set.If you have left the engine run-ning, the vehicle can move sud-denly. You or others could beseriously or fatally injured.

CAUTION• Due to higher load during

trailer usage, overheatingmight occur in hot days orduring uphill driving. If thecoolant gauge indicates over-heating, switch off the A/C andstop the vehicle in a safe areato cool down the engine.

• When towing check transaxlefluid more frequently.


765

If you do decide to pull a trailerHere are some important points ifyou decide to pull a trailer:• Consider using a sway control. You

can ask a hitch dealer about swaycontrol.

• Do not do any towing with your carduring its first 1,200 miles (2,000km) in order to allow the engine toproperly break in. Failure to heedthis caution may result in seriousengine or transaxle damage.

• When towing a trailer, be sure toconsult an authorized HYUNDAIdealer for further information onadditional requirements such as atowing kit, etc.

• Always drive your vehicle at a mod-erate speed (less than 60 mph(100 km/h)).

• On a long uphill grade, do notexceed 45 mph (70 km/h) or theposted towing speed limit,whichever is lower.

• The chart contains important con-siderations that have to do withweight:

Engine

Item

Gasoline Engine

3.3 GDI

Maximum trailerweight

Ibs. (kg)

Without brake System 1653 lbs (750 kg)

With brakeSystem

Without trailerpackage

2000 lbs (907 kg)

With trailerpackage

5000 lbs (2267 kg)

Maximum permissible static vertical load on the coupling device

Ibs. (kg)

500 lbs (226 kg)

5 77


Weight of the trailer

What is the maximum safe weight ofa trailer? It should never weigh morethan the maximum trailer weight withtrailer brakes. But even that can betoo heavy.It depends on how you plan to useyour trailer. For example, speed, alti-tude, road grades, outside tempera-ture and how often your vehicle isused to pull a trailer are all important.The ideal trailer weight can alsodepend on any special equipmentthat you have on your vehicle.

Weight of the trailer tongue

The tongue load of any trailer is animportant weight to measurebecause it affects the total grossvehicle weight (GVW) of your vehi-cle. This weight includes the curbweight of the vehicle, any cargo youmay carry in it, and the people whowill be riding in the vehicle. And if youwill tow a trailer, you must add thetongue load to the GVW becauseyour vehicle will also be carrying thatweight.

The trailer tongue should weigh amaximum of 10% of the total loadedtrailer weight, within the limits of themaximum permissible trailer tongueload. After you've loaded your trailer,weigh the trailer and then the tongue,separately, to see if the weights areproper. If they aren’t, you may be ableto correct them simply by movingsome items around in the trailer.

C190E01JM

Tongue Load Total Trailer Weight

C190E02JM

Gross Axle Weight Gross Vehicle Weight


785

WARNING - Trailer• Never load a trailer with more

weight in the rear than in thefront. The front should beloaded with approximately60% of the total trailer load;the rear should be loaded withapproximately 40% of the totaltrailer load.

• Never exceed the maximumweight limits of the trailer ortrailer towing equipment.Improper loading can result indamage to your vehicle and/orpersonal injury. Check weightsand loading at a commercialscale or highway patrol officeequipped with scales.

• An improperly loaded trailercan cause loss of vehicle con-trol.

5 79


Vehicle capacity weight:- 6 persons : 1111 lbs. (504 kg)- 7 persons : 1296 lbs. (588 kg)Vehicle capacity weight is the maxi-mum combined weight of occupantsand cargo. If your vehicle is equippedwith a trailer, the combined weightincludes the tongue load.

Seating capacity:Total : 6 or 7 persons

(Front seat : 2 persons, Rear seat : 4 or 5 persons)

Seating capacity is the maximumnumber of occupants including adriver, your vehicle may carry.However, the seating capacity maybe reduced based upon the weight ofall of the occupants, and the weightof the cargo being carried or towed.Do not overload the vehicle as thereis a limit to the total weight, or loadlimit including occupants and cargo,the vehicle can carry.

VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT

ONCNMC3200

ONCNMC3201

ONCNMC3202

ONCNMC3203

The label located on the driver's door sill gives the original tire size, coldtire pressures recommended for your vehicle, the number of people thatcan be in your vehicle and vehicle capacity weight.

Tire and loading information label


805

Towing capacity:Without trailer brakes:1653 lbs (750 kg)

With trailer brakes:2000 lbs (907 kg)

Towing capacity is the maximumtrailer weight including its cargoweight, your vehicle can tow.

Cargo capacity:The cargo capacity of your vehiclewill increase or decrease dependingon the weight and the number ofoccupants and the tongue load, ifyour vehicle is equipped with a trailer.

Steps For Determining CorrectLoad Limit1. Locate the statement "The com-

bined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed XXXkg or XXX lbs.'' on your vehicle'splacard.

2. Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that willbe riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers fromXXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo and lug-gage load capacity. For example, ifthe "XXX" amount equals 1400lbs. and there will be five 150 lbs.passengers in your vehicle, theamount of available cargo and lug-gage load capacity is 650 lb(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)

5. Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loadedon the vehicle. That weight maynot safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trail-er, load from your trailer will betransferred to your vehicle. Consultthis manual to determine how thisreduces the available cargo andluggage load capacity of yourvehicle.

5 81


C190F03JM

Item Description Total

AVehicle Capacity 1400 lbs

Weight (635 kg)Subtract Occupant

B Weight 860 lbs

172 lbs (78 kg) × 5(390 kg)

CAvailable Cargo and 540 lbs

Luggage weight (245 kg)

A B C

Example 3

C190F01JM




B Weight 300 lbs

150 lbs (68 kg) × 2(136 kg)



Example 1

A B C

C190F02JM




B Weight 750 lbs

150 lbs (68 kg) × 5(340 kg)



A B C

Example 2

Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label for specific information about your vehicle's capacity weightand seating positions. The combined weight of the driver, passengers and cargo should never exceed your vehicle'scapacity weight.


825

Certification label

The certification label is located onthe driver's door sill at the center pillar.This label shows the maximum allow-able weight of the fully loaded vehi-cle. This is called the GVWR (GrossVehicle Weight Rating). The GVWRincludes the weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, fuel and cargo.This label also tells you the maxi-mum weight that can be supportedby the front and rear axles, calledGross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).

To find out the actual loads on yourfront and rear axles, you need to go toa weigh station and weigh your vehi-cle.Your dealer can help you with this.Be sure to spread out your load equal-ly on both sides of the centerline.

The label will help you decide howmuch cargo and installed equipmentyour vehicle can carry.

If you carry items inside your vehicle- like suitcases, tools, packages, oranything else - they are moving asfast as the vehicle. If you have to stopor turn quickly, or if there is a crash,the items will keep going and cancause an injury if they strike the driv-er or a passenger.

OEN056020

WARNING - Over loading• Never exceed the GVWR for

your vehicle, the GAWR foreither the front or rear axleand vehicle capacity weight.Exceeding these ratings cancause an accident or vehicledamage.You can calculate theweight of your load by weigh-ing the items (or people)before putting them in thevehicle. Be careful not to over-load your vehicle.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Do not load your vehicle any

heavier than the GVWR, eitherthe maximum front or rearGAWR and vehicle capacityweight. If you do, parts, includ-ing tires on your vehicle canbreak, and it can change theway your vehicle handles andbraking ability. This couldcause you to lose control andcrash. Also, overloading canshorten the life of your vehicle.

5 83


WARNING• Overloading your vehicle can

cause heat buildup in yourvehicle's tires and possibletire failure that could lead to acrash.

• Overloading your vehicle cancause increased stopping dis-tances that could lead to acrash.

• A crash resulting from poorhandling vehicle damage, tirefailure, or increased stoppingdistances could result in seri-ous injury or death.

WARNING - Loose cargoItems you carry inside yourvehicle can strike and injureoccupants in a sudden stop orturn, or in a crash.• Put items in the cargo area of

your vehicle. Try to spread theweight evenly.

• Never stack items, like suit-cases, inside the vehicleabove the tops of the seats.

• Do not leave an unsecuredchild restraint in your vehicle.

• When you carry somethinginside the vehicle, secure it.

• Do not drive with a seat foldeddown unless necessary.

CAUTIONOverloading your vehicle maycause damage. Repairs wouldnot be covered by your warran-ty. Do not overload your vehicle.


845

This section will guide you in theproper loading of your vehicle and/ortrailer, to keep your loaded vehicleweight within its design rating capa-bility, with or without a trailer. Properlyloading your vehicle will provide max-imum return of the vehicle designperformance. Before loading yourvehicle, familiarize yourself with thefollowing terms for determining yourvehicle's weight ratings, with or with-out a trailer, from the vehicle's speci-fications and the compliance label:

Base curb weight This is the weight of the vehicleincluding a full tank of fuel and allstandard equipment. It does notinclude passengers, cargo, or option-al equipment.

Vehicle curb weightThis is the weight of your new vehiclewhen you picked it up from your deal-er plus any aftermarket equipment.

Cargo weightThis figure includes all weight addedto the Base Curb Weight, includingcargo and optional equipment.

GAW (Gross axle weight)This is the total weight placed oneach axle (front and rear) - includingvehicle curb weight and all payload.

GAWR (Gross axle weight rating)This is the maximum allowableweight that can be carried by a singleaxle (front or rear). These numbersare shown on the compliance label.The total load on each axle mustnever exceed its GAWR.

GVW (Gross vehicle weight)This is the Base Curb Weight plusactual Cargo Weight plus passen-gers.

GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating)This is the maximum allowableweight of the fully loaded vehicle(including all options, equipment,passengers and cargo). The GVWRis shown on the certification label.

VEHICLE WEIGHT

What to do in an emergency

Road warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2• Hazard warning flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

In case of an emergency while driving. . . . . . . . . . 6-3• If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing. . . . . . . 6-3

• If you have a flat tire while driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

• If engine stalls while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

If the engine does not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4• If engine doesn’t turn over or turns over slowly . . . . 6-4

• If engine turns over normally but does not start . . . . 6-4

Emergency starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5• Jump starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

• Push-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

If the engine overheats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Type A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9• Low tire pressure indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10

• TPMS malfunction indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11

• Changing a tire with TPMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Type B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14• Check tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14• Tire pressure monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15• TPMS malfunction indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17• Changing a tire with TPMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18

If you have a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20• Jack and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20

• Removing and storing the spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21

• Changing tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23

• Use of temporary compact spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27

• Jack label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29

Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30• Towing service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30

• Removable towing hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31

• Emergency towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32

6


26

ROAD WARNING Hazard warning flasher

The hazard warning flasher serves asa warning to other drivers to exerciseextreme caution when approaching,overtaking, or passing your vehicle.

It should be used whenever emer-gency repairs are being made orwhen the vehicle is stopped near theedge of a roadway.Depress the flasher switch with theignition switch in any position. Theflasher switch is located in the centerconsole switch panel. All turn signallights will flash simultaneously.

When you must make such an emer-gency stop, always pull off the roadas far as possible.• The hazard warning flasher oper-

ates whether your vehicle is run-ning or not.

• The turn signals do not work whenthe hazard flasher is on.

• Care must be taken when usingthe hazard warning flasher whilethe vehicle is being towed.

• To turn the hazard warning lightsoff, push the switch again.

ODM042242

ODM042243

■ Type A

■ Type B

6 3


IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY WHILE DRIVINGIf the engine stalls at a cross-road or crossingIf the engine stalls at a crossroad orcrossing, set the shift lever in the N(Neutral) position and then push thevehicle to a safe place.

If you have a flat tire whiledrivingIf a tire goes flat while you are driving:1. Take your foot off the accelerator

pedal and let the car slow downwhile driving straight ahead. Donot apply the brakes immediatelyor attempt to pull off the road asthis may cause a loss of control.When the car has slowed to sucha speed that it is safe to do so,brake carefully and pull off theroad. Drive off the road as far aspossible and park on firm, levelground. If you are on a dividedhighway, do not park in the medianarea between the two traffic lanes.

2. When the vehicle is stopped, turn onyour emergency hazard flashers,set the parking brake and put thetransaxle in P.

3. Have all passengers get out of thecar. Be sure they all get out on theside of the car that is away fromtraffic.

4. When repairing a flat tire, followthe instruction provided later inthis section.

If engine stalls while driving1. Reduce your speed gradually,

keeping a straight line. Move cau-tiously off the road to a safe place.

2. Turn on your emergency flashers.3. Try to start the engine again. If

your vehicle will not start, contactan authorized HYUNDAI dealer orseek other qualified assistance.

✽✽ NOTICEIf there was a check engine light andloss of power or stall, it is best if safeto do so to wait at least 10 seconds torestart a vehicle after it stalls. Thismay reset the car so it will no longerrun at low power (limp home) condi-tion.


46

IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT STARTIf engine doesn't turn over orturns over slowly1. If your vehicle has an automatic

transaxle, be sure the shift lever isin N (Neutral) or P (Park) and theemergency brake is set.

2. Check the battery connections tobe sure they are clean and tight.

3. Turn on the interior light. If the lightdims or goes out when you oper-ate the starter, the battery is dis-charged.

4. Do not push or pull the vehicle tostart it. See instructions for "Jumpstarting".

If engine turns over normallybut does not start1. Check fuel level.2. With the ignition switch in the LOCK

position, check all connectors atignition coils and spark plugs.Reconnect any that may be discon-nected or loose.

3. If the engine still does not start, callan authorized HYUNDAI dealer orseek other qualified assistance.

WARNINGIf the engine will not start, donot push or pull the vehicle tostart it. This could result in acollision or cause other dam-age. In addition, push or pullstarting may cause the catalyticconverter to be overloaded andcreate a fire hazard.

6 5


EMERGENCY STARTING

Connect cables in numerical orderand disconnect in reverse order.

Jump startingJump starting can be dangerous ifdone incorrectly. Therefore, to avoidharm to yourself or damage to yourvehicle or battery, follow the jumpstarting procedures. If in doubt, westrongly recommend that you have atechnician or towing service jumpstart your vehicle.

CAUTIONUse only a 12-volt jumper sys-tem. You can damage a 12-voltstarting motor, ignition system,and other electrical partsbeyond repair by use of a 24-voltpower supply (either two 12-voltbatteries in series or a 24-voltmotor generator set).

WARNING - Battery• Keep all flames or sparks

away from the battery. Thebattery produces hydrogengas which may explode ifexposed to flame or sparks.If these instructions are not fol-lowed exactly, serious personalinjury and damage to the vehi-cle may occur! If you are notsure how to follow this proce-dure, seek qualified assis-tance. Automobile batteriescontain sulfuric acid. This ispoisonous and highly corro-sive. When jump starting, wearprotective glasses and be care-ful not to get acid on yourself,your clothing or on the car.

• Do not attempt to jump startthe vehicle if the dischargedbattery is frozen or if the elec-trolyte level is low; the batterymay rupture or explode.

1VQA4001

Jumper Cables

Boosterbattery


66

Jump starting procedure✽✽ NOTICEIf the battery is discharged, theengine can be started using a batteryof another vehicle and two jumpercables. Only use jumper cables withfully insulated clamp handles.To prevent personal injury or dam-age to both vehicles, adhere strictlyto the following procedure.

1.Make sure the booster battery is12-volt and that its negative termi-nal is grounded.

2.If the booster battery is in anothervehicle, do not allow the vehicles totouch.

3.Turn off all unnecessary electricalloads.

4.Connect the jumper cables in theexact sequence shown in the illus-tration. First connect one end of ajumper cable to the positive termi-nal of the discharged battery (1),then connect the other end to thepositive terminal on the boosterbattery (2). Proceed to connectone end of the other jumper cableto the negative terminal of thebooster battery (3), then the otherend to a solid, stationary, metallicpoint (for example, the engine lift-ing bracket) away from the battery(4). Do not connect it to or near anypart that moves when the engine iscranked.Make sure that there is no contactbetween the bodywork of the twovehicles; otherwise, there is thedanger of short circuits.Do not allow the jumper cables tocontact anything except the correctbattery terminals or the correctground. Do not lean over the bat-tery when making connections.

5.Start the engine of the vehicle withthe booster battery and let it run at2,000 rpm, then start the engine ofthe vehicle with the dischargedbattery. If the first starting attemptis not successful, wait a few min-utes before making anotherattempt in order to allow the dis-charged battery to recharge.

To charge the discharged batteryenough, it is recommended to let theengine at idle or to drive the vehiclefor a certain period of time.If the cause of your battery discharg-ing is not apparent, you should haveyour vehicle checked by an author-ized HYUNDAI dealer.

CAUTION - Battery cablesDo not connect the jumper cablefrom the negative terminal of thebooster battery to the negativeterminal of the discharged bat-tery. This can cause the dis-charged battery to overheat andcrack, releasing battery acid.

6 7


Push-startingVehicles equipped with automatictransaxle cannot be push-started.Follow the directions in this sectionfor jump-starting.

WARNINGNever tow a vehicle to start itbecause the sudden surge for-ward when the engine startscould cause a collision with thetow vehicle.


86

IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATSIf your temperature gauge indicatesoverheating, you experience a lossof power, or hear loud pinging orknocking, the engine is probably toohot. If this happens, you should:

1. Pull off the road and stop as soonas it is safe to do so.

2. Place the shift lever in P and setthe parking brake. If the air condi-tioning is on, turn it off.

3. If engine coolant is running outunder the car or steam is comingout from the hood, stop theengine. Do not open the hood untilthe coolant has stopped runningor the steaming has stopped. Ifthere is no visible loss of enginecoolant and no steam, leave theengine running and check to besure the engine cooling fan isoperating. If the fan is not running,turn the engine off.

4. Check to see if the water pumpdrive belt is missing. If it is notmissing, check to see that it istight. If the drive belt seems to besatisfactory, check for coolantleaking from the radiator, hoses orunder the car. (If the air condition-ing had been in use, it is normalfor cold water to be draining from itwhen you stop.)

5. If the water pump drive belt is bro-ken or engine coolant is leakingout, stop the engine immediatelyand call the nearest authorizedHYUNDAI dealer for assistance.

6. If you cannot find the cause of theoverheating, wait until the enginetemperature has returned to nor-mal.Then, if coolant has been lost,carefully add coolant to the reser-voir to bring the fluid level in thereservoir up to the halfway mark.

7. Proceed with caution, keepingalert for further signs of overheat-ing. If overheating happens again,call an authorized HYUNDAI deal-er for assistance.

WARNINGWhile the engine is running,keep hair, hands and clothingaway from moving parts suchas the fan and drive belts to pre-vent injury.

CAUTIONSerious loss of coolant indi-cates there is a leak in the cool-ing system and this should bechecked as soon as possible byan authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNINGDo not remove the radiator capwhen the engine is hot. Thismay result in coolant beingblown out of the opening andcause serious burns.

6 9


TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) - TYPE A

(1) Low Tire Pressure Telltale / TPMS malfunction indicator

(2) Low tire pressure indicator(Shown on the LCD display)

Each tire, including the spare (if pro-vided), should be checked monthlywhen cold and inflated to the inflationpressure recommended by the vehiclemanufacturer on the vehicle placard ortire inflation pressure label. (If yourvehicle has tires of a different size thanthe size indicated on the vehicle plac-ard or tire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tire infla-tion pressure for those tires.)As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS)that illuminates a low tire pressuretelltale when one or more of your tiresis significantly under-inflated.Accordingly, when the low tire pres-sure telltale illuminates, you shouldstop and check your tires as soon aspossible, and inflate them to the prop-er pressure. Driving on a significantlyunder-inflated tire causes the tire tooverheat and can lead to tire failure.Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi-ciency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling and stop-ping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tire maintenance,and it is the driver’s responsibility tomaintain correct tire pressure, even ifunder-inflation has not reached thelevel to trigger illumination of theTPMS low tire pressure telltale.Your vehicle has also been equippedwith a TPMS malfunction indicator toindicate when the system is notoperating properly. The TPMS mal-function indicator is combined withthe low tire pressure telltale. Whenthe system detects a malfunction,the telltale will flash for approximate-ly one minute and then remain con-tinuously illuminated. This sequencewill continue upon subsequent vehi-cle start-ups as long as the malfunc-tion exists. When the malfunctionindicator is illuminated, the systemmay not be able to detect or signallow tire pressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a varietyof reasons, including the installationof replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly.

ODM062002■ Type A ■ Type B

OANNDR2003/OANNDR2004


106

Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement or alter-nate tires and wheels allow the TPMSto continue to function properly.

✽✽ NOTICEIf the TPMS indicator does not illu-minate for 3 seconds when the igni-tion switch is turned to the ON posi-tion or engine is running, or if itcomes on after blinking for approxi-mately one minute, take your car toyour nearest authorized HYUNDAIdealer and have the system checked.

Low tire pressure indicator

When the tire pressure monitoringsystem warning indicator is illuminat-ed, one or more of your tires is sig-nificantly under-inflated.If the indicator illuminates, immedi-ately reduce your speed, avoid hardcornering and anticipate increasedstopping distances.You should checkyour tires as soon as possible.

Inflate the tires to the proper pres-sure as indicated on the vehicle’splacard or tire inflation pressure labellocated on the driver’s side center pil-lar outer panel. If you cannot reach aservice station or if the tire cannothold the newly added air, replace thelow pressure tire with the spare tire.The Low Tire Pressure Telltale willremain on and the TPMS MalfunctionIndicator may blink for one minuteand then remain illuminated (whenthe vehicle is driven approximately20 minutes at speed above 15.5 mph(25 km/h)) until you have the lowpressure tire repaired and replacedon the vehicle.

CAUTIONIn winter or cold weather, thelow tire pressure indicator maybe illuminated if the tire pres-sure was adjusted to the recom-mended tire inflation pressurein warm weather.

(Continued)

OANNDR2003/OANNDR2004


6 11


TPMS (Tire PressureMonitoring System)malfunction indicator

The TPMS malfunction indicator willilluminate after it blinks for approxi-mately one minute when there is aproblem with the Tire PressureMonitoring System. If the system isable to correctly detect an underinflation warning at the same time assystem failure then it will illuminatethe TPMS malfunction indicator.Have the system checked by anauthorized HYUNDAI dealer as soonas possible to determine the causeof the problem.WARNING - Low pressure

damageSignificantly low tire pressuremakes the vehicle unstable andcan contribute to loss of vehiclecontrol and increased brakingdistances.Continued driving on low pres-sure tires can cause the tires tooverheat and fail.

CAUTION• The TPMS malfunction indica-

tor may be illuminated if thevehicle is moving around elec-tric power supply cables orradios transmitter such as atpolice stations, governmentpublic offices, broadcastingstations, military installations,airports, or transmitting tow-ers, etc.This can interfere withnormal operation of the TirePressure Monitoring System(TPMS).

• The TPMS malfunction indica-tor may illuminate if snowchains or some separatelypurchased devices such asnotebook computers, mobilecharger, remote starter, navi-gation etc. are used in thevehicle.This can interfere withnormal operation of the TirePressure Monitoring System(TPMS).

(Continued)It does not mean your TPMS ismalfunctioning because thedecreased temperature leads toa lowering of tire pressure.When you drive your vehiclefrom a warm area to a cold areaor from a cold area to a warmarea, or the outside temperatureis higher or lower, you shouldcheck the tire inflation pressureand adjust the tires to the rec-ommended cold tire inflationpressure.


126

Changing a tire with TPMSIf you have a flat tire, the Low TirePressure indicator will come on.Have the flat tire repaired by anauthorized HYUNDAI dealer as soonas possible or replace the flat tirewith the spare tire.

The spare tire (if equipped) does notcome with a tire pressure monitoringsensor. When the low pressure tire orthe flat tire is replaced with the sparetire, the Low Tire Pressure Telltalewill remain on. Also, the TPMSMalfunction Indicator will illuminateafter blinking for one minute if thevehicle is driven at speed above 15.5mph (25 km/h) for approximately 20minutes.Once the original tire equipped witha tire pressure monitoring sensor isreinflated to the recommended pres-sure and reinstalled on the vehicle,the Low Tire Pressure Telltale andTPMS Malfunction Indicator will gooff within a few minutes.If the indicators do not extinguishafter a few minutes, please visit anauthorized HYUNDAI dealer.Each wheel is equipped with a tirepressure sensor mounted inside thetire behind the valve stem (except forthe spare tire). You must use TPMSspecific wheels. It is recommendedthat you always have your tires serv-iced by an authorized HYUNDAIdealer as soon as possible.

You may not be able to identify a tirewith low pressure by simply lookingat it. Always use a good quality tirepressure gauge to measure. Pleasenote that a tire that is hot (from beingdriven) will have a higher pressuremeasurement than a tire that is cold.A cold tire means the vehicle hasbeen sitting for 3 hours and driven forless than 1 mile (1.6 km) in that 3hour period.

CAUTIONNever use a puncture-repairingagent not approved byHYUNDAI to repair and/or inflatea low pressure tire. Tire sealantnot approved by HYUNDAI maydamage the tire pressure sen-sor.

6 13


Allow the tire to cool before measur-ing the inflation pressure. Always besure the tire is cold before inflating tothe recommended pressure.




WARNING - ProtectingTPMS

Tampering with, modifying, ordisabling the Tire PressureMonitoring System (TPMS) com-ponents may interfere with thesystem's ability to warn the driv-er of low tire pressure condi-tions and/or TPMS malfunctions.Tampering with, modifying, ordisabling the Tire PressureMonitoring System (TPMS) com-ponents may void the warrantyfor that portion of the vehicle.

WARNING - TPMS• The TPMS cannot alert you to

severe and sudden tire dam-age caused by external factorssuch as nails or road debris.

• If you feel any vehicle instabil-ity, immediately take your footoff the accelerator, apply thebrakes gradually with lightforce, and slowly move to asafe position off the road.

CAUTIONChanges or modifications notexpressly approved by the partyresponsible for compliancecould void the user’s authorityto operate the equipment.


146

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) - TYPE B

(1) Low Tire Pressure Telltale/TPMS Malfunction Indicator

(2) Low tire pressure position telltaleand tire pressure telltale (Shown on the LCD display)

Check tire pressure

• You can check the tire pressure inthe information mode on the clus-ter.- Refer to “User settings mode” in

chapter 4.• Tire pressure is displayed 1~2 min-

utes later after driving.• If tire pressure is not displayed

when the vehicle is stopped, “Driveto display” message displays. Afterdriving, check the tire pressure.

• You can change the tire pressureunit in the user settings mode onthe cluster.- psi, kpa, bar (Refer to “User set-

tings mode” in chapter 4).

ODM062002

ODM064023L/ODM064020L


ODM064024L/ODM064021L


6 15


Tire pressure monitoring sys-tem

Each tire, including the spare (if pro-vided), should be checked monthlywhen cold and inflated to the inflationpressure recommended by the vehi-cle manufacturer on the vehicle plac-ard or tire inflation pressure label. (Ifyour vehicle has tires of a differentsize than the size indicated on thevehicle placard or tire inflation pres-sure label, you should determine theproper tire inflation pressure forthose tires.)

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS)that illuminates a low tire pressuretelltale when one or more of yourtires is significantly under-inflated.Accordingly, when the low tire pres-sure telltale illuminates, you shouldstop and check your tires as soon aspossible, and inflate them to theproper pressure. Driving on a signifi-cantly under-inflated tire causes thetire to overheat and can lead to tirefailure. Under-inflation also reducesfuel efficiency and tire tread life, andmay affect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tire mainte-nance, and it is the driver’s responsi-bility to maintain correct tire pres-sure, even if under-inflation has notreached the level to trigger illumina-tion of the TPMS low tire pressuretelltale.

Your vehicle has also been equippedwith a TPMS malfunction indicator toindicate when the system is notoperating properly. The TPMS mal-function indicator is combined withthe low tire pressure telltale. Whenthe system detects a malfunction,the telltale will flash for approximate-ly one minute and then remain con-tinuously illuminated. This sequencewill continue upon subsequent vehi-cle start-ups as long as the malfunc-tion exists. When the malfunctionindicator is illuminated, the systemmay not be able to detect or signallow tire pressure as intended.TPMS malfunctions may occur for avariety of reasons, including theinstallation of replacement or alter-nate tires or wheels on the vehiclethat prevent the TPMS from function-ing properly. Always check the TPMSmalfunction telltale after replacingone or more tires or wheels on yourvehicle to ensure that the replace-ment or alternate tires and wheelsallow the TPMS to continue to func-tion properly.

WARNINGOver-inflation or under-inflationcan reduce tire life, adverselyaffect vehicle handling, andlead to sudden tire failure thatmay cause loss of vehicle con-trol resulting in an accident.


166

✽✽ NOTICEIf any of the below happens, we rec-ommend that the system be checkedby an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.1.The low tire pressure telltale/

TPMS malfunction indicator doesnot illuminate for 3 seconds whenEngine Start/Stop button is turnedto the ON or engine is running.

2.The TPMS malfunction indicatorremains illuminated after blinkingfor approximately 1 minute.

3.The Low tire pressure positiontelltale remains illuminated.

Low tire pressuretelltale

Low tire pressure position tell-tale and tire pressure telltale

When the tire pressure monitoringsystem warning indicators are illumi-nated and warning massage dis-played on the cluster LCD display,one or more of your tires is signifi-cantly under-inflated. The low tirepressure position telltale light willindicate which tire is significantlyunder-inflated by illuminating the cor-responding position light.

If either telltale illuminates, immedi-ately reduce your speed, avoid hardcornering and anticipate increasedstopping distances. You should stopand check your tires as soon as pos-sible. Inflate the tires to the properpressure as indicated on the vehi-cle’s placard or tire inflation pressurelabel located on the driver’s side cen-ter pillar outer panel. If you cannotreach a service station or if the tirecannot hold the newly added air,replace the low pressure tire with aspare tire.If you drive the vehicle for about 10minutes at speeds above 15.5 mph(25 km/h) after replacing the lowpressure tire with the spare tire, thebelow will happen:• The TPMS malfunction indicator

may blink for approximately 1minute and then remain continu-ously illuminated because theTPMS sensor is not mounted onthe spare wheel.

ODM064023L/ODM064020L


6 17


✽✽ NOTICEThe spare tire is not equipped with atire pressure sensor.

TPMS (Tire PressureMonitoring System)malfunction indicator

The TPMS malfunction indicator willilluminate after it blinks for approxi-mately one minute when there is aproblem with the Tire PressureMonitoring System.We recommend that the system bechecked by an authorized HYUNDAIdealer.

✽✽ NOTICEIf there is a malfunction with theTPMS, the low tire pressure positiontelltale will not be displayed eventhough the vehicle has an under-inflated tire.

CAUTIONIn winter or cold weather, thelow tire pressure telltale mayilluminate if the tire pressurewas adjusted to the recom-mended tire inflation pressurein warm weather. It does notmean your TPMS is malfunction-ing because the decreased tem-perature leads to a lowering oftire pressure.When you drive your vehiclefrom a warm area to a cold areaor from a cold area to a warmarea, or the outside temperatureis higher or lower, you shouldcheck the tire inflation pressureand adjust the tires to the rec-ommended tire inflation pres-sure.

WARNING - Low pressuredamage

Significantly low tire pressuremakes the vehicle unstable andcan contribute to loss of vehiclecontrol and increased brakingdistances.Continued driving on low pres-sure tires can cause the tires tooverheat and fail.


186

Changing a tire with TPMSIf you have a flat tire, the low TirePressure and Position telltales willcome on. We recommend that thesystem be checked by an authorizedHYUNDAI dealer.

Each wheel is equipped with a tirepressure sensor mounted inside thetire behind the valve stem. You mustuse TPMS specific wheels. It is rec-ommended that you have your tiresserviced by an authorized HYUNDAIdealer.

If you drive the vehicle for about 10minutes at speeds above 15.5 mph(25 km/h) after replacing the lowpressure tire with the spare tire, thebelow will happen:• The TPMS malfunction indicator

may blink for approximately 1minute and then remain continu-ously illuminated because theTPMS sensor is not mounted onthe spare wheel.

You may not be able identify a lowtire by simply looking at it. Alwaysuse a good quality tire pressuregauge to measure the tire's inflationpressure. Please note that a tire thatis hot (from being driven) will have ahigher pressure measurement than atire that is cold (from sitting station-ary for at least 3 hours and drivenless than 1 mile (1.6 km) during that3 hour period).Allow the tire to cool before measur-ing the inflation pressure. Always besure the tire is cold before inflating tothe recommended pressure.

CAUTION• The TPMS malfunction indica-

tor may blink for approximate-ly 1 minute and then remaincontinuously illuminated if thevehicle is moving around elec-tric power supply cables orradios transmitter such as atpolice stations, governmentand public offices, broadcast-ing stations, military installa-tions, airports, or transmittingtowers, etc. This can interferewith normal operation of theTire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS).

• The TPMS malfunction indica-tor may blink for approximate-ly 1 minute and then remaincontinuously illuminated ifsnow chains are used or someseparate electronic devicessuch as notebook computer,mobile charger, remote starteror navigation etc., are used inthe vehicle.This can interfere with normaloperation of the Tire PressureMonitoring System (TPMS).

CAUTIONNEVER use a puncture-repair-ing agent to repair and/or inflatea low pressure tire. The tiresealant can damage the tirepressure sensor. If used, youwill have to replace the tire pres-sure sensor.

6 19


A cold tire means the vehicle hasbeen sitting for 3 hours and driven forless than 1 mile (1.6 km) in that 3hour period.




WARNING - TPMS• The TPMS cannot alert you to

severe and sudden tire dam-age caused by external fac-tors such as nails or roaddebris.

• If you feel any vehicle instabil-ity, immediately take your footoff the accelerator, apply thebrakes gradually and withlight force, and slowly move toa safe position off the road.

WARNING - ProtectingTPMS

Tampering with, modifying, ordisabling the Tire PressureMonitoring System (TPMS)components may interfere withthe system's ability to warn thedriver of low tire pressure con-ditions and/or TPMS malfunc-tions. Tampering with, modify-ing, or disabling the TirePressure Monitoring System(TPMS) components may voidthe warranty for that portion ofthe vehicle.

CAUTIONChanges or modifications notexpressly approved by the partyresponsible for compliancecould void the user’s authorityto operate the equipment.


206

IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIREJack and tools

The jack, jack handle, and wheel lugnut wrench are stored in the luggagecompartment. Pull up the luggagebox cover to find these equipment.(1) Jack handle(2) Jack(3) Wheel lug nut wrench

Jacking instructions The jack is provided for emergencytire changing only.To prevent the jack from “rattling”while the vehicle is in motion, store itproperly.Follow jacking instructions to reducethe possibility of personal injury.

WARNING - Changingtires

• Never attempt vehicle repairsin the traffic lanes of a publicroad or highway.

• Always move the vehicle com-pletely off the road and ontothe shoulder before trying tochange a tire. The jack shouldbe used on level firm ground.If you cannot find a firm, levelplace off the road, call a tow-ing service company forassistance.

• Be sure to use the correctfront and rear jacking posi-tions on the vehicle; never usethe bumpers or any other partof the vehicle for jack support.

• The vehicle can roll off thejack causing serious injury ordeath. No person shouldplace any portion of theirbody under a vehicle that issupported only by a jack; usevehicle support stands.

(Continued)

ONCNEM2003

6 21


Removing and storing thespare tire

Your spare tire is stored underneathyour vehicle, directly below the cargoarea.To remove the spare tire:1.Open the tailgate.2.Remove cover with coin or flat-

head screwdriver.

3.Connect the wheel lug nut wrench.4.Loosen the bolt enough to lower

the spare tire.Turn the wrench counterclockwiseuntil the spare tire reaches theground.

(Continued)• Do not start or run the engine

while the vehicle is on thejack.

• Do not allow anyone to remainin the vehicle while it is on thejack.

• Make sure any children pres-ent are in a secure place awayfrom the road and from thevehicle to be raised with thejack.

ONCNEM2001

ONCNEM2002


226

5. After the spare tire reaches theground, continue to turn thewrench counterclockwise, anddraw the spare tire outside. Neverrotate the wrench excessively, oth-erwise the spare tire carrier maybe damaged.

6. Remove the retainer (1) from thecenter of the spare tire

To store the spare tire:1. Lay the tire on the ground with the

valve stem facing up.2. Place the wheel under the vehicle

and install the retainer (1) throughthe wheel center.

3. Turn the wrench clockwise until itclicks.

ODM062006 ODM062007

WARNING - Storing thespare tire

Ensure the spare tire retainer isproperly aligned with the centerof the spare tire to prevent thespare tire from “rattling”.Otherwise, it may cause thespare tire to fall off the carrierand lead to an accident.

6 23


Changing tires

1. Park on a level surface and applythe parking brake firmly.

2. Shift the shift lever into P (Park).3. Activate the hazard warning flash-

er.

4. Remove the wheel lug nut wrench,jack, jack handle, and spare tirefrom the vehicle.

5. Block both the front and rear of thewheel that is diagonally oppositethe jack position.

WARNING - Changing atire

• To prevent vehicle movementwhile changing a tire, alwaysset the parking brake fully,and always block the wheeldiagonally opposite the wheelbeing changed.

• We recommend that thewheels of the vehicle beblocked, and that no personremain in a vehicle that isbeing jacked.

1VQA4022

1VQA4023


246

6. Loosen the wheel lug nuts coun-terclockwise one turn each, but donot remove any nut until the tirehas been raised off the ground.

7. Place the jack at the front or rearjacking position closest to the tireyou are changing. Place the jackat the designated locations underthe frame.

8. Insert the jack handle into the jackand turn it clockwise, raising thevehicle until the tire just clears theground. This measurement isapproximately 1.2 in (30 mm).Before removing the wheel lugnuts, make sure the vehicle is sta-ble and that there is no chance formovement or slippage.

WARNING - Jack locationTo reduce the possibility ofinjury, be sure to use only thejack provided with the vehicleand in the correct jack position;never use any other part of thevehicle for jack support.

ODM062008 ONCNEM2004 ODM062010

6 25


9. Loosen the wheel nuts andremove them with your fingers.Slide the wheel off the studs andlay it flat so it cannot roll away. Toput the wheel on the hub, pick upthe spare tire, line up the holeswith the studs and slide the wheelonto them. If this is difficult, tip thewheel slightly and get the top holein the wheel lined up with the topstud. Then jiggle the wheel backand forth until the wheel can beslid over the other studs.

10. To reinstall the wheel, hold it onthe studs, put the wheel nuts onthe studs and tighten them fingertight.The nuts should be installedwith their tapered small diameterends directed inward. Jiggle thetire to be sure it is completelyseated, then tighten the nuts asmuch as possible with your fin-gers again.

11. Lower the car to the ground byturning the wheel nut wrenchcounterclockwise.

WARNINGWheels may have sharp edges.Handle them carefully to avoidpossible severe injury. Beforeputting the wheel into place, besure that there is nothing on thehub or wheel (such as mud, tar,gravel, etc.) that prevents thewheel from fitting solidlyagainst the hub.If there is, remove it. If there isinsufficient contact on themounting surface between thewheel and hub, the wheel nutscould come loose and causethe loss of a wheel. Loss of awheel may result in loss of con-trol of the vehicle. This maycause serious injury or death.


266

Then position the wrench as shownin the drawing and tighten the wheelnuts. Be sure the socket is seatedcompletely over the nut. Do not standon the wrench handle or use anextension pipe over the wrench han-dle. Go around the wheel tighteningevery other nut until they are all tight.Then double-check each nut fortightness. After changing wheels,have an authorized HYUNDAI dealertighten the wheel nuts to their propertorque as soon as possible.

Wheel nut tightening torque:Steel wheel & aluminum alloy wheel:65~79 lb·ft (9~11 kg·m)

If you have a tire gauge, remove thevalve cap and check the air pressure.If the pressure is lower than recom-mended, drive slowly to the nearestservice station and inflate to the cor-rect pressure. If it is too high, adjust ituntil it is correct. Always reinstall thevalve cap after checking or adjustingtire pressure. If the cap is notreplaced, air may leak from the tire. Ifyou lose a valve cap, buy another andinstall it as soon as possible.After you have changed wheels,always secure the flat tire in its placeand return the jack and tools to theirproper storage locations.

CAUTIONYour vehicle has metric threadson the wheel studs and nuts.Make certain during wheelremoval that the same nuts thatwere removed are reinstalled -or, if replaced, that nuts withmetric threads and the samechamfer configuration are used.Installation of a non-metricthread nut on a metric stud orvice-versa will not secure thewheel to the hub properly andwill damage the stud so that itmust be replaced.Note that most lug nuts do nothave metric threads. Be sure touse extreme care in checkingfor thread style before installingaftermarket lug nuts or wheels.If in doubt, consult an author-ized HYUNDAI dealer.

ODM062011

6 27


To prevent the jack, jack handle,wheel lug nut wrench and spare tirefrom rattling while the vehicle is inmotion, store them properly.

Important - use of temporarycompact spare tireIf your vehicle is equipped with a com-pact spare tire, it will take up lessspace than a regular-size tire.This tireis smaller than a conventional tire andis designed for temporary use only.

The compact spare should be inflat-ed to 60 psi (420 kPa).

✽✽ NOTICECheck the inflation pressure afterinstalling the spare tire. Adjust it tothe specified pressure, as necessary.

CAUTION• You should drive carefully

when the temporary compactspare is in use. The compactspare should be replaced bythe proper conventional tireand rim at the first opportunity.

• Do not drive a vehicle withmore than one compact sparetire in use at the same time.

WARNINGThe temporary compact sparetire is for emergency use only.Do not operate your vehicle onthis compact spare at speedsover 50 mph (80 km/h).The orig-inal tire should be repaired orreplaced as soon as is possibleto avoid failure of the sparepossibly leading to personalinjury or death.

WARNING - Wheel studsIf the studs are damaged, theymay lose their ability to retainthe wheel.This could lead to theloss of the wheel and a collisionresulting in serious injuries.

WARNING - Inadequatespare tirepressure

Check the inflation pressuresas soon as possible afterinstalling the spare tire. Adjustit to the specified pressure, ifnecessary. Refer to “Tires andwheels” section 8.


286

When using a temporary compactspare tire, observe the following pre-cautions:• Under no circumstances should you

exceed 50 mph (80 km/h); higherspeeds could damage the tire.

• Ensure that you drive slowly enoughfor the road conditions to avoid allhazards. Any road hazard, such as apothole or debris, could seriouslydamage the compact spare.

• Any continuous road use of this tirecould result in tire failure, loss ofvehicle control, and possible per-sonal injury.

• Do not exceed the vehicle’s maxi-mum load rating or the load-carry-ing capacity shown on the sidewallof the compact spare tire.

• Avoid driving over obstacles. Thecompact spare tire diameter issmaller than the diameter of a con-ventional tire and reduces theground clearance approximately 1inch (25 mm), which could result indamage to the vehicle.

• Do not take the vehicle through anautomatic car wash while the com-pact spare tire is installed.

• Do not use tire chains on the com-pact spare tire. Because of the small-er size, a tire chain will not fit proper-ly. This could damage the vehicleand result in loss of the chain.

• Do not use the compact spare tireon any other vehicle because thistire has been designed especiallyfor your vehicle.

• The compact spare tire’s tread life isshorter than a regular tire. Inspectyour compact spare tire regularlyand replace worn compact sparetires with the same size and design,mounted on the same wheel.

• The compact spare tire should notbe used on any other wheels, norshould standard tires, snow tires,wheel covers or trim rings be usedwith the compact spare wheel. Ifsuch use is attempted, damage tothese items or other car compo-nents may occur.

• Do not use more than one compactspare tire at a time.

• Do not tow a trailer while the com-pact spare tire is installed.

6 29


Jack label1. Model Name2. Maximum allowable load3. When using the jack, set your

parking brake.4. When using the jack, stop the

engine.5. Do not get under a vehicle that is

supported by a jack.6. The designated locations under

the frame7. When supporting the vehicle, the

base plate of jack must be verticalunder the lifting point.

8. Shift into Reverse gear on vehicleswith manual transaxle or move theshift lever to the P position onvehicles with automatic transaxle.

9. The jack should be used on firmlevel ground.

10. Jack manufacture11. Production date12. Representative company and

address

❈ The actual Jack label in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.For more detailed specifications, refer to the label attached to the jack.

OHYK064001

OHYK064005

OHYK064002

• Type A■ Example

• Type B

• Type C


306

TOWINGTowing service

If emergency towing is necessary,we recommend having it done by anauthorized HYUNDAI dealer or acommercial tow-truck service.Proper lifting and towing proceduresare necessary to prevent damage tothe vehicle. The use of wheel dolliesor flatbed is recommended.For trailer towing guidelines informa-tion, refer to "Trailer towing" in chap-ter 5.

On AWD vehicles, your vehicle mustbe towed with a wheel lift and dolliesor flatbed equipment with all thewheels off the ground.

On 2WD vehicles, it is acceptable totow the vehicle with the rear wheelson the ground (without dollies) andthe front wheels off the ground.If any of the loaded wheels or sus-pension components are damagedor the vehicle is being towed with thefront wheels on the ground, use atowing dolly under the front wheels.When being towed by a commercialtow truck and wheel dollies are notused, the front of the vehicle shouldalways be lifted, not the rear.

OXM069028

dolly

A

B

C

CAUTION• Do not tow with sling-type

equipment. Use wheel lift orflatbed equipment.

• Do not tow the vehicle back-wards with the front wheels onthe ground as this may causedamage to the vehicle.

CAUTIONThe AWD vehicle should neverbe towed with the wheels on theground. This can cause seriousdamage to the transaxle or theAWD system.

OUN046030

OCM054034

6 31


When towing your vehicle in anemergency without wheel dollies :1. Set the ignition switch in the ACC

position.2. Place the shift lever in N (Neutral).3. Release the parking brake.

Removable towing hook (if equipped)

1. Open the tailgate, and remove thetowing hook from the tool case.

2. Remove the hole cover pressingthe lower part of the cover on thebumper.

3. Install the towing hook by turning itclockwise into the hole until it isfully secured.

4. Remove the towing hook andinstall the cover after use.

CAUTIONFailure to place the transaxleshift lever in N (Neutral) maycause internal damage to thetransaxle. ONCNEM2005

ONCNEM2006

■ Front

■ Rear


326

Emergency towing (if equipped)

If towing is necessary, we recom-mend you to have it done by anauthorized HYUNDAI dealer or acommercial tow truck service.

If towing service is not available in anemergency, your vehicle may betemporarily towed using a cable orchain secured to the emergency tow-ing hook attached to the front (orunder the rear) of the vehicle.Use extreme caution when towing thevehicle. A driver must be in the vehi-cle to steer it and operate the brakes.Towing in this manner may be doneonly on hard-surfaced roads for ashort distance and at low speeds.Also, the wheels, axles, power train,steering and brakes must all be ingood condition.• Do not use the tow hooks to pull a

vehicle out of mud, sand or otherconditions from which the vehiclecannot be driven out under its ownpower.

• Avoid towing a vehicle heavier thanthe vehicle doing the towing.

• The drivers of both vehicles shouldcommunicate with each other fre-quently.

• Before emergency towing, checkthat the hook is not broken or dam-aged.

• Fasten the towing cable or chainsecurely to the hook.

• Do not jerk the hook. Apply steadyand even force.

• To avoid damaging the hook, do notpull from the side or at a verticalangle. Always pull straight ahead.

CAUTION• Attach a towing strap to the

tow hook.• Using a portion of the vehicle

other than the tow hooks fortowing may damage the bodyof your vehicle.

• Use only a cable or chainspecifically intended for usein towing vehicles. Securelyfasten the cable or chain tothe towing hook provided.

ONCNEM2007

ONCNEM2008

■ Front

■ Rear

6 33


Emergency towing precautions• Turn the ignition switch to ACC so

the steering wheel isn’t locked.• Place the transaxle shift lever in N

(Neutral).• Release the parking bake.• Press the brake pedal with more

force than normal since you willhave reduced brake performance.

• More steering effort will berequired because the power steer-ing system will be disabled.

• If you are driving down a long hill,the brakes may overheat and brakeperformance will be reduced. Stopoften and let the brakes cool off.

CAUTION - Automatictransaxle

• If the car is being towed with allfour wheels on the ground, itcan be towed only from thefront. Be sure that the transaxleis in neutral. Be sure the steer-ing is unlocked by placing theignition switch in the ACC posi-tion. A driver must be in thetowed vehicle to operate thesteering and brakes.

• To avoid serious damage tothe automatic transaxle, limitthe vehicle speed to 10 mph(15 km/h) and drive less than 1mile (1.5 km) when towing.

• Before towing, check underyour vehicle for leaking auto-matic transaxle fluid. If theautomatic transaxle fluid isleaking, a flatbed equipmentor towing dolly must be used.

WARNING Use extreme caution when tow-ing the vehicle.• Avoid sudden starts or erratic

driving maneuvers whichwould place excessive stresson the emergency towing hookand towing cable or chain. Thehook and towing cable orchain may break and causeserious injury or damage.

• If the disabled vehicle cannotbe moved, do not forcibly con-tinue the towing. Contact anauthorized HYUNDAI dealer ora commercial tow truck serv-ice for assistance.

• Tow the vehicle as straightahead as possible.

• Keep away from the vehicleduring towing.

Maintenance

Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Maintenance services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

• Owner’s responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4• Owner maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

Owner maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6• Owner maintenance schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

Scheduled maintenance service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . 7-26Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30

• Checking the engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30• Changing the engine oil and filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31

Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32• Checking the coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32• Changing the coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35• Checking the brake fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35

Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37• Checking the washer fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37

Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37• Checking the parking brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37

Air cleaner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38• Filter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38

Climate control air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40• Filter inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40• Filter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40

Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42• Blade inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42• Blade replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45• For best battery service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45• Battery recharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46• Reset items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47

Tires and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48• Tire care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48• Recommended cold tire inflation pressures . . . . . . . 7-48• Checking tire inflation pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49• Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50• Wheel alignment and tire balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51• Tire replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52• Wheel replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53• Tire traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53• Tire maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-54• Tire sidewall labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-54

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-62• Fuse/relay panel description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-66

Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-74• Front light replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-75• Side repeater light bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-78• Rear combination light bulb replacement . . . . . . . . 7-79• High mounted stop light bulb replacement . . . . . . . 7-81

7

• License plate light bulb replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-82• Interior light bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-83

Appearance care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-84• Exterior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-84• Interior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-89

Emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-91California perchlorate notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-95

7

7 3

Maintenance

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

1. Engine coolant reservoir

2. Engine oil filler cap

3. Brake fluid reservoir

4. Air cleaner

5. Fuse box

6. Negative battery terminal

7. Positive battery terminal

8. Radiator cap

9. Engine oil dipstick

10. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

ONCEIN2007

■■ Gasoline Engine (LAMBDA 3.3) - GDI

❈ The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

Maintenance

47

MAINTENANCE SERVICESYou should exercise the utmost careto prevent damage to your vehicleand injury to yourself whenever per-forming any maintenance or inspec-tion procedures.Should you have any doubts con-cerning the inspection or servicing ofyour vehicle, we strongly recom-mend that you have an authorizedHYUNDAI dealer perform this work.An authorized HYUNDAI dealer hasfactory-trained technicians and gen-uine HYUNDAI parts to service yourvehicle properly. For expert advice ad quality service, see an authorizedHYUNDAI dealer.Inadequate, incomplete or insuffi-cient servicing may result in opera-tional problems with your vehicle thatcould lead to vehicle damage, anaccident, or personal injury.

Owner’s responsibility

✽✽ NOTICEMaintenance Service and RecordRetention are the owner's responsi-bility.

You should retain documents thatshow proper maintenance has beenperformed on your vehicle in accor-dance with the scheduled mainte-nance service charts shown on thefollowing pages. You need this infor-mation to establish your compliancewith the servicing and maintenancerequirements of your vehicle war-ranties.Detailed warranty information is pro-vided in your Owner’s Handbook &Warranty Information booklet.Repairs and adjustments required asa result of improper maintenance ora lack of required maintenance arenot covered.

We recommend you have your vehi-cle maintained and repaired by anauthorized HYUNDAI dealer. Anauthorized HYUNDAI dealer meetsHYUNDAI’s high service qualitystandards and receives technicalsupport from HYUNDAI in order toprovide you with a high level of serv-ice satisfaction.

7 5

Maintenance

Owner maintenance precau-tions Improper or incomplete service mayresult in problems. This section givesinstructions only for the maintenanceitems that are easy to perform.As explained earlier in this section,several procedures can be done onlyby an authorized HYUNDAI dealerwith special tools.

✽✽ NOTICEImproper owner maintenance dur-ing the warranty period may affectwarranty coverage. For details, readthe separate Owner’s Handbook &Warranty Information booklet pro-vided with the vehicle. If you'reunsure about any servicing or main-tenance procedure, have it done byan authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING -Maintenance work

• Performing maintenance workon a vehicle can be danger-ous. You can be seriouslyinjured while performing somemaintenance procedures. Ifyou lack sufficient knowledgeand experience or the propertools and equipment to do thework, have it done by anauthorized HYUNDAI dealer.

• Working under the hood withthe engine running is danger-ous. It becomes even moredangerous when you wearjewelry or loose clothing.These can become entangledin moving parts and result ininjury. Therefore, if you mustrun the engine while workingunder the hood, make certainthat you remove all jewelry(especially rings, bracelets,watches, and necklaces) andall neckties, scarves, and sim-ilar loose clothing before get-ting near the engine or coolingfans.

Maintenance

67

OWNER MAINTENANCEThe following lists are vehicle checksand inspections that should be per-formed by the owner or an author-ized HYUNDAI dealer at the frequen-cies indicated to help ensure safe,dependable operation of your vehi-cle.Any adverse conditions should bebrought to the attention of your deal-er as soon as possible.These Owner Maintenance Checksare generally not covered by war-ranties and you may be charged forlabor, parts and lubricants used.

Owner maintenance schedule When you stop for fuel:• Check the engine oil level.• Check coolant level in coolant

reservoir.• Check the windshield washer fluid

level.• Look for low or under-inflated tires.

While operating your vehicle:• Note any changes in the sound of

the exhaust or any smell ofexhaust fumes in the vehicle.

• Check for vibrations in the steeringwheel. Notice any increased steer-ing effort or looseness in the steer-ing wheel, or change in its straight-ahead position.

• Notice if your vehicle constantlyturns slightly or “pulls” to one sidewhen traveling on smooth, levelroad.

• When stopping, listen and checkfor unusual sounds, pulling to oneside, increased brake pedal travelor “hard-to-push” brake pedal.

• If any slipping or changes in theoperation of your transaxle occurs,check the transaxle fluid level.

• Check automatic transaxle P(Park) function.

• Check parking brake.

WARNING Be careful when checking yourengine coolant level when theengine is hot. Scalding hotcoolant and steam may blowout under pressure. This couldcause burns or other seriousinjury.

7 7

Maintenance

• Check for fluid leaks under yourvehicle (water dripping from the airconditioning system during or afteruse is normal).

At least monthly:• Check coolant level in the engine

coolant reservoir.• Check the operation of all exterior

lights, including the stoplights, turnsignals and hazard warning flash-ers.

• Check the inflation pressures of alltires including the spare.

At least twice a year (i.e., every Spring and Fall) :• Check radiator, heater and air con-

ditioning hoses for leaks or dam-age.

• Check windshield washer sprayand wiper operation. Clean wiperblades with clean cloth dampenedwith washer fluid.

• Check headlight alignment.• Check muffler, exhaust pipes,

shields and clamps.• Check the lap/shoulder belts for

wear and function.• Check for worn tires and loose

wheel lug nuts.

At least once a year :• Clean body and door drain holes.• Lubricate door hinges and checks,

and hood hinges.• Lubricate door and hood locks and

latches.• Lubricate door rubber weather-

strips.• Check the air conditioning system.• Inspect and lubricate automatic

transaxle linkage and controls.• Clean battery and terminals.• Check the brake fluid level.

Maintenance

87

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICE Follow Normal MaintenanceSchedule if the vehicle is usuallyoperated where none of the followingconditions apply. If any of the follow-ing conditions apply, followMaintenance Under Severe UsageConditions.• Repeated short distance driving.• Driving in dusty conditions or

sandy areas.• Extensive use of brakes.• Driving in areas where salt or other

corrosive materials are being used.• Driving on rough or muddy roads.• Driving in mountainous areas.• Extended periods of idling or low

speed operation.• Driving for a prolonged period in

cold temperatures and/or extreme-ly humid climates.

• More than 50% driving in heavycity traffic during hot weatherabove 90°F (32°C).

If your vehicle is operated under theabove conditions, you shouldinspect, replace or refill more fre-quently than the following NormalMaintenance Schedule. After 120months or 150,000 miles (240,000km) continue to follow the prescribedmaintenance intervals.

7 9

Maintenance

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULEThe following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance.Keep receipts for all vehicle emission services to protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, thefrequency of service is determined by whichever occurs first.

*1 : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, onebottle of additive is recommended. Additives are avail-able from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer along withinformation on how to use them. Do not mix otheradditives.

*2 : Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to bemaintenance free but periodic inspection is recom-mended for this maintenance schedule depends onfuel quality. If there are some important safety matterslike fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power, hardstarting problem etc, replace the fuel filter immediate-ly regardless of maintenance schedule and consult anauthorized HYUNDAI dealer for details.

*3 : Transfer case oil and rear axle oil should be changedanytime they have been submerged in water.

*4 : Inspect for excessive tappet noise and/or enginevibration and adjust if necessary.

*5 : The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occuror tension is reduced excessively.

Maintenance

107

7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 6 months

❑ Rotate tire❑ Inspect battery condition❑ Inspect air cleaner filter❑ Inspect vacuum hose❑ Replace engine oil and filter

(7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)❑ Add fuel additive *1

(7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)


❑ Rotate tire❑ Inspect battery condition❑ Inspect air cleaner filter❑ Inspect vacuum hose❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers❑ Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball

joint, upper arm ball joint❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts❑ Replace climate control air filter

(for evaporator and blower unit)❑ Replace engine oil and filter



❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean orreplace.

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)


7 11

Maintenance

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)22,500 miles (36,000 km) or 18 months






❑ Rotate tire❑ Inspect battery condition❑ Inspect vacuum hose❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers❑ Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball

joint, upper arm ball joint❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts❑ Inspect brake fluid ❑ Inspect fuel filter *2

❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *2

❑ Inspect parking brake❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap, fuel tank❑ Replace climate control air filter

(for evaporator and blower unit)

(Continued)

Maintenance

127

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)(Continued)

❑ Replace air cleaner filter❑ Replace engine oil and filter





❑ Rotate tire❑ Inspect battery condition❑ Inspect air cleaner filter❑ Inspect vacuum hose❑ Inspect rear axle oil (AWD) *3

❑ Inspect transfer case oil (AWD) *3

❑ Replace engine oil and filter (37,500 miles (60,000 km) or 60 months)

❑ Add fuel additive *1



7 13

Maintenance





joint, upper arm ball joint❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts❑ Replace climate control air filter

(for evaporator and blower unit)❑ Replace engine oil and filter








Maintenance

147



joint, upper arm ball joint❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts❑ Inspect brake fluid❑ Inspect fuel filter *2


❑ Inspect parking brake❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap, fuel tank❑ Inspect valve clearance *4


(Continued)

(Continued)

❑ Inspect drive belts(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 monthsafter that, every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months) *5

❑ Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)





7 15

Maintenance







joint, upper arm ball joint❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts❑ Inspect rear axle oil (AWD) *3


❑ Inspect drive belts(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months after that, every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)*5


(Continued)


Maintenance

167

(Continued)


❑ Replace coolant (First, 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 60 months after every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months)








7 17

Maintenance





❑ Inspect parking brake❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap, fuel tank❑ Inspect drive belts

(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months after that, every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months) *5

(Continued)

(Continued)






Maintenance

187



(97,500 miles (156,000 km) or 156 months)❑ Replace spark plugs

(Every 100,000 miles (160,000 km) or 10 years)❑ Add fuel additive *1





joint, upper arm ball joint❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts❑ Inspect drive belts




(Continued)

7 19

Maintenance

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)(Continued)❑ Replace coolant

(First, 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 60 months after every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months)




❑ Rotate tire❑ Inspect battery condition❑ Inspect air cleaner filter❑ Inspect vacuum hose❑ Inspect rear axle oil (AWD) *3







Maintenance

207





❑ Inspect parking brake❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap, fuel tank❑ Inspect valve clearance *4


(Continued)

(Continued)

❑ Inspect drive belts(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months after that, every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months) *5



(120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 192 months)❑ Replace coolant

(First, 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 60 months after that, every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months)




7 21

Maintenance







joint, upper arm ball joint❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts❑ Inspect drive belts




(Continued)


Maintenance

227

(Continued)

❑ Replace coolant (First, 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 60 months after that, every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months)






(142,500 miles (228,000 km) or 228 months)❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or

replace.


7 23

Maintenance


No check, No service required

❑ Automatic transaxle fluid





❑ Inspect parking brake❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap, fuel tank❑ Inspect rear axle oil (AWD) *3


(Continued)

(Continued)

❑ Inspect drive belts(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months after that, every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months) *5



(150,000 miles (240,000 km) or 240 months)❑ Replace coolant

(First, 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 60 months after every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months)




Maintenance

247

MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONSThe following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Referto the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary

MAINTENANCE ITEMMAINTENANCE

OPERATIONMAINTENANCE INTERVALS

DRIVING CONDI-TION

ENGINE OIL AND FILTER REVERY 3,750 MILES (6,000 KM)

OR 6 MONTHSA, B, C, D, E, F, G,

H, I, K

AIR CLEANER FILTER R MORE FREQUENTLY C, E

SPARK PLUGS R MORE FREQUENTLY B, H

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID R EVERY 60,000 MILES (96,000 KM) A, B, F, G, H, I, J, K

FRONT BRAKE DISC/PADS, CALIPERS I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, G, H

REAR BRAKE DISC /PADS I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, G, H

PARKING BRAKE I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, G, H

STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE &BOOTS/LOWER ARM BALL JOINT,UPPER ARM BALL JOINT

I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, E, F, G, H, I

7 25

Maintenance

SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONSA-Repeatedly driving short distance of less than 5 miles (8 km)

in normal temperature or less than 10 miles (16 km) in freez-ing temperature

B-Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long dis-tances

C-Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt-spread roads

D-Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or invery cold weather

E-Driving in sandy areas

F -Driving in heavy traffic area over 90°F (32°C)G-Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain roadH-Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rackI -Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicle

towingJ -Driving over 106 mph (170 km/h)K-Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions

MAINTENANCE ITEMMAINTENANCE

OPERATIONMAINTENANCE INTERVALS

DRIVING CONDI-TION

DRIVE SHAFTS AND BOOTS IEVERY 7,500 MILES (12,000 KM) OR

6 MONTHSC, D, E, F, G, H, I, J

TRANSFER CASE OIL (AWD) R EVERY 75,000 MILES (120,000 KM) C, D, E, G, H, I, J

REAR AXLE OIL (AWD) R EVERY 75,000 MILES (120,000 KM) C, D, E, G, H, I, J

CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER(FOR EVAPORATOR AND BLOWER

UNIT)R MORE FREQUENTLY C, E

PROPELLER SHAFT IEVERY 7,500 MILES (12,000 KM) OR

6 MONTHSC, E

Maintenance

267

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMSEngine oil and filterThe engine oil and filter should bechanged at the intervals specified inthe maintenance schedule. If the caris being driven in severe conditions,more frequent oil and filter changesare required.

Drive beltsInspect all drive belts for evidence ofcuts, cracks, excessive wear or oilsaturation and replace if necessary.Drive belts should be checked peri-odically for proper tension andadjusted as necessary.

Fuel filterA clogged filter can limit the speed atwhich the vehicle may be driven,damage the emission system andcause multiple issues such as hardstarting. If an excessive amount offoreign matter accumulates in thefuel tank, the filter may requirereplacement more frequently.After installing a new filter, run theengine for several minutes, andcheck for leaks at the connections.Fuel filters should be installed by anauthorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Fuel lines, fuel hoses and con-nectionsCheck the fuel lines, fuel hoses andconnections for leakage and dam-age. Have an authorized HYUNDAIdealer replace any damaged or leak-ing parts immediately.

Vapor hose and fuel filler capThe vapor hose and fuel filler capshould be inspected at those inter-vals specified in the maintenanceschedule. Make sure that a newvapor hose or fuel filler cap is cor-rectly replaced.

7 27

Maintenance

Vacuum crankcase ventilationhoses (if equipped)Inspect the surface of hoses for evi-dence of heat and/or mechanicaldamage. Hard and brittle rubber,cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, andexcessive swelling indicate deterio-ration. Particular attention should bepaid to examine those hose surfacesnearest to high heat sources, suchas the exhaust manifold.Inspect the hose routing to assurethat the hoses do not come in con-tact with any heat source, sharpedges or moving component whichmight cause heat damage ormechanical wear. Inspect all hoseconnections, such as clamps andcouplings, to make sure they aresecure, and that no leaks are pres-ent. Hoses should be replacedimmediately if there is any evidenceof deterioration or damage.

Air cleaner filterA Genuine HYUNDAI air cleaner fil-ter is recommended when the filter isreplaced.

Spark plugs Make sure to install new spark plugsof the correct heat range.

Valve clearance Inspect excessive valve noise and/orengine vibration and adjust if neces-sary. An authorized HYUNDAI dealershould perform the operation.

Cooling systemCheck the cooling system parts,such as radiator, coolant reservoir,hoses and connections for leakageand damage. Replace any damagedparts.

CoolantThe coolant should be changed atthe intervals specified in the mainte-nance schedule.

Maintenance

287

Automatic transaxle fluid (if equipped)Automatic transaxle fluid should notbe checked under normal usageconditions.But in severe conditions, the fluidshould be changed at an authorizedHYUNDAI dealer in accordance tothe scheduled maintenance at thebeginning of this chapter.

✽✽ NOTICEAutomatic transaxle fluid color isbasically red. As the vehicle is driven, the auto-matic transaxle fluid will begin tolook darker.It is normal condition and youshould not judge the need to replacethe fluid based upon the changedcolor.

Brake hoses and linesVisually check for proper installation,chafing, cracks, deterioration andany leakage. Replace any deteriorat-ed or damaged parts immediately.

Brake fluidCheck brake fluid level in the brakefluid reservoir. The level should bebetween “MIN” and “MAX” marks onthe side of the reservoir. Use onlyhydraulic brake fluid conforming toDOT 3 or DOT 4 specification.

CAUTIONThe use of a non-specified fluidcould result in transaxle mal-function and failure.Use only specified automatictransaxle fluid. (Refer to“Recommended lubricants andcapacities” in section 8.)

7 29

Maintenance

Parking brakeInspect the parking brake systemincluding the parking brake lever (orpedal) and cables.

Brake pads, calipers androtorsCheck the pads for excessive wear,discs for run out and wear, andcalipers for fluid leakage.

Suspension mounting boltsCheck the suspension connectionsfor looseness or damage. Retightento the specified torque.

Steering gear box, linkage &boots/lower arm ball jointWith the vehicle stopped and engineoff, check for excessive free-play inthe steering wheel.Check the linkage for bends or dam-age. Check the dust boots and balljoints for deterioration, cracks, or dam-age. Replace any damaged parts.

Drive shafts and bootsCheck the drive shafts, boots andclamps for cracks, deterioration, ordamage. Replace any damagedparts and, if necessary, repack thegrease.

Air conditioning refrigerant/compressor (if equipped)Check the air conditioning lines andconnections for leakage and damage.

Maintenance

307

ENGINE OILChecking the engine oil level

1. Be sure the vehicle is on levelground.

2. Start the engine and allow it toreach normal operating tempera-ture.

3. Turn the engine off and wait for afew minutes (about 5 minutes) forthe oil to return to the oil pan.

4. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean,and re-insert it fully.

5. Pull the dipstick out again andcheck the level. The level shouldbe between F and L.

If it is near or at L, add enough oil tobring the level to F. Do not overfill.

Use a funnel to help prevent oilfrom being spilled on engine com-ponents.

Use only the specified engine oil.(Refer to “Recommended lubricantsand capacities” in section 8.)

WARNING - Radiatorhose

Be very careful not to touch theradiator hose when checking oradding the engine oil as it maybe hot enough to burn you.

CAUTION• Do not overfill with engine oil.

Engine damage may result.• Do not spill engine oil, when

adding or changing engine oil.If you spill engine oil on theengine room, wipe it off imme-diately.

ONCEMC2003

ONCNMC2018

7 31

Maintenance

Changing the engine oil andfilter

Have engine oil and filter changed byan authorized HYUNDAI dealeraccording to the MaintenanceSchedule at the beginning of thissection.


Engine oil contains chemicalsknown to the State of Californiato cause cancer, birth defects,and reproductive harm.Used engine oil may cause irri-tation or cancer of the skin ifleft in contact with the skin forprolonged periods of time. Usedengine oil contains chemicalsthat have caused cancer in lab-oratory animals. Always protectyour skin by washing yourhands thoroughly with soapand warm water as soon as pos-sible after handling used oil.

Maintenance

327

ENGINE COOLANTThe high-pressure cooling systemhas a reservoir filled with year-roundantifreeze coolant. The reservoir isfilled at the factory.Check the antifreeze protection andcoolant concentration level at leastonce a year, at the beginning of thewinter season, and before travelingto a colder climate.

Checking the coolant level

(Continued)• Turn the engine off and wait

until it cools down. Useextreme care when removingthe radiator cap. Wrap a thicktowel around it, and turn itcounterclockwise slowly tothe first stop. Step back whilethe pressure is released fromthe cooling system.When you are sure all thepressure has been released,press down on the cap, usinga thick towel, and continueturning counterclockwise toremove it.

• Even if the engine is not oper-ating, do not remove the radi-ator cap or the drain plugwhile the engine and radiatorare hot. Hot coolant andsteam may still blow outunder pressure, causing seri-ous injury.

WARNING The electric motor(cooling fan) is con-trolled by enginecoolant temperature,refrigerant pressure

and vehicle speed. It may some-times operate even when theengine is not running. Useextreme caution when workingnear the blades of the coolingfan so that you are not injuredby a rotating fan blades. As theengine coolant temperaturedecreases, the electric motorwill automatically shut off. Thisis a normal condition.If your vehicle is equipped withGDI, the electric motor (coolingfan) may operate until you dis-connect the negative batterycable.

WARNINGRemoving radiatorcap

• Never attempt to remove theradiator cap while the engineis operating or hot. Doing somight lead to cooling systemand engine damage and couldresult in serious personalinjury from escaping hotcoolant or steam.

(Continued)

7 33

Maintenance

Check the condition and connectionsof all cooling system hoses andheater hoses. Replace any swollenor deteriorated hoses.The coolant level should be filledbetween F (MAX) and L (MIN) markson the side of the coolant reservoirwhen the engine is cool.If the coolant level is low, add enoughcoolant to bring the level to F (MAX),but do not overfill. If frequent coolantrefill is required, see an authorizedHYUNDAI dealer for a cooling sys-tem inspection.

Recommended engine coolant• When adding coolant, use only

deionized water for your vehicleand never mix hard water in thecoolant filled at the factory. Animproper coolant mixture canresult in serious malfunction orengine damage.

• The engine in your vehicle has alu-minum engine parts and must beprotected by an ethylene-glycol-based coolant to prevent corrosionand freezing.

• DO NOT USE alcohol or methanolcoolant or mix them with the spec-ified coolant.

• Do not use a solution that containsmore than 60% antifreeze or lessthan 35% antifreeze, which wouldreduce the effectiveness of thesolution.

For mixture percentage, refer to thefollowing table.

ODM073006

AmbientTemperature

Mixture Percentage (volume)

Antifreeze Water

5°F (-15°C) 35 65

-13°F (-25°C) 40 60

-31°F (-35°C) 50 50

-49°F (-45°C) 60 40

Maintenance

347

Changing the coolantHave coolant changed by an author-ized HYUNDAI dealer according tothe Maintenance Schedule at thebeginning of this section.

WARNING Radiator cap

Do not remove the radiator capwhen the engine and radiatorare hot. Scalding hot coolantand steam may blow out underpressure causing seriousinjury.

CAUTIONPut a thick cloth or fabricaround the radiator cap beforerefilling the coolant in order toprevent the coolant from over-flowing into engine parts suchas generator.

WARNING - Coolant• Do not use radiator coolant or

antifreeze in the washer fluidreservoir.

• Radiator coolant can severelyobscure visibility whensprayed on the windshieldand may cause loss of vehiclecontrol or damage to paintand body trim.

ONCNMC2007

7 35

Maintenance

BRAKE FLUIDChecking the brake fluid level

Check the fluid level in the reservoirperiodically. The fluid level should bebetween MAX and MIN marks on theside of the reservoir.

Before removing the reservoir capand adding brake fluid, clean thearea around the reservoir cap thor-oughly to prevent brake fluid contam-ination.If the level is low, add fluid to theMAX level. The level will fall withaccumulated mileage. This is a nor-mal condition associated with thewear of the brake linings. If the fluidlevel is excessively low, have thebrake system checked by an author-ized HYUNDAI dealer.

Use only the specified brake fluid.(Refer to “Recommended lubricantsand capacities” in section 8.)

Never mix different types of fluid.

ONCNMC2009

WARNING - Loss ofbrake fluid

In the event the brake systemrequires frequent additions offluid, the vehicle should beinspected by an authorizedHYUNDAI dealer.

Maintenance

367

WARNING - Brake fluidWhen changing and addingbrake fluid, handle it carefully.Do not let it come in contactwith your eyes. If brake fluidshould come in contact withyour eyes, immediately flushthem with a large quantity offresh tap water. Have your eyesexamined by a doctor as soonas possible.

CAUTIONDo not allow brake fluid to con-tact the vehicle's body paint, aspaint damage will result. Brakefluid, which has been exposedto open air for an extended timeshould never be used as itsquality cannot be guaranteed. Itshould be disposed of properly.Do not put in the wrong type offluid. A few drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, inyour brake system can damagebrake system parts.

7 37

Maintenance

WASHER FLUIDChecking the washer fluidlevel

The reservoir is translucent so thatyou can check the level with a quickvisual inspection.Check the fluid level in the washerfluid reservoir and add fluid if neces-sary. Plain water may be used ifwasher fluid is not available.However, use washer solvent withantifreeze characteristics in cold cli-mates to prevent freezing.

Checking the parking brake

Check whether the stroke is withinthe recommended specificationwhen the parking brake pedal is fullyengaged. When engaged, the park-ing brake alone should hold the vehi-cle securely. If the stroke is more orless than specified, have the parkingbrake adjusted by an authorizedHYUNDAI dealer.

Stroke : 8~9 notches

ODMNMC2019

WARNING - Coolant• Do not use radiator coolant or

antifreeze in the washer fluidreservoir.

• Radiator coolant can severelyobscure visibility whensprayed on the windshieldand may cause loss of vehiclecontrol or damage to paintand body trim.

• Windshield Washer fluidagents contain some amountsof alcohol and can be flamma-ble under certain circum-stances. Do not allow sparksor flame to contact the washerfluid or the washer fluid reser-voir. Damage to the vehicle oroccupants could occur.

• Windshield washer fluid ispoisonous to humans andanimals. Do not drink andavoid contacting windshieldwasher fluid. Serious injury ordeath could occur.

PARKING BRAKE

OCM050015

Maintenance

387

AIR CLEANERFilter replacement

It must be replaced when necessary,and should not be washed.You can clean the filter when inspect-ing the air cleaner element.Clean the filter by using compressedair.

1. Loosen the air cleaner coverattaching clips and open the cover.

2. Wipe the inside of the air cleaner.3. Lift the air cleaner cover and pull

the air cleaner filter cover.4. Pull the air cleaner to replace.5. Lock the cover (1) with the cover

attaching clips.6. Verify that the air cleaner cover is

properly attached at all four cornersand sealing against air cleaner.

ONCNMC2012

ONCNMC2013 ONCNMC2014

7 39

Maintenance

Replace the filter according to theMaintenance Schedule.If the vehicle is operated in extreme-ly dusty or sandy areas, replace theelement more often than the usualrecommended intervals. (Refer to“Maintenance under severe usageconditions” in this section.)

CAUTION• Do not drive with the air clean-

er removed; this will result inexcessive engine wear.

• When removing the air cleanerfilter, be careful that dust ordirt does not enter the airintake, or damage may result.

• Use a HYUNDAI genuine part.Use of nongenuine part coulddamage the air flow sensor.

Maintenance

407

CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER (IF EQUIPPED)Filter inspectionIf the vehicle is operated in theseverely air-polluted cities or ondusty rough roads for a long period,it should be inspected more fre-quently and replaced earlier. Whenyou, the owner, replace the climatecontrol air filter, replace it performingthe following procedure, and be care-ful to avoid damaging other compo-nents.Replace the filter according to themaintenance Schedule.

Filter replacement

1. Open the glove box and removethe support strap (1).

2. With the glove box open, removethe stoppers on both sides.

ODM072014

ODM072015

7 41

Maintenance

3. Remove the climate control air fil-ter case by pulling out both sidesof the cover.

4. Replace the climate control air fil-ter.

5. Reassemble in the reverse orderof disassembly.

✽✽ NOTICEWhen replacing the climate controlair filter, install it properly.Otherwise, the system may producenoise and the effectiveness of the fil-ter may be reduced.

OANNMC2038ODM072016

Maintenance

427

WIPER BLADESBlade inspection

✽✽ NOTICECommercial hot waxes applied byautomatic car washes have beenknown to make the windshield diffi-cult to clean.

Contamination of either the wind-shield or the wiper blades with for-eign matter can reduce the effective-ness of the windshield wipers.Common sources of contaminationare insects, tree sap, and hot waxtreatments used by some commer-cial car washes. If the blades are notwiping properly, clean both the win-dow and the blades with a goodcleaner or mild detergent, and rinsethoroughly with clean water.

Blade replacement When the wipers no longer cleanadequately, the blades may be wornor cracked, and require replacement.

CAUTIONTo prevent damage to the wiperblades, do not use gasoline,kerosene, paint thinner, or othersolvents on or near them.

CAUTIONTo prevent damage to the wiperarms or other components, donot attempt to move the wipersmanually.

CAUTIONThe use of a non-specifiedwiper blade could result inwiper malfunction and failure.

1JBA5122

7 43

Maintenance

Front windshield wiper blade

1. Raise the wiper arm and turn thewiper blade assembly to exposethe plastic locking clip.

2. Compress the clip and slide theblade assembly downward.

3. Lift it off the arm.4. Install the blade assembly in the

reverse order of removal.

1LDA5023

CAUTIONDo not allow the wiper arm tofall against the windshield,since it may chip or crack thewindshield.

1JBA7037 1JBA7038

Maintenance

447

Rear window wiper blade

1. Raise the wiper arm and pull outthe wiper blade assembly.

2. Install the new blade assembly byinserting the center part into theslot in the wiper arm until it clicksinto place.

3. Make sure the blade assembly isinstalled firmly by trying to pull itslightly.

To prevent damage to the wiper armsor other components, have anauthorized HYUNDAI dealer replacethe wiper blade.

OHM078062

OHM078063

7 45

Maintenance

BATTERYFor best battery service

• Keep the battery securely mount-ed.

• Keep the battery top clean and dry.• Keep the terminals and connec-

tions clean, tight, and coated withpetroleum jelly or terminal grease.

• Rinse any spilled electrolyte fromthe battery immediately with asolution of water and baking soda.

• If the vehicle is not going to beused for an extended time, discon-nect the battery cables.

WARNING - Battery dangers

Always read the follow-ing instructions carefullywhen handling a battery.Keep lighted cigarettesand all other flames orsparks away from thebattery.Hydrogen, a highly com-bustible gas, is alwayspresent in battery cellsand may explode if ignit-ed.Keep batteries out of thereach of childrenbecause batteries con-tain highly corrosiveSULFURIC ACID. Do notallow battery acid tocontact your skin, eyes,clothing or paint finish.

(Continued)

(Continued)If any electrolyte getsinto your eyes, flushyour eyes with cleanwater for at least 15 min-utes and get immediatemedical attention.If electrolyte gets onyour skin, thoroughlywash the contacted area.If you feel a pain or aburning sensation, getmedical attention imme-diately.Wear eye protectionwhen charging or work-ing near a battery.Always provide ventila-tion when working in anenclosed space.An inappropriately dis-posed battery can beharmful to the environ-ment and human health.Dispose the batteryaccording to your locallaw(s) or regulation.

(Continued)

ONCNMC2021

Maintenance

467

Battery rechargingYour vehicle has a maintenance-free,calcium-based battery.• If the battery becomes discharged

in a short time (because, for exam-ple, the headlights or interior lightswere left on while the vehicle wasnot in use), recharge it by slowcharging (trickle) for 10 hours.

• If the battery gradually dischargesbecause of high electric load whilethe vehicle is being used, rechargeit at 20-30A for two hours.

(Continued)• When lifting a plastic-cased

battery, excessive pressureon the case may cause batteryacid to leak, resulting in per-sonal injury. Lift with a batterycarrier or with your hands onopposite corners.

• Never attempt to recharge thebattery when the batterycables are connected.

• The electrical ignition systemworks with high voltage.Never touch these compo-nents with the engine runningor the ignition switched on.

Failure to follow the abovewarnings can result in seriousbodily injury or death.


Battery posts, terminals, andrelated accessories containlead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer, birthdefects, and reproductive harm.Batteries also contain otherchemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer.Wash hands after handling.

CAUTION• Always charge the battery

fully to prevent battery casedamage in low temperaturearea.

• If you connect unauthorizedelectronic devices to the bat-tery, the battery may dis-charge. Never use unautho-rized devices.

7 47

Maintenance

Reset itemsItems should be reset after the bat-tery has been discharged or the bat-tery has been disconnected.• Auto up/down window

(See section 4)• Sunroof (See section 4)• Trip computer (See section 4)• Climate control system

(See section 4)• Clock (See section 4)• Audio (See section 4)

(Continued)• Disconnect the battery charg-

er in the following order.1. Turn off the battery charger

main switch.2. Unhook the negative clamp

from the negative batteryterminal.

3. Unhook the positive clampfrom the positive batteryterminal.

• Before performing mainte-nance or recharging the bat-tery, turn off all accessoriesand stop the engine.

• The negative battery cablemust be removed first andinstalled last when the batteryis disconnected.

WARNING - Rechargingbattery

When recharging the battery,observe the following precau-tions:• The battery must be removed

from the vehicle and placed inan area with good ventilation.

• Do not allow cigarettes, sparks,or flame near the battery.

• Watch the battery duringcharging, and stop or reducethe charging rate if the batterycells begin gassing (boiling)violently or if the temperatureof the electrolyte of any cellexceeds 120°F (49°C).

• Wear eye protection whenchecking the battery duringcharging.

(Continued)

Maintenance

487

TIRES AND WHEELSTire careFor proper maintenance, safety, andmaximum fuel economy, you mustalways maintain recommended tireinflation pressures and stay withinthe load limits and weight distributionrecommended for your vehicle.

Recommended cold tire infla-tion pressures All tire pressures (including thespare) should be checked when thetires are cold. “Cold Tires” means thevehicle has not been driven for atleast three hours or driven less than1 mile (1.6 km).Recommended pressures must bemaintained for the best ride, top vehi-cle handling, and minimum tire wear.For recommended inflation pressurerefer to “Tire and wheels” in section 8.

All specifications (sizes and pres-sures) can be found on a labelattached to the vehicle.

WARNING - Tire under-inflation

Severe underinflation (10 psi(70 kPa) or more) can lead tosevere heat build-up, causingblowouts, tread separation andother tire failures that can resultin the loss of vehicle controlleading to severe injury ordeath. This risk is much higheron hot days and when drivingfor long periods at high speeds.

ODMNMC2017

CAUTION• Underinflation also results in

excessive wear, poor handlingand reduced fuel economy.Wheel deformation also ispossible. Keep your tire pres-sures at the proper levels. If atire frequently needs refilling,have it checked by an author-ized HYUNDAI dealer.

• Overinflation produces aharsh ride, excessive wear atthe center of the tire tread, anda greater possibility of dam-age from road hazards.

7 49

Maintenance

Checking tire inflation pres-sureCheck your tires once a month ormore.Also, check the tire pressure of thespare tire.

How to checkUse a good quality gage to check tirepressure.You can not tell if your tiresare properly inflated simply by look-ing at them. Radial tires may lookproperly inflated even when they'reunderinflated.Check the tire's inflation pressurewhen the tires are cold. - "Cold"means your vehicle has been sittingfor at least three hours or driven nomore than 1 mile (1.6 km).

WARNING - Tire inflation

Overinflation or underinflationcan reduce tire life, adverselyaffect vehicle handling, andlead to sudden tire failure. Thiscould result in loss of vehiclecontrol and potential injury.

CAUTION - Tire pressureAlways observe the following:• Check tire pressure when the

tires are cold. (After vehiclehas been parked for at leastthree hours or hasn't beendriven more than 1 mile (1.6km) since startup.)

• Check the pressure of yourspare tire each time you checkthe pressure of other tires.

• Never overload your vehicle.Be careful not to overload avehicle luggage rack if yourvehicle is equipped with one.

• Worn, old tires can cause acci-dents. If your tread is badlyworn, or if your tires havebeen damaged, replace them.

CAUTION• Warm tires normally exceed

recommended cold tire pres-sures by 4 to 6 psi (28 to 41kPa). Do not release air fromwarm tires to adjust the pres-sure or the tires will be under-inflated.

• Be sure to reinstall the tireinflation valve caps. Withoutthe valve cap, dirt or moisturecould get into the valve coreand cause air leakage. If avalve cap is missing, install anew one as soon as possible.

Maintenance

507

Remove the valve cap from the tirevalve stem. Press the tire gauge firm-ly onto the valve to get a pressuremeasurement. If the cold tire inflationpressure matches the recommendedpressure on the tire and loadinginformation label, no further adjust-ment is necessary. If the pressure islow, add air until you reach the rec-ommended amount.If you overfill the tire, release air bypushing on the metal stem in the cen-ter of the tire valve. Recheck the tirepressure with the tire gauge. Be sureto put the valve caps back on thevalve stems. They help prevent leaksby keeping out dirt and moisture.

Tire rotation To equalize tread wear, it is recom-mended that the tires be rotatedevery 7,500 miles (12,000 km) orsooner if irregular wear develops.During rotation, check the tires forcorrect balance.When rotating tires, check for unevenwear and damage. Abnormal wear isusually caused by incorrect tire pres-sure, improper wheel alignment, out-of-balance wheels, severe braking orsevere cornering. Look for bumps orbulges in the tread or side of tire.Replace the tire if you find either ofthese conditions. Replace the tire iffabric or cord is visible. After rotation,be sure to bring the front and rear tirepressures to specification and checklug nut tightness.Refer to “Tire and wheels” in section 8.

WARNING• Inspect your tires frequently

for proper inflation as well aswear and damage. Always usea tire pressure gauge.

• Tires with too much or too littlepressure wear unevenly caus-ing poor handling, loss of vehi-cle control, and sudden tirefailure leading to accidents,injuries, and even death. Therecommended cold tire pres-sure for your vehicle can befound in this manual and onthe tire label located on the dri-ver's side center pillar.

• Worn tires can cause acci-dents. Replace tires that areworn, show uneven wear, orare damaged.

• Remember to check the pres-sure of your spare tire.HYUNDAI recommends thatyou check the spare every timeyou check the pressure of theother tires on your vehicle.

7 51

Maintenance

Disc brake pads should be inspectedfor wear whenever tires are rotated.

✽✽ NOTICERotate radial tires that have anasymmetric tread pattern only fromfront to rear and not from right toleft.

Wheel alignment and tire bal-ance The wheels on your vehicle werealigned and balanced carefully at thefactory to give you the longest tire lifeand best overall performance.In most cases, you will not need tohave your wheels aligned again.However, if you notice unusual tirewear or your vehicle pulling one wayor the other, the alignment may needto be reset.If you notice your vehicle vibratingwhen driving on a smooth road, yourwheels may need to be rebalanced.

WARNING• Do not use the compact spare

tire for tire rotation.• Do not mix bias ply and radial

ply tires under any circum-stances. This may causeunusual handling characteris-tics that could result in death,severe injury, or propertydamage.

S2BLA790A

Without a spare tire

CAUTIONImproper wheel weights candamage your vehicle's alu-minum wheels. Use onlyapproved wheel weights.

Maintenance

527

Tire replacement

If the tire is worn evenly, a tread wearindicator will appear as a solid bandacross the tread. This shows there isless than 1/16 in. (1.6 mm) of treadleft on the tire. Replace the tire whenthis happens.Do not wait for the band to appearacross the entire tread before replac-ing the tire.

(Continued)• The use of any other tire size

or type may seriously affectride, handling, ground clear-ance, stopping distance, bodyto tire clearance, snow tireclearance, and speedometerreliability.

• It is best to replace all fourtires at the same time. If thatis not possible, or necessary,then replace the two front ortwo rear tires as a pair.Replacing just one tire canseriously affect your vehicle’shandling.

• The ABS works by comparingthe speed of the wheels. Tiresize can affect wheel speed.When replacing tires, all 4tires must use the same sizeoriginally supplied with thevehicle. Using tires of a differ-ent size can cause the ABS(Anti-lock Brake System) andESC (Electronic StabilityControl), to work irregularly.

WARNING - Replacingtires

• Driving on worn-out tires isvery hazardous and willreduce braking effectiveness,steering accuracy, and trac-tion.

• Your vehicle is equipped withtires designed to provide forsafe ride and handling capa-bility. Do not use a size andtype of tire and wheel that isdifferent from the one that isoriginally installed on yourvehicle. It can affect the safetyand performance of your vehi-cle, which could lead to han-dling failure or rollover andserious injury.When replacingthe tires, be sure to equip allfour tires with the tire andwheel of the same size, type,tread, brand and load-carryingcapacity.

(Continued)

OEN076053

Tread wear indicator

7 53

Maintenance

Compact spare tire replacement (if equipped)A compact spare tire has a shortertread life than a regular size tire.Replace it when you can see thetread wear indicator bars on the tire.The replacement compact spare tireshould be the same size and designtire as the one provided with yournew vehicle and should be mountedon the same compact spare tirewheel. The compact spare tire is notdesigned to be mounted on a regularsize wheel, and the compact sparetire wheel is not designed for mount-ing a regular size tire.

Wheel replacement When replacing the metal wheels forany reason, make sure the newwheels are equivalent to the originalfactory units in diameter, rim widthand offset.

Tire tractionTire traction can be reduced if youdrive on worn tires, tires that areimproperly inflated or on slipperyroad surfaces. Tires should bereplaced when tread wear indicatorsappear. To reduce the possibility oflosing control, slow down wheneverthere is rain, snow or ice on the road.WARNING

A wheel that is not the correctsize may adversely affect wheeland bearing life, braking andstopping abilities, handlingcharacteristics, ground clear-ance, body-to-tire clearance,snow chain clearance,speedometer and odometer cal-ibration, headlight aim andbumper height.

Maintenance

547

Tire maintenance In addition to proper inflation, correctwheel alignment helps to decreasetire wear. If you find a tire is wornunevenly, have your dealer check thewheel alignment.When you have new tires installed,make sure they are balanced. Thiswill increase vehicle ride comfort andtire life. Additionally, a tire shouldalways be rebalanced if it is removedfrom the wheel.

Tire sidewall labeling

This information identifies anddescribes the fundamental charac-teristics of the tire and also providesthe tire identification number (TIN)for safety standard certification. TheTIN can be used to identify the tire incase of a recall.

1. Manufacturer or brand nameManufacturer or Brand name isshown.

2. Tire size designation A tire’s sidewall is marked with a tiresize designation. You will need thisinformation when selecting replace-ment tires for your car. The followingexplains what the letters and numbersin the tire size designation mean.Example tire size designation:(These numbers are provided as anexample only; your tire size designa-tor could vary depending on yourvehicle.)(P)235/65R17 102H

(P) - Applicable vehicle type (tiresmarked with the prefix “P’’ areintended for use on passengervehicles or light trucks; howev-er, not all tires have this mark-ing).

235 - Tire width in millimeters.65 - Aspect ratio. The tire’s section

height as a percentage of itswidth.

R - Tire construction code (Radial).17 - Rim diameter in inches.

I030B04JM

1

1

23

4

5,6

7

7 55

Maintenance

102 - Load Index, a numerical codeassociated with the maximumload the tire can carry.

H - Speed Rating Symbol. See thespeed rating chart in this sectionfor additional information.

Wheel size designation

Wheels are also marked with impor-tant information that you need if youever have to replace one. The follow-ing explains what the letters andnumbers in the wheel size designa-tion mean.

Example wheel size designation:7.0JX17

7.0 - Rim width in inches.J - Rim contour designation.17 - Rim diameter in inches.

Tire speed ratings

The chart below lists many of the dif-ferent speed ratings currently beingused for passenger car tires. Thespeed rating is part of the tire sizedesignation on the sidewall of thetire. This symbol corresponds to thattire's designed maximum safe oper-ating speed.

3. Checking tire life (TIN : Tire IdentificationNumber)

Any tires that are over 6 years old,based on the manufacturing date(including the spare tire) should bereplaced by new ones. You can findthe manufacturing date on the tiresidewall (possibly on the inside of thewheel), displaying the DOT Code.The DOT Code is a series of num-bers on a tire consisting of numbersand English letters. The manufactur-ing date is designated by the last fourdigits (characters) of the DOT code.

DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOOThe front part of the DOT means aplant code number, tire size andtread pattern and the last four num-bers indicate week and year manu-factured.For example:DOT XXXX XXXX 1614 representsthat the tire was produced in the 16thweek of 2014.

S 112 mph (180 km/h)T 118 mph (190 km/h)H 130 mph (210 km/h)V 149 mph (240 km/h)Z Above 149 mph (240 km/h)

Maximum SpeedSpeedRatingSymbol

Maintenance

567

4. Tire ply composition and mate-rial

The number of layers or plies of rub-ber-coated fabric in the tire. Tiremanufacturers also must indicate thematerials in the tire, which includesteel, nylon, polyester, and others.The letter "R" means radial ply con-struction; the letter "D" means diago-nal or bias ply construction; and theletter "B" means belted-bias ply con-struction.

5. Maximum permissible inflationpressure

This number is the greatest amountof air pressure that should be put inthe tire. Do not exceed the maximumpermissible inflation pressure. Referto the Tire and Loading Informationlabel for recommended inflationpressure.

6. Maximum load ratingThis number indicates the maximumload in kilograms and pounds that canbe carried by the tire. When replacingthe tires on the vehicle, always use atire that has the same load rating asthe factory installed tire.

7. Uniform tire quality grading Quality grades can be found whereapplicable on the tire sidewallbetween tread shoulder and maxi-mum section width.For example:TREADWEAR 200 TRACTION AA TEMPERATURE A

WARNING - Tire ageTires degrade over time, evenwhen they are not being used.Regardless of the remainingtread, it is recommended thattires generally be replaced aftersix (6) years of normal service.Heat caused by not climates orfrequent high loading conditionscan accelerate the agingprocess. Failure to follow thisWarning can result in suddentire failure, which could lead to aloss of control and an accidentinvolving serious injury or death.

7 57

Maintenance

Tread wear

The tread wear grade is a compara-tive rating based on the wear rate ofthe tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified govern-ment test course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one-and-a-half times (1½) as well on the gov-ernment course as a tire graded 100.The relative performance of tiresdepends upon the actual conditionsof their use, however, and maydepart significantly from the normbecause of variations in drivinghabits, service practices and differ-ences in road characteristics and cli-mate.These grades are molded on theside-walls of passenger vehicle tires.The tires available as standard oroptional equipment on your vehiclemay vary with respect to grade.

Traction - AA, A, B & C

The traction grades, from highest tolowest, are AA, A, B and C. Thosegrades represent the tires ability tostop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions on speci-fied government test surfaces ofasphalt and concrete. A tire marked Cmay have poor traction performance.

Temperature -A, B & C

The temperature grades are A (thehighest), B and C representing thetire’s resistance to the generation ofheat and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlled condi-tions on a specified indoor laboratorytest wheel.

Sustained high temperature cancause the material of the tire todegenerate and reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can lead tosudden tire failure. The Grade C cor-responds to a level of performancewhich all passenger car tires mustmeet under the Federal MotorVehicle Safety Standard NO. 109.Grades B and A represent higherlevels of performance on the labora-tory test wheel than the minimumrequired by the law.

WARNING The traction grade assigned tothis tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests,and does not include accelera-tion, cornering, hydroplaning,or peak traction characteristics.

WARNING - Tire temperature

The temperature grade for thistire is established for a tire thatis properly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuild-up and possible suddentire failure. This can cause lossof vehicle control and seriousinjury or death.

Maintenance

587

Tire terminology and definitionsAir Pressure: The amount of airinside the tire pressing outward onthe tire. Air pressure is expressed inpounds per square inch (psi) or kilo-pascal (kPa).Accessory Weight: This means thecombined weight of optional acces-sories. Some examples of optionalaccessories are, automatic transaxlepower seats, and air conditioning.Aspect Ratio: The relationship of atire's height to its width.Belt: A rubber coated layer of cordsthat is located between the plies andthe tread. Cords may be made fromsteel or other reinforcing materials.Bead: The tire bead contains steelwires wrapped by steel cords thathold the tire onto the rim.Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire inwhich the plies are laid at alternateangles less than 90 degrees to thecenterline of the tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: The amount ofair pressure in a tire, measured inpounds per square inch (psi) or kilo-pascals (kPa) before a tire has builtup heat from driving.Curb Weight: This means the weightof a motor vehicle with standard andoptional equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil andcoolant, but without passengers andcargo.DOT Markings: A code molded intothe sidewall of a tire signifying thatthe tire is in compliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation motorvehicle safety standards. The DOTcode includes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumeric des-ignator which can also identify thetire manufacturer, production plant,brand and date of production.GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight RatingGAWR FRT: Gross Axle WeightRating for the Front Axle.GAWR RR: Gross Axle WeightRating for the Rear axle.

Intended Outboard Sidewall: Theside of an asymmetrical tire, thatmust always face outward whenmounted on a vehicle.Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit forair pressure.Load Index: An assigned numberranging from 1 to 279 that corre-sponds to the load carrying capacityof a tire.Maximum Inflation Pressure: Themaximum air pressure to which acold tire may be inflated. The maxi-mum air pressure is molded onto thesidewall.Maximum Load Rating: The loadrating for a tire at the maximum per-missible inflation pressure for thattire.Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight:The sum of curb weight; accessoryweight; vehicle capacity weight; andproduction options weight.Normal Occupant Weight: Thenumber of occupants a vehicle isdesigned to seat multiplied by 150pounds (68 kg).

7 59

Maintenance

Occupant Distribution: Designatedseating positions.Outward Facing Sidewall: The sideof a asymmetrical tire that has a par-ticular side that faces outward whenmounted on a vehicle. The outwardfacing sidewall bears white letteringor bears manufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that is higher ordeeper than the same moldings onthe inner facing sidewall.Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tireused on passenger cars and somelight duty trucks and multipurposevehicles.Recommended Inflation Pressure:Vehicle manufacturer's recommend-ed tire inflation pressure and shownon the tire placard.Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire inwhich the ply cords that extend to thebeads are laid at 90 degrees to thecenterline of the tread.Rim: A metal support for a tire andupon which the tire beads are seated.Sidewall: The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating: An alphanumericcode assigned to a tire indicating themaximum speed at which a tire canoperate.Traction: The friction between thetire and the road surface. Theamount of grip provided.Tread: The portion of a tire thatcomes into contact with the road.Treadwear Indicators: Narrowbands, sometimes called "wear bars,"that show across the tread of a tirewhen only 2/32 inch of tread remains.UTQGS: Uniform Tire QualityGrading Standards, a tire informationsystem that provides consumers withratings for a tire's traction, tempera-ture and treadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tire manufacturersusing government testing proce-dures. The ratings are molded intothe sidewall of the tire.Vehicle Capacity Weight: The num-ber of designated seating positionsmultiplied by 150 lbs. (68 kg) plus therated cargo and luggage load.

Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire:Load on an individual tire due to curband accessory weight plus maximumoccupant and cargo weight.Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire:Load on an individual tire that isdetermined by distributing to eachaxle its share of the curb weight,accessory weight, and normal occu-pant weight and dividing by 2.Vehicle Placard: A label permanent-ly attached to a vehicle showing theoriginal equipment tire size and rec-ommended inflation pressure.

Maintenance

607

All season tires HYUNDAI specifies all season tireson some models to provide goodperformance for use all year round,including snowy and icy road condi-tions. All season tires are identifiedby ALL SEASON and/or M+S (Mudand Snow) on the tire sidewall. Snowtires have better snow traction thanall season tires and may be moreappropriate in some areas.

Summer tires HYUNDAI specifies summer tires onsome models to provide superiorperformance on dry roads. Summertire performance is substantiallyreduced in snow and ice. Summertires do not have the tire traction rat-ing M+S (Mud and Snow) on the tireside wall. if you plan to operate yourvehicle in snowy or icy conditions.HYUNDAI recommends the use ofsnow tires or all season tires on allfour wheels.

Snow tiresIf you equip your car with snow tires,they should be the same size andhave the same load capacity as theoriginal tires. Snow tires should beinstalled on all four wheels; other-wise, poor handling may result.Snow tires should carry 4 psi (28kPa) more air pressure than thepressure recommended for the stan-dard tires on the tire label on the dri-ver's side of the center pillar, or up tothe maximum pressure shown on thetire sidewall, whichever is less.Do not drive faster than 75 mph (120km/h) when your car is equipped withsnow tires.

Tire chainsTire chains, if necessary, should beinstalled on the drive wheels as fol-lows.2WD : Front wheelsAWD : All four wheels

If a full set of chains is notavailable for a AWD vehicle,chains may be installed onthe front wheels only.

Be sure that the chains are installedin accordance with the manufactur-er's instructions.To minimize tire and chain wear, donot continue to use tire chains whenthey are no longer needed.

WARNING - Snow or ice • When driving on roads covered

with snow or ice, drive at lessthan 20 mph (30 km/h).

• Use the SAE “S” class or wirechains.

• If you hear noise caused bychains contacting the body,retighten the chain to avoidcontact with the vehicle body.

• To prevent body damage,retighten the chains after driv-ing 0.3~0.6 miles (0.5~1.0 km).

• Do not use tire chains on vehi-cles equipped with aluminumwheels. In unavoidable circum-stance, use a wire type chain.

• Use wire chains less than 0.59inches (15mm) to prevent dam-age to the chain’s connection.

7 61

Maintenance

Radial-ply tiresRadial-ply tires provide improved treadlife, road hazard resistance andsmoother high speed ride. The radial-ply tires used on this vehicle are ofbelted construction, and are selectedto complement the ride and handlingcharacteristics of your vehicle. Radial-ply tires have the same load carryingcapacity, as bias-ply or bias belted tiresof the same size, and use the samerecommended inflation pressure.Mixing of radial-ply tires with bias-ply orbias belted tires is not recommended.Any combinations of radial-ply andbias-ply or bias belted tires when usedon the same vehicle will seriously dete-riorate vehicle handling. The best ruleto follow is: Identical radial-ply tiresshould always be used as a set of four.Longer wearing tires can be more sus-ceptible to irregular tread wear. It isvery important to follow the tire rotationinterval shown in this section toachieve the tread life potential of thesetires. Cuts and punctures in radial-plytires are repairable only in the treadarea, because of sidewall flexing.Consult your tire dealer for radial-plytire repairs.

Low aspect ratio tire (if equipped) Low aspect ratio tires, whose aspectratio is lower than 50, are providedfor sporty looks.Because the low aspect ratio tiresare optimized for handling and brak-ing, it may be more uncomfortable toride in and there is more noise com-pare with normal tires.

(Continued)• If the tire is impacted, inspect

the tire condition or contact anauthorized HYUNDAI dealer.

• To prevent damage to the tire,inspect the tire condition andpressure every 1,800miles(3,000km).

CAUTION• It is not easy to recognize the

tire damage with your owneyes. But if there is the slight-est hint of tire damage, eventhough you cannot see the tiredamage with your own eyes,have the tire checked orreplaced because the tiredamage may cause air leak-age from the tire.

• If the tire is damaged by driv-ing on a rough road, off road,pothole, manhole, or curbstone, it will not be covered bythe warranty.

• You can find out the tire infor-mation on the tire sidewall.

CAUTIONBecause the sidewall of the lowaspect ratio tire is shorter thanthe normal, the wheel and tire ofthe low aspect ratio tire is easi-er to be damaged. So, follow theinstructions below.• When driving on a rough road

or off road, drive cautiouslybecause tires and wheels maybe damaged. And after driving,inspect tires and wheels.

• When passing over a pothole,speed bump, manhole, or curbstone, drive slowly so that thetires and wheels are not dam-aged.

(Continued)

Maintenance

627

FUSESA vehicle’s electrical system is pro-tected from electrical overload dam-age by fuses.This vehicle has 2 fuse panels, onelocated in the driver’s side panel bol-ster, the other in the engine compart-ment near the battery.If any of your vehicle’s lights, acces-sories, or controls do not work, checkthe appropriate circuit fuse. If a fusehas blown, the element inside thefuse will be melted.If the electrical system does notwork, first check the driver’s sidefuse panel.Always replace a blown fuse withone of the same rating.Before replacing an open fuse, dis-connect the negative battery cable.If the replacement fuse blows, thisindicates an electrical problem. Avoidusing the system involved and imme-diately consult an authorizedHYUNDAI dealer.Three kinds of fuses are used: bladetype for lower amperage rating, car-tridge type, and multi fuse for higheramperage ratings.

✽✽ NOTICEThe actual fuse/relay panel labelmay differ from equipped items. OLM079051N

Normal

Normal

■ Blade type

■ Cartridge type

■ Multi fuse

Blown

Blown

Normal Blown

Normal Blown

WARNING - Fusereplacement

• Never replace a fuse with any-thing but another fuse of thesame rating.

• A higher capacity fuse couldcause damage and possibly afire.

• Never install a wire or alu-minum foil instead of theproper fuse - even as a tem-porary repair. It may causeextensive wiring damage anda possible fire.

CAUTIONDo not use a screwdriver or anyother metal object to removefuses because it may cause ashort circuit and damage thesystem.

■ BFT

7 63

Maintenance

Inner panel fuse replacement

1. Turn the ignition switch and allother switches off.

2. Open the fuse panel cover.

3. Pull the suspected fuse straightout. Use the removal tool providedin the engine compartment fusepanel.

4. Check the removed fuse; replace itif it is blown.

5. Push in a new fuse of the samerating, and make sure it fits tightlyin the clips.

If it fits loosely, consult an authorizedHYUNDAI dealer.If you do not have a spare, use a fuseof the same rating from a circuit youmay not need for operating the vehi-cle, such as the cigar lighter fuse.

ODM072017

ONCNMC2030

CAUTION• When replacing an open fuse

or relay with a new one, makesure the new fuse or relay fitstightly into the clips. Theincomplete fastening fuse orrelay may cause the vehiclewiring and electric systemsdamage and a possible fire.

• Do not remove fuses, relaysand terminals fastened withbolts or nuts.The fuses, relaysand terminals may be fas-tened incompletely, and it maycause a possible fire. If fuses,relays and terminals fastenedwith bolts or nuts are open,consult with an authorizedHYUNDAI dealer.

• Do not input any other objectsexcept fuses or relays intofuse/relay terminals such as adriver or wiring. It may causecontact failure and systemmalfunction.

Maintenance

647

If the headlights or other electricalcomponents do not work and thefuses are OK, check the fuse block inthe engine compartment. If a fuse isblown, it must be replaced.

Fuse switch

Always, put the mode switch at theON position.If you move the switch to the OFFposition, some items such as audioand digital clock must be reset andtransmitter (or smart key) may notwork properly.

Engine compartment panel fusereplacement

1. Turn the ignition switch and allother switches off.

2. Remove the fuse box cover bypressing the tab and pulling up.

ODM072019

CAUTIONAlways place the fuse switch inthe ON position while drivingthe vehicle.

ONCNMC2032

7 65

Maintenance

3. Check the removed fuse; replace itif it is blown. To remove or insertthe fuse, use the fuse puller in theengine compartment fuse panel.

4. Push in a new fuse of the samerating, and make sure it fits tightlyin the clips. If it fits loosely, consultan authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Multi fuse

If the multi fuse is blown, it must beremoved as follows:1. Disconnect the negative battery

cable.2. Remove the bolts shown in the

picture above.3. Replace the fuse with a new one

of the same rating.4. Reinstall in the reverse order of

removal.

✽✽ NOTICEIf the multi fuse is blown, consult anAuthorized HYUNDAI Dealer.

Main fuse

If the main fuse is blown, it must beremoved as follows:1. Disconnect the negative battery

cable.2. Remove the nuts shown in the pic-

ture above.3. Replace the fuse with a new one

of the same rating.4. Reinstall in the reverse order of

removal.

ONCNMC2033 ONCDMC2037

CAUTIONAfter checking the fuse box inthe engine compartment,securely install the fuse boxcover. If not, electrical failuresmay occur from water leaking in.

Maintenance

667

Fuse/Relay panel description

Inside the fuse/relay box covers, youcan find the fuse/relay label describ-ing fuse/relay name and capacity.

✽✽ NOTICENot all fuse panel descriptions inthis manual may be applicable toyour vehicle. It is accurate at thetime of printing. When you inspectthe fuse box on your vehicle, refer tothe fuse box label.

ODM072017

ODMNMC2014

7 67

Maintenance

Description Fuse rating Protected Component

A/BAG IND 10A Instrument Cluster

A/BAG 15A ACU, A/C Control Module, Passenger Occupant Detection Sensor

MODULE 5 7.5ASunroof_MTR, RAIN_SNSR,RR_BLOWER,PGS, AC_INVERTER_UNIT,Smart Key Control Module,BCM, Rear Seat Warmer LH/RH,Driver/Passenger Seat Warmer Module,

MODULE 1 7.5A Sport Mode Switch, Key Solenoid, Console Switch LH/RH,Rear Power Window Switch LH/RH

FOG LAMP RR 10A RR_FOG_LH/RH

MEMORY 2 10ABCM, Tire Pressure Monitoring Module, Electro Chromic Mirror, Driver/Passenger Door Module, AutoLight & Photo Sensor, Data Link Connector, A/C Control Module, Instrument Cluster, FRT_DRV_SEAT

SMART KEY 2 7.5A Smart Key Control Module, Immobilizer Module

MODULE 3 10A

BCM, Instrument Cluster, Tire Pressure Monitoring Module, A/C Control Module, Driver/PassengerDoor Module, ATM Shift Lever Indicator, Rear Seat Warmer LH/RH, 4WD ECU, Driver/Passenger SeatWarmer Module, MTS Module, Rear(SMART) Parking Assist Sensor LH/RH, A/V & Navigation HeadUnit, Rear Parking Assist Sensor (Center)LH/RH, AMP, SAS_ESP,EPB_EXT, Electro Chromic Mirror,BSD

SMART KEY 4 10A Start/Stop Button Switch, Immobilizer Module

INTERIOR LAMP 15ACargo Lamp, Vanity Lamp LH/RH, Overhead Console Lamp, Center Room Lamp, Personal LampLH/RH

MULTI MEDIA 15A Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, MTS Module,D_CLOCK

MDPS 7.5A MDPS Unit

HTD STRG 15A Steering Wheel Switch

MEMORY 1 10A RF Receiver, Ignition Key Ill. & Door Warning Switch

Maintenance

687


START 7.5AW/O IMMO. & Smart Key : ICM Relay Box (Burglar Alarm Relay) With IMMO. or Smart Key : INHIBIT_SW(POSITION_SW)

MODULE 2 10ACrash Pad Switch, Multipurpose Check Connector, Head Lamp Leveling Device Actuator LH/RH, AutoHead Lamp Leveling Device Module, Stop Lamp Switch,AFLS_UNIT, F_WATER_SNSR,GLOW_RLY_UNIT_METAL, FPAS_SNSR, DSL_BOX

SUNROOF 2 20A Sunroof_MTR

S/HEATER RR 15A Rear Seat Warmer LH/RH

IGN 20A E/R Fuse & Relay Box (Fuse - ABS 3, SENSOR 5, TCU)

A/CON 1 7.5A E/R Fuse & Relay Box (Blower Relay), A/C Control Module, Cluster Ionizer, DSL_BOX(PTC_RLY)

WIPER RR 15A Rear Wiper Relay, Rear Wiper Motor, Multifunction Switch,BCM

SMART KEY 1 25A Smart Key Control Module

S/HEATER FRT 20A Driver/Passenger Seat Warmer Module

A/CON 2 7.5A A/C Control Module

C/LIGHTER 20A Front Power Outlet & Cigarette Lighter, Luggage Power Outlet

WIPER FRT 15A Multifunction Switch, E/R Fuse & Relay Box (Wiper HI Relay, IG2 Relay)

BLOWER RR 20A ICM Relay Box (RR BLOWER Relay)

P/WDW RH 25A Passenger Door Module, Rear Power Window Switch RH

RR HTD 10A A/C Control Module

BRAKE SWITCH 7.5A Smart Key Control Module, Stop Lamp Switch

7 69

Maintenance


SUNROOF 1 20A SUNROOF_MTR

P/WDW LH 25A Driver Safety Power Window Module, Driver Door Module, Rear Power Window Switch LH

FUEL LID 15A Fuel Fillar Door Switch (DOOR_EXT)

SMART KEY 3 7.5A Smart Key Control Module

STOP LAMP 15A Stop Signal Electronic Module

P/SEAT PASS 20A Passenger Seat Manual Switch, Passenger Lumbar Support Switch

AMP 30A AMP

MODULE 4 10AAudio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, BCM, Overhead Console Lamp, AMP, MTS Module, Power OutsideMirror Switch, E/R Fuse & Relay Box (Power Outlet Relay),PGS,D_CLOCK

DR LOCK 20A Door Lock/Unlock Relay, Tail Gate Relay, ICM Relay Box (Dead Lock Relay)

P/SEAT DRV 30A Driver IMS Module, Driver Seat Manual Switch, Driver Lumbar Support Switch

Maintenance

707

Engine compartment fuse panel

ONCNMC2036

ONCNMC2015

7 71

Maintenance

Relay NO. Relay Name Relay Type

E30 POWER OUTLET RELAY ISO MICRO

E31 START RELAY ISO MICRO

E32 FRONT DEICER RELAY ISO MICRO

E33 BLOWER RELAY ISO MICRO

E34 WIPER LO RELAY ISO MICRO

E36 ACC RELAY ISO MICRO

E37 IG1 RELAY ISO MICRO

E38 IG2 RELAY ISO MICRO

E39 COOLING FAN RELAY ISO MINI

E40 WIPER HI RELAY ISO MICRO

E41 REAR DEFOGGER RELAY ISO MICRO

E42 HORN RELAY ISO MICRO

Maintenance

727


MULTIFUSE

MDPS 80A MDPS Unit

B+2 60ASmart Junction Box (IPS 1 (4CH), IPS 2 (1CH), IPS 5 (1CH), Fuse - SUNROOF 1, P/SEATPASS, P/SEAT DRV), RR A/CON

BLOWER 40A Blower Relay

RR HTD 40A Rear Defogger Relay

ABS1 40A ESC Module, Multipurpose Check Connector

ABS2 40A ESC Module

C/FAN 60A Cooling Fan Relay

B+3 60ASmart Junction Box (Fuse - MODULE 1, SMART KEY 4, SUNROOF 2, SMART KEY 1, LeakCurrent Autocut Device)

FUSE

B+4 50ASmart Junction Box (IPS 3 (4CH), IPS 6 (2CH), Fuse - F/LID, STOP LAMP, DR LOCK, BRAKESWITCH), FUEL LID

EMS 40A EMS Box

IG1 40A W/O Smart Key : Ignition Switch, With Smart Key - ACC Relay, IG1 Relay

IG2 40A Start Relay, IG2 Relay, W/O Smart Key : Ignition Switch

TRAILER 30A Trailer Power Outlet

B+1 50A Smart Junction Box (Fuse - S/HEATER RR, S/HEATER FRT, P/WDW RH, P/WDW LH)

HORN 15A Horn Relay

DEICER 15A Front Deicer Relay

POWER OUTLET 25A Power Outlet Relay

AC INVERTER 30A AC Inverter Module

7 73

Maintenance


FUSE

P/TAIL GATE 30A Power Tail Gate Module

IDB 15A IDB Module

4WD 20A 4WD ECM

AMS 10A Battery Sensor

AMS (WIPER) 10A BCM, PCM

WIPER FRT 25A Wiper LO Relay, Front Wiper Motor

B/UP LAMP 10AA/T - Rear Combination Lamp (IN) LH/RH, Electro Chromic Mirror, Audio, A/V & NavigationHead Unit

ABS3 7.5A ESC Module

SENSOR5 7.5A PCM

TCU 15A A/T : Transaxle Range Switch

F/PUMP 15A Fuel Pump Relay

ECU 1 15A PCM

ECU 2 10A IDB Module

SENSOR 3 10A Fuel Pump Relay

IGN COIL 20A Condenser, Ignition Coil #1/#2/#3/#4

SENSOR 2 10A Purge Control Solenoid Valve, Variable Intake Solenoid Valve(G4KJ), Oil Control Valve #1/#2

SENSOR 1 15AOxygen sensor(#1/#2/#3/#4), PCM, Oxygen Sensor(Down), E/R Fuse & Relay Box (CoolingFan Relay)

B/A HORN 10A Burgl Aralarm Horn Relay

Maintenance

747

LIGHT BULBS

Use only the bulbs of the specifiedwattage.

✽✽ NOTICEAfter heavy, driving rain or wash-ing, headlamp and taillamp lensescould appear frosty. This conditionis caused by the temperature differ-ence between the lamp inside andoutside. This is similar to the con-densation on your windows insideyour vehicle during the rain anddoesn’t indicate a problem withyour vehicle. If the water leaks intothe lamp bulb circuitry, have thevehicle checked by an authorizedHYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING - Working onthe lights

Prior to working on the light,firmly apply the parking brake,ensure that the ignition switchis turned to the “LOCK” positionand turn off the lights to avoidsudden movement of the vehi-cle and burning your fingers orreceiving an electric shock.

CAUTIONBe sure to replace the burned-out bulb with one of the samewattage rating. Otherwise, itmay cause damage to the fuseor electric wiring system.

CAUTIONIf you don’t have necessarytools, the correct bulbs and theexpertise, consult an authorizedHYUNDAI dealer. In many cases,it is difficult to replace vehiclelight bulbs because other partsof the vehicle must be removedbefore you can get to the bulb.This is especially true if youhave to remove the headlightassembly to get to the bulb(s).Removing/installing the head-light assembly can result indamage to the vehicle.

7 75

Maintenance

Headlamp, Front positionlamp, Front turn signal lamp,Front fog lamp bulb replace-ment

(1) Headlamp (High)(2) Headlamp (Low)(3) Front position lamp(4) Front turn signal lamp/

Front side marker(5) Front fog lamp (if equipped)

Headlamp bulb

ONCNMC2017

OHD076046

WARNING - Halogenbulbs

• Halogen bulbs contain pres-surized gas that will produceflying pieces of glass if bro-ken.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Always handle them carefully,

and avoid scratches and abra-sions. If the bulbs are lit, avoidcontact with liquids. Nevertouch the glass with barehands. Residual oil may causethe bulb to overheat and burstwhen lit. A bulb should beoperated only when installedin a headlamp.

• If a bulb becomes damaged orcracked, replace it immediate-ly and carefully dispose of it.

• Wear eye protection whenchanging a bulb. Allow thebulb to cool down before han-dling it.

Maintenance

767

1. Open the hood.2. Remove the headlamp bulb cover

by turning it counterclockwise.3. Disconnect the headlamp bulb

socket-connector.4. Remove the socket from the

assembly by turning the socketcounterclockwise until the tabs onthe socket align with the slots onthe assembly.

5. Remove the bulb by pulling it out.6. Inset a new bulb by inserting it into

the socket.

7. Install the socket in the assemblyby aligning the tabs on the socketwith the slots in the assembly.Push the socket into the assemblyand turn the socket clockwise.

8. Install the headlamp bulb cover byturning it clockwise.

✽✽ NOTICEAlways have the headlight aimingadjusted after an accident or theheadlight assembly is reinstalled atan authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Turn signal lamp/Position lamp

1. Remove the socket from theassembly by turning the socketcounterclockwise until the tabs onthe socket align with the slots onthe assembly.

2. Remove the bulb from the socketby pressing it in and rotating itcounterclockwise until the tabs onthe bulb align with the slots in thesocket. Pull the bulb out of thesocket

3. Insert a new bulb by inserting itinto the socket and rotating it untilit locks into place.

ODMEMC2006

LLLL oooo wwwwHHHH iiii gggg hhhh

ODMEMC2006

TTTTuuuu rrrr nnnn ssss iiii gggg nnnn aaaa llll

PPPP oooo ssss iiii tttt iiii oooo nnnn

llll aaaa mmmm pppp

7 77

Maintenance


Front fog lamp bulbs (if equipped)

1. Remove the front bumper undercover.

2. Reach your hand into the back ofthe front bumper.

3. Disconnect the power connectorfrom the socket.

4. Remove the bulb-socket from thehousing by turning the socketcounter clockwise until the tabs onthe socket align with the slots onthe housing.

5. Install the new bulb-socket into thehousing by aligning the tabs onthe socket with the slots in thehousing. Push the socket into thehousing and turn the socket clock-wise.

6. Connect the power connector tothe socket.

7. Reinstall the front bumper undercover.

ONCEMC3211

Maintenance

787

Headlamp (HID type), position(LED), turn signal, and front foglamp bulb replacementIf the lamp bulb does not operate,have the vehicle checked by anauthorized HYUNDAI dealer.

✽✽ NOTICEHID lamps have superior perform-ance vs. halogen bulbs. HID lampsare estimated by the manufacturer tolast twice as long or longer than halo-gen bulbs depending on their fre-quency of use. They will probablyrequire replacement at some point inthe life of the vehicle. Cycling theheadlamps on and off more than typ-ical use will shorten HID lamps life.HID lamps do not fail in the samemanner as halogen incandescentlamps. If a headlamp goes out after aperiod of operation but will immedi-ately relight when the headlampswitch is cycled it is likely the HIDlamp needs to be replaced. HID light-ing components are more complexthan conventional halogen bulbs thushave higher replacement cost.

Side repeater lamp replacement

If the lamp bulb does not operate,have the vehicle checked by anauthorized HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING - HIDHeadlamp low beam (if equipped)

Do not attempt to replace orinspect the low beam (XENONbulb) due to electric shock dan-ger. If the low beam (XENONbulb) is not working, have yourvehicle checked by an author-ized HYUNDAI Dealer.

ODM072031

7 79

Maintenance

Rear combination lamp bulbreplacement

(1) Rear turn signal lamp(2) Back-up lamp(3) Rear stop and tail lamp(4) Rear tail lamp/Rear stop and tail

lamp*(5) Rear side marker* : if equipped

Outside lamp1. Open the tailgate.2. Remove the service cover using a

flat-blade screwdriver.3. Loosen the lamp assembly retain-

ing please verify.4. Remove the rear combination

lamp assembly from the body ofthe vehicle.


6. Remove the bulb from the socket bypressing it in and rotating it counter-clockwise until the tabs on the bulbalign with the slots in the socket.Pull the bulb out of the socket. (Sidemarker : Remove the bulb from thesocket by pulling it out)

ONCNMC2037

ONCNMC2038

Maintenance

807



9. Reinstall the lamp assembly to thebody of the vehicle.

Inside lamp

1. Open the tailgate.2. Remove the service cover using a

flat-blade screwdriver.


4. Remove the bulb from the socketby pressing it in and rotating itcounterclockwise until the tabs onthe bulb align with the slots in thesocket. Pull the bulb out of thesocket. (Back-up lamp : Removethe bulb from the socket by pullingit out)

OANNMC2036

ONCNMC2039

7 81

Maintenance



7. Install the service cover by puttingit into the service hole.

High mounted stop lampreplacement

1.Open the tailgate.2.Gently remove the center cover of

the rear tailgate trim.3.Disconnect the electrical connector.

4.Loosen the retaining nuts andremove the spoiler.

ODMEMC2022

ONCNMC3204

Maintenance

827

5.Remove the high mounted stoplamp assembly (A) after looseningthe nuts and washer nozzle (B).

6.Reinstall a new lamp assembly inthe reverse order of removal.

License plate lamp bulbreplacement

1. Loosen the lens retaining screwswith a screwdriver.

2. Remove the lens.3. Remove the bulb.4. Install a new bulb.5. Reinstall the lens securely with the

lens retaining screws.

Door courtesy lamp bulbreplacement

If the lamp does not operate, havethe vehicle checked by an authorizedHYUNDAI dealer.

ODM072039 ODM042261

ODMEMC2021

B

A

7 83

Maintenance

Interior lamp bulb replacement

1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver,gently pry the lens from the interiorlamp housing.

2. Remove the bulb by pulling itstraight out.

3. Install a new bulb in the socket.4. Align the lens tabs with the interior

lamp housing notches and snapthe lens into place.

■ Map lamp

OXM079044/ODM072041/ODM072043

■ Glove box lamp (if equipped)

■ Luggage room lamp (if equipped)

■ Room lamp

ODM072040/ODM072042/ODM072052

■ Type A

■ Type B

WARNING Prior to working on the InteriorLamps, ensure that the “OFF”button is depressed to avoidburning your fingers or receiv-ing an electric shock.

CAUTIONUse care not to dirty or damagelens, lens tab, and plastic hous-ings.

■ Sunvisor lamp

Maintenance

847

APPEARANCE CAREExterior careExterior general caution It is very important to follow the labeldirections when using any chemicalcleaner or polish. Read all warningand caution statements that appearon the label.

Finish maintenanceWashing

To help protect your vehicle’s finishfrom rust and deterioration, wash itthoroughly and frequently at leastonce a month with lukewarm or coldwater.If you use your vehicle for off-roaddriving, you should wash it after eachoff-road trip. Pay special attention tothe removal of any accumulation ofsalt, dirt, mud, and other foreign mate-rials. Make sure the drain holes in thelower edges of the doors and rockerpanels are kept clear and clean.Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,industrial pollution and similardeposits can damage your vehicle’sfinish if not removed immediately.Even prompt washing with plainwater may not completely remove allthese deposits.A mild soap, safe for use on paintedsurfaces, may be used.After washing, rinse the vehicle thor-oughly with lukewarm or cold water.Do not allow soap to dry on the finish.

WARNING - Wet brakesAfter washing the vehicle, testthe brakes while driving slowlyto see if they have been affectedby water. If braking performanceis impaired, dry the brakes byapplying them lightly while main-taining a slow forward speed.

CAUTION• Do not use strong soap, chem-

ical detergents or hot water,and do not wash the vehicle indirect sunlight or when thebody of the vehicle is warm.

• Be careful when washing theside windows of your vehicle.Especially, with high-pressurewater, water may leak throughthe windows and wet the inte-rior.

• To prevent damage to theplastic parts and lamps, donot clean with chemical sol-vents or strong detergents.

7 85

Maintenance

Waxing

Wax the vehicle when water will nolonger bead on the paint.Always wash and dry the vehiclebefore waxing. Use a good qualityliquid or paste wax, and follow themanufacturer’s instructions. Wax allmetal trim to protect it and to main-tain its luster.Removing oil, tar, and similar materi-als with a spot remover will usuallystrip the wax from the finish. Be sureto re-wax these areas even if the restof the vehicle does not yet need wax-ing.

CAUTION• Wiping dust or dirt off the

body with a dry cloth willscratch the finish.

• Do not use steel wool, abra-sive cleaners, or strong deter-gents containing highly alka-line or caustic agents onchrome-plated or anodizedaluminum parts. This mayresult in damage to the pro-tective coating and cause dis-coloration or paint deteriora-tion.CAUTION

• Water washing in the enginecompartment including highpressure water washing maycause the failure of electricalcircuits located in the enginecompartment.

• Never allow water or other liq-uids to come in contact withelectrical/electronic compo-nents inside the vehicle asthis may damage them.

OJB037800

Maintenance

867

Finish damage repair Deep scratches or stone chips in thepainted surface must be repairedpromptly. Exposed metal will quicklyrust and may develop into a majorrepair expense.

✽✽ NOTICEIf your vehicle is damaged andrequires any metal repair orreplacement, be sure the body shopapplies anti-corrosion materials tothe parts repaired or replaced.

Bright-metal maintenance• To remove road tar and insects,

use a tar remover, not a scraper orother sharp object.

• To protect the surfaces of bright-metal parts from corrosion, apply acoating of wax or chrome preser-vative and rub to a high luster.

• During winter weather or in coastalareas, cover the bright metal partswith a heavier coating of wax orpreservative. If necessary, coat theparts with non-corrosive petroleumjelly or other protective compound.

Underbody maintenanceCorrosive materials used for ice andsnow removal and dust control maycollect on the underbody. If thesematerials are not removed, acceler-ated rusting can occur on underbodyparts such as the fuel lines, frame,floor pan and exhaust system, eventhough they have been treated withrust protection.Thoroughly flush the vehicle under-body and wheel openings with luke-warm or cold water once a month,after off-road driving and at the endof each winter. Pay special attentionto these areas because it is difficultto see all the mud and dirt. It will domore harm than good to wet downthe road grime without removing it.The lower edges of doors, rockerpanels, and frame members havedrain holes that should not beallowed to clog with dirt; trappedwater in these areas can cause rust-ing.

7 87

Maintenance

Aluminum wheel maintenance The aluminum wheels are coatedwith a clear protective finish.• Do not use any abrasive cleaner,

polishing compound, solvent, orwire brushes on aluminum wheels.They may scratch or damage thefinish.

• Clean the wheel when it has cooled.• Use only a mild soap or neutral

detergent, and rinse thoroughlywith water. Also, be sure to cleanthe wheels after driving on saltedroads.This helps prevent corrosion.

• Avoid washing the wheels withhigh-speed car wash brushes.

• Do not use any alkaline or aciddetergent. It may damage and cor-rode the aluminum wheels coatedwith a clear protective finish.

Corrosion protectionProtecting your vehicle from corro-sion

By using the most advanced designand construction practices to combatcorrosion, we produces cars of thehighest quality. However, this is onlypart of the job. To achieve the long-term corrosion resistance your vehi-cle can deliver, the owner's coopera-tion and assistance is also required.

Common causes of corrosion

The most common causes of corro-sion on your vehicle are:• Road salt, dirt and moisture that is

allowed to accumulate underneaththe car.

• Removal of paint or protectivecoatings by stones, gravel, abra-sion or minor scrapes and dentswhich leave unprotected metalexposed to corrosion.

WARNINGAfter washing the vehicle, testthe brakes while driving slowlyto see if they have been affectedby water. If braking performanceis impaired, dry the brakes byapplying them lightly while main-taining a slow forward speed.

Maintenance

887

High-corrosion areas

If you live in an area where your caris regularly exposed to corrosivematerials, corrosion protection isparticularly important. Some of thecommon causes of accelerated cor-rosion are road salts, dust controlchemicals, ocean air and industrialpollution.

Moisture breeds corrosion

Moisture creates an atmosphere thatboth promotes and facilitates corro-sion. For example, corrosion is accel-erated by high humidity, particularlywhen temperatures are just abovefreezing. In such conditions, the cor-rosive material is kept in contact withthe car surfaces by moisture that isslow to evaporate.Mud is particularly corrosivebecause it is slow to dry and holdsmoisture in contact with the vehicle.Although the mud appears to be dry,it can still retain the moisture andpromote corrosion.High temperatures can also acceler-ate corrosion of parts that are poorlyventilated against moisture disperal.It is particularly important to keepyour car clean and free of mud oraccumulations of other materials.This applies not only to the visiblesurfaces but particularly to theunderside of the car.

To help prevent corrosion

You can help prevent corrosion ordrastically limit by observing the fol-lowing:

Keep your car cleanThe best way to prevent corrosion isto keep your car clean and free ofcorrosive materials. Attention to theunderside of the car is particularlyimportant.

• If you live in a high-corrosion areawhere road salts are used, near theocean, areas with industrial pollu-tion, or acid rain, etc., you shouldtake extra care to prevent corrosion.In winter, spray or rinse the under-side of your car at least once amonth and be sure to clean theunderside thoroughly when winteris over.

• When cleaning underneath the car,give particular attention to thecomponents under the fenders andother areas that are hidden fromview. Do a thorough job; just damp-ening the accumulated mud ratherthan washing it away will acceler-ate corrosion rather than preventit. Water under high pressure andsteam are particularly effective inremoving accumulated mud andcorrosive materials.

7 89

Maintenance

• When cleaning lower door panels,rocker panels and frame mem-bers, be sure that drain holes arekept open so that moisture canescape. If these areas are not keptclear, moisture could becometrapped and accelerate corrosion.

Keep your garage dryDon't park your car in a damp orpoorly ventilated garage. This cre-ates a favorable environment for cor-rosion. This is particularly true if youwash your car in the garage or driveit into the garage when it is still wet orcovered with snow, ice or mud. Evena heated garage can contribute tocorrosion unless it is well ventilatedso moisture can dispersed.

Keep paint and trim in good con-ditionScratches or chips in the finishshould be covered with "touch-up"paint as soon as possible to reducethe possibility of corrosion. If baremetal is showing, the attention of aqualified body and paint shop is rec-ommended.

Bird droppings : Bird droppings arehighly corrosive and may damagepainted surfaces in just a few hours.Always remove bird droppings assoon as possible.

Don't neglect the interiorMoisture can collect under the floormats and carpeting to cause corro-sion. Check under the mats periodi-cally to be sure the carpeting is dry.Use particular care if you carry fertil-izers, cleaning materials or chemi-cals in the car.These should be carried only in prop-er containers and any spills or leaksshould be cleaned up, flushed withclean water and thoroughly dried.

Interior careInterior general precautions Prevent caustic solutions such asperfume and cosmetic oil from con-tacting the dashboard because theymay cause damage or discoloration.If they do contact the dashboard,clean immediately. See the instruc-tions that follow for the proper way toclean vinyl.

CAUTIONNever allow water or other liq-uids to come in contact withelectrical/electronic componentsinside the vehicle as this maydamage them.

CAUTIONWhen cleaning leather products(steering wheel, seats etc.), useneutral detergents or low alco-hol content solutions. If you usehigh alcohol content solutionsor acid/alkaline detergents, thecolor of the leather may fade orthe surface may get stripped off.

Maintenance

907

Cleaning the upholstery and inte-rior trim Vinyl

Remove dust and loose dirt fromvinyl with a whisk broom or vacuumcleaner. Clean vinyl surfaces with avinyl cleaner.

Fabric

Remove dust and loose dirt from fab-ric with a whisk broom or vacuumcleaner. Clean with a mild soap solu-tion recommended for upholstery orcarpets. Remove fresh spots imme-diately with a fabric spot cleaner. Iffresh spots do not receive immediateattention, the fabric can be stainedand its color can be affected. Also, itsfire-resistant properties can bereduced if the material is not proper-ly maintained.

Cleaning the lap/shoulder beltwebbing Clean the belt webbing with any mildsoap solution recommended forcleaning upholstery or carpet. Followthe instructions provided with thesoap. Do not bleach or re-dye thewebbing because this may weaken it.

Cleaning the interior windowglass If the interior glass surfaces of thevehicle become fogged (that is, cov-ered with an oily, greasy or waxyfilm), they should be cleaned withglass cleaner. Follow the directionson the glass cleaner container.

CAUTIONDo not scrape or scratch theinside of the rear window. Thismay result in damage to the rearwindow defroster grid.CAUTION

Using anything but recommend-ed cleaners and proceduresmay affect the fabric’s appear-ance and fire-resistant proper-ties.

7 91

Maintenance

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMThe emission control system of yourvehicle is covered by a written limitedwarranty. Please see the warrantyinformation contained in the Owner’sHandbook & Warranty Informationbooklet in your vehicle.Your vehicle is equipped with anemission control system to meet allemission regulations.There are three emission controlsystems which are as follows.

(1) Crankcase emission control sys-tem

(2) Evaporative emission control sys-tem

(3) Exhaust emission control system

In order to assure the proper functionof the emission control systems, it isrecommended that you have yourcar inspected and maintained by anauthorized HYUNDAI dealer inaccordance with the maintenanceschedule in this manual.

Caution for the Inspection andMaintenance Test (With ElectronicStability Control (ESC) system)• To prevent the vehicle from mis-

firing during dynamometer test-ing, turn the Electronic StabilityControl (ESC) system off bypressing the ESC switch.

• After dynamometer testing iscompleted, turn the ESC systemback on by pressing the ESCswitch again.

1. Crankcase emission controlsystem

The positive crankcase ventilationsystem is employed to prevent airpollution caused by blow-by gasesbeing emitted from the crankcase.This system supplies fresh filtered airto the crankcase through the airintake hose. Inside the crankcase,the fresh air mixes with blow-bygases, which then pass through thePCV valve into the induction system.

2. Evaporative emission con-trol (including ORVR:Onboard Refueling VaporRecovery) system

The Evaporative Emission ControlSystem is designed to prevent fuelvapors from escaping into the atmos-phere.(The ORVR system is designed toallow the vapors from the fuel tank tobe loaded into a canister while refu-eling at the gas station, preventingthe escape of fuel vapors into theatmosphere.)

CanisterFuel vapors generated inside the fueltank are absorbed and stored in theonboard canister. When the engine isrunning, the fuel vapors absorbed inthe canister are drawn into the surgetank through the purge control sole-noid valve.

Maintenance

927

Purge Control Solenoid Valve(PCSV)The purge control solenoid valve iscontrolled by the Engine ControlModule (ECM); when the enginecoolant temperature is low duringidling, the PCSV closes so that evap-orated fuel is not taken into theengine. After the engine warms-upduring ordinary driving, the PCSVopens to introduce evaporated fuel tothe engine.

3. Exhaust emission control system

The Exhaust Emission ControlSystem is a highly effective systemwhich controls exhaust emissionswhile maintaining good vehicle per-formance.

Vehicle modifications This vehicle should not be modified.Modification of your vehicle couldaffect its performance, safety ordurability and may even violate gov-ernmental safety and emissions reg-ulations.In addition, damage or performanceproblems resulting from any modifi-cation may not be covered underwarranty.• If you use unauthorized electronic

devices, it may cause the vehicle tooperate abnormally, wire damage,battery discharge and fire. For yoursafety, do not use unauthorizedelectronic devices.

Engine exhaust gas precautions(carbon monoxide) • Carbon monoxide can be present

with other exhaust fumes.Therefore,if you smell exhaust fumes of anykind inside your vehicle, have itinspected and repaired immediately.If you ever suspect exhaust fumesare coming into your vehicle, drive itonly with all the windows fully open.Have your vehicle checked andrepaired immediately.

WARNING - ExhaustEngine exhaust gases containcarbon monoxide (CO). Thoughcolorless and odorless, it isdangerous and could be lethal ifinhaled. Follow the instructionson this page to avoid CO poi-soning.

7 93

Maintenance

• Do not operate the engine in con-fined or closed areas (such asgarages) any more than what isnecessary to move the vehicle in orout of the area.

• When the vehicle is stopped in anopen area for more than a shorttime with the engine running, adjustthe ventilation system (as needed)to draw outside air into the vehicle.

• Never sit in a parked or stoppedvehicle for any extended time withthe engine running.

• When the engine stalls or fails tostart, excessive attempts to restartthe engine may cause damage tothe emission control system.

Operating precautions for catalyt-ic converters (if equipped)CALIFORNIA PROPO-

SITION 65 WARNINGEngine exhaust and a wide vari-ety of automobile componentsand parts, including compo-nents found in the interior fur-nishings in a vehicle, contain oremit chemicals known to theState of California to cause can-cer and birth defects and repro-ductive harm. In addition, cer-tain fluids contained in vehiclesand certain products of compo-nent wear contain or emit chem-icals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer andbirth defects or other reproduc-tive harm.

WARNING - Fire• A hot exhaust system can

ignite flammable items underyour vehicle. Do not park, idle,or drive the vehicle over ornear flammable objects, suchas grass, vegetation, paper,leaves, etc.

• The exhaust system and cat-alytic system are very hotwhile the engine is running orimmediately after the engineis turned off. Keep away fromthe exhaust system and cat-alytic, you may get burned.Also, do not remove the heatsink around the exhaust sys-tem, do not seal the bottom ofthe vehicle or do not coat thevehicle for corrosion control.It may present a fire risk undercertain conditions.

Maintenance

947

Your vehicle is equipped with a cat-alytic converter emission controldevice.Therefore, the following precautionsmust be observed:• Use only UNLEADED FUEL for

gasoline engine.• Do not operate the vehicle when

there are signs of engine malfunc-tion, such as misfire or a noticeableloss of performance.

• Do not misuse or abuse theengine. Examples of misuse arecoasting with the ignition off anddescending steep grades in gearwith the ignition off.

• Do not operate the engine at highidle speed for extended periods (5minutes or more).

• Do not modify or tamper with anypart of the engine or emission con-trol system. All inspections andadjustments must be made by anauthorized HYUNDAI dealer.

• Avoid driving with a very low fuellevel. If you run out of gasoline, itcould cause the engine to misfireand result in excessive loading ofthe catalytic converter.

Failure to observe these precautionscould result in damage to the catalyt-ic converter and to your vehicle.Additionally, such actions could voidyour warranties.

7 95

Maintenance

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE NOTICEPerchlorate Material-special handlingmay apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Notice to California VehicleDismantlers:Perchlorate containing materials,such as air bag inflators, seatbeltpretensioners and keyless remoteentry batteries, must be disposed ofaccording to Title 22 California Codeof Regulations Section 67384.10 (a).


Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2Bulb wattage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3Tires and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4Gross vehicle weight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5Luggage volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5Recommended lubricants and capacities. . . . . . . . 8-6

• Recommended SAE viscosity number . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8Vehicle certification label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8Tire specification and pressure label . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9Engine number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9Refrigerant label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9Consumer information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10Reporting safety defects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11

8


28

DIMENSIONS

*1 with roof rack

Item in (mm)

Overall length 193.11 (4,905)

Overall width 74.21 (1,885)

Overall height 66.54 (1,690), 66.93 (1,700) *1

Front tread235/60R18 64.09 (1,628)

P235/55R19 64.09 (1,628)

Rear tread235/60R18 64.53 (1,639)

P235/55R19 64.53 (1,639)

Wheelbase 110.24 (2,800)

Item Lambda 3.3

Displacementcu. in (cc)

203.9 (3,342)

Bore x Stroke

in. (mm)3.6x3.3 (92x83.8)

Firing order 1-2-3-4-5-6

No. of cylinders 6

ENGINE

8 3


BULB WATTAGELamp Bulb Wattage Bulb type

Front

Headlamp (Low) 55 or 35 (HID)* H7L or D3S

Headlamp (High) 55 H7L

Front turn signal lamp 28 PY28W

Front position lamp 5 or LED* W5W or LED

Front fog lamp* 35 H8

Front turn signal lamp (Outside mirror)* LED* LED

Front marker lamp 5 W5W

Rear

Rear Stop/Tail lamp (Outside) 28 or 8, LED* P28 or W8W, LED

Tail lamp (Inside) 8, LED* W8W, LED

Rear turn signal lamp 27 PY27W

Back-up lamp 16 W16W

Rear marker lamp LED* LED

High mounted stop lamp* LED* LED

License plate lamp 5 W5W

Interior

Map lamp 10 FESTOON

Room lamp 8 FESTOON

Vanity mirror lamp 5 FESTOON

Glove box lamp 5 FESTOON

Luggage lamp 5 FESTOON

* If equipped

* HID : High Intensity Discharge


48

TIRES AND WHEELS

CAUTIONWhen replacing tires, use the same size originally supplied with the vehicle.Using tires of a different size can damage the related parts or make it work irregularly.

Item Tire size Wheel size

Inflation pressure [psi (kPa)]

Wheel lug nut torque lb•ft, N•m (kg•m)

Normal load

( )

Maximum load

( )

Front Rear Front Rear

Full size tire235/60R18 7.5J×18 33

(230)33

(230)33

(230)33

(230)65~79, 88~107

(9~11)

P235/55R19 7.5J×19

Compact spare tire (if equipped)

T165/90R17 4.0T×1760

(420)60

(420)60

(420)60

(420)

8 5


GROSS VEHICLE WEIGHT

LUGGAGE VOLUME

Item 6 Seater 7 Seater

SAE

1 Seat 2265 l (79 cu f)

2 Seat 1159 l (40.9 cu f)

3 Seat 383 l (13.5 cu f)

ItemLambda 3.3

2WD AWD

Automatic transaxle 2500 kg (5510 lbs) 2550 kg (5620 lbs)


68

RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES

*1 Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the next page.*2 Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fuel econo-

my by reducing the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements are difficult to measure ineveryday driving, but in a year’s time, they can offer significant cost and energy savings.

*3 If the API service SM engine oil is not available in your country, you are able to use API service SL.

To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality.The correct lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy.These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle.

Lubricant Volume Classification

Engine oil *1 *2

(drain and refill)Recommends

GasolineEngine

Lambda 3.3 6.02 US qt. (5.7 l)API Service SM *3,

ILSAC GF-4 (or above),ACEA A5 (or above)

Automatic transaxle fluid GasolineEngine

Lambda 3.3 8.24 US qt. (7.8 l)

MICHANG ATF SP-IV, SK ATF SP-IV,NOCA ATF SP-IV, HYUNDAI genuine ATF SP-IVor other brands meeting the above specification

approved by HYUNDAI Motor Company

Coolant GasolineEngine

Lambda 3.3 9.6 US qt. (9.1 l)Mixture of antifreeze and distilled water

(Ethylene glycol base coolant for aluminum radiator)

Brake fluid0.74 ~ 0.85 US qt.

(0.7 ~ 0.8 l)FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4

Rear differential oil (AWD) 0.56 US qt. (0.53 l)HYPOID GEAR OIL API GL-5, SAE 75W/90

(SHELL SPIRAX X or equivalent)

Transfer case oil (AWD) Lambda 3.3 0.72 US qt. (0.68 l)HYPOID GEAR OIL API GL-5, SAE 75W/90

(SHELL SPIRAX X or equivalent)

Fuel 18.95 US gal. (71 l) Refer to “Fuel requirements” in section 1

Recommended SAE viscositynumber

Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has aneffect on fuel economy and coldweather operating (engine start andengine oil flowability). Lower viscosityengine oils can provide better fueleconomy and cold weather perform-ance, however, higher viscosity engineoils are required for satisfactory lubri-cation in hot weather. Using oils of anyviscosity other than those recommend-ed could result in engine damage.

When choosing an oil, consider therange of temperature your vehicle willbe operated in before the next oilchange. Proceed to select the recom-mended oil viscosity from the chart.

CAUTIONAlways be sure to clean the areaaround any filler plug, drainplug, or dipstick before check-ing or draining any lubricant.This is especially important industy or sandy areas and whenthe vehicle is used on unpavedroads. Cleaning the plug anddipstick areas will prevent dirtand grit from entering theengine and other mechanismsthat could be damaged.

Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers

Temperature

Gasoline Engine Oil *1

°C(°F)

-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50-10 0 20 40 60 80 100 120

10W-30

5W-30, 5W-40

1. For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil ofa viscosity grade SAE 5W-30 (API SM/ILSAC GF-4). However, if theengine oil is not available in your country, select the proper engineoil using the engine oil viscosity chart.

8 7



88

The vehicle identification number(VIN) is the number used in register-ing your vehicle and in all legal mat-ters pertaining to its ownership, etc.The number is punched on theengine compartment bulkhead.

The VIN is also on a plate attachedto the top of the dashboard. Thenumber on the plate can easily beseen through the windshield fromoutside.

The vehicle certification labelattached on the driver’s side centerpillar gives the vehicle identificationnumber (VIN).

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)

ONCEVS2001

Frame number

VEHICLE CERTIFICATIONLABEL

OEN086004N

VIN label

OCM056002

8 9


REFRIGERANT LABELTIRE SPECIFICATION ANDPRESSURE LABEL

ENGINE NUMBER

The tires supplied on your new vehi-cle are chosen to provide the bestperformance for normal driving.The tire label located on the driver'sside center pillar gives the tire pres-sures recommended for your vehicle.

The engine number is stamped onthe engine block as shown in thedrawing.

The refrigerant label is located at thefront of the engine room.The label contains the following infor-mation:• Type of refrigerant• Amount of refrigerant

ONCNMC2016

ONCNMC2001

ONCEVS2002

■ Gasoline engine


108

CONSUMER INFORMATIONThis consumer information has beenprepared in accordance with regula-tions issued by the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration of theU.S. Department of Transportation.Your Hyundai dealer will help answerany questions you may have as youread this information.

Hyundai motor vehicles aredesigned and manufactured to meetor exceed all applicable safety stan-dards.

For your safety, however, we stronglyurge you to read and follow all direc-tions in this Owner's Manual, particu-larly the information under the head-ings "NOTICE", "CAUTION" and"WARNING".

If, after reading this manual, youhave any questions regarding theoperation of your vehicle, pleasecontact your nearest Hyundai MotorAmerica Regional Office as listed inthe following:

Eastern Region: Connecticut,Delaware, Maine, Massachusetts,New Hampshire, New Jersey, NewYork, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island,Vermont.

Eastern Region1122 Cranbury South River RoadJamesburg, NJ 08831(800) 633-5151

Southern Region: Florida, Georgia,North Carolina, South Carolina,Virginia, and West Virginia.

Southern Region3025 Chastain Meadows Parkwaysuite 100 Marietta, GA 30066(800) 633-5151

South Central Region: Alabama,Arkansas, Louisiana, Mississippi,New Mexico, Oklahoma, Tennessee,Texas.

South Central Region1421 South Beltline Road, Suite 400 Coppell, TX 75019(800) 633-5151

Central Region: Illinois, Indiana,lowa, Kentucky, Michigan, Minnesota,Nebraska, North Dakota, SouthDakota, Ohio, Wisconsin, Kansas,Missouri.

Central Region1705 Sequoia DriveAurora, Illinois 60506(800) 633-5151

Western Region: Alaska, Hawaii,Arizona, California, Colorado, ldaho,Montana, Nevada, Oregon, Utah,Washington, Wyoming.

Western Region10550 Talbert AvenueP.O.Box 20850Fountain Valley, California 92728-0850(800) 633-5151

8 11


If you believe that your vehicle has adefect which could cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in additionto notifying HYUNDAI MOTORAMERICA. If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open an investiga-tion, and if it finds that a safety defectexists in a group of vehicles, it mayorder a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot becomeinvolved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, orHYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA.To contact NHTSA, you may call theVehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov;or write to: Administrator, NHTSA,1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., WestBuilding Washington, DC 20590 Youcan also obtain other informationabout motor vehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.

REPORTING SAFETYDEFECTS

2015 Hyundai Santa Fe Owner's Manual

Documents